Acom HW & Maint 025-9574

AcomHardware Installation and Maintenance

025-9574E

©2009 Zetron, Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright; information in this document is subject to change without notice. Zetron and the Zetron logo are registered trademarks of Zetron, Inc. Other company names and product names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. This publication may not be reproduced, translated, or altered, in whole or in part, without prior written consent from Zetron, Inc.

Software License

The Zetron software described in this manual is subject to the terms and conditions of Zetron's Software License Agreement, a copy of which is contained on the product distribution media or otherwise provided or presented to buyer. Installation and/or use of the Zetron software constitutes acceptance of Zetron's Software License Agreement.

Limited Warranty

Buyer assumes responsibility for the selection of the Products and Services to achieve buyer's or its customer's intended results and for the results obtained from the Products and Services. If buyer has provided Zetron with any requirements, specifications or drawings, or if Zetron provides buyer with such materials, such materials are provided solely for buyer's convenience and shall not be binding on Zetron unless agreed contractually by Zetron. UNLESS AGREED CONTRACTUALLY BY ZETRON, ZETRON DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PRODUCTS OR SERVICES WILL MEET BUYER'S OR ITS CUSTOMER'S REQUIREMENTS OR SPECIFICATIONS OR THAT OPERATION OF THE PRODUCTS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE. SUBJECT TO THE LIMITATIONS SET FORTH BELOW, Zetron warrants that all Zetron Products and Services will be free from material defects in material and workmanship for one year from date of shipment or performance of the Services (except where indicated otherwise in the Zetron Price Book). For buyer's convenience, Zetron may purchase and supply additional items manufactured by others. In these cases, although Zetron's warranty does not apply, buyer shall be the beneficiary of any applicable third party manufacturer's warranties, subject to the limitations therein. Zetron's warranty covers parts and Zetron factory labor. Buyer must provide written notice to Zetron within the warranty period of any defect. If the defect is not the result of improper or excessive use, or improper service, maintenance or installation, and if the Zetron Products or Zetron Accessories have not been otherwise damaged or modified after shipment, AS ZETRON'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY AND BUYER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY, Zetron shall either replace or repair the defective parts, replace the Zetron Products or Zetron Accessories, reperform the Services or refund the purchase price, at Zetron's option, after return of such items by buyer to Zetron. Shipment shall be paid for by the buyer. No credit shall be allowed for work performed by the buyer. Zetron Products or Zetron Accessories which are not defective shall be returned at buyer's expense, and testing and handling expense shall be borne by buyer. Out-of-warranty repairs will be invoiced at the then - current Zetron hourly rate plus the cost of needed components. THE FOREGOING WARRANTY AND THE THIRD PARTY MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTIES, IF ANY, ARE IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR ARISING UNDER LAW, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Limitation of Liability

Zetron makes no representation with respect to the contents of this document and/or the contents, performance, and function of any accompanying software.Further, Zetron reserves the right to revise this document or the accompanying software and to make changes in it from time to time without obligation to notify any person or organization of such revisions or changes.This document and any accompanying software are provided “As Is.” ZETRON SHALL NOT UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES BE LIABLE TO BUYER OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT LOSS OR DAMAGE ARISING OUT OF OR CONNECTED WITH BUYER'S PURCHASE OR USE OF ZETRON PRODUCTS, ZETRON ACCESSORIES OR ZETRON SERVICES. IN NO EVENT SHALL ZETRON'S LIABILITY (WHETHER FOR NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORT, IN CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE) EXCEED THE PRICE PAID TO ZETRON FOR THE ZETRON PRODUCTS, ZETRON ACCESSORIES OR ZETRON SERVICES.IP networks by their nature are subject to a number of limitations, such as security, reliability, and performance. Anyone using non-dedicated IP networks, such as shared WANs or the Internet, to connect to any Zetron Products or systems should consider and is responsible for these limitations.

3

Compliance Statements

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this terminal equipment is 0.1. The REN assigned to each terminal equipment provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed 5.0.

Safety Summary

• Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the equipment or included in documentation.• Only technically qualified service personnel are permitted to install or service the equipment.• Be aware of and avoid contact with areas subject to high voltage or amperage. Because some components can store

dangerous charges even after power is disconnected, always discharge components before touching.• Never insert objects of any kind through openings in the equipment. Conductive foreign objects could produce a short

circuit that could cause fire, electrical shock, or equipment damage.• Remove rings, watches, and other metallic objects from your body before opening equipment. These could be

electrical shock or burn hazards.• Ensure that a proper electrostatic discharge device is used, to prevent damage to electronic components.• Do not attempt internal service of equipment unless another person, capable of rendering aid and resuscitation, is

present.• Do not work near rotating fans unless absolutely necessary. Exercise caution to prevent fans from taking in foreign

objects, including hair, clothing, and loose objects.• Use care when moving equipment, especially rack-mounted modules, which could become unstable. Certain items

may be heavy. Use proper care when lifting.

Warning! For your safety and the protection of the equipment, observe these precautions when installing or servicing Zetron equipment:

Products and batteries with the symbol (crossed-out wheeled bin) cannot be disposed as household waste. Old electrical and electronic equipment and batteries should be recycled at a facility capable of handling these items and their waste byproducts.

Contact your local authority for details in locating a recycle facility nearest to you.

Proper recycling and waste disposal will help conserve resources whilst preventing detrimental effects on our health and the environment.

Notice: The sign “Pb” below the symbol for batteries indicates that this battery contains lead.

Information on Disposal of Old Electrical and Electronic Equipment and Batteries (applicable for EU countries that have adopted separate waste collection systems)

STOP

4 025-9574E

Release History

Release Enhancements/Changes

Rev A21 Apr 2006

This manual is a combination of the following three manuals, which are hereby obsolete: • 025-9531_E Acom Maintenance • 025-9528_F Acom CCE Hardware Installation • 025-9538_D Acom Console Hardware InstallationContent was reorganized to suit the new manual, duplicate material was removed, and chapter navigation was added to most chapters.The following updates or additions are new in this revision:

• Added overview of Dynamic Intersite Bearer• RJ45 pinout numbering corrected for DCU cards and EIE cards• Updated MCU4 description and MCU4 LED description to include information about

Dynamic Intersite Bearer• Added UIO configuration examples• Replacing Components chapter rewritten with improved instructions for most

components (specifically: CCC, COV-T and COV-V, DCU, EMU/TIE/EIE, Logger, MCU4, MCU3, MSU, Optical Switch, SMU, UIO)

• Updated or added the following glossary entries: AIMS, AIMS VDU, CFDS, IRR, and UMS

• ADS alarms added to appendix• Corrected MCU LED information• Updated descriptions for serial port 1 and 2

Rev B10 Nov 2006

• Updated jumper locations for Deskmic Option on page 57. • Moved the Logger Subrack card compatibility table from the ALS section to Logger

Subrack on page 106. • Switched to new Acom nomenclature (global change). • Updated Changeover Card - 48/96 Way Switch (COV-V and COV-R) on page 123 to

include the new COV-R card. • Added RIU card to the card compatibility table Acom Line Subrack Card Installation on

page 95. • Updated glossary definitions for COV cards. • Added a new section for the Logger Subrack. • Moved the ChangeOver Subrack card compatibility table from the ALS section to

Changeover Subrack on page 105. • Removed all references to using a logger card in anything but a Logging Subrack

(Logger Card Installation). • Added a new section Radio Interface Unit (RIU) on page 224 for the new RIU card. • Added the COV-R card to the card compatibility table Changeover Subrack Card

Installation on page 106. • Added COV-R card to Changeover Control Card on page 106. • Moved IMS Fault Logs to the front of Appendix C: Alarms and added Fault Log Input

Alarms on page 377 and Fault Log Output Alarms on page 382. • Added part number for new EMU card on page 168. • Added warnings for new EMU jumper settings on page 173 and 292.

5

Rev C31 Mar 2008

• Fixed Radio Interface Unit (RIU) on page 224 to reflect the correct name, improve the overview text, provide a warning about -48v lines, and correct JP29 in the jumper table.

• Updated MCU4 Status Indicator Functions (When used in an ADS, not as an Intersite Bearer) on page 188 to show new LED behavior based on the Standby Bearer.

• Fixed nomenclature: Changed “AIS” to “ALS”, whenever “AIS” referred to Acom hardware instead of an Alarm Indication Signal. Standardized on “4W E&M” to replace “4W VF” when referring to that ACU module. Changed “ACS.ini” to “AcomConsole.ini”

• Increased the maximum number of consoles and lines in Capacity on page 27.• Added OLCB and LLCB to Appendix A: Acom Glossary on page 347.• Updated Dual E1 Interface Module on page 86 to add twisted-pair E1 ACU module.• Removed the detailed SMU DSP information from Signaling Management Unit (SMU)

on page 240.• Consolidated detailed information about the ACU into the Acom Console Unit (ACU) on

page 73, and added extra specification information from the DCS-5020 manual.• Added the new section Model 3030 PSAP TDD on page 64.• Added the new section Capacity on page 27, which introduces the dynamic backbone

and related concepts.• Added the new section Channel TX and RX Wiring on page 233 to show how to wire

various radio types to the RIU.• Updated Digital Inputs on page 408 and Internal Link Error on page 409 to show that

they are configurable and to remove references to unsupported numbers of MCUs.• Updated Capacity of DS3 switches on page 103 to include additional resources and

updated capacity.Rev D

16 May 2008• Support for stereo headsets. Monitor Speaker 1 can be redirected to one side of the

headset. Associated new jackbox and cable. Page 44.• RIU card jumper settings corrected. Page 246.• Added Dual E1 Fiber Module section. Page 78.

Rev E6 Mar 2009

• Only operating systems supported are Windows Vista Business SP1 and Windows XP Professional SP3.

• Changed all terminal-related procedures to assume use of generic terminal software.• Updated DCU Interfaces on page 133 to mention RS-485 and external serial clock.• Added Protected Mode on page 373 to describe the new alarm mode.• Added Zetron Desktop Microphone on page 57.• Added MCU4 Status Indicator Functions (When used in an ADS as an Intersite Bearer)

on page 189.• Updated Appendix A: Acom Glossary on page 347.• Updated Acom Console Unit (ACU) on page 73 for new ACU with USB.• Updated Internal Link Error on page 409 and Internal Link Master on page 410 for

MCU configured as ISB.• Updated default passwords for ALS, ADS, and ACU.• Removed older, obsolete equipment (AIU, Optical Switch, Logger Card, Logger

Subrack, and generic desktop PC speaker).• Updated ISB information in the following sections: Intersite Bearers on page 25, Time

Slots on page 25, and Capacity on page 27.• Updated Zetron Speakers on page 54 with connection information.

Release Enhancements/Changes

6 025-9574E

Contents

7

Contents

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Documentation Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Hardware Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Maintenance Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Associated Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Acom System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

System Conceptual Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Console Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Console Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Connectors and pin-outs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Common Control Equipment (CCE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23DS3 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Intersite Bearers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Time Slots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Backbone Time Slots for Local Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Bearer Time Slots for Intersite Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Installation Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29General Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Antistatic Work Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31System Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31As-Built Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Recommended Installer Materials and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Back Room (CCE) Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Testing of New/Existing Circuits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Install Additional Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Install Grounding System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Install Cable Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Mount Acom Punchdown Blocks on Demarc Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Lightning Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Contents

8 025-9574E

Check Cabinet Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Front Room (Console) Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Console Loop Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Twisted Pair Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Coax Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Console Network Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Continuing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

CCE Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43CCE Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Maintenance Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46System Power Up and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

System Power Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Power Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Manual Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Continuing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Console Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Acom Console Unit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Acom Console Unit Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Headset Jackbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Headset Jackbox with Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Stereo Headset Jackbox without Volume Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Telephone Radio Headset Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Zetron Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Configuring the Select and Monitor 1 Speakers for Acom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Configuring Monitor 2 and 3 Speakers for Acom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Deskmic Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Zetron Desktop Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Legacy Desktop Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Integrator IRR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Theory of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Software Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Contact Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59VOX Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60SoundBlaster Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61E&M 4-Wire Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Configuring Acom for Integrator IRR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Integrator Software Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Configuring Integrator IRR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Configure Acom Console to use IRR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Model 3030 PSAP TDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Other Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Operator Active Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

9

Contents

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Assembling the Operator Active Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Position Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Acom Console Unit Modification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67IMS ACU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68AcomConsole.ini File Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Foot Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69E1 Digital Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Console Quick Checkout Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Acom Console Unit (ACU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73ACU Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74ACU Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75ACU Internal Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76ACU Main Board Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76ACU Hardware Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76ACU External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77ACU Main Board Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Main Board COM Ports 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Digital Input Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Electrical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Digital Output Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Electrical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82DSP Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83ACU Expansion Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Plug-In Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Operator’s Audio Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Dual E1 Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Dual E1 Fiber Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Dual 4W E&M Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Acom Line Subracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Subrack Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93General Circuit Card Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Electrical Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Acom Line Subrack Grounding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Signal Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Acom Line Subrack Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

VoIP Acom Line Subrack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Cloning an Acom ALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Acom DS3 Switch (ADS) Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Basic ADS Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Rack Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103General Circuit Card Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Jumper Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Combine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Changeover Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Changeover Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Changeover Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Contents

10 025-9574E

Changeover Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Additional Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Changeover Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Additional Changeover Subracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Acom Card Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Changeover Control Card (CCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

CCC Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Description of Major Functional Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

CCC Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Front Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Connector Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

CCC Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Card placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Connections to MSU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Connections to ADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

CCC Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Changeover Card - 3 Way Coax Switch (COV-T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118COV-T Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Description of Major Functional Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119COV-T Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Front Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Connector Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

COV-T Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

COV-T Alarm Generation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122COV-T Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Changeover Card - 48/96 Way Switch (COV-V and COV-R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

COV-V and COV-R Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Description of Major Functional Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

COV-V and COV-R Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Front Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127COV-V Connector Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127COV-R Connector Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

COV-V / COV-R Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

11

Contents

COV-V / COV-R Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130COV-V / COV-R Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131DS3 Control Unit (DCU Card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Real Time Clock (RTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132DCU Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132DCU Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Front Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Connector Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

DCU Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138DCU Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Data Interface Unit (DIU1-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142DIU1-2 Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Description of Major Functional Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143DIU1-2 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143


DIU1-2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148DIU1-2 Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148DIU1-2 Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Debug Port Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Subrack Backplane Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Operational Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Data Interface Unit (DIU1-4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151DIU1-4 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Description of Major Functional Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152DIU1-4 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153


DIU1-4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157DIU1-4 Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157DIU1-4 Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Exchange Interface Unit Card (EIE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

EIE Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Description of Major Functional Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Contents

12 025-9574E

EIE Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Front Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Connector Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

EIE Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165EIE Alarm Generation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166EIE Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168E&M 4-Wire Interface Unit (EMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

EMU Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Description of Major Functional Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

EMU Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Front Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Connector Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

EMU Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177EMU Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177EMU Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Main Control Unit (MCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

MCU Functionality in ALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180MCU Functionality in ADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

MCU Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Description of Major Functional Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

MCU Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Front Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Status LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Connector Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194G.703 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

MCU Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196MCU Installation in ALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196MCU Installation in ADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

MCU Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197MCU Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Main Supply Unit (MSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202MSU Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202MSU Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Front Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

13

Contents

Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Reset / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Connector Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

MSU Installation in Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Load Sharing and Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

MSU Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Alarm Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Watchdog Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Programmable Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Alarm Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

MSU Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Audio Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Alarm Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Ring Generator Unit (RGU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215RGU Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216RGU Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217


RGU Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221External Ringer Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221User Serviceable Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

RGU Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222RGU Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Radio Interface Unit (RIU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224RIU Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225RIU Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Front Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Connector Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

RIU Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Channel TX and RX Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

RIU Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234RIU Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Recorded Voice Announcement (RVA) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235RVA Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235RVA Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Front Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Contents

14 025-9574E

Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Connector Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

RVA Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

RVA Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238RVA Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Signaling Management Unit (SMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240SMU Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

SMU Description of Major Functional Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241SMU Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Front Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Connector Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

SMU Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Alarm Generation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

SMU Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249SMU Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Telephone Interface Unit (TIE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252TIE Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Description of TIE Functional Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253TIE Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Front Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Connector Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

TIE Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

TIE Alarm Generation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258TIE Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Universal Input/Output (UIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260UIO Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Description of Major Functional Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262UIO Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

UIO Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

UIO Example Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

15

Contents

UIO Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270UIO Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

UIO Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274UIO Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Replacing Acom Cards and Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Replacing Acom CCC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Replacing COV-T, COV-R, and COV-V Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Replacing DCU Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Replacing Acom Console Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Replacing Acom Console Unit Daughter Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Replacing EIE, TIE, or EMU Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Replacing Jackbox 950-0474 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Replacing MCU Cards in an ALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Replacing MCU Cards in an ADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Replacing MSU Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Replacing RVA Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Replacing SMU Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Replacing Telephone Radio Handset Interfaces (TRHI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Replacing UIO Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Changeover Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Changeover Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

The Acom Line Subrack (ALS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310MSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Changeover Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Changeover Control Card (CCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Changeover Card - 48/96 Way Switch (COV-V / COV-R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Changeover Card - 3 Way Coaxial Switch (COV-T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Additional Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Backbone Switch Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Acom DS3 Switch (ADS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

ADS Changeover Wiring Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Forcing a Changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Cloning an ALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Preventative Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Check for Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Maintenance Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Check for Environmental Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Test Backup Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

System Monitoring in IMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321IMS ALS Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

General Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Contents

16 025-9574E

Remote Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Performance Testing and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Installation and Configuration References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Specific Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Audio Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Console Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Other Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Recommended Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Appendix A: Acom Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Appendix B: System Failure Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359DCU LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360MCU3/4 LEDs (in ALS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362MCU4 LEDs (in ADS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364MSU LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366Acom Console Unit (ACU) LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Appendix C: Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Input Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Input Alarm Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Output Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

IMS Fault Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373IMS Fault Log Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374Fault Log Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Alarm Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Alarm Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Fault Log Input Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Fault Log Output Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

General Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383ALS Alarm Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Configuration Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385Loss of Signal at 64k G703 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386Slips at 64k G703 Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386AIS from Remote End of 64k G703 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386Loss of Incoming Signal at 2 MBPS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386Loss of Frame Alignment of the G.703 2 MPBS Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388Received Remote Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389Excessive EBER G703 2 MBPS for Channels 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389Slips Occurring on 2 MBPS Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3902 MPPS Multi-frame Sync Loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3902 MBPS-CRC-4 Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

17

Contents

AIS Detection at 2 MBPS Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Remote Multiframe Alarm on 2 MPBS Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Acom Fault During Restart or Self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Ring Fail Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Alarms Acknowledged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393No Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393Local Input Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393Test Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395Maintenance Terminal Active. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395DIU4 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395SMU Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3972MBPS Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398Remote End Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Input Alarm Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398Alarm Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398Alarm Urgency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Alarm Acknowledgment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Alarm Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Alarm Output Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400Alarm Outputs over the G.703 Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401MSU Alarm Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Acom Console Unit (ACU) Alarm Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402Configuration Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402Amux Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402Acked Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402All OK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402Test Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403Maintenance Terminal Active. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403Digital Input 1 (through 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403Link A Offline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403Link B Offline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404Console Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404Console Audio Facilities Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404E1 Slot 0 Link X No Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405E1 Slot 0 Link X Loss of Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405E1 Slot 0 Link X Receive Remote Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405E1 Slot 0 Link X Exceeded Bit Error Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406E1 Slot 0 Link X frame slips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406E1 Slot 0 Link X Loss of MultiFrame Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406E1 Slot 0 Link X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406E1 Slot 0 Link X MultiFrame Remote Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407E1 Slot 0 Link X RA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407E1 Slot 0 Link X RA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

ADS Alarm Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Input Alarm Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Digital Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Internal Link Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409Internal Link Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410Card Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411DS3 Loss Of Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411DS3 Loss Of Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412DS3 Alarm Indication Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Contents

18 025-9574E

DS3 Link Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413DS3 Link Wrapped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413DCU Ring Off-Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414Incorrect DS3 Port Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414DCU NV Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415No Backplane Time Slots Available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415DCU Packet Memory Exhausted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416DCU Packet Memory Insufficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416MCU Packet Memory Exhausted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417MCU E1 Loss Of Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417MCU E1 Loss Of Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418MCU E1 Alarm Indication Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418MCU E1 Remote Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419MCU E1 Remote Alarm 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420MCU E1 Remote Alarm 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420MCU LCB Missing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421MCU E1 Framer Slips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422MCU LCB Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422DCU Boot Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4232Mb Clock Source Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424DCU Selftest Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Input Alarm Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424Alarm Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Alarm Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425Alarm Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425Output Alarm Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

Supervisor Alarms in IMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426Supervisor Console Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426Name Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Acom Console Unit (ACU) Alarms in IMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428Console Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429Device Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430Sample “AcomConsole.ini” file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Documentation Set

19

Introduction

Documentation Set

This Manual

This manual covers hardware installation and maintenance for the Acom system. The manual content is designed for those users who are responsible for installing and configuring the system hardware, and those users who are maintaining it. This content includes overview descriptions, installation requirements and procedures, specifications, pinouts, configuration details, diagrams, and other important information.

Overview

Acom System Overview on page 20

Installation Procedures

CCE Installation Procedures on page 43Console Installation Procedures on page 49System Power Up and Reset on page 46

Hardware Reference

Acom System Overview on page 20Hardware Components on page 73Acom Card Reference on page 111

Maintenance Procedures

System Power Up and Reset on page 46Replacing Acom Cards and Devices on page 277Forcing a Changeover on page 316Preventative Maintenance on page 319Troubleshooting on page 325

Introduction

20 025-9574E

Associated Documents

The following list identifies all of the additional manuals and documents needed to provide all of the information necessary to fully describe, install, operate, and maintain this Acom system.

Acom System Overview

The Acom system is based on three major hardware groups and one primary software application, the Integrated Management System (IMS). The primary hardware components that make up the Acom system are the Console Hardware (hardware components that make up the operator position), the Acom Console Unit (ACU), and the Common Control Equipment (CCE), including the DS3 Switches.

System Conceptual Diagrams

Figure 1 is a conceptual diagram showing the overall hardware and the associated connections for an Acom system; only one cabinet is shown for simplicity.

Title P/N

Acom Software Installation and Configuration 025-9529_MAcom Console Design 025-9587_EAcom Console Operation 025-9530_MSystem Overview See As-Built Documentation PackageProduct Definition Sheet See As-Built Documentation PackageNetwork Diagram See As-Built Documentation PackageCabinet Layout See As-Built Documentation PackagePosition Layout See As-Built Documentation PackageIDF Layout See As-Built Documentation PackageJumpering Survey See As-Built Documentation PackagePower and Grounding See As-Built Documentation PackageCable Index See As-Built Documentation PackageSystem Requirement Spec See As-Built Documentation PackageBill of Materials See As-Built Documentation PackageMisc. Technical Information See As-Built Documentation Package

Note A glossary of Acom terms and acronyms is available in Appendix A: Acom Glossary on page 347.

21


Figure 1: Basic Hardware Arrangement

Console Hardware

The system console hardware is the hardware located at the operator position, mainly the computers and the Acom Console Unit (see Figure 1). The console hardware consists of a PC with monitor that has the necessary software applications to operate the system. The operator position typically includes speakers and microphone equipment for voice capability.

The operator positions are connected to each other by the use of a Local Area Network (LAN). The LAN is used to communicate and distribute management data, application information, configuration files, and ALI/ANI information.

IMS MaintenanceTerminal

Operator PositionAcom Console Unit

RS-232Operator Position

RS-232

Operator PositionRS-232

Operator PositionRS-232

Line Subrack and Circuit Cards

Optical or DS3 Switches

Power Supply

Power Supply

SMU

MCU

SMU

EMU

UIO

MSU

Example of Populated ALS

Common Control Electronics

LAN

LAN

LAN

LANE1

E1

E1

E1

E1 loop to first Acom Console Unit (ACU)

E1

Optical or DS3 Loop

EIE

TIE

Acom Console Unit

Acom Console Unit

Acom Console Unit



Introduction

22 025-9574E

Figure 2: Example System Console (typical operator position)

The Acom Console Unit interfaces the operator’s position to the DS3 Switch with its main function being to switch and process audio and data to and from the operator’s position. The Acom Console Unit connects to the DS3 Switch by a dual E1 console loop, which provides console backbone redundancy.

The Acom Console Units are also connected to each other, forming loops that ensure that no cabling or CCE failure will isolate an operator position. RS-232 circuits run from the Acom Console Unit to the consoles.

Although the Acom Console Unit is typically installed in the front room with the console equipment, it can also be located in a closet or in the back room with the CCE.

The following list identifies the circuits used between the different components of the system console hardware:

• Operator Positions LAN• Acom Console Unit (ACU) E1 loops• Operator Position and ACU RS-232• IMS Maintenance Terminal LAN and RS-232

Console Hardware Requirements

The recommended minimum hardware and software requirements for the System Console PC are as follows:

• Pentium 4 processor, 2 GHz

DataConnection

(COM)Speaker 1

Foot Switch(optional)

IRR Box(optional)

Speaker 2

Customer ProvidedNetwork

AcomConsole Unit

Headset

Jackbox 2Jackbox 1

Handset

LAN

23


• 533 MHz FSB• 512 MB of RAM• 40 GB (or larger) hard drive• CD-ROM 48x• 1.44 MB 3.5” FDD• 2MB (or more) video card

(minimum resolution of 1024 x 768 required)• 1 x RS-232 serial port (or more)• LAN card, 10/100 MB• Flat panel or CRT monitor:

• 19 inch minimum• 1024 x 768 minimum resolution• Touchscreen optional

Electrical Requirements• The power for the system console is 110 or 220 VAC. A selection switch is located

on the back of the PC.

Connectors and pin-outs• DB9 to RJ45 cable to Acom Console Unit. (P/N 709-7615)• RJ-45 connector for LAN

Common Control Equipment (CCE)

The CCE includes the 19-inch, 6-unit equipment racks that contain the Acom Line Subracks (ALS), Acom Digital Switches (ADS), and their associated circuit cards. The CCE is networked to operator positions, providing switching for voice and data communication and dispatch console functions.

Each subrack can hold up to 13 Acom cards. The Acom Line Subracks contain all of the required interfacing to line services. The equipment rack also contains rate converters, modems, power supplies, plus all of the necessary cabling, including the DS3 backbone.

The Acom system provides the necessary signaling functions to properly interface to the line interfaces. The CCE also provides interfaces to the operator console positions through the use of DS3 Switches and an E1 link. See Figure 1.

The Acom system supports the distribution of console configuration files using a Local Area Network (LAN). A maintenance computer running the Integrated Maintenance Software (IMS) provides the system with configuration and diagnostic reporting tools.

Note The only operating systems supported are Windows Vista Business SP1 and Windows XP Professional SP3.

Introduction

24 025-9574E

DS3 Switches

The Acom system employs a DS3 bus-based architecture with distributed switching nodes (see Figure 3).

DS3 Acom systems use a DS3 backbone supported by DS3 switching equipment consisting of multiple ADSes (Acom DS3 Subracks) connected to Line and Console interfacing equipment (ALS and ACU respectively). Each ADS consists of DS3 (DCU) and E1 (MCU) interfacing equipment.

Figure 3: Basic System Hardware Components

The Acom Console Unit (ACU) and the Acom Line Subrack (ALS) interconnect to the DS3 Switches using time slots on a digital E1 link. Time slots within the E1 protocol are assigned for both voice-frequency (VF) and data information. Each Acom DS3 Subrack (ADS) supports up to 6 E1 links, depending upon the number of MCU cards installed inside the subrack.

The DS3 ring is made up of 21 E1 buses, of which 1 bus is reserved for system messaging. Of the remaining 20 buses, time slot 0 is reserved for E1 framing, leaving 20 x 31 = 620, 64Kbps time slots available for audio switching.

The DS3 consists of a dual DS3 bus that is “self-healing” under failure conditions. Failure in the equipment or in a section of the ring itself will cause the adjacent DS3 ring equipment to loop back the buses, restoring a ring architecture. The DS3 switching equipment and associated line and channel interfacing equipment can be fully duplicated with “hot-standby” change over capability. This approach allows the Acom system to employ multiple interfaces per card, while ensuring no single point of failure.

ACU

ACU

DS3 Switch

DS3 Switch

COS

ALS

ALS

VLS

External EquipmentDS3 Switch

DS3 Switch

LoggingEquipment

ACU

E1CONSOLE LOOP DS3 Ring

Console

Self-healingbackbone

RadioEquipment

TelephoneEquipment

DigitalLogging

Equipment

Digital I/OEquipment

Maintenance Terminal

Console

Console

25


Intersite Bearers

An intersite bearer (ISB) is a means of sharing resources among two or more sites that are connected within the same Acom system but may be miles apart. Using ISB links, resources at one site can be used by console operators at any connected site. A console operator at Site A can answer a call being received at Site B and can transmit over a line that is physically located at Site B. Console operators at remote sites can be included in conferences, patches, and intercoms just as if they were local. A typical usage is transmitting from Site A to a radio that is out of range of Site A but within range of Site B.

No difference should be noticed between local and remote lines, except possibly a slightly slower response time on lines that actually reside at another site. Line and console numbers are unique among all sites, so there’s no danger of confusing, for example, Console 10 and Radio Line 20 with any other console and line.

Optionally, ISBs can also carry digital I/O for voting monitor and control of remote radio lines. When this option is enabled, some digital I/O can be configured to pass over ISBs with other digital I/O remaining local.

ISB connections are implemented between ADSs of separate Acom sites, by way of E1 or T1 connections on the MCU4 cards. Every ISB has an Incoming and an Outgoing side. That is, one MCU4 port must be configured as an Incoming bearer, and the mating MCU4 port on the other site must be configured as an Outgoing bearer. Each ADS can support up to six ISBs, and there can be up to 16 ISB groups in a network. Extended bearers are used on a point-to-point basis to complement the Main bearer.

Each ISB port is monitored for stability. If a certain number of destabilizing events should occur within a certain period of time, the port would be temporarily disabled. If port is configured for redundancy, this would cause a change-over to a Standby ISB group. The port would remain unavailable until a certain number of stabilizing events occurred within a certain period of time. The port would then be enabled again, and a change-over of the bearer group back to the Main group should occur. The event types, time parameters, and redundancy are specified by way of IMS ADS.

In addition to IMS ADS, some ISB setup may need to be done in IMS ALS and/or IMS ACU, as well as in Acom Console Designer. For more information on ISBs, and for configuration procedures, see To set up intersite bearers (ISBs) in Acom Software Installation and Configuration.

Time Slots

A time slot can be thought of simply as a data transmission unit on the E1 link. (For a more detailed definition, see time slot and frame in the glossary.)

Backbone Time Slots for Local Resources

Each uniquely identifiable resource (radio lines, phone lines, ringdown lines, intercom lines and utility audio devices) requires a backbone time slot for communication between the console and the CCE. Each console also requires a backbone time slot, and each

Introduction

26 025-9574E

system tone generator requires a backbone time slot. Consoles automatically request a backbone timeslot as soon as the operator is online (logged into ACS software).

Console screens can be designed to have a Backbone Status indicator that monitors the supply of backbone time slots. If the indicator should turn from green (which indicates <90% of the backbone time slots are in use) to yellow (which indicates that 90-99% are in use), the console operator would be expected to review the resources in use by that console and determine whether any can be released. If the indicator should turn to red (which indicates that 100% are in use), resource selection is possible, but the audio is not available until another active resource is released.

Phone/Radio line resources can be allocated backbone time slots either permanently or dynamically:

• Permanent allocation — The time slot will be allocated from the time slot pool when the line first starts up, guaranteeing that the line can always receive and send audio.

• Dynamic allocation — The time slot will be allocated from the time slot pool on an as-needed basis (for example, when an operator selects or monitors the line).

The rationale behind the dynamic allocation design is the same as with all trunking type designs, such as all public phone networks: all physical circuits are not typically in use at any given time. As long as the traffic model is understood, it is possible to have many more potential connections than there are physical circuits.

Acom’s dynamic allocation model supports prioritization of the circuits to be switched in case the backbone time slots are ever full when an attempt to access a circuit is made. If an accurate traffic model is known and Acom is configured correctly, this situation should not occur. However, if it does, the following priorities are used (listed with highest priority first):

1. consoles2. permanent phone lines3. permanent radio lines4. fixed connections5. system tones6. utility audio7. dynamic phone lines8. dynamic radio lines

Bearer Time Slots for Intersite Resources

Each audio resource usage (such as monitoring a line, selecting a line, or joining a conference) over an ISB link requires a bearer time slot.

Like backbone time slots, bearer time slots can be made available for resource use across an intersite bearer either dynamically (as needed) or permanently.

27


Console screens can be designed to have a Bearer Status indicator that monitors the supply of bearer time slots. If the indicator should turn from green (which indicates <90% of the bearer time slots are in use) to yellow (which indicates that 90-99% are in use), the console operator would be expected to review the resources in use by that console over ISB links and determine whether any can be released. If the indicator should turn to red (which indicates that 100% are in use), resource selection is possible, but the audio is not available until another active resource is released.

Capacity

Using dynamic allocation of backbone time slots, an Acom system can support up to 200 consoles and 2,200 lines. The actual maximum number of consoles and lines that can be active in the system at any given time depends on the extent to which dynamic allocation is used.

In a multi-site system employing intersite bearers, the maximum number of consoles and lines that can be active in the system at any given time further depend on how many consoles and lines are configured for replication, and the extent to which the bearer time slots are allocated dynamically.

Introduction

28 025-9574E

29

Installation Preparation

This chapter describes the steps necessary to prepare for Acom installation. These instructions are guidelines and contain sufficient information to help you install the equipment, however, you will need project-specific information to completely install the equipment. See Associated Documents on page 20.

The installation procedures in this chapter are:

General Preparation on page 30Operating Environment on page 30Safety on page 30System Architecture on page 31As-Built Documentation on page 32

Back Room (CCE) Preparations on page 33Recommended Installer Materials and Equipment on page 33Testing of New/Existing Circuits on page 34Install Additional Power on page 35Install Grounding System on page 36Install Cable Trays on page 37Mount Acom Punchdown Blocks on Demarc Wall on page 38Lightning Protection on page 38Check Cabinet Route on page 39Environment on page 39

Front Room (Console) Preparations on page 40Console Loop Installation on page 40Twisted Pair Loops on page 40Coax Loops on page 41Patch Panel on page 42Console Network Installation on page 42


30 025-9574E

General Preparation

Zetron cabinets that house the subracks are staged at the factory and are typically installed on site by Zetron technical personnel. Any installation is preceded by a site analysis and preparation to ensure that the equipment is in a proper operating environment. The following guidelines are considered part of the site preparation; all equipment specifications must be maintained.

• Adequate space must be available for ingress of cabinets and equipment.• Space requirements must allow for proper placement of equipment and safely

accommodate cabling.• Space requirements must allow for safe access to equipment so that personal can

properly service and maintain the equipment.• Support flooring must be able to adequately anchor cabinets according to local

codes and practices.• Adequate ventilation and cooling must be available for proper equipment operation.• Adequate space must be available for cable trays if required.

Operating Environment

The Acom is designed for installation and operation within areas suitable for telecommunications equipment. Environmental factors such as air temperature and humidity and presence of electromagnetic interference (including line disturbances) may affect reliability and reduce system availability.

The requirements for temperature and humidity are listed in the Absolute Maximum Ratings paragraph listed in the Acom Line Subrack Specifications, page 100. Note that the specifications are for the ambient air surrounding the subrack. Compliance with the specifications must also consider measuring the air temperature in the space directly below the subrack.

Other guidelines relating to the installation environment are as follows:• The installation environment must be free of dust, moisture and vapor. The subrack

is designed for ease of access to cards and for cable entry. It is not protected against ingress of particles or liquids that may deposit on the surfaces of the circuit cards and on the metallic surfaces of connectors.

• The installation environment must be free of excessive vibration and shock.

Safety

There are two types of circuits that can be connected to an Acom.• Telecom Network Voltage (TNV)• Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV)

31

General Preparation

The TNV circuits are designed to connect to external lines and may carry hazardous voltages.

Because it is possible to work on the Acom system when the equipment is live and connected to external circuits, extreme care must be exercised to avoid touching a TNV. Those areas include the front sections of cards and the subrack’s lower backplane.

Incoming cabling will also be connected to TNV circuits and may carry hazardous voltages.

Antistatic Work Practice

All Acom system cards are static sensitive; handling and installation must take place within antistatic work areas. The recommended guidelines for antistatic work practice are as follows:

• The area should be free of unnecessary paper, plastic, or other static producing items.

• Only conductive or antistatic materials may be used for storage and packaging of cards.

• Workbenches should have an antistatic work surface (such as a conductive mat) connected to a protective earth.

• Personnel should use conductive wrist or ankle straps connected to earth through a suitable resistance.

• The antistatic system should be connected to the same protective earth as the rack.• Care should be exercised to minimize human contact with conductive areas of

circuit cards. Contact at handles and at card edges, not the connectors, is preferred. There should be no contact with a card and human hair or clothing.

• Racking equipment should be constructed with ESD earth-bond points for convenient connection of wrist straps when installing or removing cards and subracks.

Before you begin installation, review this manual, the “As-Built” documentation, and the manuals listed below. The sections in this manual are prepared in a sequence in which the system should be installed. If you need further assistance, please call Zetron. The contact information can be found at http://www.zetron.com. There may be a fee charged for providing service outside of normal business hours.

System Architecture

Acom consists of Acom Line Subracks (ALS), Acom DS3 Subracks (ADS), Acom Console Units, Acom Router Console Units, Acom Changeover SubRacks (CSR), -48VDC power supplies, and other associated Acom and third-party hardware. A DS3 ring is used to connect the switching devices.

http://www.zetron.com


32 025-9574E

Figure 4: Acom Architecture

As-Built Documentation

A collection of system drawings are referenced by this manual to provide specific details about the system to be installed. The part number for these drawings are generalized in this manual, the specific document numbers will vary between systems and contracts.

The backroom equipment is to be installed in 19" EIA shielded cabinets. The layout of the cabinets is detailed in the Cabinet Layout Drawing (041-xxxx-070). This drawing details the location of the hardware as well as the inter-cabinet cabling for all connections except digital links (such as E1 or T1), and the cross connect wiring between demarc blocks. The Cabinet Layout Drawing shows how the ALSs connect to the Changeover Subracks (COS) and how the COS connects to the cabinet patch panels or demarc blocks. The Cabinet Layout Drawing identifies the installed cabinet equipment and the slot locations for the system cards.

The layout and identification of specific punchdown blocks and patch panel connections (such as BNC, RJ45, or RJ21) are detailed in the IDF Layout drawing (045-xxxx-072). This drawings shows specific details on the location of each demarc block and patch panel connection in the back of the Acom cabinets. This drawing identifies the external interfaces for the Acom cabinets.

The digital links (E1 and T1) between cabinet components are detailed in the Network Diagram (041-xxxx-062). In addition to the digital link connections between devices, the Network Diagram also shows how the Acom Console Units connect together and then to the back room equipment. The Network Diagram includes address and other information on each Acom device.

PABX

LOGGER

ACU

ACU

COS

ALS

ALS

ACU

E1CONSOLE LOOP DS3 Ring

Console

Self-healingbackbone


Console

Console

DS3 Switch

DS3 Switch

DS3 Switch

DS3 Switch

CS

R

PSTN

RADIO

33

Back Room (CCE) Preparations

Power for most devices is provided by a -48VDC supply that derives its output from a 115VAC input source. The power supplies may feed fuse or circuit breaker panels located in each cabinet to distribute the power. Each device in the cabinet must be grounded to a copper ground bar located within the Acom cabinet. The ground bars within each cabinet must be earth grounded by an electrician before power is applied. The specific details on power and grounding of the Acom cabinets can be found in the Power and Ground Diagram (045-xxxx-074).

Recommended Installer Materials and Equipment

• Helper Instruments LineMan test box, VF meter, or equivalent• Zip ties, various sizes• Velcro, various sizes• Split loom for dressing positions• Multimeter, Fluke DMM, or equivalent• Label maker or other cable labels• Cordless drill w/square bit for 8x3/4 screws• RJ45 crimp tool and connectors• BNC crimp tool and connectors• ESD wrist strap with alligator clip• Assorted tools including screw drivers• Work light• Step ladder• Telephone test set, “Butt Set”, or equivalent


Prior to system installation the site must be prepared for the Acom system. The specific details of expected modifications or actions to be performed prior to system installation are detailed in the Site Interface Requirements document (041-xxxx-yyy). This document will describe the cabling, power, ground, environmental conditions, circuit interfaces, and physical and electrical requirements that must be met prior to system installation. It will describe what to expect during installation to include the physical dimensions of the equipment, cable lengths to be provided, and equipment to be provided by the customer. This section is meant to provide only generalizations of how to prepare the site for the Acom system.


34 025-9574E

Testing of New/Existing Circuits

The installer is responsible for the testing/measurement of all customer circuits prior to equipment installation. These tests should be done as soon as possible to avoid installation delays.

♦ To test POTS circuits (exchange, end-end, loop out/ring in):

1. Place a telephone test set or analog desk phone across the Tip and Ring of each circuit. Take the phone off-hook and verify it returns dial tone.

2. Place an outgoing call and verify the call is connected.3. Ask the remote party to press and hold the DTMF 5 key on their phone and

measure the level at the customer demarc. Record this level in either Vrms or Dbm.

♦ To test local radio channels (PTT/COR):

1. Measure the receive level from the radio by generating an incoming signal (from radio) using either a test set or a mobile radio. a. Radio Service Monitor Method - If using a service monitor, generate a 1000Hz

sine wave at %60 deviation at full quieting (FM) or %90 modulation (AM). Record the level on the receive pair from the radio.

b. Voice Method - Key up a mobile unit and say a long deep “four” or another deep powerful sound and measure the level from the radio in either Vrms or dBm.

c. DTMF Method - Key up a mobile unit and press the mobile’s DTMF 5 key. Most mobiles generate DTMF at %60 deviation (FM). Measure the level of receive audio from the radio.

2. Verify that grounding the PTT lead keys the transmitter. Momentarily ground the PTT line to the transmitter and verify the base station keys. Record your results.(Some base stations require power to key instead of ground.)

3. Verify the receiver provides a COR signal on carrier presence. Measure the COR lead from the receiver and generate a signal on the channel to break squelch. Note the signaling state change.

4. Verify the required Tx audio level to generate %60 deviation (FM) or %90 modulation (AM).a. Generate a 1000Hz tone using a VF test box such as the Helper Line Master at

-10dBm onto the base station's transmit pair. b. Activate the transmitter by signaling the PTT line and measure the transmitter's

deviation (FM) or modulation (AM).c. Record your results.

♦ To test Tone Remote radios:

1. Measure the receive level from the radio by generating an incoming signal (from radio) using either a test set or a mobile radio.

35


a. Radio Service Monitor Method - If using a service monitor generate a 1000Hz sine wave at %60 deviation (FM) or %90 modulation (AM) at full quieting. Record the level on the receive pair from the radio.

b. Voice Method - Key up a mobile unit and say a long deep "four" or another deep powerful sound and measure the level from the radio in either Vrms or dBm.

c. DTMF Method - Key up a mobile unit and press the mobile's DTMF 5 key. Most mobiles generate DTMF at %60 deviation (FM). Measure the level of receive audio from the radio.

2. Verify the required Tx audio level to generate %60 deviation (FM) or %90 modulation (AM).a. Generate a key signal (Low Level Guard Tone) using any means available such

as the existing console or a Helper Line Master VF meter.b. With the channel keyed with the LLGT generate a 1000Hz test tone at -10dBm

to start.c. Record the level required to obtain the needed tx modulation.

Testing E1/T1 circuits

Use of a T1 tester with the ability to measure the level of the T1 span and verify framing. The meter should be able to run Bit Error Rate tests and measure the results.

Install Additional Power

The Acom system is powered from a combination of –48Vdc and 115Vac. The Acom system will include a 115Vac to –48Vdc power supply. The customer should provide NEMA L5-15R twist-lock AC power receptacles within 1.8 meters (6 feet) of the proposed Acom cabinet location. If your system will be redundant, the installer should supply at least three AC receptacles from circuit breaker A and another three receptacles from circuit breaker B. Powering the CCE from a UPS source is recommended for fault tolerance. Refer to the Acom Site Interface Requirements document (041-xxxx-yyy) for additional details on the power requirements. The Power and Ground Drawing (041-xxxx-074) details the internal power and ground connections for the Acom cabinets.

A

A

A

A

120V ACPower

Source B

120V ACPowerSource

A

B

B

B

B


36 025-9574E

Install Grounding System

Each Acom cabinet will come equipped with a copper ground bar mounted within the cabinet. All of the cabinet’s components will be grounded to this bar. The cabinet’s copper ground bar should be connected to earth ground (cold water pipe) for safety. The grounding of the Acom cabinets should be done by a qualified electrician to meet electrical codes. Do not jumper the grounds between Acom cabinets together, each cabinet should have its own high gauge (6 to 16mm2 (10 to 6 AWG)) stranded copper wire connected to the equipment room’s ground point.

If the back room does not already have a suitable ground system, one should be installed that supplies a copper ground plate within 15 meters (50 feet) of the intended cabinet location. The Power and Ground Drawing (041-xxxx-074) details the internal power and ground connections for the Acom cabinets.

A "star" grounding system (a single point ground to which satellite grounds are connected) is the best grounding system. The central "star" point must be firmly attached to a low impedance earth ground point, such as a ground rod. If protective punch-down blocks are used, a large diameter (16 mm2 (6-gauge)) copper conductor (or an equivalent braided strap/bus bar) must be connected between each block's ground lug and the earth ground or central "star" ground point. With the protected punch-down blocks, it is best to wire directly to earth ground if possible. Each piece of equipment should have its chassis grounded to the central "star" point with a separate ground wire. The size of the wire depends on the length of the run, 4mm2 (12 gauge) is adequate if the length is less than 4.5 meters (15 feet). The length of the runs should be minimized. Securely connect a grounding wire to the case of each unit making sure metal connection is made (no paint or oxidation layer). Most Zetron equipment provides a grounding stud. If the console includes a computer, connect an individual grounding wire to the computer chassis. Figure 5 shows a central "star" grounding system. All earth grounds in the system should be isolated from signal lines. It is easy to couple ESD or lightning noise spikes if these lines run parallel for any distance. The AC power wires (and DC power to a lesser degree) should also be routed separately. AC lines can have large switching current noise spikes that could couple into signal lines.

DANGER! Improper system grounding can cause electric shock to personnel, damage to equipment, and system malfunctions. Proper earth grounding is an important electrical consideration. The earth ground protects the system and personnel from lightning strikes, provides a path for any electrostatic discharge (ESD), and provides a solid reference for the system. Improper grounding of the system could cause susceptibility to ESD, induced noise from input power wiring, and reduced effectiveness of lightning protection devices. Induced noise could cause false signal indications or a variety of system errors.

37


Figure 5: Central “Star” Grounding System

Install Cable Trays

The power and ground should be run separate from audio signals. A minimum distance of 38cm (12 inches) is required for parallel runs. Most back rooms have a false floor that allows for the routing of power and ground beneath the cabinet. Zetron recommends running all audio and signal cables in the overhead cable trays, away from the power and ground. The cable trays will need to be high enough to allow the Acom cabinets to sit underneath. Refer to the Site Requirements Document (041-xxx-yyy) for the physical

Copper or Aluminum Ground Plates

Ground Wires 2.5mm2 (14 AWG) or Larger

EARTH GROUND50mm2 (#0 AWG) or Larger

Acom Cabinet1

Common Control Electronics

CRT

PC

Digital Switch

Jackbox

Console Position

Protected Punch-downBlock

Radio A

Radio B

Phone InterfacePBX/CO

Acom Cabinet2

Operator Console Position

Caution! Do not connect signal ground to the central "star" ground. The conditioning and reference of the signal grounds is controlled inside the Zetron equipment. The system will be more susceptible to noise interference.

!


38 025-9574E

dimensions of the Zetron cabinets. The cable trays should provide a path for voice and signal cable routing between the Acom cabinets and the demarc wall.

Mount Acom Punchdown Blocks on Demarc Wall

The telco, radio, and digital I/O interfaces are typically provided via a 25-pair RJ21X punch-down terminal which has CO/PABX wiring on one side and open terminals on the other side. RJ21X terminals are wired to a 25-pair connector jack on the side of the terminal block. A 25-pair connectorized cable interfaces from the terminal block jack to the CO/PABX equipment. The terminals are punched directly to cabling on both sides, eliminating the 25-pair cable connectors.

RJ21X Split-Blocks (Zetron Part No. 802-0263 or equivalent) are configured with 4 terminals side to side by 50 terminals top to bottom. From side to side, the two left terminals in each row are electrically identical, and the two right terminals are electrically identical. The two left terminals are isolated, however, from the two right terminals. Normally, “bridging” clips are installed onto the two center terminals in order to connect the right-side wiring to the left-side circuits. This provides a means of “opening” circuits (by removing bridging clips) or temporarily re-routing lines (by cross-wiring different circuits) for test purposes. Terminal numbering from top to bottom starts with RJ21 pin26, then pin1, then 27, then 2 as shown below.

Also, paired bridging clips (convenience) and fused bridging clips (surge protection) are available from other vendors to facilitate these circuit terminals.

The Acom system will require a dedicated space on the wall for the demarcation of Acom circuits. A 1200x2400mm sheet of 18mm plywood (4x8x¾”) should be painted white and bolted to the wall at this location. Mount the split-block type punchdown block to the demarc wall in preparation for Acom system installation. The Acom 25-pair cables will come terminated to an RJ21 connector for direct connection to connectorized type 66 blocks. By providing accurate lengths between the proposed cabinet location and the demarc wall, cables of the necessary length can be provided. The customer may at their discretion, cut off the RJ21 and terminate the cables by punching down all of the connections to the exact length. Refer to the Site Requirements Document (041-xxxx-yyy) for the number and use of the type 66 blocks.

Lightning Protection

Arc arresters right on the telephone demarcation/punch-down blocks can shunt hazardous voltages at their source. These easily replaceable protection modules protect your equipment investment. Ask your Zetron sales person how to order punch down blocks with built in protectors.

Additional protection for the primary power line may be obtained from other vendors, and should be employed to protect from lightning strikes to power lines.

Proper grounding techniques are critically important to ensure proper lightning suppression and reliable operation of the Acom Console System.

39


Lightning grounds are typically routed directly from lightning arrestors/suppressors to the main ground bonding terminal, which in turn is typically soldered or welded directly to the site grounding network (ground rods, etc.). Each lightning protection device should be grounded separately with the shortest possible wire length to the bonding junction. To minimize path resistance and impedance, a large-diameter wire (typically 16mm2 (4 AWG)) green-colored conductor is used, having minimum bend radii of 20cm (8 inches) to minimize inductive effects. Also, other wires should be separated at least 10cm (4 inches) from these grounds to prevent arc-over during lightning strikes.

Further information is provided in Zetron Technical Bulletin 027-0069: Proper Signal Grounding Techniques for Radio Sites.

Check Cabinet Route

Walk the path you expect to use when moving the Zetron cabinets to the CCE and measure all ceilings, elevators, and doorways for clearance. Check this against the cabinet dimensions to ensure a smooth installation.

Environment

Ensure that the CCE is cool, dry, and relatively dust free. Air conditioning may be required to keep the room at a constant temperature. The use of fans by the Acom equipment is kept to a minimum.

Suggested conditions:

• Temperature: below 21.7 C (71 F)• Humidity: below 50% non-condensing

Warning! Operating the Acom Console System without adequate voltage suppression devices on the telephone and radio connections may result in costly damage not covered by warranty. Protection kits and applications assistance are available from Zetron.

STOP


40 025-9574E

Front Room (Console) Preparations

Console Loop Installation

The consoles are connected in a chain to form rings or loops for redundancy. Either 75ohm coax or 100 ohm twisted pair loops must be installed in preparation for the console installation. All connections should be labeled as per the Acom Network Diagram (041-xxxx-062).

The console loop cables should not run adjacent to power or EMI sources. Ensure that the cable is a minimum of 30cm (12”) from any parallel power cables.

Twisted Pair Loops

If the Acom Console Units are to be connected using 100Ω UTP (CAT5e/6), it is assumed that an RJ45 wall plate or patch box has been installed at the position. Use Zetron cable 709-7596 or equivalent to connect the position to the wall plate.

Port 1 Port 2

Port 1 Port 2

ACU XPort 1

Generic Twisted Pair Loop

Port 2

ACU X+1

ACUX+2

CCEPatch Panel

Wall Plate

Wall Plate

Wall Plate

41

Front Room (Console) Preparations

The amount of signal loss and noise that can result from this type of installation significantly reduce the length of runs that are allowed. The fact that these loops often run from one position to the CCE and back to the next position adds additional loss.

Coax Loops

If the Acom Console Units are to be connected using 75Ω coax, it is assumed that a BNC wall plate or patch box has been installed at the position. Use Zetron cable 709-7611 to connect the SMB connectors on the Acom Console Unit Dual E1 card to the respective port on the BNC wall plate.

Max Length Between Devices

Recommended Cable Type

60 meters (200ft) CAT5e/CAT6

ACU X Port 1TX RX

Generic Coax Loop

Port 2TX RX

ACU X+1 Port 1TX RX

Port 2TX RX

ACUX+2 Port 1TX RX

Port 2TX RX

Wall Plate

Wall Plate

Wall Plate

CCEPatch Panel


42 025-9574E

This physical medium provides the best performance over long runs. The choice of coax will depend on the length of the run. The Acom system can tolerate 6dB of signal loss at 2Mhz. The follow table provides some guidelines for choosing the right cable.

Patch Panel

All connections should terminate in a customer provided patch panel in the back room and mini patch panels/wall plate at the position. Each console position will require a wall plate or patch box to be installed to support two E1 links and one RJ45 Ethernet connection.

Figure 6: Position Patch Panel Example

Zetron will provide the necessary jumper cable to connect the Acom Console Unit to the position wall plate. The wall plate should be mounted within 2 meters (6 feet) of the intended Acom Console Unit position.

Console Network Installation

The Acom consoles require a dedicated Local Area Network (LAN) to facilitate maintenance and the distribution of configurations to all positions. The loss of the network will not affect console operation.

Run a CAT5e/6 connection between the backroom and each console position to support the Acom LAN. Terminate each end to a female RJ45 connection. Terminate the CCE end of the CAT5e/6 cable to either an RJ45 patch panel or type 66 block. The CCE end of these links will be cross connected to Zetron Ethernet routers during the cabinet installation. The console end of these links will terminate to a wall plate or position patch panel. The LAN connection will be cross-connected to the console PC using a short Ethernet patch cable during the console installation.

Continuing the Installation

Acom installation continues with CCE installation instructions in the following chapter.

Max Length Between Devices Recommended Cable Type

15 meters (50ft) RG179u150 meters (500ft) RG59

300 meters (1000ft) RG6Over 300 meters (1000ft) Singlemode or multimode fiber

Ethernet

E1 LoopCAT5/6 UTPBNC Coax

CCE Installation

43

CCE Installation Procedures

This chapter describes the steps necessary to install the CCE (back room) and the IMS terminal. These instructions are guidelines and contain sufficient information to help you install the equipment, however, you will need project-specific information to completely install the equipment. See Associated Documents on page 20.

The installation procedures in this chapter are:

CCE Installation on page 43System Power Up and Reset on page 46

CCE Installation

Inventory the delivered hardware against the Zetron pack slip to verify all equipment was included. Many accessories are bundled into the Acom Console Unit box.

Unpack and Position the Cabinets

When the cabinets arrive they will be crated. Four people and a large area of 6x6 meters (20x20 feet) will be required to unbox the cabinets. An electric screw driver will assist in the removal of the top and side of the crate. The cabinets will ship with the doors removed and stored in the crate. With the top and side removed from the shipping crate, slide the cabinet out of the crate and stand it up on the wheels. Roll the cabinet into the desired location in the equipment room. To secure the room against vibration from earthquakes the installer may remove the wheels and bolt the cabinets to the floor.

The doors should remain off until installation and commissioning is complete. They must be installed to provide FCC part15 compliance for emissions.


44 025-9574E

Remove Zip Ties

The cables that are intended to be permanently installed will be secured with Velcro or hook/loop tape. The use of Velcro reduces any stress put on the cables. Cables or hardware secured with Zip-Ties are intended to be temporary for shipping purposes only. Cut all zip ties to free cables for installation.

Install Rackmount Servers

If the Acom system shipped with a rack mount PC or server, install that now. Refer to the Cabinet Layout (041-xxxx-070) for the location of the rack mount server. This task will require two people.

Once installed, the servers will require AC power connections to the Acom rack mounted power strips and grounding to the copper ground bar within the cabinet. Refer to the Network Diagram (041-xxxx-062) for the serial connection details.

If any Ethernet routers were shipped with the system, install them now. They may need to be rack mounted, refer to the Cabinet Layout Drawing (041-xxxx-070) for specific locations.

Connect Earth Ground

All the equipment within the Acom cabinets has been grounded to a copper bus bar. Have an electrician connect each Acom cabinet’s copper ground bar to the building’s earth ground. A separate connection to the room’s primary ground point should be used for each cabinet.

Connect Cabinets to Demarc Blocks

Following the Cross Connect Document (041-xxxx-yyy) to connect the Acom equipment to the demarc wall using 25-pair cables. The signaling cables should be run away from power sources to prevent noise from coupling. Each cable that leaves the Acom cabinets will terminate on a patch panel. Radio and telephone circuits may terminate on a RJ21 patch panel on the rear of the Acom cabinets. The installer may plug the 25-pair cables directly to the connectorized Acom type 66 blocks or cut off the cable’s end and punch them down to get an exact length. Avoid running the 25-pair cables over sharp edges or creating kinks in the cable. Preserve a 25mm (1”) min bend radius for the CAT3 25-pair cables.

Cross-Connect Acom Blocks to Existing/New Circuits

Using solid 24 awg wire, cross connect each circuit to the Acom type 66 blocks. The Acom demarc details and block pinouts can be found in the Cross Connect Document (041-xxxx-yyy).

45

CCE Installation

Acom Cabinet- to-Cabinet Connections

Following the Cross Connect Document (041-xxxx-yyy) connect the Acom cabinets together using coax, 25-pair CAT3, or 4-pair CAT5. All connections out of the cabinet will terminate on a patch panel in the back of the cabinet. The patch panel jacks have a unique identifier that can be used to locate specific connections.

Connect Acom Cabinets to Console Loops

Install runs of 75ohm coax or 100ohm UTP cable between the patch panels in the rear of the Acom cabinets to the backroom termination point for the Acom console loops. The specific connections can be found in the Cross Connect Document (041-xxxx-yyy).

Install Cards

Ground yourself to the Acom cabinet using an ESD wrist strap prior to installing or removing Acom cards. The system cards are shipped separate from the cabinets to protect them during shipment. Use the Cabinet Layout Drawing (0451xxxx-070) to populate the Acom Line Subracks (ALS), Changeover Sub Racks (CSR), and Acom DS3 Racks (if applicable) with the Acom system cards and make the needed connections to the front of each card. Verify the serial number and card type against the provided as-built records. The cables that connect to the front of each card will be labeled with the designators of the port at each end.

Apply Power

The cabinets will require 110AC power. Plug in the twist lock connections for the 48VDC power supplies and any Acom 110AC rack mounted power strips to the customer provided power receptacles. The redundant power supplies should be plugged into different AC circuits to prevent a single point of failure.

Apply power to the Acom cabinets by closing the circuit breakers in the –48vdc power supplies. The equipment connected to each breaker is designated in the Power and Ground Drawing (041-xxxx-074). Turn on the power switch for the AC power strip to provide 110VAC power to the cabinets. Turn on any ADS by toggling the MSU switch on (down).

Next turn on each of the Acom Line Subracks (ALS) by toggling the MSU switch on (down). Verify that the MSU LEDs light and the MCU initializes. Refer to the card LED information in Table 130 on page 206.

Check each cabinet’s fuse distribution panel for any alarms.

Check the –48v power supply for any alarms.

Check each device for a “Run” indication.


46 025-9574E

Network

Run jumper cables between all of the network ports for the positions to the Acom LAN router. The router may be rack mounted in one of the Acom cabinets or may just sit on a shelf. Generally speaking it does not matter what port each console is connected to, however, use caution when connecting a device to the last port of the router as it may be switched for use as an uplink expansion port. Each LAN port on the router will have an LED to indicate a connectivity and activity.


The maintenance terminal is a PC that is dedicated to monitoring the system and is used for maintenance and diagnostics. Install the maintenance PC in the CCE within 50 feet of the Acom cabinets. The recommended location would be in an adjacent rack (on a shelf) or on a nearby table.

For DS3 switches, connect serial cable 709-7615 between COM1 of the maintenance PC and on J8 port 1 (right port) on the front of the DS3 card near the bottom. Connect the Ethernet port on the front of each DS3 card to a free port on the Ethernet LAN router.

Connect the Ethernet port of the Maintenance terminal to a free port on the LAN router. Make the appropriate PC connections and turn them on. Reboot the maintenance terminal PC. Start the IMS Terminal (Net_Mgr) application on the Maintenance terminal PC and verify all CCE devices show communications. No communication with the Acom Console Units and some urgent system alarms will be normal at this time because the console loops have not been connected.

System Power Up and Reset

System Power Up Sequence

The power up procedure in this section is to be used on an Acom system that is known to be configured and functional.

47

System Power Up and Reset

Power Up Sequence

♦ To power up an Acom system:

1. Power up all DS3 Switches.2. Wait two minutes after all DS3 Switches have been powered on before proceeding

to next step.3. Power up side ‘A’ of the Acom system ALSs. These would normally be all ALSs

with the names of ALS1A or an ‘A’ in the name after the word ALS. These ALSs are sometimes referred to as the Main ALSs.

4. Wait one minute after all ALSs on the ‘A’ side have been powered on before proceeding to the next step.

5. Power up side ‘B’ of the Acom system ALSs. These would normally be all ALSs with the names of ALS1B or a ‘B’ in the name after the word ALS. These ALSs are sometimes referred to as the Standby ALSs.

6. Wait one minute before proceeding to the next step.7. The system should be active on the ‘A’ side of the Acom Equipment. This can be

verified by looking at the Information Alarm LED on the ALSs. This is the Green LED located on the MSU card right below the power switch next to the Yellow and Red LED’s. All ALSs on the ‘A’ side should have the Information Alarm LED on and the ‘B’ side ALSs should have the Information Alarm LED off.

8. If IMS Terminal/Net_Mgr is available, verify that all ALSs are now reporting to the software.

9. Power up all Acom Console Units in the system.10. Wait at least one minute after the last Acom Console Unit in the system has been

powered on for all Acom Console Units to come online.11. If IMS Terminal/Net_Mgr is available, verify that all Acom Console Units are now

reporting to the software.12. Start Acom Console Software at each position and logon to a screen.13. The Acom system should now be up and ready for operation.

Restart

The redundant and self-healing nature of the system design implies that only an unusual event (like a total power failure) would require restarting the entire system. In such an event, the procedure is no different than it was for the initial startup.

Note Verify that all Acom equipment is powered down/off before starting the power up sequence. This includes all Acom Console Units, DS3 Switches, ADSs, and ALSs in the system. Also verify that Acom Console Software is not running. If Acom Console Software is running, select the Configure button and select Exit to Windows.


48 025-9574E

In the case of system components that were switched off for repair or replacement, they may be started again at any time. Once they have cleared reset and finished their self-tests, the IMS application is used to finish any configuration required and returns them to service.

Manual Reset

The individual Acom hardware components may be reset in various ways:• Reset the Acom Console Unit by sending a command from the IMS terminal or by

physically cycling the AC power switch on the rear of the unit. • Reboot the console PC.• Reset the DS3 Switches, in any, by manually cycling the power switch on the MSU

cards.• Reset the ALS cards by using the reset button on the front of the primary MCU3

card (the MCU card in slot #0). You can also reset the ALS by cycling the power supply.

All of the equipment in the system retains its individual programming when reset. Alarms are not saved during reset and will not return when the unit comes out of reset unless the alarm condition still exists.

Continuing the Installation

Acom installation continues with console “front room” instructions in the following chapter.

Acom Console Unit Installation

49

Console Installation Procedures

The following procedures are continued from the CCE installation procedures in the previous chapter. The installation procedures in this chapter are:

Acom Console Unit Installation on page 49Headset Jackbox on page 51Headset Jackbox with Volume Control on page 52Telephone Radio Headset Interface on page 53Zetron Speakers on page 54Deskmic Option on page 57Integrator IRR on page 58Model 3030 PSAP TDD on page 64

Other Interfaces on page 65Operator Active Lamp on page 65Foot Switch on page 69E1 Digital Interfaces on page 71

Console Quick Checkout Instructions on page 71


The following section describes the steps involved in the installation of a single operator position. Since every Acom system is unique, some of these steps will not apply.


50 025-9574E

Figure 7: Generic Operator Position Layout

Each console position is made up of the following generic components:• Acom Console Unit (ACU)• Acom Console PC • Audio Interfaces (speakers, handsets, desk mic)• Other Interfaces (footswitch, active conversation lamp)

Acom Console Unit Overview

The Acom Console Unit provides the data and voice interface for each console position. The Acom Console PC running the Acom GUI speaks serially to the COM1 data port on the Acom Console Unit. The audio interfaces are connected to plug in modules in the Acom Console Unit to support speakers, handsets, desk mics, and other interfaces.

Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

~`

!1 2 3 4 5 6 7

@ # $ % ^ &

Tab

F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11

8 9 0 - = \* ( ) _ + |

F12 P r in tS c re e n

S c ro llL o

c k

P a u

s e

I n s

e r t

H o

m e

P ag eUp

D e le

t e

E n

d

P a

g eD o wn H o

m e

N u

mL o c

k

L o c

k

C a p

sS c r o llL o c

k

P g Up

E nd

P g Dn

D e l

I

ns

E n

t er

N umL oc k

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

0

+

-*/

.C t

r l

S h i

f t/

?

"'

POI

K L :;

M

}

][

{

<,

>

.

UYTR

F G H J

NBVC

AltAlt

Q W E

A S D

Z X

C a p s

L o c k

S h i

f t

C t

r l

Monitor1Speaker

Acom Console Unit (ACU)

IOIO

I AVG

A

Acom Console PC

GAMEPORT

AUDIOOUT

INPUT 1(PHONE)

INPUT 2(RADIO)

1

RECORDCONTROL

IRR Interface

ActiveConversation

Lamp

HEADSETJACKBOX

HEADSETJACKBOX

Monitor2Speaker

75 OHMSMB -> BNC

75 OHMBNC -> BNC

Wall Plate(BNC Demarc toDigital Switch Loop &Ethernet)

CAT5Ethernet

In Out

Footswitch 1DeskmicAmplifier

Desk Microphone

51


Installation

Install the Acom Console Unit under desk option 950-0520. The installer may use 024-0328 Mounting Template to gauge the size of the Acom Console Unit and the mounting holes required. Position the Acom Console Unit under the work surface and secure using self-taping screws. You may have to face the Acom Console Unit with the connections toward the operator to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting.

Connect the PC COM1 to the Acom Console Unit COM1 data port using cable 709-7615.

Ringing and other tones from the Console PC are mixed into the monitor speakers by the Acom Console Unit. Often the PC Tones are brought in using Zetron OAM to Speaker Audio Cable 709-9617. The 2.5mm male connector installs in the PC sound card output (green connection on most PCs). The RJ45 end of this cable installs in the “Audio” port of the OAM to bring in PC Tones on OAM channel 5 Rx.

Refer to ACU Under Desktop Mounting Instructions (P/N 011-0637) for additional details on mounting the Acom Console Unit under the work surface.

For technical information, see Acom Console Unit (ACU) on page 73.

Headset Jackbox

These can include a headset, handset, select speaker, monitor speaker, IRR, desk microphone, audio interface, or headset/handset jackbox.

Figure 8: Audio Jackbox

The Headset Jackbox (P/N 950-0474) is the standard jackbox for an Acom system. This simple device provides a dual prong PJ-7 Style connection for a single handset or headset. The unit is designed to mount under the work surface using the provided self taping screws. To install, remove the top cover by removing the 2 flat head retaining screws shown in the drawing above. With the cover off the two mounting holes are exposed. Use the provided screws to secure the jackbox to the under side of the work surface. Once secured, reattach the cover and run the cable to the HS1 or HS2 port of the Acom Console Unit’s OAM card. This jackbox includes a shielded cable that grounds the jackbox to the OAM.


52 025-9574E

Headset Jackbox with Volume Control

The Headset Jackbox with volume control (P/N 950-0580) provides a standard PJ-7 style jack for a single handset or headset. The rear of the unit offers an expansion port where a second jackbox can be attached. Secure the jackbox to the underside of the work surface using self-tapping screws. The top cover can be removed to facilitate mounting. Connect the jackbox to the HS1/HS2 port of the ACU’s OAM using cable 709-7682. The cable provided with this jackbox may provide grounding for the jackbox. If not a ground stud is available on the back of the jackbox. Refer to Dual-Prong Headset Jack Installation Instructions (P/N 011-0670) for installation details for this jackbox.

Stereo Headset Jackbox without Volume Control

This jackbox (P/N 950-0984) allows Monitor Speaker 1 audio to be redirected to one side of a stereo headset. If the headset is unplugged or if Speaker Enable is selected on the console, the audio returns to MS1. It is a variation of P/N 950-0580 above and looks just like it except that it has no volume control. It requires connection cable P/N 709-7919. Refer to Dual-Prong Headset Jack Installation Instructions (P/N 011-0670) for installation details for this jackbox.

Note This jackbox might not be shipped preconfigured for stereo headsets. If you do not get stereo through the headset, check the jackbox to make sure the jumper settings are as follows:JP1 (PTT Common Ground) = AJP2 (Mouth Common Ground) = AJP3 (Volume Bypass) = BJP4 (Jack Sense) = AJP5 (Mouth Bypass) = AJP6 (PTT) = B

53


Telephone Radio Headset Interface

The Telephone Radio Headset Interface (TRHI) (P/N 950-9439) is an optional jackbox for integrating 3rd party phone systems with the Acom console. It provides a dual prong PJ-7 connector to support a single headset/handset. The TRHI has a physical volume control for the radio side (Acom) and the telephone side. The operator’s microphone is routed between the phone and radio by the TRHI using the PTT signal and Off-Hook signals.

Mount the TRHI to the underside of the work surface using self-tapping screws. The cover may be removed to facilitate its mounting. Connect Zetron cable 709-7629 between the DB9 connector on the rear of the TRHI and the HS1 or HS2 connector on the Acom Console Unit OAM. Connect the "PTT" wire to a Acom Console Unit digital output configured to activate on console PTT (see the Position Layout Diagram). Connect the "Hset" wire to a Acom Console Unit digital input configured as a "Headset Interface" that moves audio to the speaker when the phone is off-hook (see the Position Layout Diagram). Connect the wall bug power source and install a handset or headset. A ground connection should be made from the rear ground post of the TRHI to earth ground for ESD protection.

Refer to the Telephone Radio Headset Interface Product Manual (P/N 025-9553) for more information on the TRHI.


54 025-9574E

Zetron Speakers

Acom does not have a standardized speaker bundle. Figure 9 identifies the typical parts used to connect up to four Zetron speakers to an Acom console. Refer to your Position Layout Drawing (041-xxxx-071) for the specific connections.

Figure 9: Connecting Zetron Speakers to Acom

Power Supply 802-0692

709-7875

To AC Receptacle

Select Speaker

Monitor 1 Speaker

Optional extension709-0124

To PC Sound CardMIC Audio In

(Green)

709-7875

Monitor 2 Speaker

Monitor 3 Speaker

To ACU 4W E&M Port 1

To ACU 4W E&M Port 2

709-7887To ACU OAM

Audio Port

Select

Monitor 1

PC Tones

950-0884709-0160

709-7888

709-7888

416-0012

Monitor 2

Monitor 3

950-0884

950-0884

950-0884

55


Configuring the Select and Monitor 1 Speakers for Acom

♦ To configure OAM/Acom definitions

1. In IMS ACU, right-click on the Operator’s Audio module and select Acom Definitions. If there is more than one Operator’s Audio module, use the one connected to the speakers.

2. Click L/S 05 Right to open the channel 5 definition window.3. Set Connection Type to Console PC Tones.4. Assign Console Number (position) of the ACU.5. Set Interface to ACS (in) + HS Speaker (out).6. Set Tones To to Monitor Speaker 1.7. Adjust Speaker Volume Settings if needed.8. Click Save.9. Click L/S 06 Right to open the channel 6 definition window.10. Set Connection Type to Console Monitor.11. Assign Console Number (position) of the ACU.12. Set Monitor Speaker ID to 1.13. Set Primary Interface to Normal.14. Adjust Speaker Volume Settings if needed.15. Click Save, then Exit.

Consult the configuration guide or Project Engineer if you have any questions.

♦ To configure OAM/Gain settings

1. In IMS ACU, right-click the Operator’s Audio module and select Gain Setting. If there is more than one Operator’s Audio module, use the one connected to the speakers.

2. Based on testing and using a nominal -10dBm input, the following levels in the ACU will attain that approximate input level to the speaker. They may vary per system and will also depend on other system gain settings. To continue our example using channels 5 and 6:a. Set Channel 5 Gain TX to 7.0b. Set Channel 6 Gain TX to 7.0

3. Click Save.Consult the configuration guide or Project Engineer if you have any questions.

♦ To configure OAM/AGC settings

1. In IMS ACU, right-click on the Operator’s Audio module and select AGC setting. If there is more than one Operator’s Audio module, use the one connected to the speakers.


56 025-9574E

2. Ensure that both the Select and Monitor channels do not use AGC by clearing their respective Tx Mode Enabled check boxes. To continue our example, channels 5 and 6 should have the Tx Mode Enabled check boxes cleared.

3. Click Save.Consult the Project Engineer if specific Gain and AGC settings are required for specific headset or speakers.

Configuring Monitor 2 and 3 Speakers for Acom

♦ Dual 4W E&M/Acom Definitions

1. In IMS ACU, right-click on the Dual 4W E&M module and select Acom Definitions. If there is more than one Dual 4W E&M module, use the one connected to the speakers.

2. Click Port 01 and assign the Connection Type as Console Monitor.3. Assign Console Number (position) of the ACU.4. Set Monitor Speaker ID to 2.5. Click Save.6. Click Port 02 and assign the Connection Type as Console Monitor.7. Assign Console Number (position) of the ACU.8. Set Monitor Speaker ID to 3.9. Click Save.


♦ Dual 4w Card-Gain Settings

1. In IMS ACU, right click on the Dual 4W E&M module and select Gain Setting. If there is more than one Dual 4W E&M module, use the one connected to the speakers.

2. Set Gain RX to 0 and Gain TX to -1 for both channels on the Dual 4w card.3. Click Save.


♦ Dual 4w AGC Settings

1. The AGC Settings can be accessed by right clicking on the Dual 4W E&M module and selecting AGC Setting. If there is more than one Dual 4W E&M module, use the one connected to the speakers.

2. Ensure that both channels do not use AGC by clearing the Tx Mode Enabled check boxes.

3. Click Save.Consult the Project Engineer if specific AGC settings are required for specific speakers.

57


Deskmic Option

Zetron Desktop Microphone

The Zetron Desktop Microphone (901-9660 and 901-9661, pictured below) is provided with its own installation manual. For more information, see Zetron Desktop Microphone Manual (P/N 025-9589).

Legacy Desktop Microphone

The desk mic option (950-0646 and 802-0154 w/ PDN 214) includes an in-line AGC amplifier for use with a dual 4-Wire E&M Module. This option provides the required amplification for the deskmic 802-0154 to operate with the 4-Wire E&M Module.

♦ To install the legacy deskmic option:

1. Screw down the leads from the desk mic to the Desk Mic Amplifier J1 terminals.• Pin1 – Ground• Pin2 – Mic


58 025-9574E

• Pin3 – PTT• Pin4 – Not Used

2. Connect the RJ45 from the desk mic amplifier to the RJ45 receptacle on the Acom Console Unit (ACU) Dual 4-Wire E&M Module using cable 709-7692.

3. Connect red wire to ACU Dual 4-Wire E&M Module “VREF” plug pin 1. This is 12Vdc to power the amp.

4. Connect black wire to ACU Dual 4-Wire E&M Module “VREF” plug pin 2. This is the ground reference.

5. Set the following internal jumpers in the ACU Dual 4-wire E&M Module:• X9 = 2-3• X10 = 2-3

Pins 2-3 on X9 and X10 are closer to the rear of ACU or closer to the Dual 4w RJ45 connectors.

6. Install ONE of the following jumpers to select a channel:• X5 (for channel 1)

or• X7 (for channel 2)

7. In IMS, select the signalling inversion option for the 4-Wire E&M Module and mark the E1 checkbox. This allows for correct operation in IMS, but note that the associated LED for E1 is inverted (lit when PTT is inactive and dark when PTT is active).For more information about configuring IMS, see Acom Software Installation and Configuration (P/N 025-9529).

8. Place the desk mic within easy reach of the operator.

Integrator IRR

Caution! If the desk mic and IntegratorIRR are to be installed on the same 4-Wire E&M Module, the IntIRR must not use contact closure to start/stop recording.

!

59


This section only contains the information about Integrator IRR that is related to Acom. For more complete information about Integrator IRR, refer to the manual Integrator IRR Product Manual (P/N 025-9496).

The Integrator IRR is a software-based instant recall recorder used to save and playback position audio by the operator. When used with an Acom system it can record phone calls and radio transmissions to the PC hard drive.

Requirements• Integrator IRR (includes IRR module, Game port cable, PC audio cable, IRR

Manual 025-9496, and IRR software, Soundblaster Live sound card)• Acom Console Unit equipped with E&M 4-Wire E&M Module• Acom Console Unit to IRR cable 709-7639• Zetron User Management Software (UMS)• One free, full-height PCI slot in the console PC (suitable for a SoundBlaster Live

sound card)

Theory of Operation

The IRR will record transmit and receive audio from the Acom console. The IRR will record under any of the following conditions:

• A phone line is selected.• A selected radio channel (radio base) has CD or VOX activity.• A radio channel is keyed by the operator.

The IRR can use contact closure, software control, or VOX to trigger the start/stop of a recording. Only one application can command the IntIRR with software control at a time, so we recommend using software control unless you are installing the Acom console in conjunction with a Zetron M3200 phone.

Software Control

The Console PC will use software commands to control the IRR application when activated with the following setting in the “AcomConsole.ini” file:

[IMS Terminal]EnableIRR=True

Contact Closure

The M1 lead from the Dual 4-wire E&M Module goes active to signal the PC to begin recording. The IRR box provides a ground reference to the M1 lead of the E&M card. Under idle conditions this ground is passed out the +VREF (pin 1-left) of the center orange connector X2 on the E&M card. When recording should begin, the ground is removed from the +VREF lead which signals the PC to begin recording.


60 025-9574E

VOX Recording

The IRR has the ability to record based on the presence of audio alone. This option should be used as a last resort as it does not provide the finite control of recording that the other two options do.

SoundBlaster Installation

IntegratorIRR requires a SoundBlaster Live card.

♦ To install the SoundBlaster card and drivers:

1. Shut down the computer.2. Insert the "SoundBlaster Live! Value" card into an empty slot in the computer.3. Restart the computer.4. The Found New Hardware wizard screen should appear. Do not insert the

SoundBlaster CD at this time.

5. Follow the wizard's instructions to search for a suitable driver for the new device. Set the search locations parameter to the CD drive.

6. Insert the Creative SoundBlaster Installation CD into the CD drive. When the SoundBlaster installation program starts, click Cancel.

7. Follow the rest of the Add New Hardware wizard instructions to finish installing the driver found on the CD.

8. When the wizard is finished, go to the Windows Start menu and select Settings, Control Panel, Sounds and Multimedia.

9. Click on the Audio tab.10. From the item lists, select the item corresponding to Creative SB Live! (or Emul

10Kx Audio[E000]) for both Sound Playback and Sound Recording.11. Mark the Use only preferred devices checkbox.12. Click OK.13. Restart the computer.

SoundBlaster Configuration

♦ To configure the sound card:

1. Click START, Settings, Control Panel to open the Windows Control Panel.2. Open Sounds and Multimedia in the Control Panel. Select the Audio tab and set

Playback and Recording to use the SoundBlaster Live card.

Caution! It is very important that you use the Windows Add New Hardware feature to install the driver for this sound card. Do not use the installation program that comes on the SoundBlaster CD.

!

61


3. Select Use preferred devices only.4. Click OK on the Sounds and Multimedia panel to save your changes.5. From the Windows Control Panel, open Gaming Options. Add a new controller of

type 2-axis 2-button joystick. This is required for contact closure operation to start recording.

6. Click OK to save your changes.

Hardware Installation

♦ To install IntegratorIRR:

1. Install cable 709-7728 "Software/VOX Control Cable" or 709-7639 "Contact Control Cable" between one of the dual 4-wire ports on the Acom Console Unit and "Input 2 (Radio)" on the IRR module.

2. Connect the 2.5mm audio cable provided with the IRR between the IRR Hardware Module jack and the Line Input (Black port) of the Soundblaster Live soundcard.

3. If using contact closure to trigger the start and stop of recording, connect the game port cable provided with the IRR between the IRR module DB15 connector and the Soundblaster Live game port.

4. Use the provided Velcro to secure the IRR module to the side or top of the Console PC.

5. Connect the IRR Hardware Module "Input 1 (Phone)" to the 3rd party phone system if applicable.

E&M 4-Wire Module Installation

If the Acom Console Unit did not come with the required E&M Module pre-installed, install the 4-Wire E&M Module now. See Dual 4W E&M Module on page 89.

Configuring Acom for Integrator IRR

♦ To configure Acom for Integrator IRR:

1. Connect to the Acom Console Unit using IMS ACU.2. Right-click on the 4-Wire E&M Module and choose Acom Definitions.3. Click Channel 1 and configure it for Voice Logger/IRR.4. Set the console number to match the position number and click Save.

Warning! If the desk mic and IntegratorIRR are to be installed on the same 4-Wire E&M Module, the IntegratorIRR must not use contact closure to start/stop recording.

STOP

Note Use of Integrator IRR contact closure recording is incompatible with the Acom Deskmic if used on the same Dual 4 wire module. The Deskmic may be used with software or VOX controlled IRR.


62 025-9574E

You may configure only one “Voice Logger” and one “IRR” per console number.5. Right-click on the 4-Wire E&M Module and choose Signalling Inversion. Invert

the M1 signal for Channel 1 only and click Save.The M1 lead is used to trigger the recording of Acom audio.

6. Right-click on the 4-Wire E&M Module and choose Gain. Set the transmit gain to +6dB for Channel 1.

7. From the IMS menu click File, Update to NVRam to save your changes to flash.8. Reset to console from the Tools, Reset menu in IMS.9. Close IMS ACU.

Integrator Software Installation

♦ To install Integrator software:

1. Insert the Integrator IRR Install CD into the PC CD-ROM drive.2. The installer should automatically start; if it does not, click START, Run, and type

“D:\Setup” where D is the drive letter of your CD-ROM.3. Install UMS Client on the local machine. This will require a reboot. Leave the CD

in during the reboot and the second phase of the installation will begin automatically when Windows restarts.The User Management System (UMS) controls access to Zetron applications.

4. Install IntegratorIRR from the CD. Follow the installer’s prompts to complete the installation of Integrator IRR.

5. After installation, copy the .LIC file provided by Zetron into the “C:\Program Files\Zetron\Integrator IRR\” folder. If you don’t have a license file (*.LIC) yet, contact Zetron tech support.

6. Run the UMS shortcut from either the start menu or desktop; it will start in “Off-Line” mode.

7. Log into UMS using the name “z_admin” and no password (blank).8. Run ZAM and activate “On-Line” mode to connect with the UMS Server.

Configure your users with the permission to execute Integrator IRR. For additional information, see the UMS manual (P/N 025-9516).

Configuring Integrator IRR

♦ To configure Integrator IRR:

1. Double click on the IRR icon to start the program.

Note If desired, the IRR may be installed without the UMS requirement. There is a registry patch on the installation CD that will allow it to be run without requiring a UMS logon. Without this patch, the operator will be required to log into UMS prior to running Integrator IRR.

63


2. Once the program has started, click Edit, Options.

3. In the Options box of the Audio Settings tab, click Input 2, Sources Alias, and type “Acom”. Saved recordings will be labeled with their source.

4. Click the Record Control tab, then Input 2.5. Set Input Gain to +6 dB.6. Select AGC Enabled.7. Select the type of recording control you wish (software control is recommended).8. Click Apply, then OK.9. Select the Storage tab.10. Set Disk Allocation to a reasonable size (500MB).11. Set Warning Threshold to “10%”.12. Click Browse and navigate to “C:\Program Files\Zetron\Integrator IRR”13. Add “\Recordings” to the end of the path and accept the popup that will appear.

Verify that Storage Location reflects “C:\Program Files\Zetron\Integrator IRR\Messages”

14. Click OK to save the changes.

Configure Acom Console to use IRR

♦ To configure the AcomConsole.ini file for Integrator IRR:

1. Browse to the folder for the Acom console software. This may be “C:\Program Files\Zetron\ACS” or “C:\Program Files\ACS”.

2. Open AcomConsole.ini using Notepad or other text editor.3. Search for the section called [ACS].4. Add/modify the following values in the [ACS] section to launch IntIRR on login

and use software control to control recording:EnableIRR=TrueEnableIRRSoftwareControl=TrueIRRChannelAlias=Acom

5. If you will be using UMS to control permissions for IntIRR, add/modify the following value in the [ACS] section:

EnableUMS=True

6. Save the file and start the console software from the Windows Start menu.

Note The options menu is controlled by the user’s UMS permissions.

Note If you have not licensed the software, you may get a warning window that this demo will expire in 10 days. If the warning window appears, contact Zetron tech support. The first time the program runs it will warn you to configure your storage settings, click OK to proceed.


64 025-9574E

Model 3030 PSAP TDD

The Model 3030 PSAP TDD is compatible with the Acom system, but the operator will hear TDD tones. The following items are required to install the Model 3030 with Acom:

• Model 3030 PSAP TDD (P/N 901-9254) and manual (P/N 025-9193)• Model 3030 Handset Interface Box (P/N 950-9299) and manual (P/N 011-0108)• If connecting the Model 3030 to an ACU OAM:

• RJ45 network cable• RJ11 4-wire handset jack and suitable crimper

• If connecting the Model 3030 to a Headset Jackbox or TRHI:• RJ11 4-wire handset cable• 6-wire dual-prong PJ connector

♦ To connect the Model 3030 to Acom

1. Follow the Model 3030 installation instructions (P/N 025-9193).2. Configure the Model 3030 and the Handset Interface as described in the handset

interface instructions (P/N 011-0108), except for the audio level setting which is described in the following step.

3. Set the handset interface TX Gain = +5.85 dB and RX Gain = +12 dB. This provides the best dynamic range if the operator's audio is set to typical levels.

4. A cable must be built to interface between the 3030 handset interface box and Acom. The 3030 handset box uses a 4-wire handset type connector. On the Acom side, you must wire either a 6-wire RJ45 to connect to the OAM, or a 6-wire dual-prong PJ-type connector to connect to a headset jackbox or TRHI. The following table and figure provide the required wiring information.

Table 1: Model 3030 Acom Connections

3030 Connection Acom Connection(Pick One)

4-wire Handset Connector (RJ11)

Headset/Handset Connector for

Acom OAM (RJ45)

6-wire Dual-Prong Connector for Headset

Jackbox or TRHI

Pin 1 Yellow TDD Audio Out Pin 1 TIPPin 2 Green TDD Audio In Pin 5 SLEEVEPin 3 Red TDD Audio In Pin 6 SLEEVEPin 4 Black TDD Audio Out Pin 2 TIP

No connection Pins 3, 4, 7, and 8 RING

65

Other Interfaces

Figure 10: Model 3030 Acom Connection Pins

Other Interfaces

Operator Active Lamp

Overview

The operator active conversation lamp is a visual indicator for the Acom console position. Colored lamps illuminate to indicate position activity and status. This lamp is optional equipment.

Acom Console Unit digital outputs are configurable at each operator position for the following console states:

• Telephone Call Pending• Line Selected (Console Busy)• Telephone Line Selected• Operator PTT’ing• Emergency Telephone Call Pending • Emergency Telephone Line Selected

In addition to the outputs reacting to operator state, the cadence of the lamp is configurable from solid (always lit) to a periodic rate on/off (0.1 to 100 seconds).

Required Materials• 045-0254-076 Power Cable (1 per position)• 804-0078 24 VDC transformer (1 per position)• 045-0254-075 Lamp Cable (1 per lamp)• 804-0077 Lamp Bulb (qty = # of lamps)• 804-0076 Dual Beehive Lamp or 804-0075 Single Beehive Lamp (1 per position)

1

4

RJ11

1

8

RJ45Tip

Ring

Sleeve


66 025-9574E

Assembling the Operator Active Lamp

♦ To assemble the Operator Active Lamp:

1. Screw the spade lugs of power cable 045-0254-076 into the AC transformer 804-0078. Black wire to the – (negative) terminal and red to the + (positive).

2. Screw the flying leads of lamp cable 045-0254-075 into the orange Acom Console Unit digital output connector as shown in Figure 11.It is assumed that the red lamp will be the primary non-urgent call lamp and the white will be for emergency calls.

3. Remove the top cover of the beehive lamp (single or dual).4. Screw the spade lugs of Lamp Cable 045-0254-075 to the corresponding screws

down terminal of each lamp. The white wire goes to the white bulb, the red wire to the red bulb. The black/green wire connects to the bulb common (same electrical point for both bulbs). If you have only a single beehive lamp (only one color) screw both the red and white lugs to one terminal and the black/green to the other.

Table 2: Cable Wiring for Operator Active Lamp

Pin Signal Color Equipment

1 OP1+ Red Operator Red Lamp2 OP1- Black Operator Red Lamp3 OP2+ White Operator White Lamp4 OP2- Black Operator White Lamp5 OP3+6 OP3-7 OP4+8 OP4-9 OP5+

10 OP5-11 OP6+12 OP6-

67

Other Interfaces

Position Installation

Figure 11: Lamp Position

♦ To install the lamp at the console position:

1. Mount the operator active lamp at the position using double sided Velcro or self-tapping screws.A non-slip pad is provided with the lamp for temporary installations.

2. Plug the orange Acom Console Unit digital I/O connector into the Digital Output jack of the Acom Console Unit (if it was previously disconnected).

3. Plug the Lamp Cable 045-0254-075 into one of the 2 pin Molex plugs of the Lamp Power Cable 045-0254-076. The other 2 pin Molex would be used if the position needed additional lamps.

4. Plug the transformer 804-0078 into the position’s AC power strip.

Acom Console Unit Modification

The Acom Console Unit internal jumpers must be changed to remove the common ground reference from the digital outputs to be used with the Active Conversation Lamp. If installing just one or two lamps then remove jumpers X2 and X3. When removed, the 24vdc transformer will be used to bias the output when active.

To change the Acom Console Unit jumpers, remove power. Then remove the screws from the top cover and set it aside. The jumpers are located near the digital output connector on the rear of the Acom Console Unit.

Table 3: Acom Console Unit Internal Jumpers

INDICATORLAMP

804-0076

24VDC XFMR804-0078

Cable045-0254-075

Cable045-0254-076

2 pinMolex

ACUDigital Out

Warning! Failure to isolate the digital output will result in an electrical short to ground

Jumper Fitted Not Fitted (Default)

X2 Enable common reference for Output 1 No common reference for Output 1X3 Enable common reference for Output 2 No common reference for Output 2

STOP


68 025-9574E

IMS ACU Configuration

The first two digital outputs must be configured for IMS ACU to operate with the Active Conversation Lamps.

Figure 12: IMS ACU Configuration

♦ To configure the digital outputs:

1. Open IMS ACU and connect to the desired Acom Console Unit.2. From the Configure menu of IMS ACU, choose Digital I/O.3. Click the Digital Output tab and change the Function Type of the first output to

“ACU I/O Function 1” and set the Function Data field to the Acom console number of the position.

4. Change the Function Type of I/O 2 to “ACU I/O Function 2” and set the Function Data field to the same Acom console number.When the Acom Console Unit requests that ACU output 1 be asserted the Acom Console Unit will use this screen to identify what digital circuits are Acom Console Unit output 1 and 2.In the AcomConsole.ini file we will define the behavior of ACU output 1 and 2.

AcomConsole.ini File Modification

Add/modify the following section of the AcomConsole.ini file to configure the behavior of the Active Conversation Lamp. This is an example, the installer could vary the cadence, criteria and priority of the outputs using this setting.

X4 Enable common reference for Output 3 No common reference for Output 3X5 Enable common reference for Output 4 No common reference for Output 4X6 Enable common reference for Output 5 No common reference for Output 5X7 Enable common reference for Output 6 No common reference for Output 6

Jumper Fitted Not Fitted (Default)

69

Other Interfaces

[Digital Outputs]

; Non-Urgent calls flash 1st light when ringing, solid when answered, and solid for PTTLocalGPDigitalOutput1 = (NonUrgentPriorityPhoneCallPending, 1, Flashing, (1000,1000)) and (NonUrgentPriorityPhoneLineSelected, 2) and (PTTActive)

; Urgent/Emergency calls flash 2nd light when ringing, solid when answeredLocalGPDigitalOutput2 = (UrgentPriorityPhoneCallPending, 1, Flashing, (1000,500)) and (UrgentPriorityPhoneLineSelected, 2)

;

;The LocalGPDigitalOutput# setting has the following parameters:

;LocalGPDigitalOutput<DigitalOutputAddress> = (<ConsoleStateID>[, <Priority>, <IndicationMode> [, (<OnPeriod>, <OffPeriod>)]]) [and <ConsoleStateIndicationData>]

Foot Switch

Several methods of connecting a foot switch (P/N 950-9102) are possible.

Refer to the Position Layout (041-xxxx-071) for the intended method for the installed system.

Using TRHI:

Footswitch installation requires opening of the TRHI to access connector TB2.

Connect the leads from the foot switch to the connectors labeled "TB2" and “PTT” inside the TRHI. (The polarity of these leads does not matter.)


70 025-9574E

Using Digital PTT input:

Connect one of the leads of the foot switch to desired Acom Console Unit digital input using the pin out information in the table below. The Position Layout Drawing (041-xxxx-071) will show the intended input to use. The digital input connector X56B is the top orange connector located on the rear of the Acom Console Unit beside the data ports. The input pins are designated 1-12 from left to right when viewing the rear of the Acom Console Unit.

Table 4: Acom Console Unit Digital Input Connector X56B

Connect the other lead of the foot switch to a ground reference. The Position Layout Drawing (041-xxxx-071) will have the intended connection. It is possible to use the Acom Console Unit digital output connector X56A for this ground reference.

Configure the Acom Console Unit internal jumpers using Table 5. These jumpers control the DC bias of the digital inputs and outputs. The settings required for foot switch operation are the same as shipped from the factory.

Table 5: Acom Console Unit Jumpers

Signal X56B Pin

Input 1 2Input 2 4Input 3 6Input 4 8Input 5 10Input 6 12

Warning! Checking the Acom Console Unit jumpers requires opening the cover of the Acom Console Unit. To prevent injuries, disconnect power from the Acom Console Unit before removing the cover.

Input Jumper Position

All(Applicable for

any input)

X50X51X2

2-3 (toward power supply)2-3 (toward power supply)Installed (shorted)

1 X8X37

Installed (shorted)1-2 (toward front of Acom Console Unit)

2 X9X38


3 X10X39


4 X11X40


STOP

71

Console Quick Checkout Instructions

E1 Digital Interfaces

See Console Loop Installation on page 40.

Console Quick Checkout Instructions

This section describes a quick checkout of an operator position to be done after the replacement/installation of any hardware. The purpose is to ensure the console audio interfaces are properly connected and functional.

♦ To check a console:

1. Start the Acom Console Software and log on.a. Verify the Acom Console Software starts up without errors. If it does not

communicate, the serial port may not be installed correctly.b. Verify the console number is correct as per the Network Diagram (041-xxxx-

062).c. Verify that all radio, phone, and digital IO buttons appear active (not grayed

out).2. Install a handset into the left Zetron jackbox.

a. Verify that Acom Console Software “Mode:” shows H-Set. If it does not, check that its connected to an HS port.

3. Move the handset to the right Zetron jackbox.a. Verify that the Acom Console Software “Mode:” shows H-Set. If it does not,

check that its connected to an HS port.4. Test the various PTT sources.

a. Use the Handset/Headset inline PTT to key a radio channel, verify the PTT button changes color and the line text turns yellow. Repeat for the second jackbox.

b. Use the footswitch (if installed) to key a radio channel, verify the PTT button changes color and the line text turns yellow.

c. Use the desk mic (if installed) to key a radio channel, verify the PTT button changes color and the line text turns yellow.

5. Select a phone line.

5 X12X41


6 X13X42


Input Jumper Position


72 025-9574E

a. Verify you can hear a dialtone and that you can dial.b. Verify that Integrator IRR (if installed) has recorded the phone call.

6. Place an active radio channel into monitor speaker 1. If there is no activity, generate a test tone for that line as an audio source.a. Verify that the test tone can be heard in the left speaker of this position. If it

appears in the right the connections are swapped at the rear of the PC.7. Place an active radio channel into monitor speaker 2.

a. Verify the test tone can be heard in the right speaker.8. Select an active radio channel.

a. Verify the audio can be heard in the handset/headset.b. Verify that Integrator IRR (if installed) has recorded the phone call.

9. Clear all selected lines and monitors from the console and log off the Acom Console Software.

This concludes the installation procedures for the “front room” (console) equipment. The remainder of this document provides detailed reference information for console equipment.


73

Hardware Components

This chapter provides reference material for various hardware components:

Acom Console Unit (ACU) on page 73Acom Line Subracks on page 92Acom DS3 Switch (ADS) Subrack on page 102Changeover Subrack on page 105

For cards, see Acom Card Reference on page 111.


This section describes the Acom Console Unit (ACU) and how to connect the Acom Console Units to the other interfacing hardware. After the Acom Console Unit is connected, it is configured using the IMS ACU software. See Acom Software Installation and Configuration (P/N 025-9529) for more information.)

General

The ACU provides the data and voice interface for each console position. The Acom Console PC running the Acom Console Software communicates serially to the COM1 data port on the ACU. The audio interfaces are connected to plug in modules in the ACU to support speakers, handsets, desk mics, and other interfaces.

The ACU is a 1U component that provides audio and data interfaces between the operator position and the CCE using an E1 cable. It provides a serial data interface for the System Console. In addition, it also provides speaker, handset, and microphone interfaces for the operator position.

Note The Acom Console Unit was formerly named Operator Console Unit (OCU) and Digital Switch.

Hardware Components

74 025-9574E

The ACU can be rack mounted or desk mounted, depending on the site requirements. This unit is CE approved, and has the following dimensions:

Width: 432 mm (17 inches)

Height: 1U (45 mm) (1.8 inches)

Depth: 250 mm (9.84 inches)

Figure 13: ACU Front Panel

All the connections for the ACU are located on the rear panel as shown in Figure 14.

Figure 14: ACU Rear Panel examples

ACU Specifications

Class Item Range

CommunicationInterfaces

Number of Interfaces 4Connector Type, COM1 USB or RJ45Connector Type, COM2-4 RJ45Maximum Baud Rate 115.2Kbps (asynchronous)Data Format 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stopElectrical Interface RS232 or RS422/RS485

Digital Inputs

Number of Inputs 6Connection Type Plug-in screw terminalInput Range 3V to 60VInput Current Range 1mA to 10mAInternal Reference Voltage 5VIsolation Between Inputs and SELV 1.5kV

75


ACU Power Requirements

Digital Outputs

Number of Outputs 6Connection Type Plug-in screw terminalMaximum Switched Voltage 60VdcMaximum Output Current 100mAInternal Reference Voltage 0V (ground)Isolation Between Outputs and SELV 1.5kV

EnvironmentOperating Temperature 0 to 60 degrees CStorage Temperature -10 to 70 degrees CHumidity 95% RH at 40 degrees C

Electrical

Power from AC Mains 85 to 260 Vac47 to 63 Hz96 VA

Maximum +5V power consumption 1AMaximum +12V power consumption 1.2A

Class Item Range

AC Unit 12/24VDC Unit 48VDC Unit

Input Voltage Range 85 to 260 Vrms 9 to 36 V 18 to 60 VMax Input Current 0.4 A (240V), 0.6 A (115V) 2.1 A 1.1 AInput Power 35 W 50 W 50 WFrequency 47 to 63 Hz

Hardware Components

76 025-9574E

ACU Internal Layout

The ACU has a basic internal hardware layout as shown. It has four expansion slots numbered zero to three. These slots accept different circuit boards, which varies the functionality of the ACU.

ACU Main Board Functions

The Main Board provides the processing power to operate its own interfaces and all of the expansion slots. The Main Board provides the following:

• Data Interfaces• Digital I/O Connections• LEDs for alarms and status information• DSP audio processing, capability of eight full duplex audio lines• Digital cross-point switch/conferencing• Real Time Clock

ACU Hardware Connections

The ACU is located between the DS3 Switch and the System Console with its main function being to switch and process audio and data to and from the operator’s position. The ACUs’ connection to the DS3 Switch is by a dual E1 Console Loop, which provides for Console interface redundancy. In the event of a single point of failure, i.e., if a ACU

Main Board

ExpansionSlot

0

ExpansionSlot

1

ExpansionSlot

2

ExpansionSlot

3

Mainboard InterfaceConnections and LEDs

PowerConnector

and Switch

PowerSupply

77


becomes inoperable or the Console Loop fails, the other Consoles in the chain still maintain a connection path to the DS3 Switch.

ACU External Interfaces

The following illustration shows the ACU’s external interfaces, however, the physical locations for the connectors are all on the ACU’s rear panel.

AcomConsole Unit

(1)

E1Links

System Console

Voice Voice

System Console

n = 2 to 8

E1Links

(n)

DS3 Loop

P1 P2 P1 P2

Port A Port B Port BPort A

AcomConsole Unit

Acom DS3 Switch (ADS)


Acom ConsoleUnit (ACU)

H/S1H/S2

AUDIO

PC

Tone

s

DATA

COM 1

G703

DS3 Switch

Next ACU

G703Speaker(Left)

Speaker(Right)

OperatorAudioModule

DualE1

Module

Acom Console PC

PCSoundCard

Handset

Hardware Components

78 025-9574E

ACU Main Board Connections

The following illustration shows the ACU rear panel connections.

Table 6: ACU Rear Panel LED Indicators

Main Board COM Ports 1-4

The ACU has three configurable interface ports, COM1, COM2, and COM3. The primary purposes for these three ports is communication with the System Console. Any one of these ports may be used for communicating with the PC of the console position; however, the COM1 port is one most commonly used for that purpose. COM1 is either USB or RJ45.

COM4 is used as a maintenance port. It is used with IMS ACU software or debugging with a dumb terminal.

Electrical Interface (RJ-45)

• RS-232 or RS-485 (software selectable*)• CTS/RTS handshaking signals for RS-232, no handshaking signals for RS-485

Orange LED

Green LED

4 x Tri-color LEDs

6 x Bi-color LEDs

COM Ports 1-4 6 x Digital Outputs

6 x Digital Inputs

LED Indicates When Red When Green When Orange

A Port 0 - Slot 0 DS3 Switch Link

Link Bad Active E1 Link Communications established, link in standby mode

B Port 1 - Slot 0 DS3 Switch Link

Link Bad Active E1 Link Communications established, link in standby mode

C Configuration Bad NVRAM Configuration

Configuration OK Invalid combination of plug-in modules

D Run Indication Flashing = Booting Flashing = Normal Operation

Flashing = Waiting for Console to be created by DS3 Switch

1-6 Activity for the corresponding I/O port

Corresponding output is active

Corresponding input is active

Corresponding input and output are both active

79


• Full duplex operation• Data format (software selectable)• Maximum baud rate of 115.2 Kbps (asynchronous only)• External interface through an RJ-45 connector• Loopback capability for self-test functionality• LED indicates data is being sent and received

* RS-485 termination at the ACU requires jumpers to be set.

Recommended communication settings are 19,200 or 38,400 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no flow control.

Pinout (RJ-45)

Use Zetron cable 709-7615 with these ports. Does not apply to COM1 USB ports.

Table 7: ACU COM Port 1-3 Pinout

Table 8: ACU COM Port 4 Pinout

Note Not all versions of the ACU have activity LEDs on the COM ports.

Pin(s) Function Direction

1 to 3 No connection4 Signal ground Output5 RS232 Mode

RS485 ModeReceive Data

Receive Data -InputInput

6 RS232 ModeRS485 Mode

Transmit DataTransmit Data -

OutputOutput


Clear to SendReceive Data +

InputInput


Request to SendTransmit Data +

OutputOutput

Pin Function Direction

1RS-232 ModeRS-422 Mode

LAN Mode

No ConnectionNo ConnectionTransmit Data + Output

2RS-232 ModeRS-422 Mode

LAN Mode

No ConnectionNo ConnectionTransmit Data - Output

Hardware Components

80 025-9574E

RS-485 Termination

RS-485 requires termination on the first and last device in the RS-485 chain. The jumpers used to enable or disable termination are located inside the ACU chassis next to the power supply.

Figure 15: RS-485 Termination Jumpers

3RS-232 ModeRS-422 ModeLAN Mode

No ConnectionNo ConnectionReceive Data + Input


Signal GroundSignal GroundNo Connection

OutputOutput


Receive DataReceive Data -No Connection

InputInput


Transmit DataTransmit Data -Receive Data -

OutputOutputInput


Clear to SendReceive Data +No Connection

InputInput


Request to SendTransmit Data +No Connection

OutputOutput

Pin Function Direction

X23X24X22X21

X27X28X26X25

X31X32X30X29

X35X36X34X33

3 2 1Jumper Legend

81


If the ACU is the first or last device on the RS-485 chain, you must enable termination for the appropriate COM port as shown in the following table. For all other RS-485 devices and all RS-232 devices, leave the termination off.

Table 9: RS-485 Termination Jumpers

Digital Input Interface

The digital input interface provides a connection point for any miscellaneous input required at the ACU. Six digital inputs are provided. The inputs can be referenced to an internal 5 Vdc supply on each of the six digital inputs (jumper selectable).

Electrical Specifications• Input isolation barrier of at least 1.5 kV between the inputs• Inputs are debounced by firmware (0 and 15 ms)• Input voltage range from 3 to 60 V• Reverse and over-voltage protection• Maximum input current is 10 mA• Minimum input current to trigger the input is 1 mA• Screw terminal type external connector

Table 10: Digital Input Connector Pinout

COM Port JumpersTermination On

(RS-485 first and last device only)

Termination Off(RS-232, other RS-485)

(Default)

1 X21 and X24 Position 2-3 Position 1-22 X25 and X28 Position 2-3 Position 1-23 X29 and X32 Position 2-3 Position 1-24 X33 and X36 Position 2-3 Position 1-2

Pina 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Signal IP1+ IP1- IP2+ IP2- IP3+ IP3- IP4+ IP4- IP5+ IP5- IP6+ IP6-

a. Pin 1 is the leftmost pin on the connector.

Hardware Components

82 025-9574E

Table 11: Digital Input Jumpers

Digital Output Interface

The digital output interface provides a connection point for any miscellaneous outputs required at the ACU. Six digital outputs are provided.

Electrical Specifications• Outputs referenced to internal ground or external reference (jumper selectable)• Inputs isolation barrier of at least 1.5 kV

Jumper Fitted Not Fitted

X8 Enable common reference for Input 1 No common reference for Input 1 (default)X9 Enable common reference for Input 2 No common reference for Input 2 (default)X10 Enable common reference for Input 3 No common reference for Input 3 (default)X11 Enable common reference for Input 4 No common reference for Input 4 (default)X12 Enable common reference for Input 5 No common reference for Input 5 (default)X13 Enable common reference for Input 6 No common reference for Input 6 (default)

Jumper Link Pins 2 and 3(jumper to left)

Link Pins 1 and 2(jumper to right)

X51 Internal 5V reference enabled for Digital Inputs

No internal reference for Digital Inputs (default)

Jumper Link Pins 2 and 3(jumper to top)

Link Pins 1 and 2(jumper to bottom)

X37 12-60V input range for Input 1 3-12V input range for Input 1 (default)X38 12-60V input range for Input 2 3-12V input range for Input 2 (default)X39 12-60V input range for Input 3 3-12V input range for Input 3 (default)X40 12-60V input range for Input 4 3-12V input range for Input 4 (default)X41 12-60V input range for Input 5 3-12V input range for Input 5 (default)X42 12-60V input range for Input 6 3-12V input range for Input 6 (default)

Jumper Fitted Not Fitted

X2 Enable common reference for Output 1 No common reference for Output 1 (default)X3 Enable common reference for Output 2 No common reference for Output 2 (default)X4 Enable common reference for Output 3 No common reference for Output 3 (default)X5 Enable common reference for Output 4 No common reference for Output 4 (default)X6 Enable common reference for Output 5 No common reference for Output 5 (default)X7 Enable common reference for Output 6 No common reference for Output 6 (default)

Jumper Link Pins 2 and 3(jumper to left)

Link Pins 1 and 2(jumper to right)

X50 Internal ground reference enabled for Digital Outputs

No internal reference for Digital Outputs (default)

83


• Maximum voltage drop across the output during an on condition must be less than 2 volts

• Switched voltage must be less than 65 VDC• Reverse and over-voltage protection provided• Maximum output current allowed is 100 mA• Screw terminal type external connector

Table 12: Digital Output Connector Pinout

Table 13: Digital Output Jumpers

DSP Functions

Two Digital Signal Processors are provided on the ACU Main Board. Each DSP can handle multiple audio sources. Functions that can be performed on the audio include the following:

• Receive / Transmit Gain adjustments• u-law / A-law Compression• Side-tone generation• AGC / Level Compression• Voice operated switching (VOX)• Tone Generation (PTT, Ring)

ACU Expansion Slots

The ACU has four expansion slots, slots 0 through 3. These slots accept various plug-in modules, which can vary the capability of the ACU. There are no restrictions on the

Pina 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Signal OP1+ OP1- OP2+ OP2- OP3+ OP3- OP4+ OP4- OP5+ OP5- OP6+ OP6-

a. Pin 1 is the leftmost pin on the connector.

Jumper Description Position 1-2 or IN Position 2-3 or OUT

X50 GND REF Common Enable 1-2= + lead isolated 2-3 = + lead pulled to GND (0 V)X2 OP1 Common Enable IN = isolated OUT = GND on OP+X3 OP1 Common Enable IN = isolated OUT = GND on OP+X4 OP1 Common Enable IN = isolated OUT = GND on OP+X5 OP1 Common Enable IN = isolated OUT = GND on OP+X6 OP1 Common Enable IN = isolated OUT = GND on OP+X7 OP1 Common Enable IN = isolated OUT = GND on OP+

Hardware Components

84 025-9574E

placement of plug-in modules, except that an E1 module must reside in Slot 0. Figure 16 shows an example of a ACU and the plug-in modules positioned for the expansion slots.

Figure 16: Modules Applied to Expansion Slots (example)

Plug-In Modules

The ACU main board allows for the insertion of plug-in interface modules. The following interface modules are available:

• Operators Audio Module• Dual E1 Module (Twisted Pair)• Dual E1 Module (Coax G703/704)• Dual E1 Module (Fiber)• Dual 4W E&M Module• Dual Telephone Module (not used with Acom consoles)• Dual Exchange Module (not used with Acom consoles)• Tetra Interface Module (not used with Acom consoles)

♦ To remove a module:

1. Disconnect the power to the ACU.2. You will need access to the top and back of the ACU. Remove the ACU from the

rack if necessary.3. Remove the screws that secure the top cover.4. Remove the module’s cover plate using a hex-head wrench.5. Remove the screws that secure the module daughter card in the ACU chassis.

Warning! The plug-in modules are NOT hot pluggable.STOP

85


6. Pull the daughter board toward the rear of the unit, then up and over the metal posts.

♦ To install a module:

1. Disconnect the power to the ACU.2. You will need access to the top and back of the ACU. Remove the ACU from the

rack if necessary.3. Remove the screws that secure the top cover.4. Remove an empty cover plate using a hex-head wrench.5. Align the module to the internal connector.6. Push the module in until it is flush with the case.7. Secure the module daughter card in the ACU chassis with screws.8. Secure the module’s cover plate using a hex-head wrench.9. Replace the ACU cover and secure using the screws.

Physical sizes of each expansion board:Width 60 mm (2.4 inch)Depth 130 mm (5.1 inch)Maximum component height 25 mm (1.0 inch)

Operator’s Audio Module

The Operator’s Audio Module (OAM) provides an interface to the consoles audio equipment, such as the headset jackbox, Audio Interface, or audio foot switch. The maximum cable distance from this module to the operator audio equipment is three meters (9.8 feet). This module is CE approved.

The Operators Audio Module provides the following functions:• Two independent stereo headset ports with microphone input• Provision of a single volume control or PTT input• Headset plugged-in detection• Provision for two independent external loudspeakers• Input channel for use with boom microphone, or PC Tone source• Eight status LEDs for port activity• Control port for use with a Zetron audio interface

Operator’s Audio Module RJ45 Jacks

Figure 17 shows the connectors for the Operator Audio Module:

Hardware Components

86 025-9574E

Figure 17: Operators Audio Module Connectors

Table 14 shows the pin-outs for the Operator Audio Module:

Table 14: Operators Audio Module Connectors Pin-outs

Dual E1 Interface Module

The Dual E1 Interface module routes up to 30 E1 voice time slots between ACUs, using two twisted pair cables or four coaxial cables (two E1s). Two cables are required for each loop direction, one for transmit signals and the other for receive signals. Two sets are used to ensure self-healing within a loop configuration.

One E1 Interface Module is required per ACU, regardless of whether it is being used to connect to other switches. This module must be present in slot 0.

The physical distance between ACUs is limited by a maximum of 6 dB signal loss. When RG-179 coax is used, the typical distance limit is 24 meters (78.7 feet). If coax to CAT5 cable baluns are used, the distance can typically be extended to 166 meters (544.3 feet). A suitable balun is the Atota Networks model 460MC. (You can use RG-59 or RG-6 coaxial cable.)

Two E1 (G.703) interfaces are provided:• Bit rate: 2048 kbps• Digital interfaces: 2 x CCITT G703/G704/G732• Connector type: Twisted Pair or SMB

Note Older versions of the Operator’s Audio Module may have jacks with LEDs. The LEDs indicate connectivity and activity for that jack.

PIN No. CNTL HS1 and HS2 Audio

1 GND (Mic) (Mic)2 GND (Mic) (Mic)3 LED Latch Right earpiece Right earpiece4 Shift/Load GND GND5 Serial In Left earpiece Left earpiece6 Serial Out GND GND7 CLK INHIB Volume/PTT +12 volt8 CLK GND +12 volt

87


• Twisted Pair Impedance: 120Ω

• SMB Impedance: 75Ω (unbalanced)• Configurable options for E1 ports

• 30 cable time slots (TS16 used for signaling)• Optional CRC-4 error checking• Master/Slave clocking (slot 0 only)• Loop through capability• Loop back testing• A maximum of four Dual E1 Modules can be fitted into a single ACU• At least one E1 module must reside in slot 0

Dual E1 Interface Module LEDs

Two bicolor LEDs (Red / Green) are provided for each E1 interface.

Cable Types

Table 15: Cable Methods and Estimated Loss

Top LEDGreen Valid E1 SignalRed No E1 Signal

Bottom LEDGreen No AlarmRed Alarm

Cable Type Maximum Distance(6Db loss)

RG-179 coax 24 meters (78.7 feet)Cat5e UTP* 166 meters (544.3 feet)RG59u coax 365 meters (1200 feet)RG6 coax 457 meters (1500 feet)

* Cat5e UTP is also used on the coax module using baluns.

Hardware Components

88 025-9574E

Pinout (UTP Version)

The pinout for the UTP version is identical to the MCU E1 ports.

Dual E1 Fiber Module

The Dual E1 Fiber Module is a trunk line interface card that is primarily used to connect all of the ACUs in an Acom system together. When it is used to connect the ACUs, it can be installed only in Slot 0 of the ACU.

This module provides two E1 (G703) ports. The configurable options for the E1 ports include:

• 30 or 31 allocatable time slots (CAS in TS16)• Optional CRC-4 error checking • Master/Slave clocking (slot 0 only)• Loop back testing Specification

The Dual E1 Module can be used as the interface for a logging recorder for the Acom system. When used in this way, it can be installed in any of slots 1 through 4 of the ACU.

Specifications

Function Pins for Balanced Receive Pair

Pins for Balanced Transmit pair

Port 1 1, 2 4, 5Port 2 1, 2 4, 5

Parameter Single Mode Multi Mode

Data Rate 2048 kbps +/- 50 ppm 2048 kbps +/- 50 ppmDigital Interfaces CCIT G703/G704 CCIT G703/G704

Frame Format Double Frame or CRC Multiframe

Double Frame or CRC Multiframe

Physical Connector MT-RJ MT-RJLine Code NRZ NRZOptical Source 1300 nm laser 1300 nm LEDFiber Diameter 9 μm 62.5 μm / 125 μmTransmit Power -14 to -20 dBm -14 to -19 dBmTransmit Center Wavelength 1261 to 1360 nm 1270 to 1380 nmReceive Sensitivity -31 dBm -31 dBmReceiver Saturation -8 dBm -14 dBmAverage Transmission Distance 15 Km 2 KmOperating Temperature 0 to 50 degrees C 0 to 50 degrees CStorage Temperature -10 to 70 degrees C -10 to 70 degrees C

89


LEDs

There are two LEDs adjacent to each E1 port on the module. They indicate the status of the ports.

Table 16: Dual E1 Fiber Module LED Functions

Dual 4W E&M Module

The Dual 4W E&M module provides an interface to two analog, 4-wire, 600 ohm, E&M circuits, connecting fixed channel radios or 4-wire E&M telephone circuits, loggers or other 600 ohm circuits. Each circuit contains two sets of E&M signals. One set of E&M signals can be used for radio COR/PTT, using appropriate external interface circuitry. The function of the other set is programmable. Provisions exist for using either an internal 12 V, non-isolated reference voltage, or external, isolated reference voltages for the E&M leads of the ACU. The physical connection for each circuit is an 8-conductor, 8-position RJ-45 connector. This module may be present in slots one through three. This module is CE approved.

Each channel provides the following:• A balanced 2-wire 600 ohm transformer isolated audio Input.• A balanced 2-wire 600 ohm transformer isolated audio Output.• Two opto-isolated inputs (E leads).• Two opto-isolated outputs (M leads).• Two voltage reference leads are provided for the E and M leads.• An LED indication for each E&M lead.

Humidity 45% RH at 45 degrees C 45% RH at 45 degrees CMaximum Power Consumption +5V 300mA 300mAMaximum Power Consumption +12V 0mA 0mA

LED Position Description Color Function

Top LED left of Port 1 Port 1 Signal StatusRed Loss of Signal

Green Valid Signal

Bottom LED left of Port 1 Port 1 Alarm StatusRed RRA Alarm active

Green RRA Alarm inactive

Top LED right of Port 2 Port 2 Signal StatusRed Loss of Signal

Green Valid Signal

Bottom LED right of Port 2 Port 2 Alarm StatusRed RRA Alarm active

Green RRA Alarm inactive

Parameter Single Mode Multi Mode

Hardware Components

90 025-9574E

• An RJ-45 connector provides the audio and E&M connections.

Dual 4W E&M Module LEDs

Table 17: E&M Status LED Functions

Note A jumper option is provided to allow internal voltage references (+12V and ground) to be used when external equipment cannot supply the reference voltages.

LEDPosition Description Color Function

Far left of Port 1

E1 and M1 status for Port1 Red M1 activeGreen E1 activeYellow M1 and E1 active

Left of Port1


Right of Port2


Far right of Port2


E1/M1 StatusPort 1

E2/M2 StatusPort 1

E1/M1 StatusPort 2

E2/M2 StatusPort 2

91


E&M Pinouts

Table 18: Dual E&M Module RJ45 Pinouts

Table 19: Dual E&M Module VREF Pinouts

E&M Jumpers

To minimize cabling required to the E and M leads, common referencing is used. Each E lead input has only a single wire on the external connector. The other wire is shared with all the other E leads and is terminated on a separate connector. The reference voltage can also be sourced from an internal voltage. Note that using this internal voltage voids the isolation on the E and M leads. The following tables describe E&M jumper positioning:

Table 20: E&M Lead Referencing Jumpers

Table 21: E Lead Input Range Selection Jumpers

RJ45 Pin Direction Port 1 Signal Port 2 Signal

1 Input E1-1 E1-22 Input E2-1 E2-23 Output TX1A TX2A4 Output TX1B TX2B5 Input RX1A RX2A6 Input RX1B RX2B7 Output M1-1 M1-28 Output M2-1 M2-2

VREF Pin Signal

1 +12 VDC2 Ground

Jumper LINK PINS 2 AND 3(jumper to bottom)

LINK PINS 1 AND 2

(jumper to top)[default setting]

X9 Internal +12V reference enabled for M lead outputs

No internal reference for M lead outputs

X10 Internal GND reference enabled for E lead inputs

No internal reference for E lead inputs

Jumper Fitted Not Fitted [default setting]

X5 5-12V input range for Port1 E1 12-60V input range for Port1 E1X6 5-12V input range for Port1 E2 12-60V input range for Port1 E2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Hardware Components

92 025-9574E

Verify the following jumpers on the 4-Wire E&M Module if using contact closure operation (not required for software or VOX):

• X5=Installed• X6=Installed• X7=Installed• X8=Installed• X9=Shorting pins 1-2 (closest position to RJ45 ports)• X10=Shorting pins 1-2 (closest position to RJ45 ports)

Acom Line Subracks

An Acom Line Subrack (ALS) is an enclosure that houses circuit cards for doing specific functions. The circuit cards control the functionality of the Acom system. Each type of circuit card is specific to a type of function, and by installing different card combinations, gives the system new capability for performing different applications. Also, because the cards are easy to install and combine, system redundancy and robustness are easy to create.

Figure 18: Cabinet Configurations

Installation of the Acom Line Subracks may involve the following activities described in this section:

X7 5-12V input range for Port2 E1 12-60V input range for Port2 E1X8 5-12V input range for Port2 E2 12-60V input range for Port2 E2

Line Subrackand

Circuit Cards

Line Subrackand

Circuit Cards

Line Subrackand

Circuit Cards

Power Supply

Basic Cabinet ConfigurationBasic Redundancy Configuration

Line SubrackMain

Changeover Rack

Line SubrackStandby

Acom DS3 orOptical Switches

Power Supply

Power Supply

SMU

MCU

SMU

EMU

MSU

Example of PopulatedChangeover Rack

TIE

EIE

UIO

CCC

Example of PopulatedChangeover Rack

COVV

COVV

COVV

COVV

COVT

Acom DS3 orOptical Switches

93

Acom Line Subracks

• Adequate and reliable power must be available to the subracks in accordance with isolation and safety requirements described in applicable standards, local statutes, and codes of practice.

• All power connectors must be compatible with subracks.• Proper grounding must be available for the subracks.

ALSs are typically housed in 45 RU cabinets. 1 Rack Unit (RU) equals 1.75 in (4.45 cm). You can combine ALSs that have different card population types to create different functionality. A good example of this is the Changeover Subrack, which is used to create system redundancy.

In a redundancy configuration, if an ALS goes offline for any reason, the Changeover Subrack automatically switches operation to another ALS so that no functionality is lost. The standby ALS becomes the main ALS. (See Figure 18, Basic Redundancy Configuration.)

Subrack Mounting

The subrack is a 6-RU high, 19-inch card frame with dimensions as listed in the Acom Line Subrack specifications. The Acom subrack has side mounting flanges with 7 mm diameter holes spaced as shown in Figure 19. Recommendations for mounting a subrack are as follows:

• A space of one RU minimum should be provided at the top and bottom of the subrack to provide adequate ventilation. The space at the bottom of the subrack also provides space for cable entry to line cards.

• A minimum clearance of 50 mm must be provided at the rear of the subrack for electrical clearance.

• Connection of standard cable assemblies must be in accordance Zetron standards.• Installation of required primary surge protection devices (e.g., gas discharge

arresters) must be in accordance with Zetron standards.

Figure 19: Subrack Mounting Hole Arrangement

190 mm

Hardware Components

94 025-9574E

General Circuit Card Installation

An Acom Line Subrack (ALS) has positions for 13 plug-in cards. The positions are numbered 0 to 12 from left to right across the subrack as shown in Figure 20.

The following lists the circuit cards that are typical to a system installation:

All system cards use DIN41612 style connectors to connect to the subrack backplane. Cards should be inserted carefully to ensure that the card edges are in the guide slots before firmly mating the rear connector with the backplane.

Figure 20: Fully Populated ALS

Card Description

CCC Changeover Control CardCOV-T 3-Way Coaxial Switch

COV-V or COV-R 48/96 Way SwitchDIU1-2 Data Interface Unit, RS-232, 6-channel DIU1-4 Data Interface Unit, RS-422, 6-channel

EIE Exchange Interface UnitEMU 4-Wire E&M Interface Unit

Logger Card Logger CardMCU Main Control UnitMSU Main Supply UnitRGU Ring Generator UnitRIU Radio Interface UnitSMU Signalling Management UnitTIE Telephone Interface UnitUIO Universal Input Unit

95

Acom Line Subracks

Some cards may require setting jumper links and DIP switches prior to installation in the subrack. This information is provided in the installation description for each card. The rules for installing cards at a system level are as follows and listed in Table 22

• An ALS must have an MCU card in slot 0; this card becomes the Primary MCU.• An ALS must have an MSU card in slot 12.• An additional MSU card may be fitted in Slot 11; in this slot the MSU works as a

redundant/backup power supply. When there is no second MSU this slot becomes available to line cards.

• Slot 1 can only be used for MCU, SMU, RGU, or UIO cards.• If fourteen G.703 interfaces are present (i.e., seven MCU duals), all cards must be

installed before power-up. In this configuration the cards are no longer hot pluggable.

Figure 21: Acom ALS Layout

Table 22: Acom Line Subrack Card Installation

Slot Number

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

MCU(Single or Dual)

M

DIU1-2

DIU1-4

EMU

TIE

RGU See RGU Card Placement on page 221.

RIU

RVA

EIE

SMU

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

M

U

S

1210 1110

M

UC

Hardware Components

96 025-9574E

Legend:M - (Mandatory) every subrack must have an MCU (single or dual) in slot 0 and an MSU in slot 12.

- A card of this type may be fitted to this slot if required.- A card of this type must not be fitted to this slot.

Electrical Isolation

The Acom system is designed to connect and operate with other information technology and telecommunications equipment. An important aspect of this requirement is to provide isolation for the interfaces and power connections.

In general, the Acom system circuits connected to external lines or to Telecommunications Network Voltage (TNV) circuits have the facility to be isolated from the backplane supplies. The channels for the EIE, TIE, EMU, and MSU cards are intended for external line connection and can be isolated. The main interfaces of the MCU are designed for G.703 compliance, and the signal lines are isolated with the metallic outer conductors grounded.

The Acom backplane is also designed to provide electrical isolation and is divided into an upper board and a lower board. The upper board carries the Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) circuits such as TTL and CMOS signals between cards. The lower board carries TNV circuits such as the ring voltage, battery voltage. (These may carry hazardous voltages from external transmission lines.)

Table 23: Acom SELV and TNV Circuits

UIO

MSU M

Slot Number

SELV TNV

MCU G.703 Interfaces

MSU G.712 Interface

MSU Input Supply

MSU VBAT and VV Supplies

TIE interfaces

EIE interfaces

EMU connected to SELV source

EMU connected to TNV source 1

EMU using backplane source 1

Ringer Output

97

Acom Line Subracks

Additional isolation considerations are as follows:• Any cables bundled with external TNV cables are themselves considered to be

TNV, even if the lines are local (e.g., to telephones in the same building).• The EMU has the option of being either TNV or SELV, depending on the jumper

settings of channels. If the jumpers are changed so that reference voltage is taken from the front connector, the EMU is isolated from both TNV and SELV and can be used for either application.

• As a special case, if the only TNV connection to the system is through the coaxial G.703 interfaces, the whole subrack is considered SELV. In this case a SELV approved power supply is required. The jumpers on the EMU could then be used to provide battery voltage to the E&M leads from the backplane without violating isolation.

Acom Line Subrack Grounding

Building Earth Conductors

There are two types of earth connections required for an Acom installation: protective earth (PE) and telecom earth (TRC). PE is the normal building earth used to connect mains voltage. TRC is provided for connecting circuits to a ‘clean’ earth and is not intended for safety purposes.

Typically, there should be one connection between PE and TRC in the building (subject to installation requirements and local regulations). The connection point should be as close to the incoming earth point (earth stake or earth grid connection point) as possible.

Acom Earth Connections

The Acom system provides a number of earth connections at the rear of the subrack. The connections provided are shown in Figure 22.

A description for each connection is described in the following table.

Ringer External Input

Upper Backplane

Lower Backplane

External connections to subrack

SELV TNV

Hardware Components

98 025-9574E

Table 24: Acom Earth Connection

Figure 22: Acom Subrack Earth Connections

Connection Description PE TRC SELV TNV

J15: 1 and 2 Subrack chassis connection

J14: 2 and 3 SELV system earth

J18: 1 to 4 SELV electrostatic discharge protection

J20: 1 +VBAT (DC power positive supply)

J17: 2 to 4 TNV electrostatic discharge protection

J13-BATGNDGNDRING

J14

Upper BackplaneJ15

J13

PROTECTIVEEARTH

(PE)

J18

Lower Backplane

J20

J17TNVESDGNDTELECOM

EARTH(TRC)

99

Acom Line Subracks

Signal Cable Connections

Standard Cable Assemblies

The recommended method of signal cable connection is to use standard cable assemblies, which are available in a range of lengths. The assemblies are fitted with ferrite cores when required for compliance to EMC standards. Available types are listed in the Table 25.

Table 25: Acom Cable Assemblies

Tip If the cable assembly description includes a length, that length denotes the standard length of the cable.

The -xxx part of the cable number is optional. If it is present on the cable, the number denotes the length of the finished cable. An additional -M or -F indicates meters or feet.

For example, cable “709-7699-10-F D” indicates a 10 foot long cable, revision D (fourth revision of the cable with this number).

Part Numbers Cable Assembly

408-0045-xxx RJ-21, 25-Pair Plenum cable, 80 feet (24.4m)

709-0059-xxx PC-PC Null Modem Cable

709-0060-xxx Intercabinet Patch Panel

709-0062-xxx Multi-mode fiber, 7 meters (23 feet)

709-0063-xxx Multi-mode fiber, 12 inches (30.5cm)

709-0065-xxx Cat5e, black, 6 feet (1.8m)

709-7345-xxx Straight-through RS-232 9-pin M/F test cable

709-7592-xxx SMU Diagnostic cable

709-7601-xxx COV 12 pair to tail

709-7602-xxx COV 25 pair to tail

709-7604-xxx EIE to COV

709-7605-xxx UIO to COV upper cable, 1 foot (30.5cm)

709-7606-xxx MCU(T1) to COV

709-7611-xxx BNC to SMB

709-7612-xxx SMB to SMB

709-7613-xxx BNC to BNC

709-7615-xxx PC to Acom Console Unit (RS-232 Data)

709-7616-xxx Acom Console Unit to Modem

709-7617-xxx Acom Console Unit to generic speakers (audio cable)

709-7618-xxx Power Supply L5-15P cable

709-7630-xxx EMU to COV

709-7637-xxx Operator position wiring, AFT control cable

709-7638-xxx Operator position wiring, speaker cable

Hardware Components

100 025-9574E

Connection of Cable Shields

Shielding for the G.703 cables must be properly connected during installation to guarantee proper system operation. The metallic bodies of the G.703 SMB connectors used on the 75-ohm version of the MCU may be connected to ground as required by G.703. Jumper links are provided on the MCU card to connect the shields for receive and transmit lines as required.

Surge Suppression and Protection

The TIE, EIE, and EMU cards have surge suppression circuits. To work effectively the subrack must to be grounded in accordance with the preceding section.

The protection provided by the Acom is considered secondary protection only. If the lines connected to the Acom can be exposed to direct or near miss lightning strikes, the surges generated can far exceed the rated capacity of the surge suppression circuits. External protection systems must be installed to ensure that the circuits do not carry the full surge current.

Acom Line Subrack Specifications

Power Connection

The input power to the subrack can be anywhere from –20 to –60 Vdc supply. Power is connected to the subrack in the following ways:

• To the MSU in slot 12, which converts the incoming supply to +5, +12 and –12 volts and regulates the incoming supply for +VBAT and –VBAT voltages. The

709-7639-xxx Operator position wiring, ACU to IRR cable

709-7641-xxx Operator position wiring, TRHI to 3240 cable

709-7887-xxx Acom Console Unit to Zetron speakers (audio cable)

950-0509-xxx Power cable

950-0544-xxx EMU to Krone

950-0545-xxx EIE to Krone

950-0546-xxx UIO to Krone

950-0547-xxx MSU to tail (Krone)

950-0549-xxx CCC to Krone

950-0550-xxx RJ-21 male to Krone

950-0551-xxx RJ-21 female to Krone

Note Warranty claims for card damage as a result of indirect or induced lightning strikes will not be accepted.

Part Numbers Cable Assembly

101

Acom Line Subracks

outputs from the MSU are connected to the backplane that powers other cards in the subrack.

• To an optional MSU in slot 11. When two MSU cards are installed, the output current load is shared between the cards. One card will take up the load if the other card fails or is switched off.

• To signaling circuits on the EMU and MSU. This may be required to isolate signaling circuits from the subrack. Alternately, the signaling circuits may be fed from the backplane supply using jumper links on the card.

For further details on the card specifications and associated interfaces, refer to the specific cards described in this manual.

Absolute Maximum Ratings

Table 26: Absolute Maximum Ratings

Physical Characteristics – 19 in. Subrack

Table 27: Physical Characteristics

Electromagnetic Compatibility

Compliant to FCC Part 15, Class A.

VoIP Acom Line Subrack

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) is used to transmit voice conversations over data networks using Internet Protocol. A typical Acom Line Subrack can be configured to handle VoIP signaling requirements, allowing voice packet processing. The VoIP ALS

Parameter Conditions

Storage Temperature -10 to 70 C (14 to 158oF)Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)Operating Humidity 45% RH (non-condensing) @ 45 C (113 F)

Note Absolute maximum ratings for individual cards and associated interfaces are described in the card sections.

Parameter Typical Units

Overall Width 482 (19”) mmOverall Depth 346 mmOverall Height 265 (6 RU) mmWeight of empty subrack 3.5 Kg

Hardware Components

102 025-9574E

contains three types of cards, MCUs, SMUs, and a single MSU. An example of a VoIP Acom Line Subrack is shown in Figure 23.

Figure 23: VoIP Acom Line Subrack Example

Each VoIP ALS can handle up to ten SMU cards; one control and up to nine voice. One MCU card is used as the main control unit for the entire subrack and is connected to the DS3 Switch by an E1 link. The other MCU is used as the HDLC bridge to the SMU. The main purpose of the HDLC bridge is to transfer HDLC messages to keep the main SMUs and standby SMUs in synchronization. The MSU provides +5 and ±12 Vdc power to all the cards in the subrack.

Each SMU card is equipped with one 10Base-T Ethernet controller for connecting to the Ethernet LAN. Except for the dedicated control SMU, which processes control messages, all the SMU cards in the VoIP rack, process voice packets and are referred to as Voice SMUs. Each voice SMU can handle up to 6 talkpaths of voice traffic (incoming and outgoing calls). There is only one control SMU in the main system and one in the standby system.

When processing voice packets, the SMU card converts PCM data (circuit switch based voice data) into voice packets (packet switch-based voice data) for the outgoing calls, and converts voice packets into PCM data for the incoming calls.

Cloning an Acom ALS

See Cloning an ALS on page 316.

Acom DS3 Switch (ADS) Subrack

The ADS is a combination of a hardware subrack and software components, which together provide connectivity to control and maintain a DS3 data backbone for Acom. The installation of the ADS is nearly identical to that of the Acom Line Subrack (ALS).Power requirements, mounting, environmental requirements, and physical characteristics are similar for the ADS and the ALS. This section will focus on the differences.

VoIP LSR

HdlcbrdgMCU

CntlMCU

Cntl

SMU

Voice

SMU

Voice

SMU

Voice

SMU

Voice

SMU

Voice

SMU

Voice

SMU

Voice

SMU

Voice

SMU

Emptyslot

MSU

103

Acom DS3 Switch (ADS) Subrack

Table 28: Capacity of DS3 switches

Basic ADS Rack

The primary physical difference between the ADS and the ALS is that each ADS has two 6-slot backplanes (called a “split backplane”) whereas each ALS has one 13-slot backplane. A metal divider vertically splits the ADS rack and there are no connections between the two sides of the split backplane. Figure 24 illustrates the basic ADS rack layout and slot numbering.

Figure 24: Basic ADS Rack Layout

Rack Configuration

Due to the split backplane, two ADSs can be installed in an ADS rack.

The typical ADS configuration consists of a DS3 Control Unit (DCU), 1-3 Main Control Units (MCU), and 1-2 Main Supply Units (MSU).

Resource Acom DS3 Switch (ADS)

Time slots available for audio 620Lines 2200*Consoles 128*Utility audio 10*System tones 8*Fixed connections 128*Max # of cross-connects per E1 256

DS3 to E1* The ADS uses the available time slots dynamically. See Time Slots on page 25.

3L 4L 5L 6L 1R 2R 3R

M

U

S

6R4R 5R2L1L

D

UC

D

UC

M

U

SM

UC

M

UC

Hardware Components

104 025-9574E

General Circuit Card Installation

Unlike the ALS, every slot in the ADS is compatible with only one type of card. The Table 29 and Table 30 explain ADS slot compatibility:

Table 29: DS3 Subrack Card Installation

Legend:M - (Mandatory) every subrack must have a DCU in slot 0 and an MSU in slot 6.


* - If there are less than three MCU4 cards, the slots should be populated from the left first (slot 2, then 3), leaving empty slots to the right. (Left to right within each half of the subrack, not across the entire subrack.)

Table 30: MCU Part Numbers and Subrack Compatibility

If using a redundant ADS configuration, each redundant pair of ADSs should be equipped and configured identically with all of same resources so that a switch over is seamless. The split backplane completely separates the left and right ADS, so it is acceptable to configure a left/right ADS pair to be a redundant ADS pair.

All ADS cards use DIN41612 style connectors to connect to the split backplane. Cards should be inserted carefully to ensure that the card edges are in the guide slots before firmly mating the rear connector with the backplane.

Some cards may require setting jumper links and DIP switches prior to installation in the subrack. This information is provided in the installation description for each card.

Slot Number

1L 2L 3L 4L 5L 6L 1R 2R 3R 4R 5R 6R

DCU M M

MCU4*

MSU M M

Caution! Certain older MCU cards will not operate in an ADS subrack. See the following table for MCU compatibility with the ADS subrack.

!

Zetron Part Number Subrack Compatibility

950-0485 ALS only950-0561 ALS only950-0652 ALS only950-0486 ALS only950-0697 ALS/ADS950-0771 ALS/ADS950-0698 ALS/ADS

105

Changeover Subrack

Jumper Settings

Jumpers on the rear of the ADS rack are used to identify each half of the rack as being on the left or the right. IMS ADS uses this information to graphically display an ADS on the correct side. These jumpers are set at the factory.

Figure 25: ADS Jumper Settings

Combine Mode

In an ADS, MCU4 cards have two E1 ports each. The ports are identified as port 1 and port 2. If there are multiple MCU4 cards, each card acts as a separate device with two ports each.

However, if there is an MCU4 card in both slots 2 and 3, then they can act together in combine mode as one device with four E1 ports instead of two devices with two ports each. For more information about combine mode and configuring this mode, see “Configuring ADS Parameters” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.

Changeover Subrack

This section provides the description for using the Changeover subrack to switch radio or telephone resources between redundant line cards. (Also refer to Main Supply Unit (MSU) on page 202.)

Use of a main and standby subrack is supported to maximize Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF). A failure in one rack does not result in a lost resource, because a duplicate resource is available in the standby subrack. If the currently selected ALS

Configure as Left

JP2 JP1

Configure as Right

JP2 JP1

Pos

ition

A

Pos

ition

AP

ositi

on A

Pos

ition

B

ADS Jumper Locations (rear of rack)

Hardware Components

106 025-9574E

triggers an alarm because of a major fault, the other ALS will take control from the Changeover subrack. This happens only if the ALS has no major alarms of its own.

Changeover Hardware

The Acom changeover control system is primarily composed of a Main, Standby, and Changeover subrack. Each rack is equipped with cards to support the hot standby application.

For more information about changeover, see Changeover Control on page 309.

Changeover Subrack

A Changeover Subrack consists of a Changeover Control Card (CCC), a subrack assembly without the lower backplane, and one or more COV-V, COV-R, or COV-T cards. The lower back plane is removed to allow connection of IDF cables to the back of each changeover card. Unlike an Acom Line Subrack, the Changeover Subrack does not require an MCU or MSU card to function.

Table 31: Changeover Subrack Card Installation

Legend:M - (Mandatory) every Changeover Subrack must have a CCC or CCC-E in slot 0.


Changeover Control Card

The CCC card accepts dual –48 volt power, and it does not lose power if one supply fails. Signaling leads from each MSU power supply connects to the CCC DB9 ports on the front edge of the card. The CCC signals the changeover-rack’s COV-V/COV-R voice circuit cards or COV-T coaxial circuit cards to switch between the A and B system. The CCC card has a removal lever at the front of the card.

COV-V Card

A COV-V card switches 24 pairs of copper between an A and B system through a bank of relays. LEDs on the front of the COV-V card indicate the switched state of the card’s

Slot Number

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

CCC M

or

M

CCC-E

COV-V

COV-R

COV-T

107

Changeover Subrack

relays. An LED on the front of the COV-V card indicates if it is receiving power from the CCC card.

If a relay on the COV-V card fails, it will probably fail in either the A or B state. If both subracks are operating, the failure may go unnoticed. Each of the six LEDs on the front of the card reflects the switched state for two of the 12 relays on the COV-V card.

Inputs from the A ALS are connected to the top connector P2 of the COV-V card. Inputs from the B ALS are connected to the bottom connector P3 of the COV-V card. The common outputs of the COV-V card are connected to the back connector P1 and are terminated at an IDF for connection to a resource.

The COV-V card is not equipped with a removal lever at the top of the card.

COV-R Card

The COV-R card is functionally identical to the COV-V card. The primary difference is that the COV-R card uses RJ-21 connectors for A system, B system, and the common connector at the rear. Due to its smaller connectors, the COV-R card has a removal lever on the front of the card.

COV-T Card

A COV-T card switches three sets of coaxial links between an A and B system. This card is typically used to switch E1 or ISDN links from the CO between the A and B rack. It is not used to switch E1 links between subracks and DS3 Switch, nor a Acom Console Unit and DS3 Switch. These connections are already redundant and do not need to pass through a changeover card.

The common pair of coaxial lines connects to the top connector on each of the three connection sets. The first set of connections is on the top front of the COV-T card. The top pair is the common; the second pair is the “A” side, and the third pair is the “B” side. Just below these coaxial connections are the second set with a similar order. The third set of coaxial links is connected to the rear of the COV-T card. Unlike the COV-V and COV-R cards, the common connections on a COV-T are not made through the back; instead there are two common sets of connections on the front of the card, and one on the back.

The COV-T card is not equipped with a removal lever at the top of the card.

Card placement

The CCC card must be located in slot 0 of the changeover cabinet. The COV-V, COV-R, and COV-T cards should be located in slots 1 through 12 of the Changeover Subrack.

Additional Hardware

The common connections secure to the back of the rack and changeover cards using screw terminal connections. Care should be taken to verify the card seats completely into the back cable. Use of spacers may be required to get a secure connection.

Hardware Components

108 025-9574E

Changeover Troubleshooting

• You can force a change over to an ALS by momentarily grounding the SELSYSA or SELSYSB inputs of the CCC card. (Alternatively, you can disconnect the cable from the MSU card and force control to the associated standby rack.)

• Incorrect wiring of the changeover signaling between the CCC and MSU may cause the subracks to switch continuously between the A and B system.

• If the ALS never switches to the other subrack even though a Watchdog failure has been triggered, the subrack may be automatically acknowledging the alarms. Check the mapping for the Alarms Ack’d output alarm.

• If the ALS will not switch to the other subrack, even though it has no alarms, and the watchdog has triggered on the current rack, it may be caused by a problem with the CCC card SYSSEL output being pulled low by an unpowered DS3 Switch alarm I/O. It may also be caused by the Watchdog alarm not being seen at the other subrack; the Watchdog input should normally be active. The OK alarm should normally be inactive.

Additional Changeover Subracks

Figure 26: Additional sub-rack connection

J4J3

J4J3

J4J3

COV-V and COV-T cards



CCC-E

CCC-E

CCC

109

Changeover Subrack

Where more than one subrack is required to house all the COV cards involved in the change over, they are connected to the first subrack by a jumper cable between the two common connectors J3 and J4 as shown in Figure 26.

Hardware Components

110 025-9574E

111

Acom Card Reference

This chapter describes the system circuit cards that are current with the Acom system, including their capabilities, electrical characteristics, installation requirements, pin-outs, and replacement procedures.

• Changeover Control Card (CCC) on page 112• Changeover Card - 3 Way Coax Switch (COV-T) on page 118• Changeover Card - 48/96 Way Switch (COV-V and COV-R) on page 123• DS3 Control Unit (DCU Card) on page 131• Data Interface Unit (DIU1-2) on page 142• Data Interface Unit (DIU1-4) on page 151• Exchange Interface Unit Card (EIE) on page 159• E&M 4-Wire Interface Unit (EMU) on page 168• Main Control Unit (MCU) on page 180• Main Supply Unit (MSU) on page 202• Ring Generator Unit (RGU) on page 215• Radio Interface Unit (RIU) on page 224• Recorded Voice Announcement (RVA) Card on page 235• Signaling Management Unit (SMU) on page 240• Telephone Interface Unit (TIE) on page 252• Universal Input/Output (UIO) on page 260

Note There are system circuit cards that are part of Acom’s “legacy” equipment that are not described in this manual. These include the following cards: DIU3, DIU4, EIE V10, EMU V10, MCU 3I, MCU 3T, MCUG, MCUD, MSU-V0, ODCA-2, ODCA-4, ODS-2, ODS-4, SSR, TIE-V0, TIE-V10, TSR, and VDC. Contact Zetron, Inc. for information and technical support for this equipment.

Acom Card Reference

112 025-9574E

Changeover Control Card (CCC)

P/N 950-0492

The Changeover Control Card (CCC) is mounted in a separate sub-rack than the standard Acom system cards and controls the switching between a primary and standby Acom system. All of the primary Acom switching facilities can be duplicated in adjoining sub-racks.

The card monitors the status of two Acom systems by a connection to the Main Supply Unit (MSU) for the system. In the event that the Primary system fails, the MSU signals the CCC to change from the primary to the standby system. The CCC then drives the changeover performed by the Changeover Card - 48/96 Way Switch (COV-V or COV-R) and Changeover Card - 3 Way Coaxial Switch (COV-T) cards. These cards change the external signal lines before the lines reach any line cards of the Acom switch.

The CCC has the following features:• Initiates changeover of COV cards on command from the primary or standby Acom

system.• Supports voice, data, or 2 Mb/s interfaces using COV cards.

The relationships between the Acom, the CCC, COV, and the standby line cards are shown in Figure 27

Figure 27: Standby Acom Configuration

The CCC is connected to the MSU alarm input and outputs on each Acom system. When one of the Acom systems has gained control, it provides an earth pulse of 20 ms or greater on the appropriate alarm output. This energizes a relay in the CCC and switches the externally supplied relay voltages through to the COV cards. The changeover relay is magnetically latched, and the selected state remains until changed by another alarm output. The currently selected system is fed back to each MSU through the alarm-input lines and is indicated on the CCC LEDs.

The CCC is used to switch between two functionally identical systems. These systems are referred to as the primary system and the standby system. Although there is no difference

Note In many applications the primary system and the standby systems are referred to respectively as System A and System B.

CCC

COVCOV

Acom

Acom

Terminal oroperator

equipment

Terminal oroperator

equipment

113


between these systems from the point of the CCC, when the standby system is connected, all of the relays in the COV cards are energized. Therefore, the default system is the Primary system.

CCC Block Diagram

Figure 28 shows the functional block diagram for a CCC.

Figure 28: CCC Functional Block Diagram

Description of Major Functional Blocks

The CCC is comprised of the following major functional block:

CCC

Select other system

Select other system

Currently selected system

Currently selected system

System APrimaryAcomMSU

System BStandby

Acom MSU

Change overselection

Standby -48V

Primary -48V

Standby0V

Primary0V

To backplane forCOV cards

To backplane forCOV cards

Acom Card Reference

114 025-9574E

Table 32: Description of CCC Functional Block

CCC Interfaces

Front Edge Layout

The front edge layout of the CCC card is illustrated in the Figure 29.

Figure 29: CCC Front Edge Layout

Section Description

Change over selection

A relay and support circuitry enables either of two systems to select its own system for switching use. The logic determines which system is calling for control and signals to the COV cards which direction to switch.

A B

System A has power 2System A is active 3

LED Indicators

1 Yellow Relay power available2 Green System B has power3 Green System B is active

Extractionlever

J1System APrimary systemRelay voltages

J2System BStandby systemRelay voltages

SYSA -48 VSYSA 0 V

COM -48 V

COM 0 V

J4Common voltage andselection Connector toadditional sub-racks

J3commonrelayvoltages

3

21

14

4

2

3

J5Primary (system A)changeover controls

J6Standby (system B)changeover controls

SYSB -48 VSYSB 0 V

3142

SELECTSYSCOM -48 V

3142

115


Physical Layout

No interfaces.

Rear Edge Layout

Standard backplane interface only.

LED Indicators

See Figure 29.

Reset

There is no mechanism for reset.

Settings

There are no jumpers, straps, pots, or switches to be set when installing.

Connector Details

The changeover control ports J5 and J6 are both female DB9 connectors. Pinout details are shown in Table 33

Table 33: Pinout Details for Changeover Control Ports

These pins are located on the connector as shown in Figure 30

Pin J5 Name J6 Name Function Direction

1 SELSYSA SELSYSB Select system A/B Input into the card2 SELSYSB SELSYSA Select system A/B Input into the card3 SELECTSYS SELECTSYS System selected Output from the card4 SYSASEL SYSASEL Primary system

(System A) selectedOutput from the card

5 SYSBSEL SYSBSEL Standby system (System B) selected

Output from the card

6 No connection7 No connection8 No connection9 No connection

Acom Card Reference

116 025-9574E

Figure 30: Pin Numbering on DB-9

CCC Installation

Card placement

The CCC card must be placed in slot 0 of a changeover subrack that is either empty or contains only COV cards (COV-V, COV-R, or COV-T). A changeover subrack is similar to an Acom Line Subrack, but fitted with an upper backplane only.

Proper connection between the MSU and the CCC requires that specific hardware be correctly installed. Once this is accomplished, the IMS configuration portion will work properly. The following list describes the information necessary to properly install the hardware:

• Pinout/Cabling for Control Ports (Table 33)• Connections to MSU• Connection cable• MSU to CCC interconnections

6789

12345

Caution! The subrack containing the CCC card must not contain any standard Acom cards (such as the MCU, MSU, RGU, or TIE), because the backplane is used for relay voltages and may damage the standard cards.

Note Also see Table 131 DIP Switch Functions, page 207 for additional MSU information.

!

117


Connections to MSU

When fitted to an Acom sub-rack, the CCC changeover control ports are wired to the alarm lines on each MSU 64-pin connector (P4) according to the following:

Connections to ADS

See the pinout information for the DS3 Control Unit (DCU Card) on page 131.

CCC Technical Specifications


Table 35: Environmental Specifications

Signal Name Function MSU Alarm Connection (example only) System

SELSYSA Select system A/B AO 11 ASELSYSB Select system A/B AO 11 BSELECTSYS System selected Not used —SYSASEL System A selected AI 11 ASYSBSEL System B selected AI 11 B

Note The MSU must have its J1-J6 and J10-J12 jumpers set to take reference voltage from the backplane (pins 2, 3 shorted) when used with a CCC.

Signal Name Function Connection System

SYSXSEL System A selected MSU ASYSXSEL System A selected Master E1 input of ADS ASYSXSEL System B selected MSU BSYSXSEL System B selected Master E1 input of ADS B

Parameter Specification

Input voltage range (-48 Volt only) -48 VDC +/- 20%Maximum power consumption +5 V

+12 V-12 V-48 V < 50 mA (average)

Minimum pulse width 20 ms


Operational Temperature 0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)Storage Temperature -10 to 70 C (14 to 158 F)

Acom Card Reference

118 025-9574E

Table 36: Physical Specifications



Changeover Card - 3 Way Coax Switch (COV-T)

P/N 950-0489

The COV-T card operates under the control of the CCC to simultaneously switch six external coaxial lines between the primary and standby Acom systems.

The COV-T has the following features:• Six coaxial lines (3 x full duplex 2 Mbps links) switched.• Visual indication if standby system is in circuit.• Low power consumption in idle state.• Multiple relays reduce single point failure.

When energized from the CCC through the backplane, the change over relays switch the coaxial signal lines. The relays are grouped into banks, and an LED indicates the operation for each relay bank.

COV-T Block Diagram

Figure 31 shows the functional block diagram for a COV-T.


Height 233 mmWidth 220 mmWeight 231 g

119


Figure 31: COV-T Functional Block Diagram


The COV-T is comprised of the following major functional block:

Table 37: COV-T Functional Block

COV-T Interfaces

Front Edge Layout

The front edge layout of the COV-T is shown in Figure 32.

COV-T

P10/B

P12/B

P12/A

P11/A

P11/B

P10/APrimary conections

Standby conections

P20/A

P20/B

P30/A

P30/B

Relay control from theCCC via the backplane

Externalequipment

P22/B

P22/A

P21/A

P21/B

P32/B

P32/A

P31/A

P31/B

Section Description

Relay switch A two input / four output coaxial switching relay

Acom Card Reference

120 025-9574E

Figure 32: COV-T Front Edge Layout

Physical Layout

No interfaces.

Rear Edge Layout

The rear edge layout of the COV-T is shown in Figure 33.

Extractionlever

LED Indicators

Primary (System A) activeStandby (System B) active

Group 1 activeGroup 2 activeGroup 3 active

GreenYellowGreenGreenGreen

P10/A

G.703 2MbpsGroup 1

Standby (System B)(SMB Connectors)

G.703 2MbpsGroup 1

Primary (System A)(SMB Connectors)

G.703 2MbpsGroup 1

External equipment(SMB Connectors) P10/B

P11/A

P11/B

P12/A

P12/B

P20/A

P20/B

P21/A

P21/B

P22/A

P22/B

G.703 2MbpsGroup 2


G.703 2MbpsGroup 2


G.703 2MbpsGroup 2

External equipment(SMB Connectors)

121


Figure 33: COV-T Rear Edge Layout

LED Indicators

The following LED indicators are provided on the front of the card (see Figure 32).

Table 38: COV-T LED Indications

Switches

There are no switches on the front of the COV-T.

Settings

There are no card jumpers, straps, or switches to be set when installing.

P30/A

P30/B

P31/A

P31/B

P32/A

P32/B

G.703 2MbpsGroup 3


G.703 2MbpsGroup 3


G.703 2MbpsGroup 3

External equipment(SMB Connectors)

C A1

P1 Backplane connections

32

LED Color Function Operation

SYS:A Green Primary system On if the Primary Acom system is connectedSYS:B Yellow Standby system On if the Standby Acom system is connectedLD1 Green Relay active indication On if coaxial pair in group 1 are switched to StandbyLD2 Green Relay active indication On if coaxial pair in group 2 are switched to StandbyLD3 Green Relay active indication On if coaxial pair in group 3 are switched to Standby

Acom Card Reference

122 025-9574E

Connector Detail

Standard backplane and SMB interfaces only.

COV-T Installation

Card Placement

The COV-T card may be placed in slots 1 - 12 of a changeover subrack that contains a CCC card in slot 0. The subrack may only contain the CCC card and other COV cards. Changeover subracks are fitted with an upper backplane only.

COV-T Alarm Generation

None.

COV-T Technical Specifications

Table 39: General

Table 40: Power Supply

Table 41: Environmental


Number of circuits available to change 6 coaxial lines (3 pairs)Relay change over time 10ms


Power ConsumptionPrimary System Connected

+5 V+12 V-48 V 10 mA

Power ConsumptionAlternate System Connected

+5 V+12 V-48 V 125 mA



123

Changeover Card - 48/96 Way Switch (COV-V and COV-R)

Table 42: Physical




P/N COV-V 950-0488P/N COV-R 950-0837

The COV-V and COV-R cards operate under the control of the CCC to simultaneously switch 48 external signal lines (24 pairs) between a primary and standby Acom system.

The COV-V and COV-R have the following features:• 48 signal lines switched (24 signal pairs). These may be used for switching standard

VF, data, or contact closures.• Visual indication if standby system is in circuit.• Low power consumption in idle state.• Multiple relays reduce single point failure.

Energized from the CCC through the backplane, the changeover relays switch the 2 x 2 wire signal lines. The relays are grouped into banks, and each bank of energized relays is indicated by an LED. To switch back to the original system, the relays are de-energized.

COV-V and COV-R Block Diagram

Figure 34 shows the functional block diagram for a COV-V or COV-R.



Acom Card Reference

124 025-9574E

Figure 34: COV-V and COV-R Functional Block Diagram


The COV-V / COV-R is comprised of the following major functional block:

Table 43: Description of COV-V / COV-R Functional Block

To externalequipment or

operatorequipment

COV-V / COV-R

CCT5-1 to CCT5-4

CCT4-5 to CCT 4-8

CCT4-1 to CCT 4-4

CCT3-5 to CCT 3-8

CCT3-1 to CCT 3-4

CCT2-5 to CCT 2-8

CCT2-1 to CCT 2-4

CCT1-5 to CCT 1-8

CCT 1-4

CCT 1-3

CCT 1-2

CCT 1-1

CCT5-5 to CCT5-8

CCT6-1 to CCT6-4

CCT6-5 to CCT6-8

Primary connections

Secondary connections

P2 (COV-V)J1 (COV-R)P4 (COV-V)

P2 (COV-R)

Relay control from CCC through backplane

To primaryAcom system

To standbyAcom system

P3 (COV-V)J2 (COV-R)

Section Description

Relay switch A four input eight output switching relay.

125


COV-V and COV-R Interfaces

Front Edge Layout

Figure 35 shows the COV-R and COV-V front edge layout.

Figure 35: COV-R and COV-V Front Edge Layout

Physical Layout

No interfaces.

Rear Edge Layout

Figure 36 shows the COV-R and COV-V rear edge layout.

COV-R

B1 (green) Relay 2 activeB2 (green) Relay 4 activeB3 (green) Relay 6 activeB4 (yellow) Standby system active

Relay 1 active (green) A1Relay 3 active (green) A2Relay 5 active (green) A3

Primary system active (green) A4

LED IndicatorsLED Indicators

25

1

50

26

25

1

50

26

Normally closedbi-directional PrimaryCircuit 1-1 to 6-8

Normally openbi-directional StandbyCircuit 1-1 to 6-8

32

1

A CCOV-V

COV-V and COV-R arefunctionally equivalent.Only the connectors andpinout are different.

32

1

A C

P2

P3

J2

J1

Acom Card Reference

126 025-9574E

Figure 36: COV-R and COV-V Rear Edge Layout

LED Indicators

The following LED indicators are provided on the front of the card (see Figure 35).

Table 44: LED Indicators

COV-R

Bi-directional PrimaryCircuit 1-1 to 6-8

32

1C A

COV-V

COV-V and COV-R arefunctionally equivalent.Only the connectors andpinout are different.

32

1

C A

P1

P4

25

1

50

26

P2

Backplane Connections

32

1C A

P1

LED Color Function Operation

A1 Green Relay active indication On if circuit 1-1 to 1-8 are switched to standbyB1 Green Relay active indication On if circuit 2-1 to 2-8 are switched to standbyA2 Green Relay active indication On if circuit 3-1 to 3-8 are switched to standbyB2 Green Relay active indication On if circuit 4-1 to 4-8 are switched to standbyA3 Green Relay active indication On if circuit 5-1 to 5-8 are switched to standbyB3 Green Relay active indication On if circuit 6-1 to 6-8 are switched to standbyA4 Green Primary system On if the primary Acom system is connectedB4 Yellow Standby system On if the standby Acom system is connected

127


Settings

When installing a COV-V / COV-R card there are no settings, jumpers, pots, straps, or switches to be set.

COV-V Connector Detail

(For COV-R card pinout, see Table 46 on page 129.)

Table 45 shows the pinout cable connections for P4, P2 and P3 on the COV-V card. Cabling is done so that the cable terminating into connector P4 can be plugged directly into either of the cables terminating into P2 or P3, removing the COV-V card from the circuit. Mounting P4 upside down relative to either P2 or P3 means that pin 1a of P4 will connect to pin 32a of P2 or P3 if the two cables were connected directly.

Acom Card Reference

128 025-9574E

Table 45: COV-V Voice and Data Signals, P4, P2 and P3

CO

V-V

Cha

ngeo

ver C

ard

for V

oice

and

Dat

a Si

gnal

sC

OV-

V C

hang

eove

r Car

d fo

r Voi

ce a

nd D

ata

Sign

als

Pin

Allo

catio

n –

P4Pi

n A

lloca

tion

– P2

and

P3

Cct

Cor

eFu

ncPi

nP4

Pin

Func

Cor

eC

ctC

ore

Func

Pin

P2 a

nd P

3Pi

nFu

ncC

ore

Cct

32b

1c1a

32a

32a

32a

32c

32b

31b

6-8

2c2a

6-7

31a

31a

6-7

31a

31c

6-8

31b

30b

3c3a

6-6

30a

30a

6-6

30a

30c

30b

CC

T629

b4c

4a6-

529

aC

CT

629

a6-

529

a29

c29

bC

CT6

28b

6-4

5c5a

6-3

28a

28a

6-3

28a

28c

6-4

28b

27b

6-2

6c6a

6-1

27a

27a

6-1

27a

27c

6-2

27b

26b

7c7a

26a

26a

26a

26c

26b

25b

5-8

8c8a

5-7

25a

25a

5-7

25a

25c

5-8

25b

24b

9c9a

5-6

24a

24a

5-6

24a

24c

24b

CC

T 5

23b

10c

10a

5-5

23a

CC

T 5

23a

5-5

23a

23c

23b

CC

T 5

22b

5-4

11c

11a

5-3

22a

22a

5-3

22a

22c

5-4

22b

21b

5-2

12c

12a

5-1

21a

21a

5-1

21a

21c

5-2

21b

20b

4-8

13c

13a

4-7

20a

20a

4-7

20a

20c

4-8

20b

19b

14c

14a

4-6

19a

19a

4-6

19a

19c

19b

CC

T 4

18b

15c

15a

4-5

18a

CC

T 4

18a

4-5

18a

18c

18b

CC

T 4

17b

4-4

16c

16a

4-3

17a

17a

4-3

17a

17c

4-4

17b

16b

4-2

17c

17a

4-1

16a

16a

4-1

16a

16c

4-2

16b

15b

3-8

18c

18a

3-7

15a

15a

3-7

15a

15c

3-8

15b

14b

19c

19a

3-6

14a

14a

3-6

14a

14c

14b

CC

T 3

13b

20c

20a

3-5

13a

CC

T 3

13a

3-5

13a

13c

13b

CC

T 3

12b

3-4

21c

21a

3-3

12a

12a

3-3

12a

12c

3-4

12b

11b

3-2

22c

22a

3-1

11a

11a

3-1

11a

11c

3-2

11b

10b

2-8

23c

23a

2-7

10a

10a

2-7

10a

10c

2-8

10b

9b24

c24

a2-

69a

9a2-

69a

9c9b

CC

T28b

25c

25a

2-5

8aC

CT

28a

2-5

8a8c

8bC

CT2

7b2-

426

c26

a2-

37a

7a2-

37a

7c2-

47b

6b2-

227

c27

a2-

16a

6a2-

16a

6c2-

26b

5b1-

828

c28

a1-

75a

5a1-

75a

5c1-

85b

4b29

c29

a1-

64a

4a1-

64a

4c4b

CC

T 1

3b30

c30

a1-

53a

CC

T 1

3a1-

53a

3c3b

CC

T 1

2b1-

431

c31

a1-

32a

2a1-

32a

2c1-

42b

1b1-

232

c32

a1-

11a

1a1-

11a

1c1-

21b

129


COV-R Connector Detail

(For COV-V card pinout, see Table 45 on page 128.)

Table 46 shows the pinout cable connections for P2, J1, and J2 on the COV-R card. Cabling is done so that the cable terminating into connector P2 can be plugged directly into either of the cables terminating into J1 or J2, removing the COV-R card from the circuit.

Table 46: COV-R Voice and Data Signals, P2, J1, and J2

Connector P2(Common)

Connector J1(Normally Closed)

Connector J2(Normally Open)

Pin Relay Signal Name Pin Relay Signal

Name Pin Relay Signal Name

26 RLY1-COM1 26 RLY1-NC1 26 RLY1-NO127 RLY1-COM3 27 RLY1-NC3 27 RLY1-NO328 RLY2-COM1 28 RLY2-NC1 28 RLY2-NO129 RLY2-COM3 29 RLY2-NC3 29 RLY2-NO330 RLY3-COM1 30 RLY3-NC1 30 RLY3-NO131 RLY3-COM3 31 RLY3-NC3 31 RLY3-NO332 RLY4-COM1 32 RLY4-NC1 32 RLY4-NO133 RLY4-COM3 33 RLY4-NC3 33 RLY4-NO334 RLY5-COM1 34 RLY5-NC1 34 RLY5-NO135 RLY5-COM3 35 RLY5-NC3 35 RLY5-NO336 RLY6-COM1 36 RLY6-NC1 36 RLY6-NO138 RLY6-COM3 38 RLY6-NC3 38 RLY6-NO338 RLY7-COM1 38 RLY7-NC1 38 RLY7-NO139 RLY7-COM3 39 RLY7-NC3 39 RLY7-NO340 RLY8-COM1 40 RLY8-NC1 40 RLY8-NO141 RLY8-COM3 41 RLY8-NC3 41 RLY8-NO342 RLY9-COM1 42 RLY9-NC1 42 RLY9-NO143 RLY9-COM3 43 RLY9-NC3 43 RLY9-NO344 RLY10-COM1 44 RLY10-NC1 44 RLY10-NO145 RLY10-COM3 45 RLY10-NC3 45 RLY10-NO346 RLY11-COM1 46 RLY11-NC1 46 RLY11-NO147 RLY11-COM3 47 RLY11-NC3 47 RLY11-NO348 RLY12-COM1 48 RLY12-NC1 48 RLY12-NO149 RLY12-COM3 49 RLY12-NC3 49 RLY12-NO3

Acom Card Reference

130 025-9574E

COV-V / COV-R Installation

Card Placement

The COV-V and COV-R cards may be placed in slots 1 through 12 of a changeover subrack that contains a CCC card in slot 0. The subrack may only contain the CCC card and other COV cards. Changeover subracks are fitted with an upper backplane only.

COV-V / COV-R Alarm Generation

None.

1 RLY1-COM2 1 RLY1-NC2 1 RLY1-NO22 RLY1-COM4 2 RLY1-NC4 2 RLY1-NO43 RLY2-COM2 3 RLY2-NC2 3 RLY2-NO24 RLY2-COM4 4 RLY2-NC4 4 RLY2-NO45 RLY3-COM2 5 RLY3-NC2 5 RLY3-NO26 RLY3-COM4 6 RLY3-NC4 6 RLY3-NO47 RLY4-COM2 7 RLY4-NC2 7 RLY4-NO28 RLY4-COM4 8 RLY4-NC4 8 RLY4-NO49 RLY5-COM2 9 RLY5-NC2 9 RLY5-NO2

10 RLY5-COM4 10 RLY5-NC4 10 RLY5-NO411 RLY6-COM2 11 RLY6-NC2 11 RLY6-NO212 RLY6-COM4 12 RLY6-NC4 12 RLY6-NO413 RLY7-COM2 13 RLY7-NC2 13 RLY7-NO214 RLY7-COM4 14 RLY7-NC4 14 RLY7-NO415 RLY8-COM2 15 RLY8-NC2 15 RLY8-NO216 RLY8-COM4 16 RLY8-NC4 16 RLY8-NO417 RLY9-COM2 17 RLY9-NC2 17 RLY9-NO218 RLY9-COM4 18 RLY9-NC4 18 RLY9-NO419 RLY10-COM2 19 RLY10-NC2 19 RLY10-NO220 RLY10-COM4 20 RLY10-NC4 20 RLY10-NO421 RLY11-COM2 21 RLY11-NC2 21 RLY11-NO222 RLY11-COM4 22 RLY11-NC4 22 RLY11-NO423 RLY12-COM2 23 RLY12-NC2 23 RLY12-NO224 RLY12-COM4 24 RLY12-NC4 24 RLY12-NO4

Connector P2(Common)

Connector J1(Normally Closed)

Connector J2(Normally Open)

Pin Relay Signal Name Pin Relay Signal

Name Pin Relay Signal Name

131

DS3 Control Unit (DCU Card)

COV-V / COV-R Technical Specifications

Table 47: General



Table 50: Physical




P/N 950-0692

The DCU card performs audio and data switching for two DS3 (T3) links, holds the configuration for the ADS subrack, controls all ADS rack messaging, provides an interface for ADS redundancy, and provides Real Time Clock (RTC) data.


Number of circuits available to change 48 lines


Power ConsumptionPrimary System Connected

+5 V+12 V-48 V 10 mA

Power ConsumptionAlternate System Connected

+5 V+12 V-48 V 250 mA





Acom Card Reference

132 025-9574E

Real Time Clock (RTC)

The RTC is used to facilitate the Acom RTC system. This is an advanced configurable system that has support for DST, GMT offsets, NTP sources, multi-site redundant RTC sources, and multi-site operation over different time zones. For more information about the Acom RTC system, see the IMS ADS chapter in Acom Software Configuration (P/N 025-9529).

DCU Block Diagram

Figure 37 shows the functional block diagram for an Acom DCU card.

Figure 37: DCU Card Functional Block Diagram

DS3 Link 1Line InterfaceUnit + Framer

+DS3 <-> E1

mux

DS3 Link 2Line InterfaceUnit + Framer

+DS3 <-> E1

mux

75Ω BNCconnectors &

isolationtransformer

75Ω BNCconnectors &


CPU

42 x E1Framers

Cross PointSwitch

44.736MhzReference

clock

Flash + RAM+ Config

Prom + GlueLogic

Serial Port +LAN/Serial

Port

DS3

DS3

21 x E1

21 x E1

2xE1

21 x E1

21 x E1

BackplaneInterface

HDLC Bus

14 x E1

Clock Control

Status LEDs

Digital I/O

Serial ComsControllers

SerialComs

controller

SerialComs

controller

75Ω SMBconnector &


2M ClockInput

FPGAReal-Time

Clock

LAN Transceiver

2xE1

2xE1

HDLC

133


DCU Interfaces

Front Edge Layout

Figure 38: DCU Front Edge Layout

J2

J1

J3

J4

J5

J6

J7

J8

LED Indicators

SW1 - Reset

RX1

TX1

RX2

TX2

Serial Port 1 2

Acom Card Reference

134 025-9574E

Physical Layout

Figure 39: DCU Connectors, Switches, and Jumpers

Rear Edge Layout


LED Indicators

The DCU card status indicators show operational state, link states, wrap states, and status. They also identify the cycle master. The LEDs in Figure 40 are located at the top edge of the card. This LED indicator layout is for DCU firmware revisions 2.01 or later.

SW1

J9

JP9 JP10

JP11 JP12

RX1

TX1

RX2

TX2

JP7

JP3

J3

J4

J5

J6

J1

J2

J7

J8

LED Indicators

JP4

JP6

JP8

JP2

JP1

JP5

P2

P1

135


Figure 40: DCU Status Indicators Layout and Functions

Cycle Master - When power is first applied to ADS racks, a bidding cycle occurs among the DS3 cards to determine which card should be in control of the DS3 ring. The card in charge is the “Cycle Master”.

Link State - Link state indicates the status of a physical DS3 link.

Wrap State (Wrapped) - One of the DS3 links is not usable, so a loopback is being applied internally. All messages/voice to be sent on this port are being sent past the break point using the spare DS3 link. The technician should troubleshoot the unusable link.

Reset

The reset button performs a reset for the entire ADS. Resetting one ADS does not also reset the ADS in the other half of the rack.

If the DCU firmware was updated prior to the soft reset, the DCU card will reboot using the new firmware.

Settings

Jumpers

Jumpers JP1, JP5, and JP6 are used for production purposes only. The remaining jumpers are user-configurable. The following table describes jumper settings for configurable jumpers:

Cycle MasterBlinking Green - This card is cycle master.Off - This card is not cycle master.

Port 2 DS3 Link StateSolid Green - No errorsSolid Red - Loss of signalSolid Yellow - Loss of frame

Port 2 Wrap StateSolid Green - Not wrappedSolid Red - Wrapped

Information Alarm LEDProgrammable alarm

Card Operational StateBlinking Green - Running

Solid Red - In reset

Port 1 DS3 Link StateSolid Green - No errors

Solid Red - Loss of signalSolid Yellow - Loss of frame

Port 1 Wrap StateSolid Green - Not wrapped

Solid Red - Wrapped

Status of ADSSolid Red - Configuration alarm

Acom Card Reference

136 025-9574E

Table 51: DCU Card Jumper Settings

Connector Detail

Connector J1 - Ethernet LAN Port

Connector J2 - External Clock Port

Jumper Position A (Pins 1-2) Position B (Pins 2-3)

JP2 Run card self-test during bootup. (Default)

Bypass card self-test during bootup.

JP4 Execute full version of code at startup. (Default)

Execute failsafe version of code at startup.

JP9 No resistive termination on serial port 1 receive pair. (Default)

120 ohm termination placed across serial port 1 receive pair.

JP10 No resistive termination on serial port 1 transmit pair. (Default)

120 ohm termination placed across serial port 1 transmit pair.

JP11 No resistive termination on serial port 2 transmit pair. (Default)

120 ohm termination placed across serial port 2 transmit pair.

JP12 No resistive termination on serial port 2 receive pair. (Default)

120 ohm termination placed across serial port 2 receive pair.

Jumper Installed (Pins 1-2) Not Installed

JP3 Grounds the shield of the DS3 receive port J3.

Leaves the shield of the DS3 receive port J3 not grounded. (Default)

JP7 Grounds the shield of the DS3 receive port J5.

Leaves the shield of the DS3 receive port J5 not grounded. (Default)

JP8 Allow the bootloader and failsafe codes to be overwritten.

Bootloader and failsafe code are write-protected. (Default)

Note The external serial clock, if implemented, is connected to serial port 2 (J8).

Pin 1: TX+Pin 2: TX-Pin 3: RX+

Pin 6: RX-

Outer conductor: Ground for clock input signal

Center: 2Mbps clock input signal

137


Connectors J3, J4, J5, J6

Connector J7 - Changeover Control Port

The changeover control port, a micro-DB25 port, requires a custom cable from Zetron (P/N 709-7750-xxx).

Table 52: DCU Changeover Control Cable 709-7750-xxx

Connector Purpose

J3 DS3 port A receiveJ4 DS3 port A transmitJ5 DS3 port B receiveJ6 DS3 port B transmit

Pair Signal Wire Color

1A IN 0 BROWN1B IN 1 RED/WHITE2A IN 2 RED2B IN 3 ORANGE/WHITE3A IN 4 ORANGE3B IN 5 GREEN/WHITE4A IN 6 YELLOW4B IN 7 BLUE/WHITE5A (-)VV BLACK5B NC NC6A OUT 0 ORANGE/BLACK6B OUT 1 GREY7A OUT 2 YELLOW/BLACK7B OUT 3 WHITE

Ground

DS3 Signal

Acom Card Reference

138 025-9574E

Connector J8 - Serial Ports

The serial ports are 38400 baud, RS-232 ports with an RJ45 interface. Use an RJ45-to-DB9 cable to connect the DCU with an IMS console computer.

Serial port 1 is used for connecting from the IMS PC to the ADS, using IMS ADS. Port 2 is used for external serial clock, factory configuration, firmware updates, and testing.

DCU Installation

Removal of the DCU will render the ADS inoperable. Turn off power to the MSU card(s) prior to removing or installing a DCU.

The DCU may be fitted in slot 1L or 1R only. (The left-most slot of either section of a split backplane.)

♦ To install a DCU card:

1. If an MSU is already present, turn it off.2. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap connected to the rack.3. Remove the new card from the ESD bag.4. Configure jumpers if needed. (The jumpers should already be configured from the

factory.) See Table 51 for jumper settings.5. Align the card with the card guides at the top, then bottom of the slot and slide the

card into the subrack.6. Press the card into the rear connector using both hands on the front of the card.7. Connect cables to the front of the card. Some connections are optional, but you will

typically need to connect LAN (J1), ADS loop TX and RX (J3-J6), Changeover (J7), and serial port 1 on J8 (the left serial port). (TX/RX might not be attached when used for ISB implementation.)

8A OUT 4 GREEN/BLACK8B OUT 5 PINK9A OUT 6 GREY/BLACK9B OUT 7 LIGHT GREEN10A GND PINK/BLACK10B NC NC

Pair Signal Wire Color

Pin 1

Pin 1

Serial Port 1(IMS ADS)

Serial Port 2(debug port)

139


8. Turn on the MSU and verify LED activity.

DCU Technical Specifications

Table 53: Power Consumption


Table 55: Physical

DS3 Interface

Physical Connector: BNC socketSuitable Cable: Coax 734 or 735Line Impedance: 75 ohms (Unbalanced)Line Code: B3ZS3Pulse shape: Complies with G.703

Multiplexing principles:DS3 <-> 7xDS2: Complies with G.752DS2 <-> 3xE1: Complies with G.747

DS3 format: C-Bit parityNumber of Channels: 2

Parameter Typical Max. Units

+5 Volt Power Consumption 1000 1100 mA-12 Volt Power Consumption 100 100 mA

Parameter Min Max.

Storage Temperature -10oC (14 F) 60oC (140 F)Operating Temperature 0oC (32 F) 50oC (122 F)Operating Humidity 45% relative humidity at 45 oC

Parameter Typical

Overall Length (top to bottom) 232mmOverall Depth (front to back) 220mmOverall Height 30mmWeight 400 grams

Acom Card Reference

140 025-9574E

Table 56: DS3 Interface Specifications

LAN Interface

Physical Connector: RJ45 socketSuitable Cable: Cat-5 twisted pairData Format: 10Base-T or 100Base-T

Table 57: LAN Interface Specifications

External Clock Interface

Physical Connector: Coaxial SMBSuitable Cable: RG179Line Impedance: 75 ohms (Unbalanced)Line Code: NRZ

Table 58: External Clock Interface Specifications

Changeover Control Port Interface

Physical Connector: Micro DB25 socketPhysical Interface: OptocouplerNumber of Channels: 8 input/8 output

Parameter Conditions Min. Typical Max. Units

Bit Rate 44.735105 44.736 44.736895 MbpsOutput Pulse amplitude 700 800 900 mVpkUnframed all-ones power level At 33.368Mhz -1.8 +5.7 dBmIntrinsic Jitter generation 0.02 0.05 UIp-pInput Pulse Amplitude 1000 mVpkInput Loss of signal level Relative to 0.8Vpk -23 dBMaximum Cable length Using 735 cable 68 m

Using 734 cable 135 m

Parameter Min. Typical Max. Units

Peak Differential Output Voltage 2.2 2.5 2.8 VReceive Input impedance 22 K ohmDifferential Squelch Threshold 300 420 585 mV


Clock In Port Frequency 2.047345 2.048 2.048655 MbpsClock Signal Peak Voltage 750 1000 1500 mVpkClock Signal Nominal Pulse Width 244 ns

141


Table 59: Changeover Control Port Interface

Serial Interfaces

Physical Connector: RJ45Physical Interface: Selectable between RS232 and RS422/RS485IMS Port (left) baud rate: Selectable between 19200 and 38400Debug Port (right) baud rate: 38400Line Settings 8 data bits, No Parity, 1 stop bitNumber of Channels: 2

Table 60: Serial Interfaces


Input voltage required for active condition - 18 VdcInput voltage required for inactive condition 12 - VdcMaximum Input voltage - 60 VdcOutput impedance in active condition - 15 ohmsOutput impedance in inactive condition 500 - MohmsMaximum switched current - 140 mAMaximum switched Voltage - 200 Vdc or

VacIsolation 1.5 kV


RS232 modeOutput positive voltage swing Rl=3kΩ 5 6.5 VOutput negative voltage swing Rl=3kΩ -5 -6.5 VOutput short circuit current - - +/-60 mAInput threshold –input low - 0.8 - VInput threshold –input high - - 2.4 VReceiver input resistance - 3 5 7 kΩ

RS422/485 modeOutput voltage Unloaded 6 VOutput voltage Rl=50kΩ 2 6 VOutput short circuit current - - 250 mADifferential input threshold - -0.2 - 0.2 VReceiver input resistance - 12 23 kΩ

Acom Card Reference

142 025-9574E

Data Interface Unit (DIU1-2)

The DIU1-2 (P/N 950-0517) has six channels that allow RS-232/V.24 devices to be connected to the card. These DIU1-2 channels may be connected to time slots or to other data channels in the communications system. In a typical application, the DIU1-2 cards would be used to connect two RS-232/V.24 devices at either end of a link. The DIU1-2 card has the following features:

• Six channels, each providing an RS-232/V.24 interface to external data equipment.• Channels may be set for either asynchronous or synchronous communication.• In synchronous mode, a clock output signal is provided for synchronization of

external equipment.• Each channel can support data transfer rates from 600 bps to 64 kbp/s.• The DIU1-2 may adapt data to a full time slot or part of a time slot (subrate

connection). This enables several low speed streams to share a single time slot.• The DIU1-2 can perform a data omnibus function. (Note that it is not possible to use

subrate and omnibus connections simultaneously on the same channel.)

The data from each of the channels may be assigned to time slots within G.703 streams or to other channels of data cards.

DIU1-2 Functional Block Diagram

Figure 41: DIU1-2 Functional Block Diagram

Data RateConverter

MicroprocessorSystem

Rx DCTSDSRPCD

RICLK

Line Drivers

System Reset

BackplaneConnector

Note: Only one of the six channels shown

PLL

DCE Interface

Line Receivers

Power Circuit

Filtering &Soft Start

+5v

Loopback Switch

Tx DRTSDTR

Sync

HDLCController

Tx DCTS

Rx DRTS

Tx DCTS

Rx DRTS

Baud Clock

MicroprocessorBus

J6

J5

P4

DebugPorts

143



The major functional blocks for the DIU1-2 are described in Table 61.

Table 61: Description of DIU1-2 Functional Blocks

DIU1-2 Interfaces

Front Edge Layout

Figure 42 shows the DIU1-2 front edge layout.

Block Descriptions

Line Drivers and Receivers

Standard RS-232/V.24 line drivers and receivers are used to provide the electrical interface between the DIU1-2 circuitry and connector P4.

DCE Interface The Data Communications Equipment (DCE) interface provides the data, clock, and handshake signals required by the RS-232/V.24 interface.

Loopback Switch The loopback switch makes an internal connection between the incoming and outgoing data paths. The paths from the DCE interface to the backplane are broken, and there is no connection to the data rate converter.

Data Rate Converter This unit converts the DCE interface signals to/from the 64 kbp/s backplane data rate. It also manages the subrate multiplexing of channels by dividing the 64 kbp/s backplane data rate into the required sizes. The Data Rate Converter is capable of framing the 64 kbp/s data to the backplane for both Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) and inband signaling.

PLL The Phase Locked Loop uses a crystal oscillator and timing signals from the MCU to generate the required baud rate for the DCE Interface.

Debug Port (J5) This RS-232 serial port is intended for communication with the microprocessor system to perform factory testing.

Port (J6) This port performs no function on the DIU1-2. Microprocessor System The microprocessor system combines a CPU, memory, watchdog timer,

and reset circuitry to provide overall management of the DIU1-2 and to facilitate factory testing using debug Port J5. It also manages the signaling (handshaking) for all six DCE interfaces.

LED An indicator that is driven from an output pin of the microprocessor to indicate that the DIU1-2 is running.

HDLC Controller An HDLC controller is used to communicate with the Primary MCU.Power Circuit Includes filtering and over voltage protection on the Vcc rail and a soft

start circuit to limit the inrush current during power up.Backplane Connector A DIN41612 type connector that carries signals for power,

communications, card detection and timing.

Acom Card Reference

144 025-9574E

Figure 42: DIU1-2 Front Edge Layout

Physical Layout

No interfaces.

Rear Edge Layout


LED Indicators

The DUI1-2 has a ‘Run’ LED indicator that flashes approximately once a secondwhile the DIU1-2 is operating.

Reset

The DIU1-2 includes circuitry that resets the Microprocessor system on power-up or when the subrack is reset (initiated by the Primary MCU). The DIU1-2 microprocessor will also reset if the watchdog timer is activated. The reset sequence takes approximately three seconds during which time the Run LED will stop flashing; no data passed through the card.

a c

32

1

Extractionlever

J6Port(DB9 Female)

“Run” LED

J5Debug Port(DB9 Female)

P4

145


Settings

Jumpers

Jumper links JP3 to JP18 exist for test purposes only and should not be used. The card is shipped with these jumper links removed.

Connector Detail

Debug Port Connectors (J5, J6)

The debug ports J5 and J6 are both female DB-9 connectors, with pinouts as shown in Table 62. Note that these ports are not connected to any of the six RS-232 data channels provided by the DIU1-2 card. J5 and J6 are intended for factory purposes only.

Table 62: Debug Port Connectors (J5, J6) Pinouts (factory use only)

User Data Interface Connector (P4)

Pinouts for the user data interface connector P4 are shown in Table 63. Note that pin 32 is at the top of the connector, and Pin 1 is at the bottom, as shown in Figure 42.


1 - - - -2 TXA+ TXB+ Transmit Data Output from DIU1-23 RXA+ RXB+ Receive Data Input to DIU1-24 - - - -5 GND GND Ground -6 - - - -7 CTSA+ CTSB+ Clear to Send Output from DIU1-28 RTSA+ RTSB+ Request to Send Input to DIU1-29 - - - -

Acom Card Reference

146 025-9574E

Table 63: User Data Interface Connector (P4) Pinout

RS-232 / V.24 Channels

Each channel of the DIU1-2 consists of nine signals for data transfer (TXD and RXD), handshaking (RTS, CTS, DTR, DSR, DCD), clock out (CLK), and modem Ring Indicator

Direction Function Pin Channel Pin Function Direction

IN TXD1 32a 1 32c RXD1 OUTIN RTS1 31a 31c CTS1 OUTIN DTR1 30a 30c DCD1 OUT

OUT RI1 29a 29c DSR1 OUT- - 28a 28c CLK1 OUT

IN TXD2 27a 2 27c RXD2 OUTIN RTS2 26a 26c CTS2 OUTIN RTS2 25a 25c DCD2 OUT





OUT RI3 14a 14c DSR4 OUT- - 13a 13c -




OUT RI6 4a 4c DSR6 OUT- 3a 3c CLK6 OUT

Sig Gnd 2a 2c Sig GndSig Gnd 1a 1c Sig Gnd

147


(RI). The channels are configured as Data Communications Equipment (DCE), therefore TXD is input into the DIU1-2 and RXD is an output.

There are no clock input lines to the DIU1-2; it is therefore impossible to synchronize the DIU1-2 to an external RS-232 clock signal. The clock out line (CLK) is an RS-232 level signal that enables external equipment to be synchronized to the DIU1-2 when used in synchronous mode. The clock out signal (CLK) from a DIU1-2 channel is not active when that channel is configured for asynchronous operation.

A 25-pin plug is usually specified for RS-232, although a 9-pin plug is often used. For reference, Table 64 shows the corresponding RS-232 and V.24 pinouts and function of the circuits defined.

Table 64: RS-232/V.24 Interface Signals

Signaling

The signaling lines for each DIU1-2 channel provide handshaking between two remote devices. The signaling lines are swapped to their complimentary pair when two DIU1-2 channels are connected through a time slot. For example, an input such as RTS on one DIU1-2 channels appears as CTS on the other. This is the same for DTR and DTS. Each

Note TXD is an input into the DIU and RXD is an output from the DIU.

Circuit Pin

RS-232 V.24 DB25 DB9 Name Function Special Use

- 1 - Shield Shield or chassis ground

-

AB 102 7 5 Ground Signal ground or common

-

BA 103 2 3 TXD Transmit data line -BB 104 3 2 RXD Receive data line -CA 105 4 7 RTS Request to send

signal-

CB 106 5 8 CTS Clear to send signal -CC 107 6 6 DSR Data set ready signal -CF 109 8 1 DCD Data receive signal

detect-

CD 108 20 4 DTR Data terminal ready signal

Modem interface

CE 125 22 9 RI Ring indicator signal Modem interfaceDB 114 15 - DB Transmit clock time SynchronizationDD 115 17 - DD Receive clock line SynchronizationDA 113 24 - DA Terminal clock line Synchronization

Acom Card Reference

148 025-9574E

channel can be set (using the system software) so that the output signaling lines are low, high, or follow the incoming signal lines.

The clock signal outputs are generated from the PLL within the DIU1-2 and are not transmitted within the time slot.

DIU1-2 Installation

Rules for installation of a DIU1-2 in a subrack are as follows:• The DIU1-2 card is hot-pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power is

applied to the subrack.• A DIU1-2 card cannot be used in slot 0, slot 1 or slot 12.• A maximum of ten DIU1-2 cards may be fitted in one subrack.

DIU1-2 Alarm Generation

Table 65: DIU1-2 Alarms

DIU1-2 Technical Specifications



Event Alarm Generated No. Alarm Type

DIU1-2 Card Failure CE (Configuration Error) 0 UrgentDIU1-2 Card Removal CE (Configuration Error) 0 Urgent

Note The DIU1-2 card does not generate any other system alarms.


Voltage at any Input Pin (on J5 and P4) ±30 V


Operational Temperature 0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)Storage Temperature -10 to 70 C (14 to 158 F)Humidity 45% Relative Humidity @ 45 C (113 F)

149


Table 68: Physical

Main Interface - 6 Channel RS-232/V.24

Physical Connector: DIN41612 Type C 64 pin malePhysical Interface: RS-232 / V.24Line Settings: Selectable, refer to DIU1-2 Operation

Table 69: Electrical Characteristics of Main Interface

Table 70: Timing Characteristics

Debug Port Interface

Physical Connection: DB9 FemalePhysical Interface: RS-232 / V.24Line Settings: 9600, N, 8, 1


Overall length (front to back) 220 mmOverall Depth (between card guides) 223 mmOverall height 16 mmThickness of printed board 1.6 mmWeight 231 g

Parameter Conditions Min Typical Max Units

Line Output Voltage Swing - - ±11 - VLine Output Resistance - 300 - - Ω

Line Output Short Circuit Current - - ±10 - mALine Input Voltage Range - -30 - +30 VLine Input Low Threshold - 0.5 - 1.9 VLine Input High Threshold - 1.3 - 2.7 VLine Input Hysteresis - - 1.0 - VLine Input Current Vin = 25 V - - 8.3 mALine Input Current Vin = 3 V 1.0 mA


Line Output Slew Rate - - - 30 V/µsLine Output Rise Time Vout = ±11 V - 2.3 - µsLine Output Fall Time Vout = ±11 V - 2.0 - µsWidth of input pulse discriminated as noise

- - - 1.0 µs

Acom Card Reference

150 025-9574E

Table 71: Electrical Characteristics of the Debug Port

Subrack Backplane Interface

Physical Connector DIN41612 Type C 64 pin male

Table 72: Electrical Characteristics of the Backplane

Operational Timing

Table 73: Operational Timing Characteristics


Compliant to AS3548 Class A



Line Output Short Circuit - - ±10 - mALine Input Voltage Range - -30 - +30 VLine Input Low Threshold - 0.5 - 1.9 VLine Input High Threshold 1.3 - 2.7 VLine Input Hysteresis - 1.0 - VLine Input Current Vin = 25 V - - 8.3 mALine Input Current Vin = 3 V - - 1.0 mA

Parameter Typical

+5 Volt Power Consumption 340 mA


-12 Volt Power Consumption 100 mA


Watchdog time-out to internal reseta - 500 1200 2000 msRun LED flash rate Not in reset - 1 - HzPeriod between LED updates Not in reset - 1 - sec

a. The operation of the Watchdog Timer causes an internal reset only and does not cause the subrack to reset.

151



P/N 950-0516

The DIU1-4 has six channels that allow RS-422/V.11 devices to be connected to time slots or to other line cards. The DIU1-4 is typically used to connect two RS-422/v.11 devices to either end of a communications network.

The DIU1-4 card has the following features:• Six independent channels, each providing an RS-422/V.11 interface to external data

equipment.• Channels may be individually set up as either asynchronous or synchronous.• In the synchronous mode, clock output signals are provided for synchronization of

external equipment.• Each channel can support data transfer rates from 600 bp/s to 64 kbp/s.• The DIU1-4 may adapt data to a full time slot or part of a time slot (subrate

connection). This enables several low speed streams to share a single time slot.• The DIU1-4 can perform a data omnibus function. (Note that it is not possible to

use subrate and omnibus connections simultaneously on the same channel.)• The data from each of the channels may be assigned to time slots within G.703

streams or to channels of other line cards.

DIU1-4 Block Diagram

Figure 43 shows the functional block diagram for an DIU1-4.

Acom Card Reference

152 025-9574E

Figure 43: DIU1-4 Functional Block Diagram


The major functional blocks for the DIU1-4 are described in Table 74.

Table 74: Description of DIU1-4 Functional Blocks

Data RateConverter


System Reset

BackplaneConnector

Note: One Channel only Shown

PLL

DCE Interface

Power Circuit

Filtering &Soft Start

+5V

Loopback Switch

Sync

HDLCController

Tx DCTS

Rx DRTS

Baud Clock

MicroprocessorBus

J6

J5

Rx D

DSR

CLK

Line Drivers

Line ReceiversTx D

DTR

P4

Run LED

DebugPort

Tx DCTS

Rx DRTS

Block Descriptions

Line Drivers and Receivers

Standard RS-422/V.11 line drivers and receivers are used to provide the electrical interface between the DIU1-4 circuitry and connector P4.

DCE Interface The Data Communications Equipment (DCE) interface provides the data, clock and handshake signals required by an RS-422/V.11 interface.

Loopback Switch This unit converts the DCE interface signals to/from the 64 kbp/s backplane time slot data rate. It also manages the subrate multiplexing of channels by dividing the 64 kbp/s time slot data rate into smaller subrates. The Data Rate Converter also controls the CAS and inband signalling. For Inband mode the signalling bits are added to the data channel time slot while in CAS mode they are added to time slot 16.

Data Rate Converter This unit converts the DCE interface signals to/from the 64 kbp/s backplane data rate. It also manages the subrate multiplexing of channels by dividing the 64 kbp/s backplane data rate into the required sizes. The Data Rate Converter is capable of framing the 64 kbp/s data to the backplane for both Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) and inband signaling.

PLL The Phase Locked Loop uses a crystal oscillator and timing signals from the MCU to generate the required baud rate for the DCE Interface.

153


DIU1-4 Interfaces

Front Edge Layout

Figure 42 shows the DIU1-4 front edge layout.

Figure 44: DIU1-2 Front Edge Layout

Debug Port (J5) This RS-232 serial port is intended for communication with the microprocessor system to perform factory testing.

Microprocessor System The Microprocessor system combines a CPU, memory, watchdog timer and reset circuitry to provide overall management of the DIU1-4 and to facilitate factory testing via debug Port J5. It also manages the signaling (handshaking) for all six DCE interfaces.

Port (J6) This port performs no function on the DIU1-4. LED This LED is driven by the microprocessor and indicates that the DIU1-4 is

running.HDLC Controller An HDLC controller is used to communicate with the Primary MCU.Power Circuit Includes filtering and over voltage protection on the power rails and a soft

start circuit to limit the inrush current at power up.Backplane Connector A DIN41612 type connector that carries signals for power,

communications, card detection and timing.

Block Descriptions

a c

32

1

Extractionlever

Unused SerialCommunicationsPort 2 (DB9 Female) J6

“Run” LED

RS-232 DebugPort 1 (DB9 Female) J5

P4

Acom Card Reference

154 025-9574E

Physical Layout

No interfaces.

Rear Edge Layout


LED Indicators

The DUI1-4 has a ‘Run’ LED indicator that flashes approximately once a second while the DIU1-4 is operating.

Reset

The DIU1-4 includes circuitry that resets the Microprocessor system on power-up or when the subrack is reset (initiated by the Primary MCU). The DIU1-4 microprocessor will also reset if the watchdog timer is activated. The reset sequence takes approximately three seconds during which time the Run LED will stop flashing and no data will pass through the card.

Settings

Jumpers

Jumper links JP3 to JP18 exist for test purposes only and should not be used. The card is shipped with these jumper links removed.

Connector Detail

Debug Port J5/J6 (RS-422/V.11)

Note that these ports are not connected to any of the six RS-422/V.11 data channels provided by the DIU1-4 card. These ports are designed for factory configuration, up-grading and testing; they are not intended for use by the user. However, if needed, a connection can be established by using a terminal emulation program with line settings as per Table 75 and Debug Port Interface on page 158. The debug program is entered by pressing the ‘Escape’ key three times. Once connected the basic debug commands can printed to the screen by typing ‘help.’

Table 75: Debug Port Connectors (J5, J6) Pinouts (factory use only)


1 - - - -2 TXA+ TXB+ Transmit Data Output form DIU1-43 RXA+ RXB+ Receive Data Input to DIU1-44 - - - -

155


User Data Interface Connector (P4)

Pinouts for the user data interface connector P4 are shown in Table 76. Note that pin 32 is at the top of the connector, and Pin 1 is at the bottom, as shown in Figure 44.

Table 76: User Data Interface Connector (P4) Pinout

5 GND GND Ground -6 - - - -7 CTSA+ CTSB+ Clear to Send Output from DIU1-48 RTSA+ RTSB+ Request to Send Input to DIU1-49 - - - -


IN TX1+ 32a 1 32c RX1+ OUTIN TX1- 31a 31c RX1- OUTIN DTR1+ 30a 30c DSR1+ OUTIN DTR1- 29a 29c DSR1- OUT

OUT CLK1- 28a 28c CLK1+ OUTIN TX2+ 27a 2 27c RX2+ OUTIN TX2- 26a 26c RX2- OUTIN DTR2+ 25a 25c DSR2+ OUTIN DTR2- 24a 24c DSR2- OUT




OUT CLK5- 8a 8c CLK5+ OUTIN TX6+ 7a 6 7c RX6+ OUT


Acom Card Reference

156 025-9574E

RS-422/V.11 Channels

Each channel of the DIU1-4 consists of five signals for data transfer (TX and RXD); handshaking (DTR, DSR), and clock out (CLK). They are configured as Data Communications Equipment (DCE), therefore TXD is input into the DIU1-4 and RXD is an output.

There are no clock input lines to the DIU1-4; it is therefore impossible to synchronize the DIU1-4 to an external RS-422 clock signal. The clock-out line (CLK) is an RS-422/V.11 level signal that enables external equipment to be synchronized to the DIU1-4 when used in synchronous mode. (Refer to Figure 45 for clock and data timing). The clock out signals (CLK) from a DIU1-4 channel is not active when that channel is configured for asynchronous operation.

There is no connector format specified by the RS-422 standard, however a variety of connectors such as DB9, DB25, and DB37 are used in practice.

Figure 45: DIUI4 Clock and Data Timing

Signaling

The signaling lines for each DIU1-4 channel provide handshaking between two remote devices. The signalling lines are swapped to their complimentary pair when two DIU1-4 channels are connected through a time slot. For example, an input such as DTR on one DIU1-4 channels appears as DTS on the other. Each channel can be set (using the system software) so that the output signaling lines are low, high, or follow the incoming signal lines.

IN TX6- 6a 6c RX6- OUTIN DTR6+ 5a 5c DSR6+ OUTIN DTR6- 4a 4c DSR6- OUT

OUT CLK6- 3a 3c CLK6+ OUTSig Gnd 2a 2c Sig GndSig Gnd 1a 1c Sig Gnd

Note TXD is an input into the DIU and RXD is an output from the DIU.


ov

ov0 1 0 1

CLK +

RX +

Data

157


The clock signal outputs are generated from the PLL within the DIU1-4 and are not transmitted within the time slot.

DIU1-4 Installation

Rules for installation of a DIU1-4 in a subrack are as follows:• The DIU1-4 card is hot-pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power is

applied to the subrack. • A DIU1-4 card cannot be used in slot 0, slot 1 or slot 12. • A maximum of ten DIU1-4 cards may be fitted in one subrack.

DIU1-4 Alarm Generation

Table 77: DIU1-4 Alarms

DIU1-4 Technical Specifications


Table 79: Environmental Characteristics


DIU1-4 Card Failure CE (Configuration Error) 0 UrgentDIU1-4 Card Removal CE (Configuration Error) 0 Urgent

Note The DIU1-4 card does not generate any other system alarms.


Voltage at any Input Pin (on J5 and P4) ±14 V



Acom Card Reference

158 025-9574E


Main Interface - 6 Channel RS-422V.11

Physical Connector: DIN41612 Type C 64 pin malePhysical Interface: RS-422 / V.11Line Settings: Selectable, refer to DIU1-4 Operation

Table 81: Electrical Characteristics of Main Interface

Debug Port Interface

Physical Connection: DB9 Female (DCE)Physical Interface: RS-232 / V.24 (factory default) or RS-422/V.11

(after modification)Line Settings: 9600, N, 8, 1

Table 82: Electrical Characteristics of the Debug Port

Parameter Typical

Overall Length (front to back) 220 mmOverall Depth (between card guides) 223 mmOverall Height 16 mmThickness of printed board 1.6 mmWeight 360 g


Line Output Differential Voltage No Load - ±6 - VLine Output Differential Voltage 100Ω Load ±2.0 ±3.1 - VLine Output Common Mode Voltage 100Ω Load - ±1.8 ±3.0 VLine Output Short Circuit Current - -30 - 150 mALine Differential Input Voltage Range - ±0.2 - ±14 VLine Common Mode Input Voltage - - - ±14 VLine Input Hysteresis - - 60 - mVLine Input Resistance - 5.8 6.8 10 kΩ



Line Output Short Circuit - - ±10 - mALine Input Voltage Range - -30 - +30 VLine Input Low Threshold - 0.5 - 1.9 VLine Input High Threshold - 1.3 - 2.7 V

159

Exchange Interface Unit Card (EIE)


Physical Connector DIN41612 Type C 64 pin male.

Table 83: Electrical Characteristics of the Backplane

Operational Timing

Table 84: Operational Timing Characteristics


Compliant to AS3548 Class A.


P/N 950-0522 (64-pin)P/N 950-0637 (RJ45)

The EIE is a line card that provides six 2-wire interfaces for connection to PSTN or PABX lines.

The six interfaces on the EIE are independent and have the following features:• 2 to 4 wire conversion• Selection of 16 line termination settings• Ring detection

Line Input Hysteresis - - 1.0 - VLine Input Current Vin = 25 V - - 8.3 mALine Input Current Vin = 3 V - - 1.0 mA





Watchdog time-out to internal reseta - 500 1200 2000 msRun LED flash rate Not in reset - 1 - HzPeriod between LED updates Not in reset - 1 - sec


Acom Card Reference

160 025-9574E

• Loop seizure• Allows CLI to be passed transparently• 300 to 3400 Hz channel bandwidth• Line isolation• Ring detection via second pair

EIE Block Diagram

Figure 46 shows the functional block diagram for an EIE.

Figure 46: EIE Functional Block Diagram


The major functional blocks for the EIE are described in Table 85.

Table 85: Description of EIE Functional Blocks

FPGA

LEDs HDLCController

BackplaneConnector

LineProtection

+1.5

Note: For clarity, only one of six channels is shown.

+3.3 +5

Power Filters &Regulation

DSP

Ring Detector

DAA

Block Description

Line Protection A surge suppression circuit using sidactors.Ring Detection Isolated circuitry is used to detect the ring signal if the ring is provided

on a separate pair of wires.DAA Integrated chipset that performs the hybrid, line impedance matching,

line looping, and ring detection. Also includes the analog-to-digital / digital-to-analog conversion of the audio signal.

LEDs Provides a run indication and also the line/loop status of each channel.

Power circuit Includes filtering, over voltage protection, and soft state circuit to limit the inrush current at power-up.

161


EIE Interfaces

Front Edge Layout

Figure 47 shows the EIE front edge layout.

Figure 47: EIE Front Edge Layout

FPGA Provides an interface between the backplane signals and the DSP.DSP Implements digital filters and control the operation of the DAAs.HDLC Controller Decodes the backplane messaging channel that is used to setup the EIE

card operating parameters.Backplane Connector

A DIN41612 type connector that carries signals for power, data, timing, and card detection.

Note Older EIE cards do not have LED indicators.

a c

32

P4

1

Extractionlever

Status LEDs:Solid green = line loopedBlinking red = ring in active

CH 2 statusCH 4 statusCH 6 status

Run LED

CH 1 statusCH 3 statusCH 5 status

J1

J3

J6

J2

J4

J5

(RJ45 Version)

Pin 1

Acom Card Reference

162 025-9574E

Physical Layout

Figure 48: EIE Card Jumpers

Rear Edge Layout


LED Indicators

The Exchange Interface Card (EIE) has one LED to indicate it is running and six LEDs to indicate channel status (see Figure 47). Each LED represents one channel. Older EIE cards do not have LED indicators.

Reset

The EIE includes circuitry that resets the Microprocessor system on power-up or during the subrack reset (initiated by the primary MCU in the ALS). It will also reset when the Watchdog timer function is activated. During reset the EIE will not pass audio signals.

Settings

Jumpers

EIE boards with part numbers 950-0522 and 950-0637 have the following jumpers:

JP2

JP3

JP4

JP5

JP7

JP10

JP1

NORMALT

NORMALT

NORMALT

NORMALT

NORMALT

NORMALT

JP6

JP8

JP9

Short to reset

Dua

l bac

kpla

neSi

ngle

bac

kpla

ne

163


JP1: Located below connector P1, this jumper is provided to allow resetting of the card. These pins are supplied with no jumper fitted. Momentarily shorting the pins of JP1 will RESET the card (for test purposes only).

JP6, JP8, and JP9: Located near the bottom right-hand corner of the PCB, these are used where the EIE card is to be fitted into a subrack containing either an upper backplane only (SINGLE) or both upper and lower backplanes (DUAL). Default position is for DUAL, where both backplanes exist in the subrack.

JP2, JP3, JP4, JP5, JP7, and JP10: Located towards the bottom center of the PCB, these are used to select the ring detect source of the 6 EIE channels respectively. Ring detection can be from the EIE line circuits (NORMal) or the ALT RING detectors to the left of the jumpers (ALTernate). Default position of these jumpers is NORM.

Connector Detail

Each EIE has six 2-wire interfaces; each can be connected to a telephone exchange (PSTN or PABX). The status of the lines is detected and their associated signaling such as ring detection and line looping are generated.

DAAs perform amplification and analog-to-digital conversion of the audio signals, which allows the gain of each channel to be programmed (using the system software package). Transmit and receive signals in excess of the maximum instantaneous input levels may be subject to clipping. When the transmit and receive gains are set to 0 dB, the insertion loss on both the transmit and receive paths is 0 dB.

All external signal connections are made at the front edge of the card through connector P4. The connector pinout is shown in Table 86. The connector pinout for the RJ45 version is shown in Table 87.

Note All three jumpers (JP6, JP8, and JP9) MUST be set together (i.e. all to DUAL or SINGLE position).

Acom Card Reference

164 025-9574E

Table 86: Interface Connector P4 Pinout


- 32a 32c -IN/OUT LA1 31a 1 31c LB1 IN/OUT

- 30a 30c -IN Alt ring A1 29a 29c Alt Ring B1 IN

- 28a 28c -- 27a 27c -

IN/OUT LA2 26a 2 26c LB2 IN/OUT- 25a 25c -

IN Alt Ring A2 24a 24c Alt Ring B2 IN- 23a 23c -- 22a 22c -






IN Alt Ring A5 9a 9c Alt Ring B5 IN- 8a 8c -- 7a 7c -- 6a 6c -



165


Table 87: Interface Connector J1 Through J6 Pinout (RJ45 version)

Figure 49: Line Protection Circuit Schematic

EIE Installation

Card Placement

Rules for installing an EIE in a subrack are as follows:

Connector Channel Pin Function

J1 1 3 Alt Ring A1J1 1 4 LA1J1 1 5 LB1J1 1 6 Alt Ring B1J2 2 3 Alt Ring A2J2 2 4 LA2J2 2 5 LB2J2 2 6 Alt Ring B2J3 3 3 Alt Ring A3J3 3 4 LA3J3 3 5 LB3J3 3 6 Alt Ring B3J4 4 3 Alt Ring A4J4 4 4 LA4J4 4 5 LB4J4 4 6 Alt Ring B4J5 5 3 Alt Ring A5J5 5 4 LA5J5 5 5 LB5J5 5 6 Alt Ring B5J6 6 3 Alt Ring A6J6 6 4 LA6J6 6 5 LB6J6 6 6 Alt Ring B6

LA

LB

680pF 680pF

TNVGround

Line Relaysidactor

Acom Card Reference

166 025-9574E

• The EIE card is hot-plug capable and may be removed or inserted with power applied to the rack.

• The EIE may be fitted to any slot in the subrack except slots 0, 1, and 12.

Line Impedance

The line impedance can be configured for each line through the system software. A 2-wire telephone line connected with a short cable has an impedance of 600 ohm (resistive). As the length of the line increases, the resistance and capacitance increase and the impedance becomes complex (i.e., combination of resistance / capacitance and/or inductive impedance). The EIE includes a switchable network that is intended to help the EIE match the impedance of longer lines. The EIE can select one of 16 options to help it match the impedance of longer lines.

Signaling

There are three signaling lines used to control and monitor the status of the EIE interfaces:• Ring detect• Loop out

When a ring voltage is detected, the line remains on-hook and mutes the audio paths.

The loop out circuit connects a load, which appears resistive at DC and is seen as high impedance AC. The loop circuit is used for decadic (pulse) dialing.

EIE Alarm Generation

The removal of a configured EIE, or the failure of a CODEC, will generate a Configuration Error (CE) alarm.

Table 88: EIE Alarms

EIE Technical Specifications


Event Alarm Generated No Alarm TypeEIE Card Failure CE (Configuration Error) 0 UrgentEIE Card Removal CE (Configuration Error) 0 Urgent

Parameter Max Rating

Line Interface DC Voltage 60 VRing Voltage 100 VRMS

167




Table 92: Operation Timing

Main Interface

The following are the main interface characteristics. Table 93 shows all of the interface characteristics.



Parameter Typical

Overall length (front to back) 220 mmOverall Depth (between card guides) 233 mmOverall Height 23 mmThickness of printed board 1.6 mmWeight 330 g

Parameter Min Max

Ring signal inactive to line looping 128 msRing signal detect time 190 msLine break detect time 300 msLine looping to audio connection relay 300 ms

Physical Connector DIN41612 Type C 64-pin male / RJPhysical Interface 2-wire 600ΩNumber of Channels 6Sampling A Law PCM (8 kHz)

Acom Card Reference

168 025-9574E

Table 93: Interface Characteristics


Physical Connector: DIN41612 Type C, 64-pin male

Table 94: Electrical Characteristics


Compliant to FCC Part 15, Class A and FCC, Part 68.

E&M 4-Wire Interface Unit (EMU)

P/N 950-0484 (24v-48v)P/N 950-0841 (5v-12v)

The EMU provides a data path from the VF (voice frequency) and E&M channels on the front of the card to the MCU card through the backplane data-bus. The E&M interfaces consist of dual E and M wires per channel.

The EMU card has the following features:• Six independent 4-wire VF channels• 300 to 3400 Hz VF channel bandwidth

Parameter Conditions Min. Typical Max. UnitsInput Isolation - 1.5 - - kVExternal circuit ring voltage range - 15 - 100 VRMSExternal ring frequency range - 15 20 55 HzRing equivalence number - - - 0.5External circuit line voltage range - 19 - 80 VLine looping current limit, maximum - -10 - 120 mAReceive gain range (configurable) - -16.5 - +13.5 dBTransmit gain range (configurable) - -16.5 - +13.5 dBMaximum instantaneous input level Rx gain=0 dB - - +3.2 dBmMaximum instantaneous output level Tx gain=0 dB - - +3.2 dBmFrequency response - 300 - 3400 HzTranshybrid balance 0.3 - 3.4 kHz 20 - - dBVariation of gain with level Input level > -50dBm -0.5 - +0.5 dBSignal to total distortion 1020 Hz 33 - - dBReturn loss 0.3 - 3.4 kHz 25 - - dBChannel to channel crosstalk - - - -66 dB

Parameter Max Units


169


• 600Ω balanced (transformer coupled) VF inputs• Dual ‘E’ and ‘M’ leads per channel

EMU Block Diagram

Figure 50 shows the functional block diagram for an EMU.

Figure 50: EMU Functional Block Diagram


The EMU is comprised of the major blocks described in Table 95.

Table 95: Description of EMU Functional Blocks

CODEC1/2

AudioTransmitCircuit

AudioReceiveCircuit

Signalling OutCircuits

LedDriver

Signalling

InCircuit

Debounce

TxATxB

RxARxB

So 1So 2

SI 1SI 2

So 1So 2SI 1SI 2

DIPSwitches

LEDEnable

ResetCircuit

SupplyFilters &

Regulation

+5 +12

-5 -12

BackplaneConnector

Note: For clarity, only one of six channels is shown.

Block Description

Audio Interface The audio interfaces consists of a two-wire transformer isolated 600Ω receive and transmit circuits.

Signaling Circuits The signaling in and signaling out circuits consist of optically coupled transistors and over-voltage protection.

Debounce A debounce circuit is used for noise discrimination on the signaling input lines. A pulse of less than 0.5 milliseconds duration on the signaling input lines will be rejected by the debounce circuit. (Debounce is also available using IMS software.)

Acom Card Reference

170 025-9574E

Audio Channels

The audio interfaces comprise of a two-wire transmit circuit (output from the EMU) and a two-wire receive circuit (input to the EMU). The CODEC performs amplification and analog-to-digital conversion of the audio signals and allows the gain of each channel to be programmed (using the IMS software application).

Transmit and receive signals in excess of the maximum instantaneous input levels may be subject to clipping. When transmit and receive gains are set to 0 dB, the insertion loss on both the transmit and receive paths is 0 dB. Schematic representations of the audio input and output are shown in Figure 53 and Figure 54.

Signaling Channels

Within the Zetron equipment manuals, all references to signaling are called signaling in (SI) and signaling out (SO). SI is an input to an EMU, and SO is an output from an EMU. In general multiplexer applications, SI corresponds to an “E” input, and SO refers to an “M” output.

The signaling input circuits are designed to detect the presence of a ‘ground’ and signaling outputs to generate a ‘ground.’

When a signaling channel is passed over a G.703 link, and the link fails due to a loss of signal, frame alignment, or multiframe alignment, the signaling passed to any line card will not change until 20 seconds have passed. After 20 seconds the signaling will return to its idle state. (The idle state can be assigned using the system software package.)

The DIP switches allow the outputs to be set to a particular state (either off or on) during a link failure.

DIP switches One miniature switch is provided for each signaling output line to invert the output action. Signaling inversion may also be set using the IMS software as described in 025-9530 Acom Console Software Operation.

CODEC The CODEC performs the analog-to-digital conversion of the audio signal. The digitized audio and the signaling bits are transmitted to and received from the MCU by the backplane.Each EMU channel uses one half of a CODEC, giving a total of three CODECs per EMU card.

LEDs LEDs are used on the EMU to show the status of the signaling input and output lines. There are a total of 24 LEDs that correspond to the 12 signaling in and 12 signaling out lines. The LED operation can be enabled or disabled using the IMS software.

Reset Circuit The backplane-reset line is connected to circuitry that resets the EMU when the subrack is reset.

Power Circuit Includes filtering, over voltage protection, and soft start circuits to limit the inrush current at power up.

Backplane Connector

A DIN41612 type connector that carries signals for power, data, timing and card detection.

171


Jumper links on the EMU card allow the signaling reference voltages to be connected to the backplane power supply or to pins on the external connector P4. The external connection allows isolation of the input and output circuits from the subrack power supply. Schematic representations of the signaling input and output are shown in Figure 55 and Figure 56.

Console Use of E&M Signaling

M1 Lead (SO1) Line selected or monitoredM2 Lead (SO2) Push-to-talk (line keyed)E1 Lead (SI1) Not usedE2 Lead (SI2) Carrier detect

EMU Interfaces

Front Edge Layout

Table 51 shows the EMU front edge layout.

Figure 51: EMU Front Edge Layout

a c

32

P4

1

Extractionlever

Acom Card Reference

172 025-9574E

Physical Layout

No interfaces.

Rear Edge Layout


LED Indicators

The status LEDs are connected to the signaling in and signaling out circuits to provide a useful indication of the status of the signaling lines. The LEDs functions are shown in Figure 52 and are described in Table 96.

Figure 52: Status Indicators EMU

Table 96: EMU Status Indicator Functions

Note The operation of the LEDs can be enabled or disabled using the IMS software package.

A B1 GREEN SO1-1 Active2 YELLOW SO2-1 Active3 GREEN SO1-2 Active4 YELLOW SO2-2 Active

5 GREEN SO1-3 Active6 YELLOW SO2-3 Active7 GREEN SO1-4 Active8 YELLOW SO2-4 Active

9 GREEN SO1-5 Active10 YELLOW SO2-5 Active11 GREEN SO1-6 Active12 YELLOW SO2-6 Active

SI1-1 GREEN 1SI2-1 YELLOW 2SI1-2 GREEN 3SI2-2 YELLOW 4



Position Color Signal Position Color Signal

SI1-1 Green NA - E1 SO1-1 Green M1 - SelectedSI2-1 Yellow CD/COR - E2 SO2-1 Yellow M2 - PTTSI1-2 Green NA - E1 SO1-2 Green M1 - SelectedSI2-2 Yellow CD/COR - E2 SO2-2 Yellow M2 - PTTSI1-3 Green NA - E1 SO1-3 Green M1 - SelectedSI2-3 Yellow CD/COR - E2 SO2-3 Yellow M2 - PTTSI1-4 Green NA - E1 SO1-4 Green M1 - SelectedSI2-4 Yellow CD/COR - E2 SO2-4 Yellow M2 - PTTSI1-5 Green NA - E1 SO1-5 Green M1 - SelectedSI2-5 Yellow CD/COR - E2 SO2-5 Yellow M2 - PTTSI1-6 Green NA - E1 SO1-6 Green M1 - SelectedSI2-6 Yellow CD/COR - E2 SO2-6 Yellow M2 - PTT

173


Signaling In LEDs

Once enabled using IMS, the signaling-in LED becomes active (illuminated) when current flowing into the input lead is for a period of 0.5 milliseconds or greater.

Signaling Out LEDs

Once enabled using IMS, a signaling-out LED shows the status of the output line and is active whenever the SO lead output is passing current. This operation can be inverted by setting the board DIP switches. (See DIP Switch Settings on page 174.) Figure 53, Figure 54, Figure 55, and Figure 56 show simplified circuit diagrams for the audio and signaling ports.

Reset

The EMU includes circuitry that resets the three CODEC chips when the subrack is reset.• Pressing the reset button on the Primary MCU or applying power to the subrack

causes the subrack to reset.• During reset the EMU will not pass audio, and the LEDs may not show the status of

the signaling lines correctly. After reset, the Primary MCU enables or disables the status LEDs according to the configuration settings in the MCU Config Flash memory.

Settings

Jumper Link Settings

The input and output signaling lead circuits operate from a reference voltage supply that may be connected in two different ways. Jumper links are provided on the EMU to allow the reference voltage to be connected from either the backplane power supply or from interface connector P4. If the backplane supply is used, then the signaling circuits are not isolated from the subrack.

By connecting an external supply to the reference voltage pins on P4, the signaling-in and out lines can be isolated from the subrack.

Jumpers J1 to J12 are provided to connect the +VV and –VV supply lines to the six channels. For example, J1 connects +VV, and J2 connects –VV to the signaling-in and signaling-out circuits for Channel 1.

Configuration Jumper

Use battery voltage from backplane. This is the factory default setting for the 24v-48v version of the EMU card (P/N 950-0484).Never use this position for the 5v-12v version of the EMU card (P/N950-0841). Doing so will damage the card.

Use voltage from front connector P4.

3 1

3 1

Acom Card Reference

174 025-9574E

DIP Switch Settings

Switches SW1 to SW3 can be used to invert the polarity of the signaling output (SO) leads. Table 97 lists the DIP switch number for each signaling-out line. The polarity can also be inverted using the system software package. By using the switches and IMS together, the polarity and the fail-state of the signaling out leads can be set.

When the M Lead is not inverted using the software, and the DIP switch is OFF, then the output follows the signaling-in line for the connected channel. Changing the DIP switch to ON causes the output signal to invert the status of the connected channel’s SI line.

When the M lead is inverted using the software, and the DIP switch is ON, then the output follows the signaling-in line for the connected channel. Changing the DIP switch to OFF causes the output signal to be inverted from the connected channel’s SI line.

Table 97: DIP Switch Functions

Connector Detail

All external user signal connections are made at the front edge of the card through connector P4. The connector pinout is shown in Table 98.

Caution! For isolation reasons, all jumper links must be set in the same position.

Note Pin 1 is the square pad at the right hand side of the jumper outline.

DIP Switch EMU Channel Switch Switch Polarity

SW1 1 1 SO1-12 SO2-1

2 3 SO1-24 SO2-2

SW2 3 1 SO1-32 SO2-3

4 3 SO1-44 SO2-4

SW3 5 1 SO1-52 SO2-5

6 3 SO1-64 SO2-6

!

175


Table 98: User Interface Connector (P4) Pinout


OUT TX1A 32a 1 32c TX1B OUTIN RX1A 31a 31c RX1B IN

OUT SO1-1 30a 30c Ch1 +VVIN SI1-1 29a 29c Ch1 –VV

OUT SO2-1 28a 28c SI2-1 INOUT TX2A 27a 2 27c TX2B OUT

IN RX2A 26a 26c RX2B INOUT SO1-2 25a 25c Ch2 +VV

IN SI1-2 24a 24c Ch2 –VVOUT SO2-2 23a 23c SI2-2 INOUT TX3A 22a 3 22c TX3B OUT






IN SI1-5 9a 9c Ch5 –VVOUT SO2-5 8a 8c SI2-5 IN

Spare 7a 7c SpareOUT TX6A 6a 6 6c TX6B OUT


IN SI1-6 3a 3c Ch6 –VVOUT SO2-6 2a 2c SI2-6 IN

Spare 1a 1c Spare

Acom Card Reference

176 025-9574E

Audio Connections

Figure 53: Audio Receive (Input) Circuit Schematic

Figure 54: Audio Transmit (Output) Circuit Schematic

Signaling Connections

Figure 55: Signaling Output Circuit Schematic

Figure 56: Signaling Input Circuit Schematic

Note Signaling is required to activate the inputs and outputs:

If internal reference is used, +VV is strapped to 0Vdc. The M lead must be pulled to a voltage lower that 0Vdc and be prepared to sense current as a result of closure to ground. A positive reference voltage will not cause current to flow when the M lead is active.

If internal reference is used, -VV is strapped to -48Vdc. The E lead must be pulled to -0Vdc to activate the E lead input.

Rx A

Rx B600

Codec

+12

Tx A

Tx B

600Codec

-12

+VV

SO

Jumper LInk

Internal +V Supply

70

Internal -V Supply

+VV

SI

Jumper LinkInternal +V Supply

Jumper Link-VV

(J1, J3, J5)

(J2, J4, J6)

177


EMU Installation

Card Placement

Rules for installation of an EMU in a subrack are as follows:• The EMU card is hot pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power is

applied to the rack. • The EMU may be fitted to any slot in the subrack except slots 0, 1, and 12.

Listen-in Line Support

Listen-in Line Support is a custom option when using Acom with a 3200 system. With Listen-in Line Support, Acom can listen (receive only) to positions connected to the 3200 system.

Listen-in Line Support is installed by connecting Acom EMU cards to the position logger outputs on the 3200 (the RJ21 logger ports on station card shelves). A Krone block is used for phone isolation, which isolates M3200 Logger output from Acom EMU 600ohm input as shown in the following diagram:

Installation of Listen-in Line Support is custom. Refer to the following documents:• E&M 4-Wire Interface Unit (EMU) on page 168 of this manual• S3200 Installation Manual (P/N 025-9419)• 3200 Listen-in Wiring Diagram (P/N 045-0278-077-03)

EMU Alarm Generation

The failure of a CODEC, the interface from the CODEC to the backplane, or the removal of the EMU from the rack, will generate a configuration alarm. The EMU generates no other alarms.

Table 99: EMU Alarms

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

K R O N E

1a - Tip IN1b - Ring IN2a - Tip OUT2b - NC3a - Ring OUT

Event Alarm Generated No Alarm Type

EMU Card Failure CE (Configuration Error) 0 UrgentEMU Card Removal CE (Configuration Error) 0 UrgentCODEC Failure CE (Configuration Error) 0 UrgentFailure of interface between CODEC and backplane

CE (Configuration Error) 0 Urgent

Acom Card Reference

178 025-9574E

EMU Technical Specifications




Audio Interface

The following are the main audio interface characteristics:

Table 103: Audio Interface Characteristics

Parameter Conditions Max Units

Signaling Out Line Current (M Lead) Peak maximum 150 mAVoltage applied to Signaling Lines - +VV + 0.2 VSignaling reference voltage +VV to -VV Peak maximum 70 VDC bias across audio inputs or outputs - 0 V



Parameter Typical

Overall length (front to back) 220 mmOverall Depth (between card guides) 233 mmOverall Height 16 mmWeight 460 g

Physical Connector DIN41612 Type C 64-pin malePhysical Interface 4-wire 600Ω balancedNumber of Channels 6Sampling A Law PCM (8 kHz)


Input Isolation - 1.5 - - kVReceive gain range (configurable) - -7.4 - +18.6 dBTransmit gain range (configurable) - -20.1 - +5.8 dBCombined receive and transmit gain range - -27.5 - +24.4 dBMaximum instantaneous input level Rx gain=0 dB - - +3 dBmMaximum instantaneous input level Rx gain=-6dB - - +9 dBmMaximum instantaneous output level Tx gain=0 dB - 3 - dBm

179


Signaling Interface


Physical Interface: NPN transistor

Number of Channels:Six channels with two inputs and two outputs per channel

Table 104: Signaling Interface Characteristics





Compliant to AS3548, Class B and FCC Part 15, Class A.

Maximum instantaneous output level Tx gain=6 dB - - +9 dBmFrequency response - 300 - 3400 HzVariation of gain with level 0.3 - 2.4 kHz -0.5 - +0.5 dBVariation of gain with level 0.3 - 3.4 kHz -0.5 - +1.8 dBSignal to total distortion 1020 Hz 33 - - dBReturn loss 0.3 - 3.4 kHz 20 - - dB



Voltage at unconnected input - - -VV+2 - VInput pulse width assumed to be noise - - - 0.5 msInput current with input connected to +VV - - 4 - mAOutput voltage when output is active - +VV-1.2 - +VV VMaximum continuous output current - - - 60 mASignaling rate - - - 250 Hz

Parameter Min. Max. Units

+5 Volt Power Consumption 60 200 mA+12 Volt Power Consumption 5 10 mA-12 Volt Power Consumption 35 60 mA

Acom Card Reference

180 025-9574E

Main Control Unit (MCU)

Part Numbers: see Table 106

The MCU (Main Control Unit) has a microprocessor with communications and interface circuits. It is used in either an Acom Line Subrack (ALS) or an Acom DS3 Switch (ADS). When used in an Acom ALS, the MCU forms the core of the Zetron Acom subrack digital multiplexer system. When used in an ADS, the MCU acts as an E1 line interface card which performs audio conferencing.

An MCU cannot be simply swapped between an ALS and an ADS. Older MCU cards are only compatible with the ALS role. MCU cards that are compatible in either role require specific firmware (either ALS or ADS firmware) to operate in specific roles. The following table identifies MCU part numbers, their firmware compatibility, and their front-edge physical interfaces.

Table 106: MCU Part Numbers and Compatibility

MCU Functionality in ALS

In an ALS, the main functions of the MCU are to communicate with system software running on a PC, to control and monitor the status of other cards in the subrack, and to configure time slot connections between voice, data, and signaling channels.

The MCU communication circuits include the main G.703 interfaces for connecting the subrack to other subracks or to components such as microwave and fiber-optic transceivers. It contains the ports for connection to external supervisory interfaces, such as IMS and Network Management Systems. (See MCU Options in the Acom Software Installation and Configuration manual, P/N 025-9529.)

The MCU interface circuits include PCM, IOM-2, and HDLC control buses, which are used to communicate with other cards in the subrack. These buses are connected between cards by the backplane.

ZetronPart Numbers

Firmware Compatibility G.703 Physical Interface

950-0485 (MCU3) ALS only 75Ω, E1, SMB coaxial (unbalanced)950-0561 (MCU3) ALS only 120Ω, E1 RJ-45 (balanced)950-0652 (MCU3) ALS only Type ST single mode 0.62 µm fiber optic950-0486 (MCU3) ALS only 100Ω, T1, RJ-45 (balanced)950-0697 (MCU4) ALS/ADS 75Ω, E1, SMB coaxial (unbalanced)950-0771 (MCU4) ALS/ADS 120Ω, E1, SMB coaxial (balanced)950-0698 (MCU4) ALS/ADS 100Ω, T1/ISDN, RJ-45 (balanced)

Note MCU3 cards are compatible with the ALS. MCU4 cards with ALS firmware are also compatible with the ALS.

181


When the MCU is installed in slot 0 of the subrack, it becomes the primary MCU that functions as a system master and provides configuration set-up parameters for other MCUs installed in the subrack. A primary MCU must be present for the rack to function.

If an MCU card is installed in slots 1 to 11, it will function as a secondary MCU and only the G.703 interfaces, system clocking, and data switching functions for the card are active.

A primary and secondary MCU perform the following functions:• Interconnection of data between MCU and line cards to G.703 channels• Optional CRC error checking of the G.703 data channels• G.703 clock recovery and external clock interfacing• Programmable framing formats:

• Doubleframe or CRC Multiframe (E1)• 12 Frame Multiframe or Extended Superframe (T1)

• Implementation of Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) (E1)• One or two G.703 interfaces• Optional fiber optic interface for each G.703 channel

The following functions are performed by a primary MCU only:• Controls bus connections to line cards in the same subrack• Controls and monitors the status of other cards in the subrack• Controls and monitors alarms generated by other cards in the subrack• Provides a master G.703 clock source• Handles signaling for the subrack• Monitors the alarms and quality of all G.703 links• Controls all voice and data branching and omnibus time slot connections• Provides ports for connection to external systems, such as IMS and NMS (Network

Management System) for configuration and access of alarm and status information• Provides nonvolatile storage of system configuration (including time slot

connections) and NMS node address• Configuration and operation of Ringers (RGU cards)• Provides HDLC communications for NMS applications through time slot 0

MCU Functionality in ADS

The role of an MCU4 in an ADS is much simpler. The MCU4 acts as an interface between the DCU, ALS, and Acom Console Units. An MCU4 can also interface multiple Acom sites using Dynamic Intersite Bearer.

Note MCU3 cards are not compatible with the ADS. MCU4 cards with ADS firmware are compatible with the ADS.

Acom Card Reference

182 025-9574E

In an ADS, external supervisory interfaces such as IMS are handled by the DCU card.

MCU Block Diagram

Figure 57 shows the major functional blocks of the MCU. Table 107 describes each of these blocks in detail.

Some older MCU cards do not have a second G.703 port. With the exception of the missing port, these “single-port” MCU cards function exactly the same as the more common “dual-port” MCU cards.

Figure 57: Functional Block Diagram – MCU

FlexSignallingController

Real TimeClock

CPUBus

Framer 2

MUSAC2


Memory Config. Flash

HDLC ControllerCPU

MUSAC1

EPIC

Serial Port 1Serial Port 2

Leds

ResetLogic

ResetButton

Framer 1

Master ClockLink 1 ReceivePort (In)

Link 1 TransmitPort (Out)

Link 2 ReceivePort (In)

Link 2 TransmitPort (Out)

VCC

SystemClock

Selection Circuit

BackplaneConnector

Filter &Soft Start

-126V8

ExternalClock

Interface

External ClockIn Port

External ClockOut Port

System Clock

183



Table 107: Description of MCU Major Functional Blocks

BLOCK DESCRIPTION

MUSAC The MUSAC is a cross-point switch responsible for the time slot connections and conferencing of channels on all internal G.703 buses up-to a maximum of 14 streams (512 time slots).

Framers The Framers process the frame in accordance with G.704 and provide electrical interfaces for the G.703 signals. There is one framer per each G.703 link. The Framer circuit performs clock recovery, AIS injection, CAS signaling, remote alarm generation, CRC error handling, transmit line monitoring, local loopback connection, error monitoring and alarm simulation.

Line Transformers Provide electrical isolation between the Framers and the external line connections and diodes for over-voltage protection.

Microprocessor System

The microprocessor system combines a CPU, memory, watchdog timer and reset circuitry to provide overall management of the MCU. Configuration settings are stored in the Config Flash memory. The MCU includes software routines to check the program memory checksum and to check for the presence of the Config Flash memory. The microprocessor system includes reset circuitry, which is controlled by the reset push button and the CPU.

Config Flash Memory

Memory used to store two sets of configuration parameters such as time slot connections, address, clocking sources, etc., and to store fault logs.

LEDs Sixteen Status indicators for monitoring the status of links, ringers, alarms and MCU operation.

Serial Port 1 (X17) Serial port 1 is an RS-232 port typically used for communication with the Microprocessor System. Configuration of software parameters can be achieved by connecting a personal computer with the IMS software package to this port. The serial port itself can be configured (see the section “Serial Port” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529)

Serial Port 2 (X18) Serial port 2 is normally supplied configured as RS-485 full duplex with no collision detection. The default setting for this port is no operation. This port is typically used to feed an external clock signal into the MCU/system. The serial port can be configured (see the section “Serial Port” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529)

Real Time Clock A 24-hour clock and calendar with leap year correction.Flex Signaling Controller

Processes all signaling for the MCU and provides signaling inversion when configured using system software. Provides a time slot connection path from the backplane to the MUSAC, EPIC and Framers.

EPIC The EPIC allows the MCU to detect, configure and interface to CODEC based line cards.

Master Clock The Master Clock is a free running crystal oscillator.External Clock Interface

Supplies an ITU G.703 standard (clause 10), external G.703 synchronization clock input and output.

Acom Card Reference

184 025-9574E

System Clock Selection Circuit

Selects the system clock synchronization source form the external G.703 clock, one of the 2 framers, a G.703 clock source from another card by the back-plane, or to free run as a system master.

HDLC to Backplane

An HDLC controller is used to communicate with other HDLC capable line cards in the subrack.

Power Circuit Includes filtering and over voltage protection on the Vcc rail and a soft-start circuit to limit the inrush current at power up.

Backplane Connector

A DIN41612 type connector that carries signals for power, communications, card detection and ringer monitoring.

BLOCK DESCRIPTION

185


MCU Interfaces

Front Edge Layout

The front edge of the MCU (shown in Figure 58) has status LED indicators, a reset button, and connectors for external interfaces.

Figure 58: MCU - Front Edge Layout

Physical Layout

No interfaces.

Rear Edge Layout


Clock Tx/Rx

X32

X31

A B

ResetSwitch

RS-232 SerialCommunicationsPort 1 ( DB9 Female)X17

LEDIndicators1 Green2 Green3 Green4 Yellow5 Yellow6 Yellow7 Red8 Red

Extractionlever

RS-485/422 SerialCommunicationsPort 2 ( DB9 Female)X18

X33

2Mbps Port 1

2Mbps Port 2

X13 (Rx)

Clock Tx/Rx

X14 ( Tx)

X11 (Rx)

X12 (Tx)

A B

ResetSwitch

RS-232 SerialCommunicationsPort 1 ( DB9 Female)X17

LEDIndicators1 Green2 Green3 Green4 Yellow5 Yellow6 Yellow7 Red8 Red

Extractionlever

RS-485/422 SerialCommunicationsPort 2 ( DB9 Female)X18

X15 ( Tx)

2Mbps Port 1

2Mbps Port 2

X16 (Rx)

Not Fitted onMCU3 Single

E1 120Ω and T1 100 Ω E1 75 Ω

Not Fitted onMCU3 Single

Port used for E1,ISDN, and HDLCsignaling.

Port used for E1,ISDN, and HDLCsignaling.

Port used for E1,T1, ISDN, andHDLC signaling.

Port used for E1,T1, ISDN, andHDLC signaling.

Acom Card Reference

186 025-9574E

Status LED Indicators

The MCU card status indicators are connected to the microprocessor system, which updates the LEDs every second, indicating the basic status of the MCU. The functions of the LEDs are shown in Figure 59 and Figure 60. These functions are also described in further detail in Table 108 and Table 109.

The left column of LEDs (A) indicate status for the top port of the MCU. The right column of LEDs (B) indicate status for the bottom port of the MCU.

LED Indicators (MCU3/4 ALS)

Figure 59: MCU3/4 Status Indicators (When Used in ALS)

Table 108: MCU3/4 Status Indicator Functions (When Used in ALS)

A B1 GREEN RUN Indicator (Flashing)2 GREEN Spare3 GREEN Ringer 2 OK4 YELLOW Link 2 Service Alarm5 YELLOW Link 2 LMFA6 YELLOW Link 2 NOS7 RED Programmable Alarm8 RED Link 2 LOS

Spare / Master State GREEN 1Spare GREEN 2Ringer 1 OK GREEN 3Link 1 Service Alarm YELLOW 4Link 1 LMFA YELLOW 5Link 1 NOS YELLOW 6System Reset RED 7Link 1 LOS RED 8

LED Color Status Indicated When On or Flashing

A1 Spare orMaster State

Green For OpenSky only, this indicates if the rack is the master. Otherwise it is a spare.

B1 RUN Green MCU is running and operational, flashes once every 2 seconds.2 Spare Green N/A3 Ringer OK Green Ringer is OK and fuse on RGU card (Ring Generator Unit) is OK. The Ringer

2 LED gives the status of either the secondary ringer on the RGU card (if fitted) or an external ringer source when connected. The MCU checks that the ringer is operational and indicates an error (LED off) if a ringer is faulty or not present.

4 Service alarm Yellow Service alarm is active. This is a summary alarm in accordance with CCITT recommendation G.732. One or more of the following conditions will activate the link service alarm:

• An error ratio of 10E-3 or greater on the frame alignment signal.• Loss of incoming G.703 signal at the G.703 port (NOS).• Loss of frame alignment (LOS).• Loss of multiframe alignment (LMFA).• Receipt of an alarm indication signal.

5 LMFA Yellow Loss of multiframe alignment. Indicates a failure to receive a correct sequence of frames in the G.704 Channel Associated Signalling (CAS) multiframe format. The LMFA alarm becomes active if a multiframe alignment word is not detected within a six millisecond period.

187


LED Indicators (MCU4 ADS)

Figure 60: MCU4 Status Indicators (When Used in an ADS)

6 NOS Yellow Indicates a loss of the incoming signal, such as a physical break in the link. An alarm is generated if the incoming data stream has no pulses (no transitions or logic zero) for 64 pulse periods (single pulse period = 244ns). The NOS alarm also activates if the incoming pulses are below a set voltage threshold.The NOS alarm clears after the signal has been present for 5 pulse periods.

A7 System Reset Red MCU is in a reset state. The ALS will not transmit data on any port while the primary MCU is in reset.

B7 Programmable Alarm

Red This programmable alarm LED is programmable Output Alarm B7 LED in IMS Output Alarm programming.

8 LOS Red Loss of sync (signal is present but cannot lock onto the TS0). Indicates that the frame alignment is not being received correctly. This alarm is set after three incorrect frame alignment words are received consecutively. The alarm is cleared after receiving a valid frame alignment word in frame n, a valid service word in frame n+1 and a valid frame alignment word in frame n+2.

LED Color Status Indicated When On or Flashing

A B 1 GREEN RUN Indicator (Flashing) 2 GREEN LCB 2 or ISB Port 3 GREEN Spare or ISB Group 4 YELLOW Link 2 Bad/RRA 5 YELLOW Link 2 LMFA 6 YELLOW Link 2 NOS 7 RED Spare 8 RED Link 2 LOS

Spare GREEN 1 LCB 1 or ISB Port GREEN 2 Spare or ISB Group GREEN 3 Link 1 Bad/RRA YELLOW 4 Link 1 LMFA YELLOW 5 Link 1 NOS YELLOW 6 System Reset RED 7 Link 1 LOS RED 8

Acom Card Reference

188 025-9574E

Table 109: MCU4 Status Indicator Functions (When used in an ADS, not as an Intersite Bearer)

LED Color Status IndicatedWhen On or Flashing

A1 Spare Green Spare.B1 Run Indicator Green Flashes every second.2 LCB Green Status of the LCB link:

• Steady on = LCB present and active• Slow flash (1Hz) = LCB present and in standby mode• Fast flash (5Hz) = LCB present and in standby mode but is still getting

system information from the active LCB3 Spare Green Spare.4 Bad/RRA Yellow Some fault condition such as LOS, NOS, or AIS. If LOS and NOS LEDs are off,

this indicates an RRA (received remote alarm).5 LMFA Yellow Loss of multiframe alignment. Indicates a failure to receive a correct sequence of

frames in the G.704 Channel Associated Signalling (CAS) multiframe format. The LMFA alarm becomes active if a multiframe alignment word is not detected within a six millisecond period.

6 NOS Yellow No incoming signal detected. Indicates a loss of the incoming signal, such as a physical break in the link. An alarm is generated if the incoming data stream has no pulses (no transitions or logic zero) for 64 pulse periods (single pulse period = 244ns). The NOS alarm also activates if the incoming pulses are below a set voltage threshold.The NOS alarm clears after the signal has been present for five pulse periods.

A7 System Reset Red MCU is in a reset state. The ALS will not transmit data on any port while the primary MCU is in reset.

B7 Spare Red Spare.8 LOS Red Loss of sync (signal is present but cannot lock onto the TS0). Indicates that the

frame alignment is not being received correctly. This alarm is set after three incorrect frame alignment words are received consecutively. The alarm is cleared after receiving a valid frame alignment word in frame n, a valid service word in frame n+1 and a valid frame alignment word in frame n+2.

189


When an MCU4 is used for an Intersite Bearer, LEDs 2 and 3 function in a different manner. Furthermore, LED 2 indications mean different things depending on the LED 3 indications. The following table describes MCU4 LED indications when used as an Intersite Bearer. It should be read left-to-right; determine the status of LED 3 first, then LED 2.

Table 110: MCU4 Status Indicator Functions (When used in an ADS as an Intersite Bearer)

* Includes ports configured as Main, Main Backup, Standby and Standby Backup ports.** Includes ports configured as Extender and Standby Extender ports.

LED ISB Status Indicated

3(ISB Group)

2(ISB Port) Main/Standby Main/Backup

Fast flashing (5Hz)

Fast flashing (5Hz) Offline, not ready, or errored Offline, not ready, errored, or configured as inactive standby

Slow flashing (1Hz) Offline, not ready, or errored Standby ready

Slow flashing (1Hz)

Fast flashing (5Hz) Standby ready Offline, not ready, errored, or configured as inactive standby

Slow flashing (1Hz) Standby ready Standby ready

Steady on

Fast flashing (5Hz)(*main/backup ports) In use (Main) Offline, not ready, or errored

Slow flashing (1Hz)(*main/backup ports)

In use (Main) Online backup

Steady on(*main/backup ports)

In use (Main) Online active

Fast flashing (5Hz)(**extender ports)

In use (Main) Offline or errored

Steady off(**extender ports)

In use (Main) Online

Note ISB port LEDs are individual and can have different indications. ISB port LEDs help determine if a main/backup changeover is allowable.

Note ISB group LEDs are grouped; all ports in the Main group should all have the same indication, and all ports in the Standby group should have the same indication. ISB group LEDs help determine if a main/standby changeover is allowable.

Acom Card Reference

190 025-9574E

Reset

The reset button on the front edge of the MCU is connected to circuitry that activates the System Reset LED (A7) and sends a reset signal to the microprocessor. When the reset button is pressed on a primary MCU in an ALS, all other cards in the subrack are reset. When the reset button is pressed on an MCU in an ADS or a secondary MCU in an ALS, only that MCU is reset; all other cards continue to operate.

During the reset sequence, the microprocessor performs a series of checks and tests, including a power on self-test (if enabled). A number of LEDs are activated for around ten seconds for a primary MCU (ALS) and three seconds for a secondary MCU (ALS) or an MCU in an ADS. Correct operation is indicated in the following procedure.

♦ To reset an MCU card:

1. LED A7 (System Reset) comes on when the Reset Button is held down.2. LED A7 turns off and B1 (Run) turns on when the Reset button is released.3. A number of LEDs (nine or ten) turn on for a period and then turn off.4. LED B1 (Run) starts flashing.

In an ALS, the primary MCU has a longer start-up time than secondary cards, because during its power-up sequence it detects and tests all other cards in the subrack. Secondary MCUs do not perform these functions and have a shorter reset/power-up sequence.

A reset may also be initiated by the microprocessor system by the Reset Subrack command in the system software. During this type of reset the System Reset LED will not be active.

Settings

Jumper Settings

G.703 Cable Shield

Jumper links are provided for the local grounding of the G.703 ports as required by G.703 standard. They should be removed when the remote equipment requires TNV isolation or is not classified as SELV.

Note LED numbers are indicated in Figure 58.

Note For MCUs installed in an ADS, there is no primary/secondary distinction because there is no primary MCU. In an ADS subrack, the DCU holds the configuration for the subrack and controls ADS subrack messaging. To reset all cards in an ADS subrack, press the DCU reset button.

191


Figure 61: Jumper Setting to Ground Transmit Shields

Jumper links are also provided to connect transmit shields to receive shields. It is recommended not to connect these shields in order to prevent the flow of current through the shield between the two systems. However, if the link is greater than 30 meters, the connection shield at both ends (Rx and Tx) may reduce the standing waves present on the cable. These links should only be fitted if problems are encountered.

Figure 62: Jumper Settings for Rx to Tx Shield Connections

Serial Port 2

Jumpers may be used to select the mode (RS-422 or 485), duplex (2-wire or 4-wire) and line termination.

Note The default factory setting has transmit shields grounded.

Note Default factory setting has receive shields not connected to Tx.

Tx Ports

With this jumper configuration the shield is grounded

Jumpers X46, X43, X45

1 2 3

Setting for Rx not connected to Tx

1 2 3

X38, X23, X22

Acom Card Reference

192 025-9574E

Figure 63: Jumper Setting for RS-485 Mode, 4-Wire, Unterminated

Figure 64: Jumper Setting for RS-485 2-Wire, Unterminated

Figure 65: Jumper Setting for RS485 Line Termination

Note Default factory setting.

Note Other jumpers can be set as shown in Figure 63 and Figure 64 to select 4 or 2-wire operation.

Note Other jumpers can be set to select 2 or 4-wire operation.

x24 x28

x20 x21

x29 x37

x27

X25

X30

X26

X36

x24 x28

x20 x21

x29 x37

x27

X25

X30

X26

X36

x24 x28

x20 x21

x29 x37

193


Figure 66: Jumper Setting for RS422 Mode

Connector Detail

External Clock-In

The External Clock-In port allows the MCU to be synchronized to an external 2048 kHz G.703 clock signal. The MCU will only use an external clock source when it is the highest priority valid clock source. A valid clock source is one that is within the correct frequency range for a minimum of four seconds.

External Clock-Out

The External Clock-Out port is connected to the system clock. This allows external devices to be synchronized to the subrack.

G.703 Link

G.703 ports are the main interface for the MCUs. The G.703 ports allow 2048Kb/s synchronous transmission and reception of CRC4 and Double frame data (E1), or 1544Kb/s 12 frame Multiframe and Extended Superframe (T1).

Serial Communications Port 1 (RS-232)

This port provides an RS-232 interface between the MCU and a local maintenance terminal, such as a personal computer running IMS software. The MCU pin-out is configured as a DCE, which requires a ‘straight through’ cable to connect to a PC (DTE). Communication settings are: 38,400 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no flow control.

Serial Communications Port 2 (RS-422/485)

Serial Port 2 is identical to Serial Port 1 but uses the RS-485 or RS-422 protocol. These protocols allow for transmission distances of up to 1200 meters. When using the RS-485 protocol, multiple subracks can be connected to a multi-drop cable, which is then controlled by a single PC running IMS. The IMS software allows access (through a

Note RS-422 mode requires that component D46 is fitted (factory modification).

x24 x28

x20 x21

x29 x37

x27

X25

X30

X26

X36

Acom Card Reference

194 025-9574E

network address) to any of the subracks connected to the cable. This port is also used for NMS (Network Management System) applications.

Termination resistors are provided on the MCU card and may be enabled or disabled using jumper links. The terminators should be enabled when Port 2 is used in RS-422 mode. They should also be enabled for the MCU card at the end of a network when in RS-485 mode.

The default factory configuration of Serial Port 2 is four-wire RS-485 with no line termination. RTS functionality can be provided for special applications but requires a factory modification to fit component D46.

Real Time Clock (RTC)

The RTC is used to facilitate the Acom RTC system. This is an advanced configurable system that has support for DST, GMT offsets, NTP sources, multi-site redundant RTC sources, and multi-site operation over different time zones. For more information about the Acom RTC system, see the IMS ADS chapter in Acom Software Configuration (P/N 025-9529).

Serial Ports

Serial Port 1 is used for local IMS programming and firmware updates. Serial Port 2 can be used to connect all Acom subracks to the NMS computer by RS-485. This is normally not required in an Acom system, because time slot 16 can perform the same function when the NMS is connected to a DS3.

Table 111: Serial Port 1 (X17) DB9 Female Detail

Note The program cable is a straight through cable, connecting Port 1 with the PC (pins 2 to 2, 3 to 3, and 5 to 5).

Pin Name Function Signal Direction

1 NC2 TXA + Transmit data Output from MCU3 RXA + Receive data Input to MCU45 GND Ground67 CTSA + Clear To Send Input to MCU8 RTSA + Request To Send Output from MCU9

195


Table 112: Serial Port 2 (X18) DB9 Female Detail

Table 113: Serial Port 2 (X19) IDC10 Socket Detail

G.703 Interface

The G.703 is the port used to interface to E1, T1, ISDN, and HDLC signaling. The E1 rate is 2.048 Mbps and the T1 rate is 1.544 Mbps. ISDN and HDLC are signaling protocols used for various applications.

Table 114: G.703 Connectors – E1 75Ω Build


1 TXB - Transmit data Output from MCU2 TXB + Transmit data Output from MCU3 RXB + Receive data Input to MCU4 RXB - Receive data Input to MCU5 GND Ground6 CTSB - Clear To Send Input to MCU7 CTSB + Clear To Send Input to MCU8 RTSB + Request To Send Output from MCU9 RTSB - Request To Send Output from MCU


1 GND Ground23 RXB - Receive data Input to MCU45 TXB - Transmit data Output from MCU6 CTSB - Clear To Send Input to MCU7 RXB + Receive data Input to MCU8 CTSB + Clear To Send Input to MCU9 TXB + Transmit data Output from MCU

10

Connector Function Signal Direction

X13 Link 1 receive port Input to MCUX14 Link 1 transmit port Output from MCUX11 Link 2 receive port Input to MCUX12 Link 2 transmit port Output from MCUX16 External clock in port Input to MCUX15 External clock out port Output from MCU

Acom Card Reference

196 025-9574E

Table 115: G.703 Connectors – E1 120Ω Build and T1 100Ω Build

MCU Installation

MCU Installation in ALS

The rules for installing an MCU in an ALS are as follows:• The MCU card is hot pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power is

applied to the rack, except for the primary MCU. There are also special conditions for hot plugging an MCU when there are fourteen G.703 links installed in one subrack (see the following bullet items).

• An MCU card may be fitted in any slot except slot 12.• MCU cards may be fitted to provide thirteen G.703 links in one subrack.• A fourteenth G.703 link can be used with the provision that all the MCU cards are

installed at power-up. Hot plugging an MCU in a subrack with fourteen links causes the Primary MCU to re-allocate backplane resources to the MSU or to another card installed in the subrack. This will result in the fourteenth link becoming unavailable.

• A MCU card must be fitted in slot 0 to function as the Primary MCU for the subrack. This card is not hot pluggable.

MCU Installation in ADS

The rules for installing an MCU in an ADS are as follows:• The MCU card is hot pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power is

applied to the rack.• An MCU card may be fitted in slots 2, 3, and 4.• Install MCU cards from left to right, so a DS3 switch with...

• ...one MCU card should reside in slot 2.

Connector Function Pins for Balanced Receive Pair

Pins for Balanced Transmit pair

X32 Link 1 port 1, 2 4, 5X31 Link 2 port 1, 2 4, 5X33 External clock port 1, 2 4, 5

Note ALS slots are numbered starting with “0”.

Note ADS slots are numbered starting with “1”. ADS slots may also be identified with an “L” or “R” for those situations where it is important to know which DS3 switch in the subrack is being discussed (left or right). For example, slot “1L” is the first slot on the left side and slot “3R” would be the third slot on the right side.

197


• ...two MCU cards should reside in slots 2 and 3.• ...three MCU cards should reside in slots 2, 3, and 4.

MCU Alarm Generation

See Appendix C: Alarms on page 371.

MCU Technical Specifications




Table 119: Operational Timing

Parameter Max

Differential Voltage at any G.703 Port 5 mADifferential Voltage at Clock Input Port 5 VCommon Mode Voltage at G.703 Ports 0 VCommon Mode Voltage at Clock In Port 0 V



Parameter Typical

Overall length (front to back) 220 mmOverall Depth (between card guides) 233 mmOverall Height 16 mmThickness of printed board 1.6 mm

Parameter Conditions Typical Max. Units

Time to detect another card in subrack - - 35 sWatchdog time-out to internal reset 1 - 800 - msRun LED flash rate Not in reset 2 - secPeriod between LED updates Not in reset 1 - secPeriod of RTC update to secondary MCU - 0.5 - hourTime to detect loss of signal (LOS) - 15.6 - µsError free seconds before clock source can be used as a valid system clock 2

- 4 - s

Acom Card Reference

198 025-9574E

1.The operation of the Watchdog Timer causes an internal reset only and does not cause the MCU Reset LED to operate.

2.Clock sources may include recovered or external clocks.

1544 Kbps Data Processing

Main Interface Data Rate: 1544 kbps ± 50 ppmFrame Format: Selectable 12 Frame Multi-Frame or Extended

SuperFrameFrame Rate: 8000 frames/secondFrames per Multi-frame: 12 or 24Time slots per Frame: 24Bits per Time Slot: 8Multiplex Principle: Time Slot Interleaving

2048 Kbps Data Processing

Main Interface Data Rate: 2048 kbps ± 50 ppmFrame Format: Selectable Double-Frame or CRC Multi-frameFrame Rate: 8000 frames/secondFrames per Multi-frame: 16Time Slots per Frame: 32Bits per Time Slot: 8Multiplex Principle: Time Slot Interleaving

2048 kbps Digital Interface – 75Ω G.703/G.823

Physical Connection: Coaxial, type SMB (RG179 Coax)Line Code: HDB3Line Impedance: 75Ω (unbalanced)

Table 120: 75Ω Digital Interface - Electrical Characteristics

Error free seconds before Link alarms are deactivated. - 4 - s

Parameter Conditions Typical Max. Units

Parameter Conditions Min. Typical Max Units

Bit Rate - 2047897 2048000 2048102 HzPeak voltage of a mark (pulse) - 2.13 2.37 2.61 VPeak voltage of a space (no pulse) - -0.237 0 0.237 VNominal pulse width - - 244 - nsIntrinsic Jitter 20 –1E5 Hz - - 0.015 UI p-pReceiver Differential Input Threshold - - 1.04 - VReturn Loss 102-2048 Hz 18 - - dBInput Signal Attenuation No equalizing. - 6 - dB

199


1544 Kbps Digital Interface – 100Ω G.703

Physical Connection: Symmetrical pair, type RJ-45 (UTP Cable)Line Code: B8ZSLine Impedance: 100Ω (balanced)

Table 121: 100Ω Digital Interface – Electrical Characteristics

2048 kbps Digital Interface – 120Ω G.703/G.823

Physical Connection: Symmetrical pair, type RJ-45 (UTP Cable)Line Code: HDB3Line Impedance: 120Ω (balanced)

Table 122: 120Ω Digital Interface – Electrical Characteristics

External Clock Interface – 75Ω G.703/G.823

Physical Connection: Coaxial, type SMB (RG179 Coax)Line Code: NRZLine Impedance: 75Ω (unbalanced)


Bit Rate - 1543923 1544000 1544077 HzPeak voltage of a mark (pulse) - 2.3 3.0 3.7 VPeak voltage of a space (no pulse) - -0.3 0 0.3 VNominal pulse width - - 323 - nsReceiver Differential Input Threshold - - 200 - mVIntrinsic Jitter 20 – 1E5 Hz - - 0.015 UI p-pReturn Loss 102-2048 Hz 18 - - dBInput Signal Attenuation - - 6 - dB


Bit Rate - 2047897 2048000 2048102 HzPeak voltage of a mark (pulse) - 2.70 3.00 3.30 VPeak voltage of a space (no pulse) - -0.3 0 0.3 VNominal pulse width - - 244 - nsReceiver Differential Input Threshold - - 200 - mVIntrinsic Jitter 20 – 1E5 Hz - - 0.015 UI p-pReturn Loss 102-2048 Hz 18 - - dBInput Signal Attenuation - - 6 - dB

Acom Card Reference

200 025-9574E

Table 123: 75Ω Clock Interface - Electrical Characteristics

External Clock Interface – 100Ω G.703

Physical Connection: Symmetrical pair, type RJ-45 (UTP Cable)Line Code: NRZLine Impedance: 100Ω (balanced)

Table 124: 100Ω Clock Interface - Electrical Characteristics

External Clock Interface – 120Ω G.703/G.823

Physical Connection: Symmetrical pair, type RJ-45 (UTP Cable)Line Code: NRZLine Impedance: 120Ω (balanced)

Table 125: 120Ω Clock Interface – Electrical Characteristics

Maintenance Terminal Interface RS-232

Physical Connection: DB9 FemalePhysical Interface: RS-232C / V24Line Settings: 38400, N, 8, 1

Table 126: Maintenance Terminal Interface – Electrical Characteristics


Clock Out Port Frequency - 2047897 2048000 2048102 HzClock In Port Frequency - 2047693 2048000 2048307 HzClock Signal Peak Voltage - 0.75 1.0 1.5 VClock Signal Nominal Pulse Width - - 244 - ns


Bit Rate - 1543923 1544000 1544077 HzPeak Voltage - 1.0 1.5 1.9 VNominal Pulse Width - - 323 - ns


Bit Rate - 2047897 2048000 2048102 HzPeak Voltage - 1.0 1.5 1.9 VNominal Pulse Width - - 244 - ns


Data Rate - - 38400 - bpsTransmitter Output Voltage Swing 3 kΩ Load ±5 ±9 - V

201


NMS Interface – RS-422 / RS-485

Physical Connection: DB9 FemalePhysical Interface: RS-422 / RS-485Line Settings: 9600, N, 8, 1

Table 127: NMS Interface – Electrical Interface


Physical Connector: DIN41612 Type C 64 pin male

Table 128: Backplane Interface - Electrical Characteristics

Real Time Clock

Time Format: 24 hour, 1 second resolutionDate Format: 365-day calendar with leap year correctionData Backup: Backup capacitor stored voltage

Receiver Voltage Range - -30 - +30 VReceiver Input Low Threshold - - 1.2 - VReceiver Input High Threshold - - 1.7 - VReceiver Input Hysteresis - - 0.5 - VReceiver Input Resistance - 3 5 7 kΩ

Transmitter Output Resistance - 300 - - Ω

Transmitter Output Short Circuit Current - - ±10 - mA



Data Rate - - 9600 - bps

Transmitter Differential Output Swing No Load - 5 - V

Transmitter Differential Output Swing 50Ω Load 2.7 - - V

Transmitter Differential Output Swing 27Ω Load 1.5 - - V

Transmitter Output Short Circuit Current Output High - - 250 mA

Transmitter Output Short Circuit Current Output Low - - 250 mA

Receiver Input Hysteresis - - 70 - mV

Receiver Input Resistance - 12 - - kΩ

Receiver Differential Input Threshold - -0.2 - 0.2 V


+5 Volt Power Consumption 1.35 A-12 Volt Power Consumption 50 mA

Acom Card Reference

202 025-9574E

Backup Duration

The card can hold time without power for up to three days.


Compliant to AS3548, Class A and FCC Part 15, Class A.

Main Supply Unit (MSU)

P/N 950-0487

The MSU provides DC-DC conversion that powers the Acom subrack or ADS rack from a battery or rectifier ‘station supply.’ The input voltage must be in the -20 to -60 VDC range. The MSU generates the +5, +12, and –12 volt power rails required by the plug-in cards as well as an isolated –12 volt supply used for TNV circuitry. The MSU also handles system alarms and provides a general purpose 4-wire audio interface. (See MSU Options in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.)

The MSU card has the following features:• DC-DC conversion• Redundant / Load sharing operation• Automatic shutdown on failure• LEDs and relays for three G.732 composite general system alarms• Six general-purpose alarm inputs• Six alarm outputs, one fixed and five programmable general-purpose• A general-purpose 4-wire audio interface intended for use as an engineering order

wire (EOW) system, voice recorder output, or as a test port• Tone generation

MSU Block Diagram

Figure 67 shows the major functional blocks in the MSU. Table 129 describes these functional blocks in detail.

203


Figure 67: MSU Functional Block Diagram

Table 129: Description of MSU Functional Blocks

+5V

+12V

-12V

V BAT

TNV -12VSWITCH MODEPOWERSUPPLY

ISOLATEDSWITCH MODE

POWERSUPPLY

PSU TNV Side

SELV Side

RXA Rx

MSU3

RXB

Audio Interface

600R

TXA

TXB600R

+6dB

Tx

Regulation58V Max

Slow TurnOn

Over VoltageProtection

Reverse VoltageProtection

RF FilterLPF

WATCHDOG

TNV Side

TNV or User Equip

BatteryVoltage-StationSupply

+VV

AO11

AO21

-VV

AI21

AI11

Alarm Interface

AO11’

AO21’

AI11’

AI21’

Alarm I/O 1 & 2

+ve Batt

-ve Batt

CODEC 1+VV

AO12

AO22

-VVAI22

AI12

Alarm Interface

AO12’

AO22’

AI12’

AI22’

Alarm I/O 3 & 4

+ve Batt

-ve Batt

WatchdogMonitorInput

WatchdogAlarm

POWERON/OFF

CODEC 2+VV

AO13

AO23

NO Relay

-VV

AI23

AI13

Alarm Interface

AO13’

AO23’

AI13’

AI23’

Alarm I/O 5 & 6

+ve Batt

-ve Batt

IOM-2BUS TOBACKPLANE

BusVoltages toSubrackBackplane

ToneGen 3

ToneGen 2

ToneGen 1

G.732 ALARMSURGENT, NON-URGENT,

SYSTEM OK

Sense

Current Share

RELAYS + LEDsContacts

Block Description

RF filter This is a passive RF filter used to ‘clean’ external DC power.Over voltage protection

Transient over voltage protection is provided by passive components. The module also contains components that prevent damage if the station supply is connected in reverse polarity.

Acom Card Reference

204 025-9574E

MSU Interfaces

Front Edge Layout

The front edge of the MSU (Figure 68) has status LED indicators, battery supply connection, power-on switch, and a connector for external interfaces.

Regulation Regulates the voltage supply to the MSU card and to the backplane to a maximum of –60V (input voltage). The regulator also monitors the incoming supply and will shut down the entire subrack if an over voltage condition occurs larger than -64 ± 3 volts. Transient increases in the supply rail larger than -60 volts can be tolerated. The module also provides a ‘slow turn-on’ facility to prevent large in-rush currents at power-on.

Isolated switched mode power supply

The main DC to DC voltage conversion. There is 1.5 kV isolation between the input and output. A separate TNV -12 volt supply is also generated. Each voltage rail lights a front-panel LED to indicate that voltage is present. Regulation of the power supply is controlled by a 5V remote sense lead from the backplane. Current sharing between two MSUs is controlled by a connection on the backplane between the two units.

Audio Interface The audio interface and general alarm inputs and outputs are almost identical to the audio interface and the E&M inputs and outputs on the EMU (6R90524). The CODECs interface to the MCU by the IOM-2 buses on the backplane. Each CODEC can provide two audio channels, and signaling bits for the alarm leads and card maintenance.The transmit audio is amplified by a 7 dB opamp to compensate for the loss through the feed resistor and the insertion loss of the transformer.Audio in both directions is 600 ohm impedance and transformer isolated. The audio channel is intended for system level functions such as driving a voice recorder, providing an omnibus or order wire, or providing a test port. When used in this mode, two of the alarm inputs (AI11/2) and outputs (AO11/2) become un-available.

Alarm Interface The general alarm inputs and outputs are provided by optocouplers. The lines are grouped into pairs that use the same reference voltages. DIP switches and gates on board allow the polarity of the alarm outputs to be inverted. The output leads have secondary protection against over voltage, but are not protected against short circuit.

Watchdog Monitors the operation of the primary MCU processor on an ongoing basis and raises an alarm if a problem is detected.

CODEC The CODEC performs the analog-to-digital conversion of the audio signal, detects the signaling information from the alarm interfaces, and makes the data available to the MCU through the internal IOM-2 bus.

Tone generator The CODECs are used to generate tones used by cards in the subrack.G.732 alarms This module provides the required alarms for a CCITT G.732 system. This requires

that communication equipment should generate a composite general alarm for any condition that would create an alarm. These are grouped into three broad categories- ‘Urgent,’ ‘Non-Urgent’ and ‘System OK.’ Three on-board LED’s are provided, Red, Yellow and Green. Each alarm condition also has an on-board relay with the relay contacts that are available on the front DIN connector.

Block Description

205


Figure 68: MSU Front Edge Layout

Physical Layout

No interfaces.

Rear Edge Layout


LED Indicators

LED status indicators are provided on the front of the card, as shown in Figure 68; their functions are listed in Table 130.

X1PowerSupplyConnector

LED Indicators

1 Green TNV -12V2 Green +5V

Extractionlever

LED Indicators

+12V Green-12V Green

A C

32

P4 Audio andAlarmInterface

1

3 Red Over Voltage Alarm4 Green Supply ON

Watchdog Alarm RedInput supply present Green

Green InformationYellow Non-Urgent AlarmRed Urgent Alarm

Power SwitchOFF

ON

21

43

Acom Card Reference

206 025-9574E

Table 130: Status Indicator Functions

Reset / Shutdown

The MSU includes circuitry that resets the two CODEC chips when the subrack is reset. Pressing the reset button on the Primary MCU or applying power to the subrack causes the subrack to be reset.

During reset the MSU does not pass audio, and the alarm inputs and outputs will not be functioning. Power supply voltage generation is not affected.

Automatic Shutdown

The MSU will shutdown in an attempt to protect the Acom equipment when exposed to extreme voltage conditions. (See Table 137 for the exact specifications.)

An MSU will shutdown and remain off if one of the following events occur:• Over voltage on the +5, +12 or –12 volt power rails• Over current draw on the +5, +12 or –12 volt power rails

An MSU will shutdown but may recover if any of the following events occur:• Over voltage on the input battery feed. Removal of the over voltage condition (3V

hysteresis) turns the supply back on.• Under voltage of the input battery feed. Removal of the under voltage condition

turns the power supply back on.

Position Color Function Operation

First row left Green +12V Active under normal operating conditionsFirst row right Green TNV -12V Active under normal operating conditionsSecond row left Green -12V Active under normal operating conditionsSecond row right Green +5V Active under normal operating conditionsThird row left Red Watchdog alarm Active under an alarm conditionThird row right Red Over voltage alarm Active under an alarm conditionFourth row left Green Battery present Active when supply connectedFourth row right Green Battery turned on Active when switch turned on

Position Color Function Operation

Left in tri-level Green G.732 System OK Active under System OK alarmMiddle in tri-level Yellow G.732 Non-Urgent Active under Non-Urgent alarmRight in tri-level Red G.732 Urgent Active under Urgent alarm

207


Settings

DIP Switch Settings

Switch X3 can be used to invert the polarity of the alarm output (AO) leads. Table 131 lists the DIP-switch number for each alarm out line.

A switch is in the ‘On’ position when the link is moved towards the backplane edge of the card. A switch is in the ‘Off’ position when the link is moved towards the front of the card.

Table 131: DIP Switch Functions

1. Also see the paragraph “Changeover Hardware and the MSU.”

Jumper Link Settings

Reference Voltage Strapping

The input and output alarm circuits operate from a reference voltage supply, which may be connected in two different ways.

• Jumper links are provided on the MSU that allow the reference voltage to be connected from either the backplane power supply or from interface connector P4. If the backplane supply is used, then the alarm circuits are not isolated from the subrack.

• By connecting an external supply to the reference voltage pins on P4, the alarm in and out lines can be isolated from the subrack.

Jumpers J1 to J6 are provided to connect the +VV and –VV supply lines to the six alarm circuits. For example, J1 connects +VV, and J2 connects –VV to the alarm in and alarm out circuits for Channel 1 (Figure 71 and Figure 72).

For isolation reasons, all jumper links must be set in the same position.

DIP Switch

MSU Alarm Switch

1Switch Pole

Switch setting for AO lead Fail and Idle State

AO Fail in Idle StateIMS Normal Output

AO Fail in Active StateIMS Inverted Output

Earth-off-idle Earth-on-idle Earth-off-idle Earth-on-idleX3 1 1 AO11 Off On On Off

2 2 AO21 Off On On Off



5 wdog 5 AO13 Off Off Off Off


- 7 N.C. - - - -

- 8 N.C. - - - -

Acom Card Reference

208 025-9574E

Jumpers J10 to J12 are provided to connect the three G.732 normally open relay contacts from either the backplane power supply or from the interface connector P4.

Table 132: Reference Voltage Jumper Settings

Note that pin 1 is the square pad at the left-hand side of the jumper outline.

Strapping for Single Backplane Systems

Jumpers J7 to J9 are provided to fit the MSU into a single backplane subrack. If an MSU is linked for a single backplane subrack, but is installed into a dual backplane subrack, no physical damage will occur, but the isolation between TNV and SELV equipment is compromised.

Table 133: Configuration Jumpers for the Lower Backplane


Use voltage from front connector (factory default):

(J1-J6, J10-J12)Use battery voltage from backplane:

(J1-J6, J10-J12)

1 3

1 3

Warning! When the MSU is configured for single backplane, and the reference voltage is sourced from the backplane, the TNV to SELV barrier is negated. In this configuration, the equipment connected to the alarm circuits must have an SELV rating in order to preserve the SELV rating of the backplane - hence the entire subrack.


Use MSU in a dual backplane subrack (factory default):

(J7-J9)

Use MSU in a single backplane subrack: (J7-J9)

Note Note that pin 1 is the square pad at the top side of the jumper outline.

STOP

1

3

1

3

209


Connector Detail

All external user signal connections are made at the front edge of the card through connector P4 (pin 1 at the bottom of the card). The connector pin out is shown Table 134.

Table 134: User Interface Connector (P4) pin out

External battery supply connections are made at the front edge of the card through connector X1 (pin 1 at the top of the card). The connector pin out is shown in Table 135.

Table 135: Battery Supply Connector (X1) Pinout

Direction Function Pin Pin Function DirectionOUT TX1A 32a 32c TX1B OUTIN RX1A 31a 31c RX1B INOUT AO11 30a 30c Ch1 +VVIN AI11 29a 29c Ch1 –VVOUT AO21 28a 28c AI21 IN

Spare 27a 27c SpareSpare 26a 26c Spare

OUT AO12 25a 25c Ch2 +VVIN AI12 24a 24c Ch2 –VVOUT AO22 23a 23c AI22 IN

Spare 22a 22c SpareSpare 21a 21c Spare

OUT AO13 20a 20c Ch3 +VVIN AI13 19a 19c Ch3 –VVOUT AO23 18a 18c AI23 IN

Spare 17a 17c SpareSpare 16a 16c SpareSpare 15a 15c SpareSpare 14a 14c Spare

OUT G.732 OK COM 13a 13c G.732 OK NO OUTSpare 12a 12c SpareSpare 11a 11c SpareSpare 10a 10c SpareSpare 9a 9c Spare

OUT G.732 Non-Urgent COM

8a 8c G.732 Non-Urgent NO

OUT

Spare 7a 7c SpareSpare 6a 6c SpareSpare 5a 5c SpareSpare 4a 4c SpareSpare 3a 3c Spare

OUT G.732 Urgent Com 2a 2c G.732 Urgent NO OUTSpare 1a 1c Spare

Pin Function

1 and 3 Negative battery2 and 4 Positive ground

Acom Card Reference

210 025-9574E

Audio Channel

The audio interface is a 4-wire audio (two Tx and two Rx). The channel is usually used as an order wire, allowing installers to communicate with each other during the install or during system testing. The interface is identical to that on an EMU. When the audio port time slot is connected (using the system software), alarm inputs and outputs 1 and 2 become unusable. The inputs and outputs cannot be used as E&M type leads, because the signaling is not passed through the system.

The transmit and receive gains can be set using the system software. When the transmit and receive gains are set to 0 dB, the insertion loss on both the transmit and receive paths is 0 dB.

Audio Connections

Figure 69 through Figure 72 show simplified circuit diagrams for the audio and alarm ports.

Figure 69: Audio Receive (Input) Circuit Schematic

Figure 70: Audio Transmit (Output) Circuit Schematic

Alarm Connections

Figure 71: Alarm Output Circuit Schematic

Rx A

Rx B600

Codec

+12

Tx A

Tx B

600Codec

-12

+VV

AO

Jumper Link

Internal +V Supply

(J1, J3, J5)

211


Figure 72: Signaling Input Circuit Schematic

MSU Installation in Racks

Load Sharing and Redundancy

Two MSUs can be installed into slots 11 and 12 of a subrack. With this configuration, the MSUs share the load of the subrack. If one MSU fails (or its battery feed is interrupted), the remaining MSU takes over and powers the entire rack with no interruption to the operation of the rack.

Rules for installing an MSU in an Acom Line Subrack (ALS) are as follows:• A MSU must be fitted to slot 12 in the ALS.• A second MSU may be inserted into slot 11 in the ALS.• A second MSU card is hot pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power

is applied to the first MSU, providing the above two points are noted.

Rules for installing an MSU in an ADS Subrack are as follows:• A MSU must be fitted to slot 6 of the subrack.• A second MSU may be inserted into slot 5 of the subrack.• A second MSU card is hot pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power

is applied to the first MSU, providing the above two points are noted.

Suggested installation method:1. Insert MSU into subrack.

Internal -V Supply

+VV

AI

Jumper LinkInternal +V Supply

Jumper Link-VV

(J1, J3, J5)

(J2, J4, J6)

Note If the failure is at a subrack level, such as a power rail being shorted to ground, both power supplies are shut down.

Warning! Do not apply power and/or turn on the power switch to an MSU that is not fully inserted in the subrack.

Do not remove an MSU from a subrack with the power switch for that MSU turned on.

STOP

Acom Card Reference

212 025-9574E

2. Connect power up to MSU.3. Turn power switch on.

Suggested removal method:1. Turn power switch off.2. Remove power connection.3. Remove MSU from subrack.

MSU Alarm Generation

The failure of a CODEC, the failure of interface from the CODEC to the backplane, or the removal of the MSU from the rack, will generate a configuration alarm. The MSU can also generate alarms through six alarm inputs.

Table 136: MSU Alarms

Alarm Outputs

The MSU has six opto-isolated alarm outputs and three alarm relays for Urgent, Non-Urgent, and Informational alarms. (See Table 134 for pin outs.) One of the six alarm outputs is fixed as a watchdog alarm and the other five are fully configurable using the system software. Detailed alarm output information is provided in Appendix C: Alarms on page 371. Each of the three output relays coincides with an LED on the front of the MCU (red, yellow, and green).

You can map any alarm generated by any of the cards contained within the subrack to any alarm output on the MSU. More than one alarm may be mapped to an alarm output on the MSU; the alarms are logically OR’ed by the MSU. The exact operation of the relay (i.e.,


User Input Alarm Programmable 0 ProgrammableMSU Card Failure CE (Configuration Error) 0 UrgentMSU Card Removal CE (Configuration Error) 0 UrgentCODEC Failure CE (Configuration Error) 0 UrgentFailure of interface between CODEC and backplane CE (Configuration Error) 0 UrgentMSU Input Alarm 1 Programmable 27 ProgrammableMSU Input Alarm 2 Programmable 28 ProgrammableMSU Input Alarm 3 Programmable 29 ProgrammableMSU Input Alarm 4 Programmable 30 ProgrammableMSU Input Alarm 5 Programmable 31 ProgrammableMSU Input Alarm 6 Programmable 32 Programmable

213


normally open or normally closed) can be set by using jumpers on the MSU board. The operation of the alarms can also be inverted by using the system software.

Watchdog Alarm

The watchdog alarm (AO13) of the MSU is a fixed alarm. If the primary MCU stops responding, the watchdog alarm is activated. This mapping is fixed and cannot be removed, however other system alarms can be mapped to the watchdog alarm output.

While the Watchdog is fixed to alarm on loss of primary MCU or power, other alarms may be mapped to the output in addition to the fixed conditions.

Programmable Alarms

The other five alarms on the MSU are fully configurable. You can map any card alarms to any MSU alarm output.

Alarm Inputs

The MSU has six alarm inputs that can be used to generate alarms within the MSU. (See Table 134 for pinouts.) These inputs can be used to trigger output alarms, or perform functions such as ‘acknowledge all alarms.’ This mapping is done using the system software.

The alarm input circuits are designed to detect the presence of a ‘ground’ on their input and alarm outputs or to generate a ‘ground’ (+VV = Gnd, -VV = -20 to -70V). Jumper links on the MSU card allow the alarm reference voltages (VV) to be connected to the backplane power supply or to pins on the external connector P4. The external connection allows isolation of the input and output circuits from the subrack power supply.

MSU Technical Specifications


Note The alarm outputs for each unit are identical when two MSU’s are installed.

Note In the case of a power failure, the watchdog alarm (AO13) becomes active, however the watchdog LED does not illuminate.

Parameter Conditions Max

Operating Input Voltage (DC) - -60 VSignaling Out Line Current (M Lead) Peak maximum 150 mAVoltage applied to Alarm Lines - +VV + 0.2 VAlarm reference voltage +VV to -VV Peak maximum 70 VDC bias across audio inputs or outputs - 0 V

Acom Card Reference

214 025-9574E



Table 140: Power Supply Characteristics

Audio Interface

Physical Connector: DIN41612 Type C, 64-pin malePhysical Interface: 4-wire 600Ω balancedNumber of Channels: 1Sampling: A Law PCM (8 kHz)




Parameter Typical


Parameter Min. Max UnitsInput voltage range -20 -61 VOver-voltage shutdown -61 -67 VUnder-voltage shutdown - -20 VRegulated backplane battery voltage - -58 VOutput Currents +5V 1 12 A

+12V 0.05 1 A-12V 0.05 1 ATNV-12V - 0.6 A

Maximum output power 94 WMaximum Input Current

Input voltage = 20V - 6 AInput voltage = 48V - 2.5 AInput voltage = 60V - 2.1 A

Power Supply Efficiency 70 75 %

Parameter Conditions Min. Typical Max Unit

Input Isolation - 1.5 - - kVReceive gain range (configurable) - -7.4 - +18.6 dBTransmit gain range (configurable) - -20.1 - +5.8 dBCombined receive and transmit gain range - -27.5 - +24.4 dBMaximum instantaneous input level Rx gain = 0 dB - - +3 dBm

215

Ring Generator Unit (RGU)

Alarm Interface

Physical Connector: DIN41612 Type C, 64-pin malePhysical Interface: NPN TransistorNumber of Inputs/Outputs: 6 inputs and 6 outputs

Table 142: Alarm Interface Characteristics


Compliant to AS3548, Class A and FCC Part 15, Class A.


P/N 950-0518 (24V)P/N 950-0519 (48V)

The RGU card provides a ring voltage source required to ring telephones. When an RGU card is installed in a subrack, the ring voltage can be connected to outputs of TIE line cards via the backplane.

The RGU contains one ringer module that provides a 20 hertz ring voltage source. It can also accept an external ring source voltage.

Maximum instantaneous input level Rx gain=-6dB - - +9 dBmMaximum instantaneous output level Tx gain = 0 dB - 3 - dBmMaximum instantaneous output level Tx gain = 6 dB - - +9 dBmFrequency response - 300 - 3400 HzVariation of gain with level 0.3 - 2.4 kHz -0.5 - +0.5 dBVariation of gain with level 0.3 - 3.4 kHz -0.5 - +1.8 dBSignal to total distortion 1020 Hz 33 - - dBReturn loss 0.3 - 3.4 kHz 20 - - dB



Reference Voltage +VV to -VV - -18 -48 -60 VVoltage at unconnected input - - -VV+2 - VInput pulse width assumed to be noise - - - 0.5 msInput current with input connected to +VV - - 4 - mAOutput voltage when output is active - +VV-1.2 - +VV VMaximum continuous output current - - - 60 mAG.732 Alarm relay contact rating - - - 0.5 A

Acom Card Reference

216 025-9574E

The RGU can be configured to use either the internal ringer or the external ringer input. It can also use both in a Primary/Standby (when there is more than one ringer source) mode where the ringer source is switched if one ringer source fails.

The external ringer source input is also useful in applications where the number of telephones to be supplied exceeds the output rating of the internal ringer module.

The ring voltage output from the RGU is connected to the subrack backplane. TIE cards in the subrack take the ring voltage from the backplane and use a relay to connect the ring voltage to the TIE two-wire interfaces when a ring tone is required.

The RGU has the following functionality and features:• LED indication of the ringer voltage status (healthy or fail).• Automatic selection of a healthy ringer source when the Primary/Standby mode is

used.• Output short circuit protection of the internal ringer source.

RGU Description

Block Diagram

A functional block diagram of the RGU is illustrated in Figure 73. Table 143 describes each of these blocks in detail.

Figure 73: Functional Block Diagram

Ringer SourceSelector

InternalRingerOK

J2

RingerSource

Detector

+5

BackplaneConnector

- Bat

Power Fitter &Soft Start

FSI


RingerModule

ExternalSource Input


ExternalRingerOK

Ringer SourceDetector

BalancingTransformer Input

J1

Relays

Active Ringer Source

217


Table 143: Description of RGU Functional Blocks

RGU Interfaces

Front Edge Layout

The front edge layout of the RGU card is illustrated below.

Block Description

Ringer Module Generates a 20 Hz sine wave, which is used as the internal ringer source. The Ringer Module is internally powered from the Backplane BAT supply.

Relays These perform switching of the ringer source voltages and are controlled by the ringer source selection circuit. The output of the relays is called the ‘active’ ringer source.

Ringer Source Detector

Monitors the voltage and frequency of the internal ringer voltage, the external ringer voltage and the ‘active’ ringer sources. The signals are used to drive the status LEDs and are sent to the MCU card for monitoring. The detectors include amplitude discrimination circuits so that the outputs will only be active when the ringer source is greater than a specified minimum voltage.

Ringer Source Selector

Provides signals for switching of the relays and includes a circuit that turns the relays on at a zero crossing of the ringer voltage.The MCU continuously monitors the signals from the ringer detection circuits and decides which source should be selected as the active ringer source. This decision is communicated to the MSU card which sends a signal to the Ringer Source Selector. Because only one signal is used, there are only two possible states: internal ringer or external ringer.

LEDs Two status indicators are provided for monitoring the status of the ringer voltages. The LEDs are driven from the ringer source detector circuits for the internal ringer and the external ring source.An LED will be active (on) when the ringer source voltage is negative and off when positive. Normal operation is indicated by a flickering of the LED at a rate of around 20 Hz.

External Source Input

The external source input includes a MOV based over-voltage protection circuit and a fuse. Refer to RGU Installation on page 221 for more detail.

Power Circuit Includes filtering of the BAT and +5 voltages supplied from the backplane and soft start circuits to limit the inrush current at power up.

BackplaneConnector

Two DIN41612 type connectors are used to carry signals for power, ringer detection and ringer selection. The active ringer voltage is also carried by the backplane to TIE cards in the subrack.

Acom Card Reference

218 025-9574E

Figure 74: Card Front Edge Layout: Types 11-12R90523

Physical Layout

No interfaces.

Rear Edge Layout

Connectors:

• DIN41612 Type C 64 pin male• DIN41612 Type C 32 pin male

Table 144: Backplane Electrical Characteristics

A B LED Indicators

Green External Ringer OK

Extractionlever

LED Indicators

Internal Ringer Ok Green

21 External

RingSourceconnector

43


+5 Volt Power Consumption - - 10 - mA–BAT Supply Voltage Rangea 11R90523 24 48 59 V DC–BAT Supply Voltage Rangea 12R90523 18 24 36 V DC

a. A supply of less than the specified typical voltage will result in a reduction in the rated output voltage and power of the internal ringer source.

219


LED Indicators

The status LED indicators are connected to the Ringer Source Detection circuits and operate independently of other cards in the subrack.

The Ringer Source Detection circuits will turn a LED on when the ringer source voltage is in the negative half cycle of the waveform and greater than a minimum RMS voltage. When the ringer source voltage is in the positive half cycle or less than the minimum required amplitude then the Ringer Source Detection circuit will turn the LED off. Normal operation is indicated by a flickering of the LED at a rate of around 20 Hz.

Because the LED indicators are hard-wired to circuits within the RGU card, they operate independently of the MCU and the TIE cards and will function correctly when there is no MCU or TIE in the subrack.

Figure 75: RGU Status Indicators

Table 145: RGU Status Leds

Reset

Pressing the reset button on the MCU may result in a temporary change of the relay positions. Both relays will move to the off position (thus connecting the internal ringer source as the active ringer) while the button is pressed.

A system reset has no other effect on the RGU and the status indicators will continue to operate.

Settings


LED Color Status Indicated when LED is Pulsing (LED will Flicker at 20 Hz)

Internal Ringer OK Green Indicates that the internal ringer module is active.

External Ringer OK Green Indicates that the external ringer source is active.

A B LED Indicators

Green External Ringer OK

Extractionlever

LED Indicators

Internal Ringer Ok Green

Acom Card Reference

220 025-9574E

Connector Detail

External Ring Input – Connector J1

Details and rules for connection of an external ring voltage at connector J1 are included in sections RGU Technical Specifications on page 222 and RGU Installation on page 221.

Ring Voltage Output - Connector J2

Connector J2 is not normally fitted to the RGU and is used for special applications where the ring voltage is to be connected from external equipment. The main intention of providing J2 is to allow users to generate a balanced ring signal using an externally connected transformer and series capacitor as shown in Figure 76.

Figure 76: External Balancing Transformer Connection

Connector J1 is provided for connection of an external ringer source. The pinout detail of J1 is as follows. There are connection on the RGU printed wiring board between pins 1 and 2 and between pins 3 and 4.

Table 146: RGU Power Connector

Pin Function

1 External Source +2 External Source +3 External Source -4 External Source -

1

2

3

4

External RingTransformerRGU

J2 6.8 F

Ring

Balanced RingIn

- Bat

3 1

4 2

221


Figure 77: External Ring Signal Connection

RGU Installation

Card Placement

Rules for installation of an RGU in a subrack are as follows:The RGU card is hot-pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power is ap-plied to the rack.The RGU should normally be installed in slot 11 of the subrack.If ten line cards are required in the subrack then the RGU should be fitted in slot 1and the line cards in slots 2 to 11.

Card Detection

The MCU cannot detect which slot the RGU is in. It detects the presence of theRGU by monitoring the outputs from the ringer source detectors. Rather than show-ing a card located in the subrack, the status of ringers is shown as a text message onthe IMS Main Window.

External Ringer Source

The rules for connecting an external ringer source are as follows:• Voltage and current limitations are detailed in RGU Technical Specifications on

page 222.• The external source must have no DC component.• The external circuit must be floating (i.e. both ends of the circuit should not be

connected to any other point in the system).• The input circuity for the external ringer source input is shown in Figure 78.

Ring Signal(No DC)

J1

Acom Card Reference

222 025-9574E

Figure 78: External Ringer Source Input Circuit

User Serviceable ItemsFuse FS1: 3AG Glass Slow Blow, 1.5A 250VFuse FS2: 3AG Glass Slow Blow, 1.5A 250VFuse FS3: 3AG Glass Slow Blow, 1.5A 250V

Connector J1: Weidmuller Part No. BL412593.6Connector J2: Weidmuller Part No. 1124.6

RGU Alarm Generation

Table 147: RGU Alarms

RGU Technical Specifications



12

34

To Relay and RingerSource Detector

10

+V Bat -V Bat

MoVTransientSupressors

FS3

FS2

Connector J1


RGU Card Failure RFA (Ring Fail Alarm) 23 UrgentRGU Card Removal RFA (Ring Fail Alarm) 23 Urgent

Parameter Conditions Max Units

Maximum Ringer Load Standard line length 24 RENExternal Ringer Input Voltage 100 VRMS

External Ringer Input Current 1.5 ARMS

DC Component of External Ring Voltage

0 Volts



223



Internal Ringer Source

Table 151: Electrical Characteristics: 11R90523

Table 152: Electrical Characteristics: 12R90523

External Ringer Input

Table 153: Ringer Electrical Characteristics

Parameter Typical


Parameter Conditions Typical Max Units

Rated Output Voltage –BAT = 48 V 86 - VRMS

Rated Output Powera

a. Rating specified for intermittent duty and not continuous operation.

–BAT = 48 V 20 - WRMS

Minimum Load Impedance –BAT = 48 V 250 - OhmsRated Frequency - 20 - HzLoad Regulation - ± 7 - %Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) - - 7.5 %

Parameter Conditions Typical Max Units

Rated Output Voltage –BAT = 24 V 86 - VRMS

Rated Output Powera

a. Rating specified for intermittent duty and not continuous operation.

–BAT = 24 V 15 - WRMS

Minimum Load Impedance –BAT = 24 V 300 - OhmsRated Frequency - 20 - HzLoad Regulation - ± 7 - %Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) - - 7.5 %


External Ringer Input Voltagea 50 86 100 VRMS

External Ringer Input Current - - 1.0 ARMS

DC Component of External Ring Voltage - - 0 V

Acom Card Reference

224 025-9574E


Compliant to AS3548 Class B.

Radio Interface Unit (RIU)

P/N 950-0838

The RIU is a card for the Acom Line Subrack (ALS) that provides interfaces for up to six conventional radio channels via local or tone remote control. The six channels can be configured to serve as an interface to a 2-wire or 4-wire tone remote base station, a local radio, or an E&M circuit*. Voice logger outputs are available for all six channels and all configurations.

The RIU card has LEDs that provide visible indication of COR (E) and PTT (M) status for each channel. Configuration and audio level adjustments are performed via the Integrated Management System (IMS).

a. A voltage below the specified minimum will not be properly detected by the RGU status monitoring circuits.

Note * The RIU does not have -48v capability on E&M lines.

225


RIU Description

Block Diagram

The following figure illustrates a system block diagram of the RIU.

Figure 79: RIU System Block Diagram

The following figure illustrates a hardware block diagram of the RIU.

Figure 80: RIU Hardware Block Diagram

Acom Line Subrack(ALS)

RIU (2) RJ-21's

Radio

Type 66 LoggerP

unchdown

Type 66 Radio

Punchdow

nVoice logger

audio andaux I/O

Radio

Radio

Radio

Radio

Radio

2-wire / 4-wire / localSelectable terminationSelectable gain control

Acom backplaneinterface and DSP

Tx audio

Rx audio

M / PTT

E / COR

I/O

Audio interface:

M-lead / PTT relay contact

E-lead Opto / COR comparator

Radio (1 of 6)Tx +Tx -Rx +Rx -M+ / PTTM - / PTTE+ / COR +E - / COR -

Tx / Rx summing

Aux I/O and Busy I/O

Logger (1 of 6)TxRxSum +TxRxSum -Aux InputAux OutputBusy I/OGnd

Acom Card Reference

226 025-9574E

RIU Interfaces

Front Edge Layout

The front edge layout of the RIU card is illustrated below.

Figure 81: RIU Front Edge Layout

PTT (M) for Channels 1-3 (left to right)COR (E) for Channels 1-3 (left to right)PTT (M) for Channels 4-6 (left to right)COR (E) for Channels 4-6 (left to right)

Channel Activity LEDs

25

1

50

2625

1

50

26

J2 Radio Interface Connector

J1 Voice Logger Interface Connector

Run LED

227


Rear Edge Layout

The rear edge layout of the RIU card is illustrated below.

32

1C A

32

1

C A

P1

P2

Acom Card Reference

228 025-9574E

Figure 82: RIU Interface and Jumper Locations

LED Indicators

See Front Edge Layout on page 226.

Reset

Pressing the reset button on the MCU results in a reset state for the RIU card. No output is generated during reset.

Settings

Most of the RIU configuration is performed in IMS (see Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529). Jumpers are used to configure channels for local or remote control. For jumper locations, see Figure 82. The following table provides jumper configuration information.

This figure shows approximate locations of certain components. It is not to scale.

P1

P2

JP35

JP6

FactoryUse Only

ACOM Radio Interface UnitDS1

DS2DS3DS4DS5

J1Voice LoggerInterface

J2RadioInterface

JP7

JP1JP2

JP8JP9

JP13JP14

JP18JP19

JP23JP24

JP28JP29

JP33

JP3JP4JP5

JP10JP11JP12

JP15JP16JP17

JP20JP21JP22

JP25JP26JP27

JP30JP31JP32

JP34

P3

BackplaneInterfaces

229


Table 154: RIU Jumpers

If any mixture of these Functions is used, set JP1=IN. (The only caveat is that you will not be able to connect telco lines to the card. This should not present any problem.)

Factory defaults JP34=OUT and JP35=A should never be changed.

Connector Detail

For connector locations, see Figure 82.

Voice Logger Connector (J1)

The RIU’s voice logger is just a line logger for the specific RIU channel it is attached to. The voice logger interface is a 50-pin RJ-21 connector with the following pinout:

Function Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

Local Radio Interface COR and

PTT

JP29=BJP30=AJP31=INJP32=BJP33=B






Dry(no VBAT)

E&M

JP29=OUTJP30=AJP31=OUTJP32=AJP33=B






Pin Description Type Notes

1 CH1 Voice Logger + Audio Output Paired with Voice Logger -• Transformer coupled• RO = 600 ohm +/- 10 %• Shall be capable of driving +5 dBm into 600 ohm• Shall withstand > 50 VDC through 1k ohm

26 CH1 Voice Logger - Audio Output See Voice Logger +3 CH1 Busy I/O + Open

Collector I/OPaired with signal ground

• Open collector input/output with hysteresis on the input

• 10k ohm pull up to +12 VDC nominal• RACTIVE < 50 ohms, RINACTIVE > 10k ohm• Shall withstand > 50 VDC through 1k ohm

28 CH1 Busy I/O - Ground Signal ground

Acom Card Reference

230 025-9574E

2 CH1 Aux In Input Paired with Aux In common• Input with hysteresis• 47k ohm pull up to +12 VDC nominal • Intended for a closure to ground, logic level or +12

VDC drive.• VACTIVE < 2 VDC, VINACTIVE > 4.75VDC • Shall withstand > 50 VDC through 1k ohm

27 CH1 Aux In Common Input Signal ground 4 CH1 Aux Out Output Paired with Aux Out Common

• Open drain output• RACTIVE < 10 ohms, RINACTIVE > 10k ohm• Shall withstands > 50 VDC through 1k ohm

29 CH1 Aux Out Common Output Signal ground5 CH2 Voice Logger + Audio Output30 CH2 Voice Logger - Audio Output7 CH2 Busy I/O + Open

Collector I/O32 CH2 Busy I/O - Busy return6 CH2 Aux In Input31 CH2 Aux In Common Input 8 CH2 Aux Out Output33 CH2 Aux Out Common Output9 CH3 Voice Logger + Audio Output34 CH3 Voice Logger - Audio Output11 CH3 Busy I/O + Open


Collector I/O40 CH4 Busy I/O - Busy return14 CH4 Aux In Input39 CH4 Aux In Common Input 16 CH4 Aux Out Output41 CH4 Aux Out Common Output


231


Radio Interface Connector (J2)

The radio interface is a 50-pin RJ-21 connector with the following pinout.

17 CH5 Voice Logger + Audio Output42 CH5 Voice Logger - Audio Output19 CH5 Busy I/O + Open


Collector I/O48 CH6 Busy I/O - Busy return22 CH6 Aux In Input47 CH6 Aux In Common Input 24 CH6 Aux Out Output49 CH6 Aux Out Common Output



1 CH1 Transmit audio + Audio Output Paired with Transmit Audio -• Transformer coupled• ROUT = 600 ohm +/- 10% while driving the line,

ROUT > 200k ohm while not driving the line• ROUT shall not vary from its 1 kHz value by more than

+/-10% over the range 300 Hz - 3 kHz• Capable of driving +10 dBm into a 600 ohm load• Also receive + for two wire application, must accept +10

dBm from the line without clipping• Shall withstand > 50 VDC through 1k ohm

26 CH1 Transmit audio - Audio Output See Transmit Audio +

2 CH1 Receive audio + Audio Input Paired with Receive Audio -• Transformer coupled• RIN = 600 ohm +/- 10% or RIN > 50k ohm, selectable• Must accept +10 dBm from the line without clipping• AC coupling installer selectable• Shall withstand > 50 VDC through 1k ohm

27 CH1 Receive audio - Audio Input See Receive Audio +

Acom Card Reference

232 025-9574E

28 CH1 E+ or COR+ Input Paired with E -Configured as "E":

• Capable of withstanding +/- 56.5 VDC• Opto-isolated, non-polar voltage detector• VIL = +/- .6 VDC, VIH = +/- 18 VDC• Configured as "COR":• Digital input with hysteresis• 47k ohm pull up to +12 VDC nominal• RIN > 9k ohm• VT ~ 2.5 VDC

3 CH1 E- or COR- Input See E +

29 CH1 M+ or PTT Output Paired with M -• Isolated relay contact capable of carrying 100 mA• RACTIVE < 4 ohms (VO < .2 V @ 50 mA), RINACTIVE >

500k ohms• Shall withstand > 50 VDC through 1k ohm

4 CH1 M- or PTT Output See M +

5 CH2 Transmit audio + Audio Output

30 CH2 Transmit audio - Audio Output

6 CH2 Receive audio + Audio Input

31 CH2 Receive audio - Audio Input

32 CH2 E+ or COR+ Input

7 CH2 E- or COR- Input

33 CH2 M+ or PTT Output

8 CH2 M- or PTT Output



















233


RIU Installation

Card Placement

The RIU card can be installed in slots 2-11 of the Acom Line Subrack (ALS).

Channel TX and RX Wiring

The RIU’s radio interface connector (J2) uses 4-wires for TX and RX. This interface supports three radio wiring schemes: 4-wire, 2-wire simplex, and local radios. The following table provides the necessary wiring information.

Table 155: RIU TX and RX Wiring
















25 Ground Ground

50 Ground Ground


RIU J2 4-Wire 2-Wire Simplex Local

TX + TX + TX/RX + TXTX – TX – TX/RX – N/CRX + RX + N/C RXRX – RX – N/C N/C

Ground(Pin 25 or 50)

N/C N/C Ground

Acom Card Reference

234 025-9574E

RIU Alarm Generation

Table 156: RIU Alarms

RIU Technical Specifications

Table 157: Audio Levels

Gain adjustments can be made through IMS ALS, even while a line is active. See the Acom Software Installation and Configuration manual.




RIU Card Failure Configuration Error (CE) 0 UrgentRIU Card Removal Configuration Error (CE) 0 Urgent

Parameter Min Max Step Units

Input Gain 0 22.5 1.5 dBOutput Gain -46.5 0 1.5 dB



Parameter Typical

Overall Length (front to back) 220 mmOverall Depth (between card guides) 233 mmOverall Height 22 mmThickness of printed board 1.6 mmWeight 630 g

235

Recorded Voice Announcement (RVA) Card


P/N 950-0650

The Recorded Voice Announcement (RVA) card provides playback of recorded announcements. Multiple announcements may be recorded and stored in non-volatile memory. The playing back of the announcement is controlled by pre-determined events set up within the system.

The announcements stored in the RVA are downloaded into the cards non-volatile memory via Zetron maintenance terminal software. The RVA accepts 8kHz, 8-bit mono .wav files. If required, announcements can be recorded directly into the RVA via a handset that plugs into the RJ12 socket on the front of the card.

The RVA has the following functionality and features:• RVA playback uses the A-law PCM format• Announcements are stored in non-volatile memory (i.e. retained during power

down)• 516 seconds of total record time• Longest single announcement length of 30 seconds• Maximum of 30 separate recordings• Maximum of 30 simultaneous playbacks of one or more recordings• Able to playback an announcement while recording a new announcement• A dual purpose reset / heartbeat LED indicator.• Date / time stamp and name (up to 30 characters) for each announcement stored in

the non-volatile memory• RJ12 socket for recording and playback of announcement messages (invoked via

debug mode only)

RVA Block Diagram

A functional block diagram of the RVA is illustrated in Figure 83. Table 160 describes each of these blocks in detail.

Acom Card Reference

236 025-9574E


Table 160: Description of RVA Functional Blocks

BackplaneDrivers

(PCM bus)

Regulator/PSU Filtering

Clk

Sync

5V

PCM

3.3V

Host Processor(68MH360)

Bus/Timeslotselection

HDLC

2M (30 TS)

Host ProcessorFlash and RAM

Debug Port(RS232)

2M (1TS)

2x4Mb x 8 Flash

Headset Interface CODEC

Back

Plane

BLOCK DESCRIPTION

Regulator/PSU Filtering Includes filtering, over voltage protection and soft start circuits to limit the inrush current at power up.

Debug port Debug port for factory use onlyHost Processor Flash and Ram

Holds configuration data for the processor and memory for operation

Host Processor Controls all function of the board and audio processingBus time slot selector Selects back plane buses to transmit audio dataBack plane drivers Discreet drivers that interface back plane signals to the RVA board4Mb Flash Non-volatile memory used to store the recorded announcementsHeadset Interface RJ12 interface used to record voice announcementsCODEC Coder-decoder used to encode the audio from the Headset interface

237


RVA Interfaces

Front Edge Layout

The front edge layout of the RVA cards is illustrated below.

Figure 84: Card Front Edge Layout and Headset Pinout

Physical Layout

No interfaces.

Rear Edge Layout


LED Indicators

The status LED indicator shows the state of the RVA card. The status LED has three different modes, red, steady green and flashing green. Table 9 outlines LED stated and the associated RVA card status.

Table 161: RVA Status LEDs

A

Extraction lever

Audio Connector

Run / Reset LED

LED Color Status Indicated

Red Indicates the RVA is in a reset stateSteady Green Indicates that the RVA is in power-up initialization mode

Flashing Green Indicates that the RVA is operational

Acom Card Reference

238 025-9574E

Reset


Settings


Connector Detail

Headset Interface

Table 162: Headset Interface Pin Description

RVA Installation

Card Placement

The RVA can be installed in slots from 1 to 11. It may not be installed in Slot 0 as this is reserved for the primary MCU. It may not be installed in Slot 12 as this is reserved for the MSU.

The RVA card is hot-pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power is applied to the rack. The recorded announcements are stored in a non-volatile memory and are not lost when the card is removed from the subrack.

RVA Alarm Generation

Table 163: RVA Alarms

RVA Technical Specifications


Pin Description Direction

1 Mic Input2 Spkr + Output3 Spkr - Output4 GND -


RVA Card Failure Config Alarm 23 UrgentRVA Card Removal Config Alarm 23 Urgent


239




Physical Connector: DIN41612 Type C 64 pin male.

Table 166: Electrical Characteristics of the Back Plane

Audio Interface

Recording standard: A-law PCM (8 kHz)Playback via back plane: A-law PCM (8 kHz)


Operational Timing

Table 168: Operational Timing characteristics


Parameter Typical

Overall Depth (front to back) 220 mmOverall Height (between card guides) 233 mmOverall Width 22 mmThickness of printed board 1.6 mmWeight 380 g

Parameter Typical


Parameter Conditions Max.

Total recording time Standard RVA 516 secondsMaximum length of a single recording Standard RVA 30 secondsMaximum number of separate recordings Standard RVA 30 secondsMaximum number of simultaneous playbacks Standard RVA 30


Watchdog time-out to internal reseta - 500 1200 2000 ms

Run LED flash rate (green) Not in reset - 1 - Hz

Run LED In reset Solid red -

Acom Card Reference

240 025-9574E

Signaling Management Unit (SMU)

P/N 950-0512

The Signaling Management Unit (SMU) contains a microprocessor and up to three Digital Signal Processors (DSP), providing a general purpose signal processing resource for Acom systems. It also contains an IEEE 802.3 Ethernet port (10 Base-T) and a diagnostic serial port. With the optional SMU Adapter board (R93634), up to two of the Operators Console Unit analog-daughter boards can be mounted to the SMU board for additional I/O capability.

The microprocessor’s main functions are to communicate with the MCU card in slot 0 of the subrack and to manage the on-board signal processing and I/O resources. This includes translating resource allocation commands from the MCU and reporting operational status.

The SMU communicates with the MCU over an HDLC circuit on the subrack. It also has an RS-232 serial debugging port and status LED on the front of the card. The Ethernet port also has two diagnostic LEDs near the front of the card.

The SMU board supports up to three Digital Signal Processors to process the digitized audio information contained in the subrack PCM buses. These DSPs are connected through the FPGA to the PCM busses on the backplane and to the I/O connector to any daughter boards. A wide range of additional signal processing or specialized I/O capabilities are possible by designing daughter boards that mount on the SMU board and interface through the 100-pin I/O connector.

SMU interface circuits include the PCM and HDLC control buses, which are used to communicate with other cards in the subrack. These control buses are connected between cards by the backplane.

Multiple SMU cards can be installed in slots 1 through 11 of a subrack.

The DSP processing capabilities on the SMU provides the following functions:• Selective Calling (SELCAL) encoding and decoding• DTMF encoding and decoding• Complex tone generation with programmable tone type, frequency amplitude, and

duration• Voice detection (VOX)• Voice compression


241


SMU Block Diagram

Figure 85 shows the major functional blocks of the SMU and Table describes each of these blocks in detail.


SMU Description of Major Functional Blocks

Table 169: Description of SMU Major Functional Blocks

BackplaneConnectors

EthernetController

Soft Start &Regulators

FPGA Logic &Interface Circuits

RS-232 HDLC ControllerPort CPU

I/O ConnectorMemory


Isolated Power Supplies

DSP#3

DSP#2

DSP#1Ethernet

Port

Special Function Daughter Board Interface

Block Description


The microprocessor system combines a CPU with internal HDLC communications controller, memory, watchdog timer and reset circuitry to provide overall management of the SMU DSP resources. The microprocessor system controls the DSP resources and the PCM signal paths located in the FPGA and any daughter boards that are plugged into the I/O connector.

Digital Signal Processors

There are three independent DSP resources located on the SMU card. Each DSP can be connected to one of the backplane PCM busses and to daughter boards through the I/O connector.

Ethernet Controller The Ethernet controller is coupled directly to DSP #1 on the SMU card. It translates the internal digital data into the correct voltage and current levels to meet the IEEE 802.3 specification.

Ethernet Port IEEE 802.3 (10Base-T) port for data or audio.FPGA Logic and Interface Circuits

All of the SMU board logic and most of the PCM signal interconnections are located in a large FPGA device. There are interface buffers between the FPGA and the backplane connector to translate the voltage levels and provide the drive currents required by the backplane.

Acom Card Reference

242 025-9574E

HDLC to Backplane An HDLC controller located inside the microprocessor is used to communicate with master MCU located in slot 0 of the subrack.

RS-232 Port The RS-232 serial port allows direct communication to the SMU microprocessor by service personnel.

I/O Connector This 100-pin connector carries microprocessor and FPGA signals to the daughter cards. It also carries the three isolated 150-volt power connections.

Daughter Board(s) One custom SMU daughter board, or the SMU Adapter board, and one or two Acom Console Unit analog daughter cards can be installed on the SMU board.

Power Circuits Includes filtering and over voltage protection on the three input voltage rails, and soft-start circuits, to limit the inrush current at power up. There are three voltage regulators to create 3.3 VDC, 2.5 VDC, and 1.8 VDC supplies that are used on the card.

Upper Backplane Connector

A DIN41612 type 64-pin connector that carries signals for power, the internal PCM busses, slot identification and HDLC communications with the MCU card in slot 0.

Lower Backplane Connector

A DIN41612 type 32-pin connector that carries the –48 VDC input for the three isolated 150 VDC power supplies. This connector is not normally installed.

Block Description

243


SMU Interfaces

Front Edge Layout

Figure 86: SMU - Front Edge Layout

The front edge of the SMU in Figure 86 has an Ethernet connector, a Run LED, and the Diagnostic RS-232 connector.

Physical Layout

The SMU layout of major components is shown in Table 87. For a detailed layout of all components, see the SMU Component Overlay drawing (Zetron No. 410-0072).

LEVEREXTRACTION

ETHERNETPORT

X5

RUN LEDV6

RS-232 PORTX14

Acom Card Reference

244 025-9574E

Figure 87: Location of major Components - SMU

Rear Edge Layout


LED Indicators

The Run LED indicator blinks with a 2-second period, indicating normal operation of the SMU board (see Figure 86).

The Ethernet interface consists of the RJ-45 connector and two-surface mounted LED indicators. The top LED indicates a valid connection exists and the lower LED indicates data packet activity in either direction.

Lower BackplaneConnector

X19(optional)

Run LED

Upper BackplaneConnector

X4

IsolatedPowerSupply

PS3(Optional)

VoltageRegulator

VR3

IsolatedPower Supply

PS2(Optional)

IsolatedPower Supply

PS1(Optional)

GateArray

(FPGA)D17

VoltageRegulator

VR1

MotorolaMC68360

MicroprocessorD13

FLASHD23

FLASHD22

SRAMD15

SRAMD14

DSP3

D4

DSP2

D3

DSP1

D2

Daughter BoardAdaptor Connector

X18

VR2

EthernetControl

D5

CPLDD1

SerialPortX14

JTAG Connector

EthernetPortX5

245


Reset


Power-Up Self Test

The power-up self-test is a sequence of checks performed by the SMU microprocessor system. The tests are used to verify to the fullest possible extent that the SMU card is operational without requiring external equipment or connections. The SMU may be self-tested in any slot of the subrack.

Settings

Reset Jumper

The two pins located at X11 can be shorted together to force the SMU board into reset without effecting the other cards in the subrack(s). The reset switch on the front of the MCU board in slot 0 is normally used to reset the whole subrack.

Uninstalled Jumpers

There are several uninstalled 2-pin, 10-pin, 14-pin and 20-pin through hole pad sets on the SMU boards that are intended only for development purposes.

Connector Detail

Ethernet Port

Table 170: Ethernet Connector (X5) 8-pin male Detail

Diagnostic Serial Port

Serial cable: PN: 709-7592Line Settings: 38,400, 8, N, 1

Pin Name Function Signal Direction1 TX+ Transmit data Output from SMU2 TX- Transmit data Output from SMU3 RX+ Receive data Input to SMU4 No Connect5 No Connect6 RX- Receive data Input to SMU7 No Connect8 No Connect

Acom Card Reference

246 025-9574E

Table 171: Diagnostic Serial Port (X14) 5-pin male Detail

JTAG Connector

The 6-pin JTAG connector is located at X12. This connector is used during the production process to program the CPLD port located at D1. The signal details are shown in Table 172.

Table 172: JTAG Connector (X12) 6-pin male Detail

BDM Connector

The 10-pin Background Debug Mode (BDM) connector is located at X13. This connector is only used for development purposes and is not normally installed. The signal details are shown in Table 173.

Table 173: BDM Connector (X13) 10-pin male Detail

Pin Name Function Signal Direction1 RTS Request to send (not being used) Output from SMU2 TXD Transmit data Output from SMU3 RXD Receive data Input to SMU4 CTS Clear to send (not being used) Input to SMU5 GND Ground

Pin Name Function Signal Direction1 TMS Test Mode Select Input from SMU2 TDO Test Data Out Output from SMU3 TDI Test Data In Input to SMU4 TCLK Test Clock Input to SMU5 +3.3V +3.3 Volts dc Output from SMU6 GND Ground

Pin Name Function Signal Direction1 /DS Data Strobe Output from SMU2 /BERR Buss Error Bi-directional3 GND Ground4 DSCLK Development Serial Clock Input to SMU5 GND Ground6 FREEZE Breakpoint Acknowledge Output from SMU7 /RESET Reset Bi-directional8 DSIN Development Serial Data In Input to SMU9 +3.3V +3.3 Volts dc Output from SMU10 DSOUT Development Serial Data Out Output from SMU

247


Time Slot Connections

The SMU can be used to connect one or more time slots within the subrack. A description of time slot connection types can be found in the IMS chapter of the Acom Software Installation and Configuration manual (P/N 025-9529).

The time slot connections made on the SMU card are application dependent and are directed by the MCU located in slot 0.

Ethernet Interface

The Ethernet interface consists of the RJ-45 connector (X5), transformer (T1), controller (D5), nonvolatile memory (D6), and two surface mounted LED indicators. The top LED (V2) indicates a valid connection exists; the lower LED (V3) indicates data packet activity in either direction. DSP1 (D2) controls the Ethernet Controller through the CPLD (D1). The CPLD is used to expand the number of I/O addresses needed to control the Ethernet Controller and match the signal timing between the two ICs. DSP1 doubles the 39.00104 MHz clock input it receives from PLL (D8) to 78.00208 MHz for the internal timing in the CPLD IC. The Ethernet MAC address is stored in the nonvolatile memory (D6). The Ethernet interface is optimized for 100 ohm cables.

FPGA and Interface Circuits

The FPGA (D17) contains most of the logic on the SMU board. It is SRAM based and is programmed at start-up by the microprocessor. It contains several registers that are programmed by the microprocessor to control the routing of the serial signals between the three DSPs and the 14 PCM buses on the backplane. Other FPGA registers control connections between the second DSP serial ports and any daughter boards mounted to the SMU board.

The backplane signals all connect through 74LVT type buffers (D9, D10, D18 and D19) and receivers (D11, D20 and D24), which match the 5-volt, 74ABT logic levels on the other cards in the subrack. The exceptions are the 4.096 MHz clock and 8 KHz sync signals that have 100 ohm series resistors. This is to minimize RF emissions from the board.

Diagnostic RS-232 Interface

This port provides an RS-232 interface between the SMU and a local maintenance terminal. (This port is not intended for general use and should only be use for firmware upgrades or as instructed by Zetron maintenance personnel.)

The 6-pin connector (X14) provides an RS-232 interface between the SMU and a local maintenance terminal, such as a personal computer running a terminal capable of serial communication. The serial port controller is inside the microprocessor (D13). The 3.3-volt logic signals are translated to RS-232 levels (+/- 9-volts) by D21 before they are connected to the 5-pin diagnostic port connector (X22). This port runs at 38,400 Baud with 8 data bits and no parity. The 2 hardware control signals (RTS and CTS) are connected to the connector but are not used by the software to control the flow of data.

Acom Card Reference

248 025-9574E

DSP Interfaces

The Digital Signal Processors on the SMU are Analog Devices ADSP-218x parts that use an Internal Direct Memory Access (IDMA) port for connection with the microprocessor. The DSP software is loaded through this interface at startup. The FPGA provides additional logic to enable the microprocessor to access memory within the DSPs. The DSP output signal /IACK-DSPn is monitored by both the MC68360 and the FPGA. The MC68360 must wait for /IACK-DSPn to be true (low) prior to sending an address to the DSP or prior to any data access to the DSP. The FPGA provides the MC68360 bus transfer termination signal (/DSACK1) for all DSP bus cycles. The MC68360 internally terminates all other bus transfers based on the access times of the devices being accessed.

Each DSP has 2 independent serial interfaces. One operates at a 2 Mbps data rate and a sync rate of 8 kHz. This port is connected to one of the backplane PCM busses by logic in the FPGA. The other is connected through the FPGA to the I/O connector on the board. The Acom Console Unit daughter boards operate at a data rate of 1 Mbps and sync rate of 8 kHz, but the DSPs and FPGA allow operation up to 4 Mbps and sync rates up to 64 kHz on future daughter boards.

DSP1 has an additional interface to the Ethernet Controller (D5). The timing differences between the fast DSP and the slower CS8900 (D5) are handled by the CPLD (D1). This part is programmed through the JTAG connector (X12) during production test. The four connections between the CPLD and the FPGA are not used. If only one DSP is populated on a future version of the board, it must be DSP1.

I/O Connector and SMU Daughter Boards

The 100-pin I/O connector and 12 mounting holes provides a general interface for several types of SMU daughter boards. The SMU Adapter Board (702-0073) provides 3.3 V to 5 V level translators so it can be used to interface one or two Acom Console Unit analog daughter boards. The SMU board also has provision for three isolated DC to DC 150-volt power supplies to facilitate a future DC Remote Daughter Board.

The microprocessor address and data buses are isolated by D25, D26, and D27 prior to being connected to the I/O connector. Other I/O signals go directly to the connector for the greatest flexibility. The I/O connector signals are summarized in Table 174.

Table 174: Summary of I/O Connector Signals

Signal Source Signals Notes

Power Supplies +12V, +5V, +3.3V, -12V, GND There are 20 ground pins.Microprocessor A0 – A11, D24 – D31, R/W, /CS, /IRQ-DB1,

/IRQ-DB2, RESET-DB, /PCB-INA12 is used by the FPGA to create /CS-DB1 and /CS-DB2.

MC68360 I/O 10 general purpose I/O signals Use determined by the I/O board.FPGA I/O 2 clock inputs and 8 general purpose I/O signals DSP or PCM signals possible.Isolated Power 3 isolated DC Power Supplies (150V) Future DC Remote Daughter Board.Unconnected pins 11 unconnected pins used to provide isolation

249


SMU Installation

Card Placement

Rules for installing an SMU in a subrack are as follows:• The SMU card is hot pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power is

applied to the rack.• An SMU card may be fitted in any slot except slot 0 or slot 12.

Alarm Generation

Table 175: SMU Alarms

SMU Alarm Generation

See Appendix C: Alarms on page 371.

SMU Technical Specifications



SMU Card Failure CE (Configuration Error) 0 UrgentSMU Card Removal CE (Configuration Error) 0 UrgentAny of the three DSPs have a fault(watchdog, self test)

SMU 58 Urgent

DSP IDMA read/write failure SMU 58 UrgentFPGA failed to load SMU 58 UrgentDSP signal processing loop has too many modules enabled, exceeding the maximum number of DSP instruction cycles allowed

SMU 58 Urgent

SMU host processor believes DSP is running at the wrong speed(corrupt EEPROM can cause this)

SMU 58 Urgent

EEPROM cannot be read SMU 58 UrgentEEPROM read error (checksum bad) SMU 58 Urgent



Acom Card Reference

250 025-9574E


Table 178: Operational Timing

1The operation of the Watchdog Timer causes an internal reset only and does not affect other cards in the subrack.

Ethernet Interface

Interface specification:IEEE 802.3Physical Interface: 10 Base-TPhysical Connection: RJ-45 female

Table 179: Ethernet Interface – Electrical Characteristics

Maintenance Terminal Interface RS-232

Physical Connection: 5-pin maleRecommended cable: Zetron 709-7592Physical Interface: RS-232C / V24Line Settings: 38400, N, 8, 1

Table 180: Maintenance Terminal Interface – Electrical Characteristics

Parameter Typical

Overall length (front to back) 220 mmOverall Depth (between card guides) 233 mmOverall Height (does not include I/O cards) 21 mmThickness of printed board 1.6 mmWeight 360 g

Parameter Conditions Min Typical Max. Units

Run LED flash rate Not in reset - 1 - HzWatchdog time-out to internal reset 1 - 500 1200 2000 msec

Parameter Conditions Min Typical Max. Units

Transmitter Differential Output Voltage Peak 2.2 - 2.8 VReceiver Normal Squelch Level Peak 300 - 525 mVReceiver Low Squelch Level Peak 125 - 290 mVCable Impedance - 100 - Ω


Data Rate - - 38400 - bpsTransmitter Output Voltage Swing 3 kΩ load ±5 ±9 - VReceiver Voltage Range - -30 - +30 VReceiver Input Low Threshold - - 1.2 - V

251


PCM Bus Interface

Interface Data Rate: 2048 kbps ± 50 ppmFrame Rate: 8000 frames/secondTime Slots per Frame: 32Bits per Time Slot: 8Companding: A-law or Mu-law (configurable)Number of buses: 14

HDLC Interface

Interface Data Rate: 2048 kbps ± 50 ppmImplemented Functions: Rx, Tx and Collision DetectNumber of backplane pins:2

Backplane Control Signals

Implemented Signals: SCLK, SYPQ, RESET and 4 SLOT ID


Physical Connector: DIN41612 Type C 64 pin male

Table 181: Backplane Interface - Electrical Characteristics

Receiver Input High Threshold - - 1.7 - VReceiver Input Hysteresis - - 0.5 - VReceiver Input Resistance - 3 5 7 kΩ

Transmitter Output Resistance - 300 - - ohmTransmitter Output Short Circuit Current - - ±10 - mA



+5 Volt Power Consumption 0.60 A-12 Volt Power Consumption 5 mA

Acom Card Reference

252 025-9574E

Telephone Interface Unit (TIE)

P/N 950-0483 (Australia)P/N 950-0591 (USA)

The TIE is a line card that provides a data path from the six 2-wire audio interfaces on the front of the card to other cards through the backplane data bus. It provides an interface between external subscriber telephone equipment and a communications system that can handle all ringing and telephone line-state detection such as ring out/loop in signaling.

The TIE has six independent 2-wire telephone channels. Each channel has the following features:

• 600Ω or complex line termination• Battery voltage feed• Loop detection• Decadic dialing detection• Ring signal output (requires an RGU card in the subrack)• Earth Recall Signal detection• Line Break detection• Allows CLI to be passed transparently• 300 to 3400 Hz channel bandwidth• Line isolation

The channel gain can be set using the IMS software package.

TIE Block Diagram

Figure 88 shows the major functional blocks of the TIE. Table 182 describes each of these blocks in detail.

253


Figure 88: TIE Functional Block Diagram

Description of TIE Functional Blocks

Table 182: Description of TIE Functional Blocks

Codec 1/2


BackplaneConnector

Note: For clarity, only one of six channels is shown

ResetCircuit

LA

LB

Microprocessor Bus

Line Relay

+12 +5

-12

Power Filters& Regulation

FactoryTest

Interface

Hybrid

RingTrip

Detect

LineProtection

LoopDetect

BatteryFeed

Ring Voltage+ VBat

Line BreakSwitch

Block Description

Line Protection A surge suppression circuit comprising MOVs and inductors.Line Relay When the MCU activates a signaling bit to the TIE, the TIE uses a relay to

disconnect the line from the audio circuits and connect it to the ring voltage. A signaling bit from the Primary MCU controls the relay.

Line Break Switch The line break switch is controlled by a signaling bit from the Primary MCU and opens the lines so that no ring voltage or audio is connected.

Battery Feed Provides a DC battery voltage from the TIE to the line and appears as a high impedance AC.

Loop Detect Consists of detection circuits for positive and negative flow of battery voltage into the line. If either LA or LB is connected to ground, then the Loop Detect circuit allows the TIE to detect an Earth Recall Signal. Signaling bits indicating the status of the loop (i.e., loop detect and Earth Recall) are sent to the Primary MCU.

Hybrid A transformer and electronic circuit are used to provide line impedance of either 600Ω or Complex.

Ring Trip Detection

This circuit is used to detect a phone going off-hook when the TIE is ringing out. When activated, the Microprocessor disconnects the ring voltage by deactivating the Line Relay.

Acom Card Reference

254 025-9574E

TIE Interfaces

The TIE card interfaces can be connected to analog telephone line or to an EIE card interface. These interfaces are used to pass audio and ring voltage. The status of the lines is detected and the associated signaling such as ringing and loop detection are generated.

CODECs perform amplification and analog-to-digital conversion of the audio signals, which allows the gain of each channel to be programmed (using the IMS software package). Transmit and receive signals in excess of the maximum instantaneous input levels may be subject to clipping. When the transmit and receive gains are set to 0 dB, the insertion loss on both the transmit and receive paths is 0 dB.

When the TIE is installed in a subrack with an RGU card, the ring voltage generated by the RGU is used as the TIE ring signal. A TIE will function in a subrack without an RGU card, but there will be no ring voltage available at the TIE interface during ringing.

Signaling

The four types of signals used to control and monitor the status of the TIE interfaces are the following:

• Ring• Line break• Loop detect• Earth recall

Front Edge Layout

Figure 89 shows the front edge layout of the TIE card.

CODEC The CODEC performs the analog-to-digital conversion of the audio signal. The digitized audio and the signaling bits are transmitted to and received from the MCU through the backplane.Each TIE channel uses one half of a CODEC, and there is a total of three CODECs on the TIE.


The Microprocessor system combines a CPU, memory, watchdog timer and reset circuitry to provide overall management of the TIE. A factory test interface is provided at connector J15.

Reset Circuit The backplane reset line is connected to circuitry that resets the TIE when the subrack is reset or when the TIE is powered up.

Power Circuit Includes filtering, over voltage protection and soft start circuits to limit the inrush current at power up.

Backplane Connector

A DIN41612 type connector that carries signals for power, data, timing and card detection.

Block Description

255


Figure 89: TIE Front Edge Layout

Physical Layout

No interfaces.

Rear Edge Layout


LED Indicators

The TIE card has no LED indicators.

Reset

The TIE includes circuitry that resets the Microprocessor system at TIE power-up or when the subrack is reset (initiated by the primary MCU). It will also reset when the Watchdog timer function is activated. During reset the TIE does not pass audio, and the ringer voltage will not be present on the 2-wire interfaces.

a c

32

P4

1

Extractionlever

Acom Card Reference

256 025-9574E

Self Test

The TIE card is tested on power-up and after reset. The test sends packets of information between the CODEC circuits and the Primary MCU. The received data is then checked by the MCU to confirm the correct operation of the CODECs on the TIE card.The IMS self-test window shows the results of the self-test and does not perform a new test; there is no disruption to operation.

Settings

Gain Setting and Impedance

Changing the gain setting using the IMS software causes the TIE card to adjust the gain for the transmit or receive amplifiers within a CODEC circuit.

The receive gain adjustment allows signals to be amplified before analog-to-digital conversion. Increasing the receive gain may improve the signal to noise ratio for weakly received signals.

The transmit gain allows signals received from the far end of a link to be adjusted to a level that suits the local user. Changing the transmit gain may be required when the handset volume is too loud or too soft.

The line impedance can be configured for each line. A two-wire telephone line connected using a short cable can have an impedance of 600 ohm (resistive). As the length of the line increases, the resistance and capacitance increase and the impedance becomes complex (i.e., combination of resistive / capacitive and/or inductive impedance). The TIE includes a switchable network that is intended to help the TIE card match the impedance of longer lines. This network comprises 220 ohm resistive in series with a parallel network of 820Ω and 120 nF.

Ring Cadence and Ring Tone

These are set through the Special Settings menu as described in the IMS chapter of the Acom Software Installation and Configuration manual (P/N 025-9529).

Connector Detail

There are six channels of the TIE, which may be connected to any channel of other line cards (e.g., TIE, EMU or EIE) or to time slots of an MCU card. The signaling from the TIE card is processed by the MCU and passed in time slot 16 when CAS mode has been enabled. Signaling is not passed to a remote device on a G.703 link if CAS mode is not enabled for that link.

Loopback

When the IMS software is used to enable a loop back connection, a connection is made within the MCU crosspoint-switch to loop the data and signaling back to the same TIE channel. The loop back connection is not performed within the TIE, and the connection to

257


the channel is interrupted while the loop back is enabled. Disabling the loop back restores prior connections to the TIE channels.

P2

All external user signal connections are made at the front edge of the card by connector P2. The connector pinouts are shown in Table 183 on the following page.

Table 183: User Interface Connector (P2) Pinouts


- 32a 32c -

IN/OUT LA1 31a 1 31c LB1 IN/OUT

- 30a 30c -

- 29a 29c -

- 28a 28c -

- 27a 27c -


- 25a 25c -

- 24a 24c -

- 23a 23c -

- 22a 22c -


- 20a 20c -

- 19a 19c -

- 18a 18c -

- 17a 17c -


- 15a 15c -

- 14a 14c -

- 13a 13c -

- 12a 12c -


- 10a 10c -

- 9a 9c -

- 8a 8c -

- 7a 7c -

- 6a 6c -


- 4a 4c -

- 3a 3c -

- 2a 2c -

- 1a 1c -

Acom Card Reference

258 025-9574E

Line Protection Circuit

Figure 90: Line Protection Circuit Schematic

TIE Installation

Card Placement

Rules for installing the TIE card into a subrack are as follows:• The TIE card is hot pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power is

applied to the rack. • The TIE may be fitted to any slot in the subrack except slots 0, 1, and 12.

TIE Alarm Generation

The removal of a configured TIE card, or the failure of a CODEC, will generate a Configuration Error (CE) alarm.

Table 184: TIE Card Alarms

TIE Technical Specifications


LA

LB

180V 180V

TNVGround

Line Relay180V

.

.

Event Alarm Generated No Alarm Type

TIE Card Failure CE (Configuration Error) 0 UrgentTIE Card Removal CE (Configuration Error) 0 UrgentCODEC Failure CE (Configuration Error) 0 UrgentFailure of interface between CODEC and backplane.

CE (Configuration Error) 0 Urgent

Parameter Conditions Min. Max. Units

Line Interface DC Voltage - - 60 VRing Voltage - - 100 VRMS

259




Table 188: Operation Timing

Main Interface

Physical Connector: DIN41612 Type C 64-pin malePhysical Interface: 2-wire 600ΩNumber of Channels: 6Sampling: A-law PCM (8 kHz)

Table 189: Interface Characteristics



Parameter Typical


Parameter Min. Typical Max Units

Watchdog time-out to internal reset 500 1200 2000 ms

Note The operation of the Watchdog Timer causes a TIE reset only; it does not cause the subrack to reset.


Input Isolation - 1.5 - - kVExternal Line Loop Resistance 48V supply 0 - 1800 Ω

Receive gain range (configurable) - -6.2 - +19.7 dBTransmit gain range (configurable) - -19.8 - +6.2 dBCombined receive and transmit gain range - -26.0 - +25.9 dBMaximum instantaneous input level Rx gain=0 dB - - +3 dBmMaximum instantaneous input level Rx gain=-6dB - - +9 dBmMaximum instantaneous output level Tx gain=0 dB - 3 - dBmMaximum instantaneous output level Tx gain=6 dB - - +9 dBm

Acom Card Reference

260 025-9574E


Physical Connector: DIN41612 Type C 64-pin male



Compliant to AS3548 Class A and FCC Part 15, Class A.

Universal Input/Output (UIO)

P/N 950-0490

The Universal Input/Output (UIO) system card provides connections from the channel interfaces to the primary MCU by the backplane data bus. The card provides an interface between external equipment requiring discrete contact closure signals and a communications system.

Frequency response - 300 - 3400 HzVariation of gain with level 0.3 - 2.4 kHz -0.5 - +0.5 dBVariation of gain with level 0.3 - 3.4 kHz -0.5 - +1.8 dBSignal to total distortion 1020 Hz 33 - - dBReturn loss 0.3 - 3.4 kHz 20 - - dBChannel to channel cross talk - - - -66 dB


Parameter Max Units

-12 Volt TNV Power Consumption 71 mA+5 Volt Power Consumption 120 mA+12 Volt Power Consumption 5 mA-12 Volt Power Consumption 59 mA

261


UIO Block Diagram

The card has the following features:• Sixteen independent DC signaling inputs• Sixteen independent DC/AC signaling outputs• Configurable debounce time on inputs• 1.5 kV isolation on inputs and outputs• Debug interface to card with selftest capabilities• Hot-plugging capability

OUTPUT COMMONBUS

TNV_-12V

OUTA1

OUTC1

INPUT COMMONBUS

INA1

INC1

JMP1A..F

JMP19

JMP3

JMP2

15

30

30

15

INPUT CIRCUIT CH1

OUTPUT CIRCUIT CH1

DC-DCCONVERTER

OUTPUTBUFFERSU8,U9

INPUTBUFFERSU10,U11

Microprocessor (U1)ROM (U2)RAM (U3)Decoding (U4,U5)WatchDog (U6)

HDLC U7INPUT CIRCUITS CH2-CH16

OUTPUT CIRCUITS CH2-CH16

RLY1

+VE_BAT

-VE_BAT

F2

F3

LEGEND: 1.5KV Isolation BarrierProcessor Bus:Data,Address,ControlMisc. signal

DCLK

FSC

DU1

DD1

SCLK

SYPQ

CTX

CRX

CH B

CH A

RESET

EXT TNV SELV

P5PINS 1&3

P5PINS 2&4

Note: Fuses F2 and F3 are installed only if the TNV battery voltage isrequired on inputs or outputs. This voids the isolation between TNVand the external circuits.

Acom Card Reference

262 025-9574E


The following describes the major functional blocks illustrated in the above diagram.

Input Interface

The input interface is comprised of 16 identical circuits providing polarity and independent conversion of DC signaling inputs to opto isolated logic inputs. The rectified output from the bridge is then conditioned by the circuitry comprised of Q1, R1, R2, D1, and D2. This circuit configuration provides a constant current drive for the opto-coupler diode of nominally 1.5 mA over most of the input voltage range. Capacitor C1 across the rectifier input is for RF suppression, and varistor V1 is for transient over voltage protection. The isolated opto coupler logic output from device U12 is buffered from the system data bus by an octal latch, U10.

Output Interface

The output interface is comprised of 16 identical circuits providing opto-isolated discrete contact closure outputs.

The opto-isolated logic control device U16 performs the contact changeover, switching the TNV-12V to the relay coil. Diode D33 provides back EMF protection of the photo-transistor. No on-board protection against over current or short circuit is provided.

Microcontroller Section

The microcontroller section employs a 647180 microprocessor and 128K each of flash ROM and static RAM.

HDLC Section

The HDLC controller U7 handles backplane communications to and from the primary MCU. All signals to and from the backplane are buffered by ABT devices for hot plugging.

DC-DC Converter

Deriving its output from the isolated TNV battery voltage, this circuit provides a nominal 12 VDC output for the relay coils. The circuit is based around the LT1172HVCT device U27 and is capable of operating over a supply range of -20 to -63 VDC.

UIO Interfaces

Front Edge Layout

263


Figure 91: Front Layout for UIO card

Physical Layout

No interfaces.

Rear Edge Layout


LED Indicators

A single green LED is provided on the front edge of the card (see Figure 91). This is the 'RUN' LED, and it flashes approximately once per second indicating normal operation.

Reset


C32 (INC1)(INA1)A32

(OUTA16)A32 C32 (OUTC16)

P2

DEBUG PORT

P5

Run LED

Extractionlever

Acom Card Reference

264 025-9574E

Settings

Jumpers

The following descriptions are intended as a guide for interfacing external equipment to the UIO card using the various jumper options. Figure 92 is a simplified block diagram to illustrate the Input and Output circuits as well as the common bus.

The basic descriptions explain the ways of adjusting the various jumpers to do the following:

• Independent connections for input or output circuits• Using the jumpers to connect to a common bus• Using the jumpers to connect to a specific voltage source

The descriptions should also be referenced with Table 191 and Table 192.

Figure 92: Simplified UIO Block Diagram

INPUT COMMONBUS

INA1

INC1

JMP3

INPUT 1

INA2 - 16

INC2 - 16

OUTPUT COMMONBUS

-VE_BAT

+VE_BAT

INPUT 2-16

OUTA1

OUTC1

JMP19

OUTPUT 1

OUTA2 - 16

OUTC2 - 16

OUTPUT 2-16

P5JMP2

JMP1A - F

PINS 1 & 3

PINS 2 & 4

Note The reference to jumpers JMP1 A, B, C, D, E, and F are made as a single jumper, JMP1.

265


• The default settings for the jumpers on the UIO have all the inputs and outputs floating; i.e., all channel connections are independent of one another. Under these conditions, use of the card requires that all input and output channels be wired out from connector P2 as individual pairs.

• Any one or more of the input and output channels may be assigned to a common input and output bus respectively. This is handled by the jumper associated with the particular channel(s) located immediately behind the front-plane connector P2. This may be a desirable option where independence of channels is not a concern since the wiring requirements for P2 can be reduced.

• The options regarding the use of the common input and output busses depend on the jumpers JMP2 and JMP1 respectively. Each common bus may be extended out onto connector P5 or referenced to the TNV supply (Figure 92): TNV_-VE_BAT in the case of the common input bus, and TNV_+VE_BAT in the case of the common output bus.

• Under some circumstances it may be desirable to reference both common busses to the same voltage, most likely user ground. No provision exists on the UIO for the two common busses to be tied together. This must be done externally.

• Jumpers JMP35 and JMP36 are zero ohm links. They are used ONLY in the event of the card being used in a subrack having a single upper backplane. Such an installation will void the SELV-TNV isolation.

• Jumpers JMP37 and JMP38 are not used.• Jumpers JMP3 to JMP18 are associated with the 16 input channels. They allow one

input leg to be extended out onto the front-plane connector P2. This is done by either strapping between pins 2-3 or by strapping between pins 1-2 connected to the common input bus (INCOM).

• Jumpers JMP19 to JMP34 are associated with the 16 output channels. They allow one output to be extended out onto the front-plane connector P2. This is done by either strapping between pins 2-3 or by strapping between 1-2 connected to the common output bus (OUTCOM).

• Jumper JMP2 extends the common input bus (INCOM) to either pin 1 or 3 on the front-plane connector P5 by strapping pins 1-2, or referencing JMP2 to -VE_BAT by strapping pins 2-3.

• Jumpers JMP1 A, B, C, D, E, and F extend the common output bus (OUTCOM) to either pins 2 and 4 on front-plane connector P5 by strapping pins 1-2, or references

Warning! If the full 2 amp rating of all outputs is a requirement, the individual outputs must be used (default). Otherwise, use of the common output bus is limited to the total current drawn to 12 amp if connected through P5, or 4 amp if referenced to the TNV supply by the F2.

Since no protection against over current or short circuit conditions is provided on the UIO outputs, it is the responsibility of the user to ensure that adequate protection is provided within the external interface.

STOP

Acom Card Reference

266 025-9574E

it to +VE_BAT by strapping pins 2-3. These jumpers are individually rated at 2 amp, and six are fitted to provide a 12-amp current rating when connector P5 is used as the output common connection. These jumpers should be considered collectively as one jumper; therefore, strapping should be identical on all six. Note that if the common output bus is being referenced to +VE_BAT, a current limit of four amps applies.

Figure 191 and Figure 192 summarize the various jumper options for input and output strapping respectively.

Table 191: Input Channel Jumper Options

JUMPER FUNCTIONOPTION

IndependentInputs (Default)

Connection to Common Input Bus (INCOM)To Pins 1and3 of P5 To -VE_BAT

JMP3 Ch 1 Input 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP4 Ch 2 Input 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP5 Ch 3 Input 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP6 Ch 4 Input 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP7 Ch 5 Input 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP8 Ch 6 Input 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP9 Ch 7 Input 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP10 Ch 8 Input 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP11 Ch 9 Input 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP12 Ch 10 Input 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP13 Ch 11 Input 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP14 Ch 12 Input 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP15 Ch 13 Input 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP16 Ch 14 Input 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP17 Ch 15 Input 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP18 Ch 16 Input 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP2 Common Input Bus

(INCOM)1-2 1-2 2-3

267


Table 192: Output Channel Jumper Options

Connector Detail

The UIO has two backplane connectors. P1 is the upper connector and carries all of the data signals and SELV power rails. P3 is the lower connector and provides the isolated TNV battery voltage.

Upper Backplane Connector P1

Power Rails :GND, +5VIOM-2 Bus :DU1' :Data Up (to MCU)

:DD1' :Data Down (from MCU):DCLK' :Data Clock:FSC' :Frame Sync Clock

JUMPER FUNCTION

OPTION

IndependentOutputs (Default)

Connection to Common Output Bus (OUTCOM)

To Pins 2and4 of P5

To +VE_BAT

JMP19 Ch 1 Output 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP20 Ch 2 Output 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP21 Ch 3 Output 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP22 Ch 4 Output 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP23 Ch 5 Output 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP24 Ch 6 Output 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP25 Ch 7 Output 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP26 Ch 8 Output 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP27 Ch 9 Output 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP28 Ch10Output 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP29 Ch11Output 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP30 Ch12Output 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP31 Ch13Output 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP32 Ch14Output 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP33 Ch15Output 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP34 Ch16Output 2-3 1-2 1-2JMP1A Common 1-2 1-2 2-3JMP1B Output 1-2 1-2 2-3JMP1C Bus 1-2 1-2 2-3JMP1D (OUTCOM) 1-2 1-2 2-3JMP1E 1-2 1-2 2-3JMP1F 1-2 1-2 2-3

Acom Card Reference

268 025-9574E

HDLC Bus :CTX' :HDLC Link:CRX' :HDLC Link:SCLK' :Data Clock for 2Mbps and HDLC Bus:SYPQ' :Frame Sync for 2Mbps and HDLC Bus

Slot Decoding :SLOT 0':SLOT 1':SLOT 2':SLOT 3'

System Control :RESET'

Lower Backplane Connector P3

+VE_BAT TNV Battery Voltage-VE_BAT

Connector P2

Channel Dir FunctioN Pin o o Pin Function Dir Channel

1 IN INA1 32a o o 32c INC1 IN 12 IN INA2 31a o o 31c INC2 IN 23 IN INA3 30a o o 30c INC3 IN 34 IN INA4 29a o o 29c INC4 IN 45 IN INA5 28a o o 28c INC5 IN 56 IN INA6 27a o o 27c INC6 IN 67 IN INA7 26a o o 26c INC7 IN 78 IN INA8 25a o o 25c INC8 IN 89 IN INA9 24a o o 24c INC9 IN 910 IN INA10 23a o o 23c INC10 IN 1011 IN INA11 22a o o 22c INC11 IN 1112 IN INA12 21a o o 21c INC12 IN 1213 IN INA13 20a o o 20c INC13 IN 1314 IN INA14 19a o o 19c INC14 IN 1415 IN INA15 18a o o 18c INC15 IN 1516 IN INA16 17a o o 17c INC16 IN 161 OUT OUTA1 16a o o 16c OUTC1 OUT 12 OUT OUTA2 15a o o 15c OUTC2 OUT 23 OUT OUTA3 14a o o 14c OUTC3 OUT 34 OUT OUTA4 13a o o 13c OUTC4 OUT 45 OUT OUTA5 12a o o 12c OUTC5 OUT 56 OUT OUTA6 11a o o 11c OUTC6 OUT 67 OUT OUTA7 10a o o 10c OUTC7 OUT 78 OUT OUTA8 9a o o 9c OUTC8 OUT 8

269


Connector P5

UIO Installation

Card Placement

The UIO may be installed in Slots 1 through 11 of the Acom subrack. The card may be inserted or removed while the subrack is in operation.

9 OUT OUTA9 8a o o 8c OUTC9 OUT 910 OUT OUTA10 7a o o 7c OUTC10 OUT 1011 OUT OUTA11 6a o o 6c OUTC11 OUT 1112 OUT OUTA12 5a o o 5c OUTC12 OUT 1213 OUT OUTA13 4a o o 4c OUTC13 OUT 1314 OUT OUTA14 3a o o 3c OUTC14 OUT 1415 OUT OUTA15 2a o o 2c OUTC15 OUT 1516 OUT OUTA16 1a o o 1c OUTC16 OUT 16

Channel Dir FunctioN Pin o o Pin Function Dir Channel

OUTCOM1234

INCOM

INCOMOUTCOM

Acom Card Reference

270 025-9574E

UIO Example Configurations

Figure 93: Simplified Overview of UIO Input/Output Circuits

UIO Inputs

The UIO input is triggered active when the Opto-isolator input diode on the UIO can draw at least 1mA of current.

There are two sets of jumpers on the UIO card for the input. One will determine the reference voltage for the input and the other jumpers will determine if each Opto-isolator input is independent from the reference voltage.

1 3 +VE_BATP5

Pins 2 & 4

Pins 1 & 3

JMP1A - F

1 3

JMP2

-VE_BAT

INC1

INA1

JMP3 - 18

3 12

Input x - 16

Common Input Busto JMP2

Output x - 16

3 12 Common Output Busto JMP1A - F

OUTC1

OUTA1

JMP19 - 34

271


The reference jumper is JMP2. In the default setting, it will use external reference, which will be fed using pin 1 or 3 on P5 located on the front of the card. When JMP2 is in the default setting, the jumper will be set toward the front of the card.

JMP3 though 18 determine if the input circuits will use the reference voltage or is an independent circuit. The default setting is independent inputs (Setup A).

The table below shows the jumper settings and required input to activate the UIO input in the four most common ways.

Table 193: Example UIO Input Configuration

Setup Required Input JMP2 JMP3 - 18 P5 Bias

A At least +3Vdc/1mA across INC1 / INA1

Don’t care Jumped 2-3 (Toward front of card)

Don’t care

B Ground on INC1 Jumped 1-2 (Toward front of card)

Jumped 1-2 (Toward back of card)

At least +3Vdc/1mA

C At least +3Vdc/1mA on INC1

Jumped 1-2 (Toward front of card)


Ground

D Ground on INC1*See Note 1

Jumped 2-3 (Toward rear of card)


Don’t care

*JMP3 –18 jumped across pins 2-3 uses no internal or external reference.*JMP2 jumped across 1-2 uses P5 connector. Jumped 2-3 uses internal –48Vdc reference.

Note This input can not be a positive voltage in the idle state. Since the back plane voltage (-VE) is –48Vdc, any potential higher than 0V/ground will activate the diode. The idle state should be –48Vdc when using this jumper configuration and ground when active.

The UIO Input has an option to invert the logic if needed. This would cause the UIO Input on Acom Console Software to display inactive when the input is active and active when the input is inactive. This software option could be enabled if the input interface provides the UIO reverse logic. *See IMS Digital I/O settings in “Acom Software Installation and Configuration” (P/N 025-9529).

Make sure that when an external voltage source is connected to P5 that it’s limited to 60VDC or less. This is the maximum voltage limit for the Input circuit. The current draw also should not exceed 10mA. The minimum DC requirement for P5 is 3VDC at 1mA.

Acom Card Reference

272 025-9574E

Active input state for each setup:

Setup A:

Setup B or D: Setup C:

UIO Outputs

The UIO Outputs are relay contact closures that are normally open when inactive. The output can be programmed to toggle or for momentary closure when the button is pressed on the Acom Console Software screen. The output relays are also ganged DPDT relay closures for redundancy to assure contact closure if a single relay contact closure should fail.

There are two sets of jumpers on the UIO card for the output. One will determine the reference voltage for the output and the other jumpers will determine if each output relay is independent from the reference voltage.

The reference jumper are JMP1A – F. In the default setting, the output will use external reference, which will be fed using pin 2 or 4 on P5 located on the front of the card. When JMP1A - F is in the default setting, the jumper will be set toward the front of the card.

JMP19 though 34 determine if the output circuits will use the reference voltage or is an independent circuit just using the relay contacts. The default setting is independent outputs (Setup A).

The table below shows the jumper settings and output state when active for the four most common setups.

INC1

INA1

Or

INC1

INA1

_+ _

+

INC1

INA1Don't care

INC1

INA1Don't care

_+

273


Table 194: Example UIO Output Configurations

Active output state for each setup:

Setup A:

Setup Active Output JMP1A - F JMP19 - 34 P5 Bias

A Dry relay contact closure of OUTC1 / OUTA1

Don’t care Jumped 2-3 (Toward front of card)

Don’t care

B P5 voltage on OUTC1 Jumped 1-2 (Toward front of card)


Connect desired voltage*See Note1

C P5 ground on OUTC1 Jumped 1-2 (Toward front of card)


Ground/0v*See Note1

D +48VDC on OUTC1*See Note2

Jumped 2-3 (Toward rear of card)


Don’t care

*JMP19 –34 jumped across pins 2-3 uses no internal or external reference.*JMP1A - F jumped across 1-2 uses P5 connector. Jumped 2-3 uses internal +48Vdc reference.

Note The P5 connector is rated to handle a maximum of 220 VDC / 250 VAC at 16 Amps when all 16 outputs are active or 1 amp per output.

When using +VE_BAT (Pin 2 or 4 of MSU X1 front connector) for a supply reference to the relay contact, the maximum current draw can not exceed 4Amps when all 16 outputs are active or 250mA per output. A negative voltage will be required on OUTC1 to flow any current when using +VE_BAT.

The UIO Output has an option to invert the logic if needed. This would cause the UIO Output relay to be active (closed) when the output is idle and inactive (open) when the output is active. This software option could be used if the output interface requires the UIO output logic to be reversed. *See IMS Digital I/O settings in “Acom Software Installation and Configuration” (P/N 025-9529).

OUTC1

OUTA1

Acom Card Reference

274 025-9574E

Setup B:

Setup C:

Setup D:

UIO Alarm Generation

The failure or removal of a UIO card will generate a system configuration error. A configuration alarm will activate.

Table 195: UIO Alarms

P5

OUTC1

OUTA1Don't care

P5 Voltage

Connectdesiredvoltage

P5

OUTC1

OUTA1Don't care

+VE_BAT

OUTC1

OUTA1Don't care

+VE_BAT

(backplane)(MSU X1 Pin 2 and 4 )


UIO Card Failure CE (Configuration Error) 0 UrgentUIO Card Removal CE (Configuration Error) 0 Urgent

Note The UIO card does not generate any other system alarms.

275


UIO Technical Specifications

Table 196: Signaling Characteristics







Channels Per Card Number of Inputs and Outputs 16 inputs / 16 outputsSignaling In Leads per Channel 2

Nominal input impedance 6 KΩ

Minimum input voltage 3 VDCMinimum input current 1mAMaximum input voltage 60 VDCMaximum input current 10 mA

Signaling Out Leads per channel 2Maximum voltage 220 VDC / 125 VACMaximum current 2 AMaximum switching power (resistive) 60 W



Power Consumption Specification

Idle +5 V: 105 mA- VE_BAT: 6 mA

Maximum +5 V 180 mA- VE_BAT:65 mA


Height 233 mmWidth 220 mm

Acom Card Reference

276 025-9574E

277

Replacing Acom Cards and Devices

This chapter provides procedures for replacing failed Acom cards and devices. Generally, you should only replace devices on the advice of Zetron technical support at http://www.zetron.com.

Replacing Acom CCC Cards on page 278Replacing COV-T, COV-R, and COV-V Cards on page 279Replacing DCU Cards on page 280Replacing Acom Console Units on page 287Replacing Acom Console Unit Daughter Cards on page 290Replacing EIE, TIE, or EMU Cards on page 291Replacing Jackbox 950-0474 on page 292Replacing MCU Cards in an ALS on page 293Replacing MCU Cards in an ADS on page 297Replacing MSU Cards on page 301Replacing RVA Cards on page 302Replacing SMU Cards on page 303Replacing Telephone Radio Handset Interfaces (TRHI) on page 305Replacing UIO Cards on page 306


278 025-9574E

Replacing Acom CCC Cards

The Changeover Control Card (CCC) signals the COV-V, COV-R, and COV-T relay cards to switch from main to standby.

Equipment Required

• Small flat head screwdriver

♦ To remove the CCC card:

1. When removing a CCC card, change the system over to the primary/main (A) side of the system. This will assure that audio/data from the ALS to the demark will remain active and available. From the primary/main ALS force control over to the other ALS:a. Launch IMS Terminal, and login.b. Double click the ALS. From the Tools menu, select Change Over, select the

Manual option and select the ALS NOT in control.c. Verify that the icon in IMS turns blue for the other ALS.d. Select the Automatic option and exit the Change Over menu.

2. Use a grounding wrist strap to prevent ESD damage to the equipment.3. If you are replacing a CCC card, removing all connectors from the front of the

card. Make sure the cables are labeled. If they are not labeled, label them now so they can be properly connected to the replacement card.

4. The DB9 connectors can be removed using the small flat head screwdriver. The orange weidmuller plug can be pulled out if there are wires connected to them. The power plugs can be removed by squeezing the locking latch on the right side of the plug. It may be easier to pull the CCC card out partially to get a good grasp on the connector/latch to remove the plugs.

5. Flip the top lever on card upward to dislodge it from the backplane. Slide card out slowly and carefully.

6. Once all connectors have been removed, remove the CCC card.

Warning! Please exercise electro-static discharge (ESD) precautions when handling all cards.

STOP

Note These cards are HOT SWAPPABLE but removing the CCC will remove power from the ChangeOver Subrack rack backplane and the COV-T, COV-R, or COV-V cards will default to the primary/main (A) side of the system. Although these cards are hot swappable, it is preferable to turn off the power when swapping out any cards in the system.

Subrack programming is not required when replacing these cards.

279

Replacing COV-T, COV-R, and COV-V Cards

7. Place the old card in the ESB bag.

♦ To install the replacement CCC card:

1. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap connected to the rack.2. Remove the new card from the ESD bag.3. Align the card with the card guides at the top, then bottom of the slot.4. Slowly and carefully slide the card into the rack.5. Press the card into the rear connector using two hands on the front of the card.6. Connect the cables to the connectors on the front of the card.7. The LED’s on the COV-T, COV-R, or COV-V card should indicate that they are

active on the primary/main (A) side.8. Change the system over to the backup/standby (B) ALS and verify that audio/data

is passed and the COV-T, COV-R, or COV-V indicate they are switched over to backup/standby (B).

9. After you are satisfied that the Backup/Standby (B) rack is functional, change system back over to the Primary/Main (A) rack for normal operation.

Replacing COV-T, COV-R, and COV-V Cards

The COV-T card is fitted with relays that can switch 6 coaxial SMB connections between the main and standby subracks. This card is hot-swappable.

The COV-V and COV-R cards is fitted with relays that can switch 50 conductors (25 pairs) between the main and standby subracks. There is a common connector on the rear of the card for the line interfaces and 2 connections on the front for the main and standby subracks. This card is hot-swappable.

♦ To remove the COV-T, COV-R, or COV-V card:

1. When removing a COV-T/COV-R/COV-V card, any line resources using the card will not be able to get audio/data to the outside world/demark. The ALSs will be transparent to this and will not know but the operators should be aware not to use


STOP

Note Although these cards are hot swappable, it is preferable to turn off the power when swapping out any cards in the system.



280 025-9574E

the line resources associated to the card because they will not be available when the card is removed.

2. Use a grounding wrist strap to prevent ESD damage to the equipment.3. Ensure the connectors are labeled so they can be reconnected in the correct order.4. Carefully disconnect the connectors six SMB coax connectors (COV-T) or two

EURO96 connectors (COV-V) from the front of the card by squeezing at the top and bottom of the connector while pulling straight out. For COV-R cards, you may have to loosen a screw at the top of the two RJ-21 connectors first.

5. Flip top lever on card upward to dislodge it from the backplane connector. Slide card out slowly and carefully.

6. Place card in ESD bag.

♦ To install the replacement COV card:

1. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap connected to the rack.2. Remove the new card from the ESD bag.3. Align the card with the card guides at the top, then bottom of the slot.4. Slowly and carefully slide the card into the rack.5. Press the card into the rear connector using two hands on the front of the card.6. Connect the six SMB coax connectors (COV-T), two EURO96 connectors (COV-

V), or two RJ-45 connectors (COV-R) to the front of the card.7. The LEDs on the COV card should indicate that the card is active.8. Perform some tests on the primary/main (A) side and backup/standby (B) side to

make sure both sides are functional.

Replacing DCU Cards

The DCU card performs audio and data switching for two DS3 (T3) links. This card holds the configuration for the ADS subrack and controls all rack messaging.

Equipment Required

• Zetron PC to Acom Console Unit cable: 709-7615-xxx (xxx = cable length)• PC/Laptop equipped with Windows, a terminal program capable of serial

communication, and a DB9 RS232 Serial Com Port


STOP

Note The DCU card is NOT hot-swappable.

281

Replacing DCU Cards

• IMS ADS software (installation setup for this software is located on the Acom Install CD)

• WinZIP or other file compression utility (this may be required if the firmware file is not in .ZIP format)

• The network address of the ADS housing the DCU to be replaced

Replacing a DCU card

♦ To save the DCU configuration:

1. If this is a standalone ADS, skip to Step 2. If this ADS is part of a redundant setup with two or more ADS’s, then continue with the following sub-steps:a. In order to successfully remove a DCU card with little disturbance to the

system, ensure that there are no E1 links resources active between the ADS and an ALS. This can be verified by viewing the second row of green LEDs on each MCU4 card in the ADS (LEDs A2 and B2 in Figure 94).

Figure 94: LED Indicators on an MCU4 Card

b. If these LEDs are NOT solid green, there is no active E1 link on this ADS and you can skip to Step 2.

c. If either of these two LEDs ARE lit solid green, there is a link from this ADS to either a Acom Console Unit (ACU) or an ALS. To determine which, consult your system’s network diagram or follow the cables.If the link is to a Acom Console Unit (ACU), you can skip to Step 2.If the link is to an ALS, you must first ensure all ALS E1 links are switched active to another ADS. See Replacing MCU Cards in an ALS on page 293 for instructions describing how to safely switch an ALS to it’s redundant clone.

2. Connect the 709-7615-xxx cable from the PC to the left RJ45 connector on the bottom of the DCU card.

3. Start the IMS ADS program.If you do not have IMS ADS loaded on your PC, install it from the Acom Install CD.

4. Select the Communications menu, click Settings, and verify that the baud rate is 38400 and the Com Port matches the one being used on the PC. Click OK to save settings.

A B1 GREEN RUN Indicator (Flashing)2 GREEN LCB 23 GREEN Spare4 YELLOW Link 2 Bad/RRA5 YELLOW Link 2 LMFA6 YELLOW Link 2 NOS7 RED Spare8 RED Link 2 LOS

Spare GREEN 1LCB 1 GREEN 2Spare GREEN 3Link 1 Bad/RRA YELLOW 4Link 1 LMFA YELLOW 5Link 1 NOS YELLOW 6System Reset RED 7Link 1 LOS RED 8


282 025-9574E

5. Select the Communications menu and click Connect. When prompted for the Network address, enter the ADS Network address and click OK.(The network address is typically on a sticker on the ADS and also can be found in the “As-Built” documents for your particular system).

6. When prompted with the password dialog, click the Default button and it should allow access to the ADS.

7. Access the File menu and select Save to Disk. When prompted for the configuration file name, use a descriptive file name. For example: ADS<network address>.bin

8. Once the file has been saved, select the Communications menu and select Disconnect.

9. Close the IMS ADS program.

♦ To record the firmware version:

1. Open a terminal program capable of serial communication.2. Open a terminal connection using the COM port connected to the DCU. The COM

port should be configured for the following settings:Bits per second = 38400 (default for an DCU)Data bits = 8Parity = NoneStop bits = 1Flow Control = None

3. Press Esc on your keyboard until you see a “Password:” prompt. It should only take three presses. If you do not get the “Password:” prompt, check the COM port and its settings.

4. When the Password prompt appears, type “8564888” and press Enter.5. A menu should appear with some selections. Press 1, then Enter.6. Once logged in, type ver and press Enter. Record the results for Release and

Library.7. To exit debug mode, press Esc, then X.

Note Make note of the Network address because it will be needed when installing the replacement card.

Note A Progress Meter window will appear when saving the file to disk. It may take up to 30 seconds to save the file. When the file save is complete, the Progress Meter window will disappear.

Note The DCU card holds the configuration for the ADS.

283

Replacing DCU Cards

♦ To remove the failed DCU:

1. Turn off power to the ADS by switching the MSU power switch off (up).2. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap to the ADS rack.

3. Disconnect the RJ45, BNC coax, and other connections from the front of the card.4. Use the card removal handle at the top of the card to slide the card forward.5. Remove the card and place it in an ESD bag.

♦ To install and update the new DCU:

1. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap to the rack.2. Remove the new card from the ESD bag.3. Align the card with the card guides at the top, then bottom of the slot.4. Slide the card into the subrack and press the card into the rear connector using both

hands on the front of the card.5. Apply power to the subrack by turning on (down) the MSU card and verify LED

activity.6. It is necessary to make sure the DCU card installed has the same version of

the DCU card removed. Verify firmware version:a. Determine the firmware version of the new card (see To record the firmware

version: on page 282) and compare with the version of the old card.b. If the DCU firmware is the same, skip to To restore ADS configuration on page

286. If the firmware versions are different, continue:7. Before you proceed with updating the firmware, make sure you have a copy of the

Ds3<version>.zip firmware file. If you do not have this file, call Zetron (see http://www.zetron.com).

8. Open the terminal program in Windows.

Warning! The DCU card is NOT hot-swappable. Power down the ADS before removing the DCU card.

Tip If the cables are not labeled, label them now so you know where to connect them on the replacement card.

Warning! The new DCU must be the same revision as the one you are replacing.

Note This procedure requires a terminal program capable of serial communication and file transfers using the 1K xmodem protocol. If this is not available, see Updating the DCU firmware (FTP alternative method): on page 285.

STOP

STOP


284 025-9574E

9. Open a terminal connection using the COM port connected to the DCU. The COM port should be configured for the following settings:

Bits per second = 38400 (default for a DCU)Data bits = 8Parity = NoneStop bits = 1Flow Control = None


11. When the Password prompt appears, enter “8564888” and press Enter.12. A menu should appear with some selections. Press 1, then Enter.13. At the LR> prompt, type download. This causes the DCU to expect and wait for a

file transfer.14. Using your terminal program, send the zipped firmware file using the 1K xmodem

protocol.

15. After the file has been transferred, the DCU will flash the file to memory. This will take approximately 60 seconds. Once the firmware has been flashed, the DCU will return to the prompt.

16. Press Enter, then type RESET /Y to reset the DCU/ADS. In about 120 seconds, the DCU should come online.

17. After the DCU is online, check the firmware version to verify that the uploaded firmware is now active (see To record the firmware version: on page 282).

18. Repeat the firmware update to load the new firmware version into the other firmware image.

Warning! Choosing the incorrect file or file transfer protocol may result in a dead ACU. The only way to recover a dead ACU is to send it to Zetron for repair.

Note The DCU supports the zip file compression format. After the zip file has been transferred, the DCU will CRC check the zip file, unzip it, and update to flash.

Note The DCU holds two copies of the firmware images, and both images should be updated. The first time you send a firmware update, the DCU is using one firmware image while overwriting the other with your update. After the reset in Step 16, the DCU automatically uses the newer of the two firmware images, leaving the older firmware image ready for an update.

STOP

285

Replacing DCU Cards

♦ Updating the DCU firmware (FTP alternative method):

Use the following procedure to update the firmware on one DCU, or the first of many DCUs.

1. Place the DCU firmware file in a location on the IMS console computer where you can easily find it and FTP it to the DCU. The firmware file must be unzipped and it must be named “dcu.binary”.

2. At a Windows Command Prompt, navigate to the location of the firmware file.3. Use the following command to FTP to the DCU where [IP Address] is the IP

address of the DCU:> FTP [IP Address]

4. Press Enter for the user name (none).5. Type the password (default is 8564888).6. Select binary mode:

FTP> binary

7. Upload the firmware file:FTP> put dcu.binary

(This may take a few minutes.)8. When the FTP prompt returns, check the directory for file errors:

FTP> dir

If there are file errors in the directory, the firmware update has failed. Press the reset button on the DCU.

9. Exit FTP.FTP> quit

10. Press the reset button on the DCU.11. The resetting DCU will put on an LED “lightshow” while booting up. The status

LEDs will return to normal in a minute or two.

♦ To update the firmware for all networked DCUs:

If you haven’t already, use the previous procedure to update the firmware on the first DCU. The following procedure “copies” the updated firmware from that first DCU to all other networked DCUs.

1. At a Windows Command Prompt, Telnet to the DCU with the updated firmware:

Warning! Sending a ZIP file or using the wrong file may result in an inoperable DCU.

Warning! Failure to use binary mode will cause FTP to send a corrupt file to the DCU’s firmware. This may result in an inoperable DCU.

STOP

STOP


286 025-9574E

> telnet [IP Address]

where [IP Address] is the IP address of the DCU.2. Press Enter for the user name (none).3. Type the password (default is 8564888) and press Enter. You should have an LR>

prompt.4. Use the following two commands to check the version of this DCU and all other

networked DCUs:LR> ver

LR> rver

5. The first DCU should have a newer version than the other networked DCUs.6. Update the networked DCUs:

LR> rdown /M7. As each DCU is being updated, you should see the following message where XXX

is the DCU address and YY is the slot holding the DCU.“Rack Address XXX in slot YY is burning.”

After several minutes of updating DCU firmware, the LR> prompt returns. This is an indication that the update process is complete.

8. Each DCU will reboot itself after the firmware update is complete.

♦ To restore ADS configuration

1. Launch IMS ADS on the PC. Select Communications then Connect. Enter the network address of 1 when prompted, click OK.If using a network address of 1 does not allow you access to the MCU, try using 0 or 255.

2. At password screen click default.3. Click File, Load From Disk, and select the file name that was saved earlier (see To

save the DCU configuration: on page 281).4. Click File, Update to rack.5. When prompted for the network address, use the address that provided access in

Step 1.6. When prompted for the Configuration name, use the one supplied, which should be

the name of the DCU that was replaced.7. Access the Configure menu and select Set Address. Enter the Network Address

recorded earlier in To save the DCU configuration: on page 281.8. Click File, Update to rack.9. To finalize the changes, click Tools, then Reset Rack from the IMS menu.10. When the DCU is back up and running (top right LED on DCU card is blinking

slowly) proceed to the following section.

♦ To reconnect the cables

1. Turn off power to the ADS by switching the MSU power switch off (up).

287

Replacing Acom Console Units

2. Re-connect the cables to the front of the card.3. Turn power on the ADS.4. Wait 120 seconds for the ADS to come on line.5. Make ALSs connected to this DCU/ADS active by performing an ALS changeover

described in Replacing MCU Cards in an ALS on page 293.6. Test some line resources to verify that the system resources are functional on this

DCU/ADS.


The Acom Console Unit provides the console data and voice interfaces for the position. The unit holds up to four expansion modules.

♦ To remove an Acom Console Unit:

1. Back up the unit's configuration to disk using IMS. (See Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.) Note the Acom Console Unit’s network address displayed in the title bar of IMS ACU.

2. Make a note of the unit's firmware version; the new Acom Console Unit must be the same revision. Using IMS ACU, access the ACU and hover the mouse over the Dual E1 card and the firmware version will appear in the status bar on the bottom of the IMS ACU program.

3. Turn off power to the Acom Console Unit using the switch on the rear of the unit.4. Disconnect AC power from the rear of the unit.5. Disconnect all serial connections from the data ports, noting their connection and

marking if needed.6. Disconnect all voice connections from the OAM or 4-Wire E&M Modules.7. Disconnect the Digital Input and Digital Output connectors if used.8. Remove the ground lead from the Acom Console Unit.9. Remove the E1 cables from the Dual E1 card.10. With all leads disconnected, unscrew the unit from the underside of the desk.


288 025-9574E

♦ To install a Acom Console Unit/ACU:

1. If the ACU is not being mounted under the desk, skip to Step 5.2. Install any required modules in the ACU. See Replacing Acom Console Unit

Daughter Cards on page 290.3. Install the under desk mounting option.4. Screw the ACU to the under side of the work surface using self-tapping screws.5. Make all serial connections to the data ports. The ACS serial connection often uses

ACU COM1.6. Make all voice connections to the OAM or 4-Wire E&M Modules. Refer to the

position layout drawing for your system for specific details on position connections.

• Jackbox or TRHI• Speakers• PC Tones

7. Connect any digital I/Os. This may include foot switches, TRHI, or active conversation lamps.

8. Connect the ground lead to the ground post near the power connection.9. Connect the AC power cable and turn on the ACU using the power switch on the

rear of the unit.10. Access the ACU using IMS ACU. When prompted for the network address, try

using 2, 0, or 255.11. Hover the mouse over the Dual E1 card and note the firmware version. If the

firmware version is NOT the same as the ACU being replaced, continue to the next step. Otherwise, skip to Step 20.

12. Move the ACS cable currently plugged in the ACU Data Port COM1 to COM4.13. Open a terminal connection using the COM port connected to the ACU. The COM

port should be configured for the following settings:Bits per second = 38400 (default for a ACU)Data bits = 8Parity = NoneStop bits = 1Flow Control = None

Note If a firmware update is needed, then a zipped ACU firmware update file is required for this procedure. This file is typically supplied via email from Zetron technical support or located on the Acom Install CD. The supplied file may be titled ACU_101.zip or similar.

Note This procedure requires a terminal program capable of serial communication and file transfers using the 1K xmodem protocol.

289



15. When the Password prompt appears, type 8564888 and press Enter.16. Once logged in, type ver and press Enter and record the current version.17. Using your terminal program, send the zipped firmware file using the 1K xmodem

protocol.

18. After the firmware has been uploaded, the ACU will reset itself. Once it appears that the ACU is operating again, press Esc three times to get another Password prompt. Enter 8564888 and type ver to verify that the ACU now has the current version.If the version is correct, type Exit to end the debug session.

19. Move the ACS cable currently plugged in the ACU Data Port COM4 to COM1.20. Using IMS ACU, access the File menu and select Load from disk.

Locate the save file and load it.21. From the File menu, select Update to NVRAM.

When prompted for the Network address, try 2, 0, or 255.When prompted for the Configuration name, use the one supplied.

22. Access the Configure menu and select Network Address.23. Enter the appropriate Network Address recorded earlier.24. Access the File menu and select Update to NVRAM.25. Power down the ACU and connect the E1 cables to the Dual E1 card.26. Power on the ACU and verify that it is online and ACS is operational.

Warning! Choosing the incorrect file or file transfer protocol may result in a dead ACU. The only way to recover a dead ACU is to send it to Zetron for repair.

Note The ACU supports the zip file compression format. After the zip file has been transferred, the ACU will CRC check the zip file, unzip it, and update to flash. It is recommended that you keep the firmware update in the zip file and do not unzip it before transferring to the ACU. This will minimize the transfer time and protect the bin file with the CRC checking provided by the zip format.

STOP


290 025-9574E

Replacing Acom Console Unit Daughter Cards

The Acom Console Unit daughter cards are available in several varieties:

♦ Removal:

1. Ground yourself to the Acom Console Unit using an ESD wrist strap.2. Remove the Acom Console Unit (see Replacing Acom Console Units on page

287).3. Remove the screws that secure the top cover on the Acom Console Unit using a

medium Phillips screwdriver.4. Remove the Allen screws that secure the cover plate on the rear of the module.5. Remove the two Phillips screws that secure the card inside the Acom Console

Unit.6. Gently pull the card toward the rear of the Acom Console Unit to unseat the

connector.7. Lift the module out over the guide posts and place it in an ESD bag.8. Secure the top cover of the Acom Console Unit using the existing screws.

♦ Installation:

1. Ground yourself to the Acom Console Unit using an ESD wrist strap.2. Follow the instructions for removing the Acom Console Unit.3. Remove the screws that secure the top cover on the Acom Console Unit using a

medium Phillips screwdriver.4. If there is a cover plate at the intended location for the module, remove the Allen

screws that secure the cover plate and set the plate aside.5. Set the module into the Acom Console Unit slot so it fits over the guide posts and

gently slide it into the connector.6. Secure the card inside the Acom Console Unit with two provided Phillips screws.

Dual E1 Module Provides multiple E1 connections for installing the position in an E1 loop. The Dual E1 must be installed in slot 0 (farthest away from data ports).

Dual 4-Wire E&M Module

Provides two 4-wire E&M interfaces for IRR, desk mic, speakers or other purposes.

Operator's Audio Module (OAM)

Provides voice and data ports for speakers, handsets, mics, and more.

DCOAM Provides voice, logging, foot switch, PC Tones, and handset ports.


STOP

291

Replacing EIE, TIE, or EMU Cards

7. Attach the new cover plate using the existing Allen screws.8. Secure the top cover of the Acom Console Unit using the existing screws.9. Install the Acom Console Unit (see Replacing Acom Console Units on page 287).

Replacing EIE, TIE, or EMU Cards

The EIE card provides six independent ring in/loop out channels that interface to CO provided POTS circuits. This card is hot-swappable.

The TIE card provides six independent ring out/loop in channels that interface to local phones. This card is hot-swappable.

The EMU card provides six independent 4-wire E&M channels that interface to radios or other 4-wire circuits. This card is hot-swappable.

♦ To remove the old card:

1. If this ALS is part of a Main-Standby setup and it is currently in control, force control over to the other ALS:a. Launch IMS Terminal, and login.b. Double click the ALS. From the Tools menu, select Change Over, select the


2. Power down the subrack by setting the toggle switch on the MSU card to the UP position.

3. Use a grounding wrist strap to prevent ESD damage to the equipment.4. Carefully disconnect the EURO96 connectors from the front of the card by

squeezing at the top and bottom of the connector while pulling straight out.5. Flip top lever on card upward to dislodge it from the backplane connector. Slide

card out slowly and carefully.6. Place card in ESD bag.


STOP

Note Although these cards are hot swappable, it is preferable to turn off the power when swapping out any cards in the system.



292 025-9574E

♦ To install the replacement card:

1. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap connected to the rack.2. Remove the new card from the ESD bag.3. For an EIE card with part numbers 950-0522 or 950-0637, check jumpers JP6, JP8,

and JP9. These jumpers need to be set to “Dual” or “Single” (as printed on the board itself), depending on whether the subrack has dual or single backplanes. EIE cards with part number 950-0491 do not have jumpers for this purpose and are compatible with dual backplanes only.

4. Align the card with the card guides at the top, then bottom of the slot.5. Slowly and carefully slide the card into the subrack.6. Press the card into the rear connector using two hands on the front of the card.7. Connect the EURO96 connectors to the front of the card.8. Apply power to the subrack.9. Verify in IMS Terminal that the new card appears and the slot box for it is green.10. If this ALS is part of a Main-Standby setup, force control back to this ALS:

a. From the Tools menu in IMS Terminal, select Change Over.b. Select the Manual option and select this ALS.c. Verify the ALS icon in IMS turns light blue to show that this ALS is in control.d. Once this ALS has taken control, select the Automatic option and exit the

Change Over menu.11. Test the new card. Verify that the run LED flashes.

Replacing Jackbox 950-0474

The jackbox is the headset or handset interface for the Acom Console Unit.

♦ Removal:

1. Remove the jackbox audio connection from OAM RJ45 port on the rear of the Acom Console Unit.

2. Using a flat head screwdriver, remove the cover plate of the jackbox.3. Remove the jackbox by unscrewing it from its mounted location.

♦ Installation:

1. Using a flat head screwdriver, remove the cover plate of the jackbox.

Note For a 5v-12v version of the EMU card (P/N 950-0841), jumpers J1 through J12 must always be in the 2-3 position.

293

Replacing MCU Cards in an ALS

2. Secure the jackbox to the underside of the work surface using self-tapping screws. Mount the jackbox far enough away from the front edge of the work surface to prevent the handset connector from protruding.

3. Install the jackbox cover plate using the existing flat head screws.4. Route the audio connection to the OAM module of the Acom Console Unit and

connect it to one of the HS ports (HS1/HS2).


This procedure is only for an MCU3 or MCU4 in an ALS. For an MCU4 in an ADS, see Replacing MCU Cards in an ADS on page 297.

If an MCU card is installed in slot 0 of an ALS, it is considered the primary MCU; it holds the configuration for the subrack and controls all rack messaging.

Required Equipment

• Straight-through RS232 serial cable(Zetron cable part number 709-7345)

• Laptop/PC with Windows or better and a serial port.• IMS Program. (Typically installed from the Acom install disk)• Winzip or other unzipping utility if installing using an emailed zip file.

♦ To backup the MCU configuration:

1. Connect the laptop’s serial com port to port 1 of the MCU card. (Port 1 of the MCU card is the top 9-pin serial connector on the front of the MCU card, labeled X17 on the PCB.)

2. Launch IMS ALS on the laptop.3. From the main menu, select Communications then Connect.

Warning! The Primary MCU is NOT hot-swappable. Only secondary MCU cards are hot-swappable.

Caution! The new MCU must be the same revision as the one you removed.

Note It is preferred that the power be turned off when swapping out any cards in the system.

STOP

!


294 025-9574E

4. When prompted, enter the Network Address of the subrack, and click OK. (The network address is typically on a sticker on the subrack and can also be found in the as-built documents for your system.)

5. At the password screen click the default button.6. If this ALS is part of a Main-Standby setup, force control to the other ALS:

a. From the Tools menu in IMS Terminal, select Change Over.b. Select the Manual option and select the other ALS.c. Verify the ALS icon in IMS turns light blue to show that the other ALS is in

control.d. Once the other ALS has taken control, select the Automatic option and exit

the Change Over menu.7. Once connected choose File then Save to Disk. Save the file with a descriptive

name, for example:ADS<network address>.cfg

8. Choose Configure then Subrack Address write down the subrack address. Also note if this is the Main or Standby ALS.

9. Select the Communications menu then Disconnect to disconnect from the ALS.

♦ To record the current firmware version:

1. Open a terminal program capable of serial communication.2. Open a terminal connection using the COM port connected to the MCU. The COM

port should be configured for the following settings:Bits per second = 38400 (default for an MCU)Data bits = 8Parity = NoneStop bits = 1Flow Control = None


4. When the Password prompt appears, type the password (default 8564888) and press Enter.

5. Once logged in, type ver and press Enter.6. Record the results.

Note A Progress Meter window will appear when saving the file to disk. It can take several minutes to completely save the file. When the file save is complete, the Progress Meter window will disappear.

295


♦ To remove the old MCU card:

1. Power down the subrack by setting the toggle switch on the MSU card to the up position.

2. Use a grounding wrist strap to prevent ESD damage to the equipment.3. If the cables are not labeled, label them now so you know where to plug them in on

the new card.4. Disconnect all cables from front of MCU card.

For SMB connections, grab them at the elbow with the thumb and index finger, and pull gently straight out.If a net clock connection exists, make a note of the port it is connected to before removing it.

5. Flip the top lever on MCU card to dislodge it from the backplane connector. Slide the card out slowly and carefully.

6. Place card in ESD bag.

♦ To install the new MCU card:

1. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap connected to the rack.2. Remove the new card from the ESD bag.3. Align the card with the card guides at the top, then bottom of the slot.4. Slowly and carefully slide the card into the subrack.5. Press the card into the rear connector using two hands on the front of the card.

Do NOT connect the SMB cables to the new MCU at this time.6. Apply power to the subrack and verify that the top right green LED is blinking

slowly approximately once per second. This shows that the MCU up and running.

♦ To verify or upgrade the firmware of the card:

Requirements:• A zipped MCU3 firmware update file. This is typically supplied via email

from zetron technical support or located on the Acom Install CD. The supplied file may be titled “ADS_100.zip” or similar.


port should be configured for the following settings:Bits per second = 38400 (default for an MCU)Data bits = 8Parity = NoneStop bits = 1

Note The sub rack will not function while updating the firmware on a Primary MCU card.


296 025-9574E

Flow Control = None3. Press Esc on your keyboard until you see a “Password:” prompt. It should only

take three presses. If you do not get the “Password:” prompt, check the COM port and its settings.

4. When the Password prompt appears, type the password (default 8564888) and press Enter.

5. Once logged in, type ver and press Enter.

6. At the prompt, type Download and press Enter. This command will cause the MCU to prompt for a Xmodem transfer by sending a “C” character repeatedly.

7. Using your terminal program, send the zipped firmware file using the 1K xmodem protocol.

8. After the MCU has reset itself and appears to be operating again, press Esc three times to get another “Password” prompt.

9. Type ver and note the results.

♦ To restore the ALS configuration:(only if replacing MCU in slot 0)

1. On the laptop, launch IMS ALS.2. Select “Communications” then “Connect”.3. Enter the network address of 1 when prompted, and click OK.

If using a network address of 1 does not allow you access to the MCU, try using 0 or 255.

4. At the password screen, click default.5. Click File, then Load From Disk and choose the file name that was saved in To

backup the MCU configuration: on page 293.6. Select File, then Update To Rack to transfer the new file to the ALS.

Note If the firmware version is the same as recorded in To backup the MCU configuration: on page 293, then skip the remaining steps in this procedure and proceed to the next procedure.

Warning! Choosing the incorrect file or file transfer protocol may result in a dead MCU card. The only way to recover a dead MCU card is to send it to Zetron for repair.

Note The MCU supports the zip file compression format. After the zip file has been transferred, the MCU will CRC check the zip file, unzip it, and update to flash. It is recommended that you keep the firmware update in the zip file and do not unzip it before transferring to the MCU. This will minimize the transfer time and protect the bin file with the CRC checking provided by the zip format.

STOP

297

Replacing MCU Cards in an ADS

7. When prompted for the network address, use the one that worked correctly in Step 3.

8. When prompted for the configuration name, use the one supplied, which should be the name of the MCU that was replaced.

9. Click Tools, then Reset Rack from the IMS menu to finalize the changes.10. Click File, Update To Rack.11. When the rack is back up and running (top right LED on MCU card is blinking

slowly), reconnect and verify the network and subrack addresses.12. Select Configure, then Subrack Address.

Set the subrack address to the value recorded in To backup the MCU configuration: on page 293, then click Save.

13. Click Configure, then Network Address.Set the network address to the same value recorded in To backup the MCU configuration: on page 293, then click Save.

14. Power down the rack and reconnect the SMB cables to the MCU.15. Power up the rack.

Within a minute or two, the rack should be operating normally. Only the top right green LED on the MCU should be flashing and on if everything is normal.

♦ To switch back to this rack and test:

1. Select Tools, then Change over.2. Set “Mode” to manual.3. Under “Select Active Device” click the button for the offline rack. This should

force a cut over back to this ALS.4. Set “Mode” back to Automatic.5. Go to the Acom Console PC. Verify in IMS ALS that this subrack is now blue

(online-OK) and the other rack is green (offline-OK)


This procedure is only for an MCU4 in an ADS. For an MCU3 or MCU4 in an ALS, see Replacing MCU Cards in an ALS on page 293.

Required Equipment

• Zetron straight through cable part number 709-7345• PC/Laptop equipped with Windows or better and an RS232 Serial Com Port• IMS ADS software

(installation for this software is located on the Acom Install CD)


298 025-9574E

• WinZIP or other file compression utility(this may be required if the firmware file is not in .ZIP format)

♦ To verify MCU4/ADS is not active:

1. If this is a standalone ADS, skip to the next procedure To record the firmware version: on page 298.If this ADS is part of a redundant setup with two or more ADS’s, then continue.

2. Make sure no E1 links are active on the ADS. This can be verified by viewing the second row of green LEDs (right below the top right flashing green LED) on each MCU4 card in the ADS. For a diagram of MCU LEDs, see Figure 60 MCU4 Status Indicators (When Used in an ADS) on page 187.If any of these LEDs are lit solid, there is either a link to a Acom Console Unit/ACU or an active link to an ALS. Consult the system Network Diagram or follow the cables and make sure it’s NOT an active E1 link to an ALS.If there are no active E1 links to an ALS, skip to the next procedure, To record the firmware version: on page 298. If there are active links to an ALS, make sure that all ALS E1 links are switched active to the other ADS:a. At the IMS console, launch IMS Terminal, and login.b. Double click the ALS. From the Tools menu, select Change Over, select the


♦ To record the firmware version:


port should be configured for the following settings:Bits per second = 38400 (default for a MCU)Data bits = 8Parity = NoneStop bits = 1Flow Control = None


4. When the Password prompt appears, enter 8564888 and press Enter.5. A menu should appear with some selections. Enter 1 and press Enter.6. Once logged in, type ver and press Enter.7. Record the results for Release and Library.

299


8. Press the Esc key then press X to exit debug.

9. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap to the ADS rack.

10. Disconnect the SMB connections from the front of the MCU4 card by grasping the gold connectors and pulling on them. DO NOT pull on the cable itself or you may damage the cable.

11. Disconnect the DB9 serial cable.12. Use the card removal handle at the top of the card to slide the card forward.13. Remove the card and place in an ESD bag.

♦ To install the MCU4:

1. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap to the rack.2. Remove the new card from the ESD bag.3. Align the card with the card guides at the top, then bottom of the slot.4. Slide the card into the subrack and press the card into the rear connector using both

hands on the front of the card.5. Apply power to the subrack by turning on (down) the MSU card.6. Verify LED activity.

♦ To verify and update the firmware version:

1. It is necessary to make sure the MCU4 card installed has the same firmware version of the MCU4 card removed.

2. Check the firmware version of the new card and compare it with the firmware version you recorded for the old card (see To record the firmware version: on page 298).

3. If the MCU4 firmware is the same, skip to To reconnect the cables: on page 300.4. Before you proceed, make sure you have a copy of the MCU4<version>.zip

firmware file. If you do not have this file, call Zetron.5. Open a terminal program capable of serial communication.6. Open a terminal connection using the COM port connected to the MCU. The COM

port should be configured for the following settings:

Warning! The new MCU4 must be the same revision as the one you are replacing.

Note Although the MCU4 card is hot-swappable, it is preferred that the power be turned off when swapping out any cards in the system.

Warning! If the cables are not labeled, label them so you know where to connect them on the replacement card.

STOP

STOP


300 025-9574E

Bits per second = 38400 (default for a MCU)Data bits = 8Parity = NoneStop bits = 1Flow Control = None


8. When the Password prompt appears, enter “8564888” and press Enter.9. A menu should appear with some selections. Enter 1 then press Enter.10. At the MCUX> prompt, type download. The download process will begin.11. Using your terminal program, send the zipped firmware file using the 1K xmodem

protocol.

12. After the file has been transferred, the MCU4 will flash the file to memory then reset. This will take about 60 seconds.

13. After the MCU4 is online, check the firmware version to verify that the uploaded firmware is now active (see To verify and update the firmware version: on page 299).

♦ To reconnect the cables:

1. Turn off power to the ADS by switching the MSU power switch off (up).2. Re-connect the cables to the front of the card.3. Restore power to the ADS by switching the MSU power switch on (down).4. Wait 120 seconds for the ADS to come on line.5. Make ALSs connected to this MCU4/ADS active by performing a changeover

described in Replacing MCU Cards in an ALS on page 293.6. Test some line resources to verify that the system resources are functional on this

MCU4/ADS.

Warning! Choosing the incorrect file or file transfer protocol may result in a dead MCU4 card. The only way to recover a dead MCU4 card is to send it to Zetron for repair.

Note The MCU4 supports the zip file compression format. After the zip file has been transferred, the MCU4 will CRC check the zip file, unzip it, and update to flash.

STOP

301

Replacing MSU Cards

Replacing MSU Cards

♦ To remove the old MSU card:

1. If this ALS is part of a Main-Standby setup and it is currently in control, force control over to the other ALS:a. At the IMS console, launch IMS Terminal, and login.b. Double click the ALS. From the Tools menu, select Change Over, select the



3. Remove power from the rack at the fuse or breaker panel.4. Use a grounding wrist strap to prevent ESD damage to the equipment.5. Carefully disconnect the EURO96 connector from the front of the card by

squeezing at the top and bottom of the connector while pulling straight out.6. Remove the weidmuller 48volt power connection from the front of the MSU by

pulling straight out.7. Flip top lever on card upward to dislodge it from the backplane connector. Slide

card out slowly and carefully.

♦ Install replacement card:

1. Verify that power has been removed from the subrack at the fuse or breaker panel.2. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap connected to the rack.3. Remove the new card from the ESD bag.4. Review the jumpers on the old card and verify all jumpers are set the same on the

new card.5. Place card old card in ESD bag.6. Verify MSU power switch is in the UP position.7. Align the card with the card guides at the top, then bottom of the slot.8. Slowly and carefully slide the card into the subrack.9. Press the card into the rear connector using two hands on the front of the card.

Note Please exercise electro-static discharge (ESD) precautions when handling all cards.

Warning! The MSU card is NOT hot-swappable.STOP


302 025-9574E

10. Connect the EURO96 connector and weidmuller power connector to the front of the card.

11. Apply power to the rack using the fuse panel or circuit breaker.12. Push the power switch DOWN on the MSU.13. Verify in IMS Terminal that the ALS with the replaced MSU card appears and has

no Urgent Alarms.14. If this ALS is part of a Main-Standby setup, force control back to this ALS:

a. From the Tools menu in IMS Terminal, select Change Over.b. Select the Manual option and select this ALS.c. Verify the ALS icon in IMS turns light blue to show that this ALS is in control.d. Once this ALS has taken control, select the Automatic option and exit the

Change Over menu.15. Test the new card. Verify that the run LED flashes.

Replacing RVA Cards

The RVA card provides Acom with the capability of using recorded voice announcements. The RVA card is hot-swappable. Recorded announcements are stored in non-volatile memory, so recordings are retained even if the RVA card loses power. This also means you can move the RVA card from one slot to another without losing the recordings.

♦ To remove an RVA card:

1. If the ALS that contains the RVA card is part of a Main-Standby setup, force control over to the other ALS:a. At the IMS console, launch IMS Terminal, and login.b. Double click the ALS. From the Tools menu, click Change Over, the Manual

option, and then select the ALS NOT in control.c. Verify that the icon in IMS turns blue for the other ALS.d. Select the Automatic option and exit the Change Over menu.

2. In IMS, make a note of the card’s firmware version; the new card must be the same revision. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap attached to the rack.

3. If there is an audio device connected to the headset jack, remove the device.4. Use the card removal handle at the top of the card to slide the card forward.5. Remove the card and place it in an ESD bag.


STOP

303

Replacing SMU Cards

♦ To install an RVA card:

1. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap attached to the rack.2. Remove the new card from the ESD bag.3. Align the card with the card guides at the top, then bottom of the slot.4. Slide the card into the subrack.5. Press the card into the rear connector using both hands on the front of the card.6. If applicable, reconnect the audio device to the headset jack.7. Verify that the card can be seen in IMS and that the run LED flashes (see Recorded

Voice Announcement (RVA) Card on page 235).8. Upgrade the unit's firmware if necessary (contact Zetron Technical Support).9. If necessary, use IMS to download or record your voice announcements to RVA

card. (See Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.)

Replacing SMU Cards

The SMU card provides all signalling for the subrack (VOX, DTMF, TRC, AGC, …). It may alternatively be used for VoIP radio interfaces such as OpenSky. This card is hot-swappable.

Required Equipment

• Zetron SMU cable, part number 709-7592-xxx (xxx=cable length)• PC with Windows, serial com port, and terminal software capable of serial comm

♦ To record the current Firmware version:

1. If the ALS that contains the SMU card is part of a Main-Standby setup, force control over to the other ALS:a. At the IMS console, launch IMS Terminal, and login.b. Double click the ALS. From the Tools menu, click Change Over, the Manual

option, and then select the ALS NOT in control.

Caution! Please exercise electro-static discharge (ESD) precautions when handling all cards.

!

Note Although these cards are hot swappable, it is preferable that the power be turned off when swapping out any cards.

No subrack programming is required when replacing these cards.


304 025-9574E

c. Verify that the icon in IMS turns blue for the other ALS.d. Select the Automatic option and exit the Change Over menu.

2. Connect the SMU cable between the PC and the front connector on the SMU. The connector on the SMU is keyed and can only fit properly one way.

3. Open a terminal program capable of serial communication.4. Open a terminal connection using the COM port connected to the SMU. The COM

port should be configured for the following settings:Bits per second = 38400 (default for a SMU)Data bits = 8Parity = NoneStop bits = 1Flow Control = None


6. When the Password prompt appears, enter 8564888 and press Enter.7. Once logged in type ver and press Enter, record the results.


1. If the ALS that contains the SMU card is part of a Main-Standby setup, force control over to the other ALS:a. At the IMS console, launch IMS Terminal, and login.b. Double click the ALS. From the Tools menu, select Change Over, select the


2. Use a grounding wrist strap to prevent ESD damage to the equipment.3. Flip top lever on card upward to dislodge it from the backplane connector. Slide

card out slowly and carefully.4. Place card in ESD bag.

♦ To install the replacement card:

1. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap connected to the rack.2. Remove the new card from the ESD bag.3. Align the card with the card guides at the top, then bottom of the slot.4. Slowly and carefully slide the card into the subrack.5. Press the card into the rear connector using two hands on the front of the card.6. Verify in IMS Terminal that the ALS is reporting no Urgent Alarms.

305

Replacing Telephone Radio Handset Interfaces (TRHI)

♦ To verify or upgrade the firmware of the SMU:

Requirements:• SMU update file. This is typically supplied via email from Zetron technical

support or located on the Acom Install CD. The supplied file may be titled “smu_141.raw” or similar.

1. Open a terminal session as described in To record the current Firmware version: on page 303.

2. Press Esc until you see a “Password:” prompt, it should only take three presses. If you do not get the “Password:” prompt, check the COM port and its settings.

3. When the Password prompt appears, enter 8564888 and press Enter.4. Once logged in type ver and press Enter, record the results.

5. Type Download and press Enter. This command will cause the SMU to prompt for a Xmodem transfer by sending a “C” character repeatedly.

6. Using your terminal program, send the zipped firmware file using the 1K xmodem protocol.

7. Press Esc three times to get another Password prompt.8. Type 8564888 and press Enter.9. Type the ver command again and note the results.

Replacing Telephone Radio Handset Interfaces (TRHI)

The Telephone Radio Handset Interface (TRHI) provides a common point between a phone and radio system to allow for a single headset to service both systems. It functions as a jackbox and handset interface, but also as an audio amplifier and switching device.

Warning! The sub rack will not function properly while updating the SMU firmware.

Note If firmware version in the new card is the same as the firmware version recorded earlier in the old card, then the install has been completed.

Warning! Choosing the incorrect file or file transfer protocol may result in a dead SMU card. The only way to recover a dead SMU card is to send it to Zetron for repair.

STOP

STOP


306 025-9574E

♦ Removal:

1. Disconnect the ground wire from the rear of the TRHI.2. Disconnect power from the TRHI.3. Disconnect the DB9 and Weidmuller connections from the rear of the TRHI.4. Remove the side screws that hold the TRHI to the top cover and remove the unit

from under the desk. If you are not replacing this unit, remove the top cover as well.

♦ Installation:

1. Remove the top cover and set the jumpers as required. Refer to the previously installed unit's settings or TRHI manual 025-9553.

2. Secure the TRHI top cover to the bottom of the writing surface using the supplied screws. Mount the TRHI far enough away from the front edge of the work surface to prevent the handset connector from protruding.

3. Attach the body of the interface to the top cover.4. Connect the case ground, located on the rear panel, to the central earth ground.5. Install cable 709-7629 or 709-7684 between the DB9 connector of the TRHI and

one of the HS ports of the OAM (HS1/HS2). (Cable 709-7629 draws power from the Acom Console Unit and cable 709-7684 draws power from an AC/DC transformer.)

6. Connect the lead labelled “PTT” to the Acom Console Unit’s digital output pin 2.7. Connect the lead labelled “HSE” to the Acom Console Unit’s digital input pin 6.8. Connect the 12V power source to the TRHI.9. Perform level adjustments described in the TRHI manual (P/N 025-9553).

Replacing UIO Cards


1. If the ALS that contains the UIO card is part of a Main-Standby setup, force control over to the other ALS:a. At the IMS console, launch IMS Terminal, and login.

Caution! Please exercise electro-static discharge (ESD) precautions when handling all cards.

Note Although these cards are hot swappable, it is preferable that the power be turned off when swapping out any cards in the system.

!

307

Replacing UIO Cards

b. Double click the ALS. From the Tools menu, select Change Over, select the Manual option and select the ALS NOT in control.

c. Verify that the icon in IMS turns blue for the other ALS.d. Select the Automatic option and exit the Change Over menu.


3. Use a grounding wrist strap to prevent ESD damage to the equipment.4. Carefully disconnect the EURO96 connector from the front of the card by

squeezing at the top and bottom of the connector while pulling straight out.5. Flip top lever on card upward to dislodge it from the backplane connector. Slide

card out slowly and carefully.

♦ Install replacement card:

1. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap connected to the rack.2. Remove the new card from the ESD bag.3. Review the jumpers on the old card and verify all jumpers are set the same on the

new card.4. Place card old card in ESD bag.5. Align the card with the card guides at the top, then bottom of the slot.6. Slowly and carefully slide the card into the subrack.7. Press the card into the rear connector using two hands on the front of the card.8. Connect the EURO96 connector to the front of the card.9. Apply power to the subrack.10. Verify in IMS Terminal that the new card appears and that the slot box for it is

green.11. If this ALS is part of a Main-Standby setup, force control back to this ALS:

a. At the IMS console, launch IMS Terminal, and login.b. Double click the ALS. From the Tools menu, select Change Over, select the

Manual option and select the ALS NOT in control.c. Verify that the icon in IMS turns blue for this ALS.d. Select the Automatic option and exit the Change Over menu.

12. Test some of the UIO input to make sure they are functional.


308 025-9574E

309

Changeover Control

This document explains the use of a Changeover Subrack to switch Acom radio or telephone resources between redundant Acom Line Subracks (ALS).

Use of a main and standby subrack is supported to maximize Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF). A failure in one rack will not result in a lost resource because a duplicate resource is available in the standby subrack. If the currently selected ALS triggers an alarm because of a major fault, the other ALS will lose confidence and demand control of the lines from the changeover subrack.

Note The main rack and standby rack should have the same hardware and same configuration (except for addresses). See Cloning an ALS on page 316.

Changeover Control

310 025-9574E

Changeover Hardware

The Acom changeover control system is primarily composed of a main, standby, and changeover subrack. Each rack is equipped with cards to support the hot standby application. The E1 links from the subrack to the ADS (Acom DS3 Switch) are not switched, a combination of signaling lines between the racks determine which E1 link is considered active to be presented to the system backbone.

The Acom Line Subrack (ALS)

An Acom Line Subrack consists of a Main Control Unit (MCU), a Main Supply Unit (MSU), a subrack assembly, and line cards. Each redundant pair of ALSs in the changeover system should be equipped and configured identically with all of the same resources so switchover is seamless to the user.

An ALS will demand control when it loses confidence in the opposite subrack. By monitoring the Watchdog (AI13) and Standby Fault (AI21) alarm outputs of the opposite subrack, the MSU card can demand a switchover to take control by asserting the System Select (AO11) output. By momentarily grounding this output, the MSU will signal the Changeover Control Card (CCC) in the Changeover subrack that it wishes control of the radio and phone lines. The CCC will command all COV-V, COV-R, and COV-T relay cards to switch lines over to give the subrack control and will assert the System A Selected or System B Selected outputs to tell the subracks which ALS now has control. This CCC output is connected to the MSU “System Selected” input (AI11) and a parallel connection is made to the ADS input.

MSU

The Main Supply Unit (MSU) serves many functions in an Acom system, system tone generation, DC-DC conversion, and alarm inputs and outputs. The MSU has six input and six output alarms. MSU input alarms are pulled high to –48 volts by the MSU card’s internal jumpers JP1-JP6. A ground on any of these inputs will cause the input to become active. The output alarms of the MSU are opto-isolated common collector outputs that pull to ground (+VV) when active.

System Selected and Select System (AO11/AI11)

The SYSSEL output (AO11) is grounded by the MSU card to signal the CCC card that it wishes to take control. AI11 is then grounded by the CCC card to signal the MSU that it has control. The subrack will take control when it sees its Standby Fault input go active or its Watchdog Fault input go inactive. The subrack may additionally take control if the local alarms clear and the opposite subrack still has either a Standby Fault or Watchdog Fault.

311

Changeover Hardware

Standby Fault (AO21/AI21)

This is the primary health alarm of the subrack. It is used to signal the other subrack when it has an urgent alarm. The output is programmable; it is useful to configure this alarm identically to the Urgent Output alarm.

This input is expected to be normally inactive and if it becomes active a fault in the standby rack is assumed. This signal is used in conjunction with the Watchdog Fault to provide communication between main and standby subracks. If the Standby Fault input goes active, the local subrack will take control of the lines.

Watchdog (AO13/AI13)

The Watchdog output (AO13) is in an active state under normal operation. There are two alarms that are hard coded (fixed) to the Watchdog output alarm. Should the Primary MCU card in the ALS go dead, or the MSU lose power, the Watchdog output will go inactive to indicate it has failed. In addition to these two non-configurable triggers, additional alarm inputs can be mapped to this MSU output to trigger a changeover (see “Alarms” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration P/N 025-9529). It is common to connect all operational alarms to the Standby Fault output and leave only the loss of power and failure of a primary MCU to trigger the watchdog.

The Watchdog input (AI13) monitors the Watchdog output of the other sub rack. If this input goes inactive the MSU will demand control by asserting the SYSSEL Output (AO11).

Bad E1 (AO23/AI23)

The AI23 input is commonly used to detect a problem associated with the E1 link connected to the rack. The ADS that services this subrack provide this signal if any of the E1 links from the ALS to the switch fail. It provides a faster indication of a lost E1 than waiting for a LOS, NOS, or RRA signal and will result in a quicker changeover between subracks.

Changeover Subrack

A Changeover Subrack consists of a Changeover Control Card (CCC), a subrack assembly without the lower backplane, and one or more COV-V/COV-R/COV-T cards. The lower backplane of the Changeover Subrack is removed to allow for the connection of IDF cables to the back of each changeover card (COV-V/COV-R/COV-T). Unlike an Acom Line Subrack, the Changeover Subrack does not require an MCU or MSU card to function.

In an Acom system, to minimize the number of resources affected by a problem, only two ALSs should be connected to one Changeover subrack. The complexity involved in switching more than two ALSs from a single Changeover is more trouble than its worth. If a fault existed in one of the “A” ALSs and one of the “B” ALSs, there is not good state where all resources are in working order unless each ALS pair is switched independently.

Changeover Control

312 025-9574E

There are applications where two ALSs could be switched together but that is beyond the scope of this document.


The CCC card is designed to take changeover control commands from the connected subracks and command the installed COV-V, COV-R, or COV-T relay cards to switch the common connections to the subrack in control. The CCC card accepts dual 48vdc power inputs so it does not lose power if one supply fails. Signaling leads in the audio/alarm interface from each MSU power supply connect to the CCC DB9 ports on the front edge of the CCC card. The CCC signals the Changeover Subrack’s COV-V/COV-R voice circuit cards or COV-T coaxial circuit cards to switch between the A and B system. LEDs on the front of the CCC card indicate A power, B power, and a status of which system is in control (see “CCC” in Acom Maintenance, P/N 025-9528).

Changeover Card - 48/96 Way Switch (COV-V / COV-R)

The COV-V and COV-R cards switch 24 2-wire circuits (or pairs) between an A and B system through a bank of relays. LEDs on the front of the card indicate the switched state of the card’s relays. Another LED on the front of the card indicates if it is receiving power from the CCC card. Each of the six LEDs on the front of the card reflects the switched state for 2 of the 12 relays on the card (see Changeover Card - 48/96 Way Switch (COV-V and COV-R) on page 123).

Inputs from the A ALS are connected to the top connector of the COV card (P2 on the COV-V card or J1 on the COV-R card). Inputs from the B ALS are connected to the bottom connector (P3 on the COV-V or J2 on the COV-R). The common outputs of the COV-V and COV-R cards are connected to the back connector P1 and are terminated at an independent distribution frame (IDF) for connection to the physical line or circuit.

Changeover Card - 3 Way Coaxial Switch (COV-T)

A COV-T card switches three sets (pairs) of coaxial links between an A and B system. This card is typically used to switch E1 or ISDN links from the phone system and the A and B rack. It is not used to switch E1 links between subracks and the backbone switch (ADS). The COV-T is not meant to switch E1s between the Acom Console Unit loops and backbone switch. These connections are already redundant and do not need to pass through a changeover card.

The common pair of coaxial lines connect to the top SMB pair on each of the three connection sets. The first set of connections is on the top front of the COV-T card. The top pair is the common, the second pair is the A side, and the third pair is the B side. Just below these coaxial connections are the second set and the third set of coaxial links are connected to the rear of the COV-T card. Unlike the COV-V and COV-R cards, the common connections are NOT made through the back, instead there are two common sets of connections on the front of the card, and one on the back. (See Changeover Card - 3 Way Coax Switch (COV-T) on page 118.)

313

Changeover Hardware

Card Placement

The CCC card should be located in slot 0 (far left) of the changeover cabinet The COV-V, COV-R, and COV-T cards should be located in slots 1 through 12 of the Changeover Subrack.

Additional Hardware

The common connections secure to the back of the rack and changeover cards using screw terminal connections. Care should be taken to verify the card seats completely into the back cable.

Backbone Switch Signaling

The backbone switch is an Acom DS3 Switch (ADS). The ADS switches E1 circuits to/from the high speed backbone.

The CCC card’s SYSSEL output is used by the backbone switch to determine which E1 is to be switched onto the high-speed backbone (DS3). With the E1s of both the A and B subracks permanently connected to backbone switch, the system needs to know which E1 is the valid signal (in control) for the subrack’s associated lines. The E1 signal from the subrack that is in control of the physical circuits will be connected to the backbone to be made available for other Acom devices.

The CCC card has two outputs for the SYSASEL signal and two for the SYSBSEL signal. One of each signal is connected to the ALS, and the other is connected to the backbone switch associated with the ALS. The SYSSEL input signals the backbone switch that the associated E1 link is connected to the active ALS and should be considered the valid signal (and connected to the backbone).

An output from the backbone switch is connected to the ALS as an advanced indicator of a problem on the E1 links from the ALS. This signal is connected between one of the backbone switch digital outputs and the ALS MSU alarm input AI23 “Bad E1”. If the backbone switch detects a problem with the E1 on the corresponding link (such as NOS/LOS) it will signal this output to give the ALS advanced warning and prompt a changeover. This output can provide a faster indication of a bad E1 than just monitoring for LOS, NOS, or RRA on the MCU card.


The ADS digital I/O for changeover control is connected via a 25-pin connector on the front of the DS3 Control Unit (DCU). The DCU has 8 inputs and eight outputs. The inputs are pulled to –48 volts using the externally provided bias voltages on the front of the DCU. An external bias voltage must be provided, the DCU does not have a way to internally bias these IOs. To signal the DCU that the ALS on the corresponding E1 circuit is in control and its E1s should be used, an input is pulled low (0Vdc). ADS inputs and outputs are programmable, any input may be used to set one or more E1 links as active. Any output can be programmed to activate on a bad E1 link.

Changeover Control

314 025-9574E

The ADS can be signaled which ALS is in control by grounding the corresponding input on the DCU I/O connector. The input is programmable, any input can be configured to represent any number of links that are active (in control). This input is typically connected to the Changeover Control Card (CCC) output SYSASEL or SYSBSEL. The input is pulled to –48vdc internally by the ADS and is taken active by grounding it (0Vdc).

Once an ALS is communicating with the connected ADS on E1 TS16, the MCU4 LED B1 (link 1) or B2 (link 2) will come on solid for the ALS that has control and will slowly flash green on the link(s) connected to the standby ALS (see Main Control Unit (MCU) on page 180).

ADS outputs indicating the link status are also available from the DCU I/O connector. The output is programmable, any output may represent any number of bad E1 links. These outputs should be connected to MSU AI23 (input 6) and programmed to trigger an Urgent Alarm LED and Standby Fault when active. The output will indicate active by being pulled to 0vdc (ground). The connected equipment should pull this output high to –48vdc and watch for the ground. The programmed DCU output will be pulled to +VV (ground) by the ADS when there is a failure (NOS/LOS) on the corresponding 2Mbit port.

315

ADS Changeover Wiring Example

ADS Changeover Wiring Example

This is an example only. Every Acom system has custom wiring diagrams included with the package of on-site documentation.

Changeover Control

316 025-9574E

Forcing a Changeover

• A technician can force a changeover using IMS (see “Change Over” in the “Tools Menu” section of Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529). Alternatively, a technician can force a changeover to an ALS by removing the front edge connector of the MSU card. These are the preferred methods to cause a changeover because they are the least disruptive.

• Incorrect wiring of the changeover signaling between the CCC and MSU may cause the subracks to switch continuously between the A and B system. This could happen if both racks have Watchdog and Standby faults active. Check your changeover wiring diagrams against the actual wiring in the Krone blocks.

• If the ALS never switches to the other sub rack even though a Watchdog failure has been triggered, the sub rack may be automatically acknowledging the alarms, check the mapping for the “Alarms ACK’d” output alarm in IMS (see “Alarms” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).

• If the ALS will not switch to the other subrack even though it has no alarms and the Watchdog has triggered on the active rack, it may be caused by a lack of confidence that the other rack is okay because of a problem with the SYSSEL output of the CCC card is pulled low by an unpowered DS3 Switch alarm I/O. Make sure the backbone switch alarms are biased by providing an external –48vdc reference. It may also be caused by the Watchdog alarm not being seen at the other subrack, the Watchdog input should normally be active. The OK alarm should be normally inactive.

Cloning an ALS

This section provides instructions for a Zetron Certified Acom technician to clone the ALS configuration from the main rack to the backup. Cloning the main configuration into the backup is a fast way to copy your changes to the standby ALS and keep both racks in sync. It is assumed that both ALSs have identical cards.

Equipment• Straight through RS-232 serial cable (DB9 to DB9)• Computer with IMS installed

Warning! If you change over using IMS, be certain to set “Mode” back to “Automatic”. Leaving this in manual mode will prevent an ALS from taking control in the event of a failure.

STOP

317

Cloning an ALS

Procedure1. Connect to the MCU3 connector X13 of the “Main” ALS using a straight-through

RS-232 cable.2. Start IMS and choose Communications-Connect from the IMS menu to connect.

Enter the network address of the main sub rack when prompted.3. Once connected, click File, Save to Disk from the IMS menu.4. Disconnect from the “Main” ALS and move the RS-232 cable from the “Main” to

the “Standby” ALS.5. From the IMS menu, click File, Load from Disk, and select the file you

previously saved from the “Main” ALS.6. The only options that should be different between the “Main” and “Standby” ALS

are the Sub-rack Address and External Clocking. Click Configure, Subrack Address from the IMS menu. Set the option to Standby and click Save.

7. Choose File, Update to Rack from the IMS menu to transfer the configuration to the ALS.

8. Reset the “Standby” ALS to finalize the changes.

Changeover Control

318 025-9574E

319

Preventative Maintenance

This chapter provides recommended preventative maintenance tips for an Acom system.

Check for Faults

The most important preventative maintenance you can do for your Acom system is to watch for faults and alarms. There are many faults that can occur that do not cause a loss of service. You can identify these issues using the IMS fault logs, the IMS alarm displays, and the LEDs associated with the equipment.

LEDs

The LEDs on the front of the equipment may be the first thing that makes you aware of an issue. On a periodic basis, walk by the common control electronics and check for any red, yellow, or amber LEDs that might indicate a problem. The LEDs may direct you to check the alarms of the associated device. Refer to the chapter Hardware Components on page 73 for a detailed description of the system LEDs.

Alarms

The IMS Terminal application can give you a high-level summary of the alarms in the system. While it does not include alarms that have come and gone, it does show devices with active alarms. Once the alarming device(s) have been identified, you could dive deeper into the specific input alarms or check the fault logs. Consult the chapter Appendix C: Alarms on page 371 for a detailed description of the input alarm definitions. Consult the chapter Troubleshooting on page 325 for a list of error messages and their causes.

Fault logs

The IMS fault logs should be checked on a periodic basis to monitor past alarms. If an alarm came and went before you could look at the alarms, the fault logs would still provide a history of when the alarm was active and inactive. Compare the fault logs against your maintenance records and flag anything that can’t be explained. Consult the section IMS Fault Logs on page 373 for a detailed description of the fault log messages.


320 025-9574E

Backups

Creating current backups of the system’s configuration is critical to recovering from a failure quickly. Make backups whenever the configuration changes.

Full Backups

Make full backups of the computer on a regular basis. A full computer backup can be quickly restored, simplifying the recovery process. It may be possible to automate backups.

IMS Backup

When changing the configuration of an Acom device such as a Acom Console Unit, save the configuration to disk on the maintenance terminal. Backup the IMS Terminal folder C:\Program Files\Zetron\IMS Terminal\ on a regular basis to archive the configurations off the server.

ACS Backup

Backup the latest copy of your ACS configuration by copying the entire C:\Program Files\Zetron\ACS\ folder to disk or other backup medium. This only needs be done for one position.

Standby Backup

Backing up also means copying the system configuration between the main and standby subracks. Any changes you make to the system A racks should be duplicated or cloned on the system B racks. Consult the section Cloning an ALS on page 316 for instructions on cloning an ALS.

Maintenance Log

When performing maintenance, changes, upgrades, or troubleshooting the system, make a record of the date and time with a short description of the action taken. Note in the log when backups are made. Note intermittent symptoms and any Zetron trouble ticket numbers you received as part of a trouble call. The maintenance log should be kept in the equipment room accessible to you.

321

System Monitoring in IMS

Example Maintenance Log

Check for Environmental Issues

When the Acom system was installed, the site was checked for environmental issues such as dust, moisture, vibration, and temperature. If these conditions have changed, they may cause operating problems. Check the environmental specs for each piece of equipment on a periodic basis. Check the equipment room and console positions for moisture, high or low temperature, and dust on a periodic basis.

Test Backup Systems

If the Acom system was delivered with a redundant backup system (main/standby), the system should be switched to the backup system a few times a year to verify operation and configuration. It is advised to do this during a maintenance hour to avoid impacting the end user. The chapter Changeover Control on page 309 provides detail about the changeover control system and instructions on how to force the system to the standby subrack.


IMS is the Acom software application used to manage the Acom infrastructure and network via a user-friendly graphical user interface (GUI). IMS is used by those responsible for configuring and maintaining the system. It can be installed on all dispatcher positions, but this is not necessary.

IMS ALS Module

The IMS ALS module provides a user interface to the Acom system, which allows you to perform the following functions:

• Configure connections, parameter values, and modes of operation.• Monitor link status, alarms, system faults, and signaling status.• Check system diagnostics such as self-tests and alarm simulation.

Date Time Description Corrective action Zetron EFO Ticket#

Jan 1 8:12a Urgent alarm on ALS1A – Fault logs show EMU card 5 removed

Talked with Joe at Zetron, replaced EMU card

123456

Jan 15 12:30p Scheduled backup Backed up IMS configs to disk. -


322 025-9574E

General Configuration

In an ALS, the Primary MCU functions as a master controller for the other cards and has a non-volatile memory that contains the configuration information. When the Primary MCU is reset, it uses the configuration data in the memory to set the connections, parameter values, and modes of operation for all cards in the subrack.

By using IMS, the configuration of the subrack can be changed and if desired, the changes can be saved to the non-volatile memory so that the subrack uses that configuration after reset. If no configuration has been saved to the non-volatile memory, then the Primary MCU uses a default configuration that includes connections to line cards, which may or may not be fitted in the subrack.

The complete configuration description is located in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529. A brief overview is given in Table 200.

Table 200: Overview of Acom Configuration

Monitoring

The Acom system is designed for two levels of monitoring. LEDs are provided on the cards for basic monitoring of the state of the link and channel operation. These are described in Acom Card Reference on page 111.

The IMS software provides a means for more detailed and informative monitoring and includes facilities for observing the status of links, alarms, system faults, and signaling states. A brief summary is shown in Table 201.

Item Description

Configuration Data The Primary MCU is capable of storing two sets of configuration information. It can use one set only or can switch between the two sets upon an event occurring (e.g., alarm becoming active).

Connections Connection types and definitions must be set for all channels.Data Formats The G.703 links can be set for double frame or CRC4 with CAS

enabled or disabled. DIU card interfaces can be configured for synchronous or asynchronous operation at various data rates.

Alarming Include settings for slip time and alarm pulse operation. Alarms can be individually defined.

Synchronization Clock sources for the subrack may be listed in order of priority for use.Signaling Signaling bits may be individually inverted. The handling of signaling

for certain cards can be selected from a set of options.Ringers Ringers can be configured for single or dual operation.Gain Channel gain for audio circuits may be set.Other Date, time, password, and rack address can be changed.

323


Table 201: Summary of Acom Monitoring

Remote Management

If remote access is required, Symantec pcAnywhere must be installed on the IMS PC. Any PC running the pcAnywhere client and connected to the IMS PC can then use IMS remotely. Remote users, depending upon their password-protected access level, can perform all management and configuration tasks provided by IMS as well as transfer files between the IMS PC Terminal and the remote PC.

pcAnywhere is a third-party product sold and supported by Symantec Corporation.

Diagnostics

System diagnostics may be checked by viewing the LEDs on Acom cards. Examples are the LEDs for the Run and Reset indications.

IMS also allows diagnostics to be checked and includes features for performing system and link level tests. A summary of the diagnostics information is given in Table 202.

Table 202: Summary of Acom Diagnostics

Item Description

Link Status The status of each G.703 link, including the status of alarms relating to the link may be observed.

Alarm Status The status of input alarms and of alarms defined by the user may be viewed and acknowledged.

Signaling Status Windows are provided for observing the status of signaling bits for G.703 links and for channels of individual cards.

Item Description

System Faults Fault logs are generated for the system and may be viewed to determine the sequence and occurrence of faults.

Card Details The type, slot position and revision level of cards is displayed.Loopback Loopback connections can be set for any type of card for

diagnostic and operational checks. Self Tests The MCU3 and other cards can perform self-tests to check the

operation of major circuits. SIM Mode An alarm simulation mode allows the MCU3 to simulate a

number of alarms at a G.703 link. Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Injection

AIS may be injected on any G.703 link.

Ping When connected in a network, the Ping command shows the addresses of other connected subracks.


324 025-9574E

Performance Testing and Troubleshooting

The Acom system features a facility to monitor and record transmission performance of the G.703 links using IMS. The parameters monitored include No Signal (NOS), Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), Loss of Synchronization (LOS), remote alarm and slip detection. The event log also records the statistical performance of the G.703 data stream, recording HDB3 code violations, CRC-4 error counts, and an ongoing measure of the bit error rate (BER) of the data.

A major feature provided by this system is the capability to perform internal loopbacks in the various signal paths. Loopbacks are used during commissioning and fault finding. By creating loops on signal paths it is possible to check the integrity of a channel from a given point in the system. To set a loopback, see “Loopback” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.

Installation and Configuration References

Additional topics related to Acom maintenance are the Installation and Configuration instructions described in the following documents:

Acom Software Installation and Configuration (P/N 025-9529)Acom Console Software Operation (P/N 025-9530)

General Troubleshooting

325

Troubleshooting

General Troubleshooting

Use the following general methods to detect and identify problems.

Gather symptoms by running a functional test and checking for alarms and faults.

Other symptoms may arise if you exercise the system. These symptoms may help you find the source of the problem. Check fault logs, system alarms, and LEDs, as they may lead you to the solution.

What has changed?

Ask yourself and others what has changed with the system that might have caused this. For example, recent configuration updates.

Reset the associated device

If you can, reset the associated Acom Console Unit, ALS, or ADS. If your system is redundant, you may not lose any functionality. While this does not help you understand what was wrong, it may correct the fault very quickly.

Isolate

Break the problem into blocks and isolate them. Can you isolate the problem to one position? One loop? A particular ADS? Is it common to a single line or circuit? A group of lines shared by a line card?

Switch to the backup system and retest; if the problem is now resolved, it may have been localized to the main system. Once you have isolated a problem, understanding what has caused it becomes easier.

Troubleshooting

326 025-9574E

Substitute

Once you have isolated the issue, try substituting a spare. Switching to the standby system is a method of substitution. Substitution can help you isolate problems as well.

Call for help

Zetron technical support is available 24/7. Your support contract will determine if support is free or requires a credit card. Please have your System ID ready when you call (the ID number is often found on the front of the Zetron cabinets).

For contact information, see http://www.zetron.com.

Specific Troubleshooting

Audio Problems on page 326

Console Problems on page 327

Other Problems on page 329

Audio Problems

Incorrect Audio or No Audio

There is no transmit audio from one position; all other positions are fine on page 329

One line has no transmit audio on all positions on page 330

Users cannot hear selected lines in the handset/headset on one console only on page 330

There is no receive audio from a monitored line on one console only on page 330

There is no audio from a line on any console on page 331

Selected or monitored lines do not present parallel operator transmit audio, only receive audio on page 333

Selected lines do not appear in the select speaker on page 334

Select audio does not appear in the select speaker on page 337

Monitored or selected lines are unmonitored or unselected by themselves on page 344

327

Specific Troubleshooting

Mute Not Working

Some functions like “Ring Mute” and “Mute All” time out on page 334

The “All Mute” or “Monitor Mute” function does not completely mute the receive audio on page 334

Volume and Audio Quality

Adjacent operators are too loud in my speakers on page 345

The level of the monitored channels cannot be changed on page 335

Crackle or static sound at position on page 344

Noise in speaker, clicking/ticking sound at times. Happens the most during logon on page 344

60hz buzz in speakers. on page 344

Hearing conversation from an adjacent position in headset or speaker on page 345

Console Problems

General

The ACS crashes on startup with a Windows error when run from a Windows login without administrative permissions on page 338

Cannot exit to Windows on page 332

Cannot log off ACS on page 332

Cannot select a radio channel on the ACS, console plays a “Bing” sound when line clicked on page 332

The ACS does not show Tx indication (yellow text) on radio line on page 332

The ACS did not bring up the dial pad, the button is stuck in the depressed position on page 333

The ACS popup forms, such as dial pad, monitor, and conference, are blocking access to other buttons and cannot be moved on page 333

The time on the console is wrong on page 335

All lines on the ACS gray out during operation on page 335

Intercom fails and ACS plays a “Bing” without connecting to selected console on page 345

Troubleshooting

328 025-9574E

Integrator IRR

IntegratorIRR is not recording messages on page 342

IntIRR is recording blank (silent) messages on page 342

Popup message “IRR failed to record” on page 343

IRR not working. Message: “irr.exe has generated errors and will be closed by Windows, you will need to restart this program, an error log is being created” on page 343

IntegratorIRR failure “the currently recording message has exceeded the imposed size limit for a single recorded message. Ensure that your record control configuration parameters are optimally set to avoid recording messages that are too large” on page 343

Console Error Messages

The console displays “Heartbeat Timeout” message on page 331

The console displays “No Audio Interface” message on page 331

The status bar says “SOMETHING.WAV does not exist” on page 333

The Status bar shows “Console Waiting ##” on page 337

The ACS pops up a dialog “Cannot open quick dial database” and does not start on page 338

The ACS pops up a dialog “Line key XX type does not match physical line XX” when loading the form file on page 338

The ACS logon dialog box shows “Fail Over” mode instead of “Online” on page 340

The ACS logon dialog box shows “Offline” mode instead of “Online” on page 340

Popup message “IRR failed to record” on page 343

IRR not working. Message: “irr.exe has generated errors and will be closed by Windows, you will need to restart this program, an error log is being created” on page 343

IntegratorIRR failure “the currently recording message has exceeded the imposed size limit for a single recorded message. Ensure that your record control configuration parameters are optimally set to avoid recording messages that are too large” on page 343

Missing or Unavailable Functions

There are missing monitors in the Monitor selection popup. MS1/MS2/MS3/MS4 are gray and not selectable on page 336

The Dial Pad does not have a Send button when an ISDN line is selected / Cannot make calls on ISDN lines on page 337

329

Recommended Actions

The Alpha Search button is missing from the Dial Pad on page 338

The Broadcast and Announce buttons are missing from the Intercom popup on page 339

Headset/Handset/Footswitch

The foot switch does not key the selected radio channel on page 339

The handset/headset does not key the selected radio channel, does not show yellow text on line on page 339

Other Problems

The phone line turns green but will not ring for inbound calls on page 334

The ACS is slow to respond to button presses such as line selection or PTT on page 336

Right-clicking on a radio channel causes a popup dialog to appear instead of causing an instant transmit on page 340

The passwords for the ACS have been lost or forgotten on page 341

The passwords for the ACU, DCU, or MCU have been lost or forgotten on page 341

Hunt Groups are not working; a line is not selected on page 346

Recommended Actions

There is no transmit audio from one position; all other positions are fine

Possible Cause Recommended Action

Handset not detected. If the Status Panel in ACS shows “Speaker”, the handset is not detected. Check its connection and try a different handset. The ACS uses the microphone current to detect the headset/handset.

Console in Demo mode. Check status bar that console is “Online”. May have gone into demo mode because of communications errors.

Microphone is muted. Check the Mute function. If it is flashing, the operator’s microphone is muted.

Troubleshooting

330 025-9574E

One line has no transmit audio on all positions

Users cannot hear selected lines in the handset/headset on one console only

There is no receive audio from a monitored line on one console only


Bad radio/phone. Check for Tx audio on demarc out of Acom system.Incorrect radio signaling. Check for Tx audio on demarc out of Acom system.

Check for guard tone out of Acom. In IMS, check that TRC frequencies in Radio Tone Database match radio requirements. (See “Radio Tone Database” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.)

Bad line card. Switch to standby system.Swap card with spare.


Handset volume turned down. Check volume controls for handset and for line. Check physical volume control if using a TRHI.

Handset not detected. Check connections, replace handset.Console in Demo mode. Check status bar that console is “Online”. IMS may

have gone into demo mode because of communication errors.


Mute All is active. Check for flashing indication on Mute All function key.

Monitor Mute active. Line may be in Monitor Mute; try toggling the Monitor Mute when there is active audio.

Speaker volume turned down. Check physical volume control on speaker. Check that LED on speaker is lit (indicating the speakers has power).

Line is selected. Selected lines are removed from the monitor speaker.

331

Recommended Actions

There is no audio from a line on any console

The console displays “Heartbeat Timeout” message

The console displays “No Audio Interface” message


ADS digital I/O incorrectly wired. Check LEDs on ADS. The active E1 links for the connected ALS should have solid green LEDs, not flashing green. Check changeover wiring and ADS I/O power. Only active ALS receive audio is connected to backbone.

Line is not triggering VOX. Check for VOX indication on line. VOX or CD is required to gate audio on half duplex conference or patch.

Bad radio/phone. Check demarc for Rx audio. Generate tone into Acom to test.


Loss of communications with Acom Console Unit.

Click Retry on popup.Check serial cable between PC and Acom Console Unit.Check ACS baud rate and port in AcomConsole.ini file. (9600 baud and COM2 are the default, but your system may be different.)

Loss of communications with ADS. Check Acom Console Unit LEDs A and B for green indication indicating ADS communications.Check ADS for faults or alarms.

Duplicate Acom Console number in system. Check all serial and audio interfaces for console number. In IMS, verify the console ID against the network diagram. Turn off other Acom Console Units, reset all ADS and retry ACS. Turn on one position at a time to find conflict.


Audio definitions were changed. Click OK and retry ACS.Reset Acom Console Unit after making changes to OAM.

ACS looking for audio interface for radios. Check AcomConsole.ini file for HandsetOnly setting. If you have only configured Headset audio interfaces on OAM then you must have HandsetOnly=True in the AcomConsole.ini file to combine radio and telephone audio into one time slot on an E1.

Troubleshooting

332 025-9574E

Cannot select a radio channel on the ACS, console plays a “Bing” sound when line clicked

Cannot log off ACS

Cannot exit to Windows

The ACS does not show Tx indication (yellow text) on radio line


ACS looking for audio interface for radios. Check AcomConsole.ini file for HandsetOnly setting. If you have only configured Headset audio interfaces on OAM then you must have HandsetOnly=True in the AcomConsole.ini file to combine radio and telephone audio into one time slot on an E1.

Console not communicating with ADS. Check the status bar to see if the console is online.


Lines are selected or monitored. Clear lines and monitors before logging off.Edit the following AcomConsole.ini setting:AllowLogoffIfLinesActive=True

If this setting isn’t in the AcomConsole.ini, add it within the [ACS] section.


Operator forgot exit password. Delete all ACS.#PW files from folder to reset password to “8564888”.

UMS permissions are preventing user from exiting.

Check UMS using Zetron Account Manager application (ZAM).Log off and log on as “admin”.


AcomConsole.ini not set to show yellow text.

Verify that DisplayOutgoingPTT=True in [Radio Lines] section of AcomConsole.ini.

IMS is not configured to pass PTT status. Check that the line has the “Indicate PTT Source” checked in IMS. (See “MCU 3/4 Card Options” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.)

333

Recommended Actions

Selected or monitored lines do not present parallel operator transmit audio, only receive audio

The status bar says “SOMETHING.WAV does not exist”

The ACS did not bring up the dial pad, the button is stuck in the depressed position

The ACS popup forms, such as dial pad, monitor, and conference, are blocking access to other buttons and cannot be moved


IMS not configured to present operator transmit audio.

Check that “Tx and Rx on Monitor” and “Tx and Rx on Group” are checked in IMS for the line. (See “MCU 3/4 Card Options” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.)

Console Cross Mute enabled. Check Acom Console Unit audio interface configuration for any console cross mute. (See “Console Interface Tab” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.)


Sound file SOMETHING.WAV was not found. The console attempted to play it because of an event.

Copy the file into the ACS folder.Change the AcomConsole.ini file to point to another sound.


Multiple phone lines are selected. If more than one phone line is selected, the program does not know which to dial on. In these conditions, the Dial Pad button will appear in the depressed position, waiting for the operator to touch/click one of the selected lines to use for dialing.


The title bar is not enabled for pop-ups. The pop-ups may have been locked in place by the AcomConsole.ini file; check the [Screen Positions] section for a “,N” option that would disable the title bar on these pop-ups.

Troubleshooting

334 025-9574E

The “All Mute” or “Monitor Mute” function does not completely mute the receive audio

Some functions like “Ring Mute” and “Mute All” time out

Selected lines do not appear in the select speaker

The phone line turns green but will not ring for inbound calls


The mute level is set too high. This function attenuates the monitored line to a preset level setup in the AcomConsole.ini file. The Monitor Mute Set function can override this level. The default mute level is also set in the AcomConsole.ini file.


Time-out set too low in the AcomConsole.ini file.

The time-outs are set in the AcomConsole.ini file for these options. Check the [Timeout Periods] section. Set the timeout to 0 seconds to disable.


The Speaker Enable function is not active. Use the Speaker Enable function to place the console in “Dual” mode where selected channels are in the handset and speaker.

The wrong speaker has been selected for select audio.

Use the Locate Audio function to choose the speaker to receive select audio. This can be defaulted in the AcomConsole.ini file under the [Interfaces] section.


The line is ring disabled. Check the line’s ring enable state. If the state shows “RD” at the bottom of the key, its ring is disabled. Use the Ringer Enable function key to enable your phone lines.

The PC sound properties are adjusted to levels that will not work correctly.

Open the Windows volume control and move the master volume and wave volume to half way. Verify they are not muted.

The monitor speaker is turned off or the volume is down.

Check the volume settings on the monitor speakers. PC tones play through the monitor speakers.

The console has the Ring Mute function active.

Check that the Ring Mute function is not active.

335

Recommended Actions

The level of the monitored channels cannot be changed

The time on the console is wrong

All lines on the ACS gray out during operation


Operator error. There is a specific order of steps that must be followed:

• Press the “Level” button on the Monitor popup.• Click channels to apply the set level to them.

(Their level will be shown on the line key in negative dB.)


The system time is wrong. The console time is set by the Acom Console Unit on startup. The Acom Console Unit time is set by the first ALS in the system. Change the time on that ALS or your setting will not keep.

The console is set to not take the time from the system.

Check the Acom Console Unit IMS data port setting, verify that the “No Time Updates” option is NOT checked. (See “Console Data” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.)

The console’s time zone is incorrectly set. The ACS Time and Date controls use the local PC time zone info to convert the Acom system time to the needed Time and Date controls. Check the Windows Time Zone setting.

The ACS time control is set to the wrong time zone.

Check the “TimeSourceZone” setting of the AcomConsole.ini file.


The ADS has reset or been lost. Check the ADS for alarms or faults. It holds the line key database for the connect ALSs.

The ALS that provides the lines has been lost.

Check the ALS that provides the lines, it may have lost power or E1 connectivity with the ADS. The redundant ALS may not have taken control; check changeover signaling.

Troubleshooting

336 025-9574E

The ACS is slow to respond to button presses such as line selection or PTT

ACS slowdowns and unresponsiveness is caused by excessive E1 messaging.

There are missing monitors in the Monitor selection popup. MS1/MS2/MS3/MS4 are gray and not selectable


Bad or high-loss E1 links. Bad E1 links that repeatedly make, then break their connection can cause consoles to log on repeatedly.

• Check for E1 alarms/faults to find the break.• Use an E1 meter/test set to measure loss on the

loop.Many consoles logging on at once. After the consoles finish logon, the system will speed

up. Try only logging on a few positions at a time.Many PTT messages from consoles. The system design could reduce the effect of many

console PTTs. Move busy consoles off of ADS with radio ALSs or a lot of other consoles to an ADS with phone lines. (Contact Zetron Technical Support.)

There are duplicate console addresses in the system.

In IMS, check that the Console ID of this Acom Console Unit is unique. Check all data and audio interfaces. Reset the entire system (all ADS/Acom Console Units), if you feel there were duplicate addresses, to clear the problem.

Many CD messages from ALS. Radio ALSs generate many CD messages as the carrier goes active/inactive.

• Increase the VOX hold time. (See “Level Settings Tab” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.)

• Increase the E-Lead tail debounce. (See “EMU Card Options” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.)

• Enable the PTT sliding window in IMS to limit the max number of CD messages.

• Find the source of the carrier detects; there may be a bad radio or radio link.


IMS configuration incorrect. Verify you have configured each monitor speaker in the Acom Console Unit’s OAM. (See “Configuring Acom Console Unit Parameters” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.)

E1 time slots have been exceeded. Verify that you have not assigned more audio interfaces than you have time slots on the E1 loop. (See “Acom Definitions” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.)

337

Recommended Actions

The Status bar shows “Console Waiting ##”

The ACS is talking to the Acom Console Unit but not the ADS and issues this message to notify the user.

Select audio does not appear in the select speaker

The Dial Pad does not have a Send button when an ISDN line is selected / Cannot make calls on ISDN lines


The Acom Console Unit has just reset. Wait for at least 30 seconds for the Acom Console Unit to regain communication with the ADS. Check the fault logs.

There are duplicate console addresses in the system.

Check that the Console ID of this Acom Console Unit is unique. In IMS, check the addresses all data and audio interfaces. Reset the entire system (all ADS/Acom Console Units) if you feel there were duplicate addresses to clear the problem.

There is a duplicate network address in the system.

Check that all Acom Console Units have a unique Acom network address. Reset the system if a duplicate is found.

The ADS servicing the Acom Console Unit is bad.

Check the A and B LEDs on the back of the Acom Console Unit for indication on ADS connectivity.Check the fault logs and alarms.


The Speaker Enable function is off. Check that the Speaker Enable function is active (blinking). If the handset is removed, it should move select audio to the speaker as well.

Speaker has become disconnected. Check the physical connection to the speaker.Speaker volume turned down or unplugged. Check the volume level and the power LED on the

speaker.Select audio routed to wrong speaker. Check AudioPanelLocation and HandsetLocation in

the AcomConsole.ini file in the [Interfaces] section. These settings may have been set to a non-existent speaker.


The console does not know the line is ISDN. Change the AcomConsole.ini setting [Line Key Data] “Check” to a value of True. When True, the ACS will compare each line against the ALS config.

The IMS configuration does not identify the line as ISDN.

Check the IMS programming for the phone line. It should have a sub type of ISDN. (See “Acom Definitions” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.)

Troubleshooting

338 025-9574E

The ACS crashes on startup with a Windows error when run from a Windows login without administrative permissions

The ACS pops up a dialog “Cannot open quick dial database” and does not start

The ACS pops up a dialog “Line key XX type does not match physical line XX” when loading the form file

The Alpha Search button is missing from the Dial Pad


The Borland database user file has restricted access and is causing an access violation when the ACS attempts to load the Borland databases.

Give full permissions to Everyone for the file “C:\PDOXUSRS.NET”. User or Super User accounts may not have read/write access to this file, thus causing an access violation.


The Borland database engine has not been installed.

Install or re-install the Borland database engine (BDE). It is used for database access by the ACS.

The Quickdial database files are missing or corrupt.

Replace the quicktel.*, quickpage.* files with backups or reinstall the ACS.


The ACS form configuration does not match the IMS programming for the line.

Radios should be Radio Base buttons.EIE phones lines should be Autolines buttons.TIE hotlines should be CB Phone buttons. CB Phone lines should have the default dial type set to “None”.Check the button line assignments in Console Designer.

The installer does not want the operator notified of the bad line configuration, how do I stop this notice from appearing?

Change the AcomConsole.ini setting [Line Key Data] HideMismatchResults to a value of True.

The ACS form has lines that do not exist in the IMS configuration.

Remove the lines or accept the popup.


The button has been removed in the AcomConsole.ini.

Setup the following setting in the [Dial Pad] section of AcomConsole.ini.ShowAlphaSearchButton=True.

339

Recommended Actions

The Broadcast and Announce buttons are missing from the Intercom popup

The foot switch does not key the selected radio channel

The handset/headset does not key the selected radio channel, does not show yellow text on line


The button has been removed in the AcomConsole.ini.

Change the AcomConsole.ini setting [Intercoms] ShowAnnounce= and ShowBroadcast= to a value of True.


Foot switch incorrectly wired. Check connections between foot switch and console. It may be connected to TRHI, a digital input, or the DCOAM. (See Foot Switch on page 69.)

The digital input is not configured correctly. Check the digital input programming in IMS (see “Acom Definitions” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529) and the AcomConsole.ini file [Digital Inputs] section.


The TRHI is set for use with a 4-wire handset.

Check the jumper settings if using a TRHI jackbox. (See the Telephone Radio Headset Interface Product Manual, P/N 025-9553.)

Radio channel is configured as full-duplex. In general, radios should not be configured as Full Duplex, even if you can Tx and Rx at the same time.Just leave off CD Muting if the channel is full duplex. The full duplex option activates the M1 and M2 leads whenever the line is selected. (See “Acom Definitions” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.)

The radio is keying but the yellow channel text is turned off.

Check that the AcomConsole.ini setting [Radio Lines] DisplayOutgoingPTT is set to True.

The OAM audio interface is set for volume control.

Configure the OAM port for “Use vol pot as PTT”. (See “Operator’s Audio Module” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529)

The ACS is in demo mode. Because of a serial timeout the ACS has entered demo mode (Offline). Shut down and restart the ACS and watch for Online in the status bar.

Troubleshooting

340 025-9574E

Right-clicking on a radio channel causes a popup dialog to appear instead of causing an instant transmit

The ACS logon dialog box shows “Fail Over” mode instead of “Online”

The ACS logon dialog box shows “Offline” mode instead of “Online”


The ACS is in “Maintenance Mode”. Press CTRL-ALT-M to return the console to normal mode. Maintenance mode is used for troubleshooting and will cause problems with instant transmit. Check the properties of the ACS shortcut for a “/m” command line argument. The “/m” argument starts the console in maintenance mode.


The ACS is unable to connect with the UMS Server.

Retry server.The ACS can make use of Zetron’s User Management System for controlling permissions. Check for a network problem.Try to ping the UMS server.Check that the UMS Server service and the Apache service are running on the server. You can check services from Control Panel -> Administrative Tools.If other consoles are successfully communicating with the UMS, try rebooting the PC.Open ZAM to check the configuration of this console. Ensure that it is pointing to the correct server.

The ACS has been incorrectly configured to require UMS on a non-UMS system.

Check that the AcomConsole.ini parameter [ACS] EnableUMS= is set to False.

Try to log in using an offline account to get the ACS running.

Offline accounts are “z_admin” or “zg_admin” with no password (leave blank).


ZAM is not configured for Online mode. When offline it will not attempt to connect to the UMS server, it will use the local offline databases.

Open ZAM and login with user “z_admin” (no password).Change the Workstation settings to Online mode. Set the Server Host to the name of the UMS Server and click Apply.

341

Recommended Actions

The passwords for the ACS have been lost or forgotten

The passwords for the ACU, DCU, or MCU have been lost or forgotten

The default password for all of these devices is 8564888. If you have changed the password from its default and cannot remember or find the password, it can be recovered by calling Zetron Technical Support.


Operator forgot exit password. Delete file ACS.1PW from folder to reset password to “8564888”. You can use the Chg_psw.exe application to change it to something else.

Operator forgot logon password and is using UMS.

Use the Zetron Account Manager (ZAM) to change the password on the account. If you cant get into ZAM, try using logon admin with no password, or else try “zg_admin” with no password.

Operator forgot logon password and is NOT using UMS.

Delete file ACS.3PW from folder to reset password to “8564888”. You can use the Chg_psw.exe application to change it to something else.

Operator forgot supervisor password (databases).

Delete file ACS.2PW from folder to reset password to “8564888”. You can use the Chg_psw.exe application to change it to something else.

Troubleshooting

342 025-9574E

IntegratorIRR is not recording messages

IntIRR is recording blank (silent) messages


Using contact closure control. • Did you configure a 2-axis, 2-button joystick in Windows?

• Use the Windows Game Controls control panel to view the state of the joystick inputs. Button 2(Radio) should turn on when the Acom Console Unit commands the IRR to record.

• Look at the LED on the back of the Acom Console Unit’s 4-Wire E&M Module. The M1 LED should turn red when the Acom Console Unit commands the start of recording.

• Double-check the jumpers in the IRR module and on the 4-Wire E&M Module for the Acom Console Unit. (See Integrator Instant Recall Recorder, P/N 025-9496 and Integrator IRR on page 58.)

The orange connector “VREF” on the Acom Console Unit may be upside down; screws should face up.

Using VOX record control. VOX threshold may be set too high or too low. Use the IntIRR VOX Threshold Adjustment to change the threshold. (See “VOX Threshold Adjustment” in Integrator Instant Recall Recorder, P/N 025-9496.)

Using software record control. Ensure the [ACS] EnableIRR= is set to True, EnableIRRSoftwareControl= is set to True, and IRRSoftwareAlias= is set equal to the alias programmed into IntIRR channel setup.


Playback level set too low. Check IRR playback volume slider control. (See Integrator Instant Recall Recorder, P/N 025-9496.)

IRR playback muted. Check IRR playback mute control. (See Integrator Instant Recall Recorder, P/N 025-9496.)

Recording problem (vs. playback problem). Verify the PC plays other wave files properly. Try to play the recordings manually from the IntIRR recordings folder.

No audio from Acom Console Unit. Check the Acom Console Unit voice logger output configuration in IMS. Listen to the audio out of the Acom Console Unit to isolate.

Using wrong SoundBlaster drivers. During the installation of the IRR, you should have canceled the Windows driver install wizard and used the SoundBlaster installation CD to install the drivers.Installing the other drivers will result in empty recordings. Uninstall the sound drivers and reinstall from the CD.

343

Recommended Actions

Popup message “IRR failed to record”

IRR not working. Message: “irr.exe has generated errors and will be closed by Windows, you will need to restart this program, an error log is being created”

IntegratorIRR failure “the currently recording message has exceeded the imposed size limit for a single recorded message. Ensure that your record control configuration parameters are optimally set to avoid recording messages that are too large”


IRR is closed. Launch IntegratorIRR. If EnableIRR=True then it should launch on ACS startup.

Problem with SoundBlaster drivers. Uninstall and reinstall the SoundBlaster drivers from the SoundBlaster install CD.


Hardware problem with sound card. Remove and reinstall SoundBlaster card.If problem continues, replace sound card.

Permissions problem. Verify IRR has full access to its folder and registry privileges. Your system administrator sets these permissions.


Large message warning threshold set too low.

Check the options page of IntegratorIRR (Edit -> Options) for the warning threshold for max record length. This warning will not stop recording; it only presents the popup. The long recording may be valid; try extending the max length and see if the issue reoccurs.

Recording triggers are not set correctly. Check that the IRR can start and stop recording. If it is set to use VOX, the threshold may be too low.

Troubleshooting

344 025-9574E

Monitored or selected lines are unmonitored or unselected by themselves

Crackle or static sound at position

Noise in speaker, clicking/ticking sound at times. Happens the most during logon

60hz buzz in speakers.


ADS has reset. Check fault logs and alarms for signs of a reset.Check power into ADS.Contact Zetron for more info on monitoring ADS resets.

Acom Console Unit has reset. Check fault logs and alarms for signs of a reset.A/C power cable may be loose.

ALS has reset. Check fault logs and alarms for signs of a reset.


Hardware problem with backbone switch. Force system from A to B side and retest, may be ADS issue.

Noise is isolated to one Acom Console Unit. Replace Acom Console Unit.Crackle is from lines. Listen on demarc for sound, may be coming from

some external source.


Speaker cables run next to serial data cable. Re-route audio and data cables away from each other to prevent coupling of noise.


Transformer coupling onto speaker cable. Re-route audio away from transformer.Try moving transformer to another A/C receptacle.

PC-tones cable not grounded to PC. Check that PC-tones audio cable is connected to PC sound card. Try replacing cable with spare.

345

Recommended Actions

Hearing conversation from an adjacent position in headset or speaker

Intercom fails and ACS plays a “Bing” without connecting to selected console

Adjacent operators are too loud in my speakers


Parallel console has been assigned the same E1 time slot as the local position.

Check IMS E1 definitions (see “Dual E1 Module” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529). Two consoles may be using the same time slot. Reset Acom Console Units to force reallocation of audio interface time slots. When the Acom Console Unit is reset, it is assigned audio interface E1 time slots by the ADS if configured for “Define External Device” or “Configure Acom Console Unit over E1 Link” in IMS.

Cross-talk occurring on external circuits. Check punchdown blocks for possible cross talk on the system’s receive.


The destination console is busy. The destination console may not have another free intercom button to receive the intercom call on.

The destination console is not online. The destination console may not be logged in or the ACS is not started.


Operator’s microphone sensitivity is too high.

Use IMS ACU to reduce the Rx gain on the OAM microphone channel. (See “Operator’s Audio Module” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).Try disabling operator AGC on the Acom Console Unit to reduce input gain. (See “Operator’s Audio Module” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).

Operator is too close, causing feedback. Enable position cross muting for the adjacent positions in IMS. (See “Operator’s Audio Module” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).Turn off the “Enable Tx and Rx on Group” and “Enable Tx and Rx on Monitor” to remove parallel operator Tx audio from selected and monitored channels.

Troubleshooting

346 025-9574E

Hunt Groups are not working; a line is not selected


The AcomConsole.ini file can point toward the Acom Console Unit or the PC database for the Hunt Group configuration.

Check the AcomConsole.ini file setting [Hunt Groups] UseDatabase= setting. If =True it will use the DBEditor database, or else it will use the IMS ACU configuration for the Hunt Groups.

None of the lines in the Hunt Group are visible on the screen.

You must configure the lines in the Hunt Group on the ACS form file.

All of the lines in the Hunt Group are in use. Clear and unmonitor the lines in the Hunt Group.The Dial pad is not using the hunt group when no lines are selected.

Check the AcomConsole.ini setting [Line Selection] DialPadHuntGroup=XX = the number of the Hunt Group (1-8)

347

Appendix A: Acom Glossary

Name Description

2-Wire Interface A term used to describe Tip and Ring connections to telephone handsets and exchanges. The Acom TIE and EIE cards use 2-wire to 4-wire converters to allow connection to 2-wire interfaces and provide separate receive and transmit audio paths to the MCU card in the ALS.

ACD Automatic Call DistributionACS Acom Console SoftwareACU Acom Console UnitADS Acom DS3 SwitchAFD Acom File DistributorAIS(Alarm Indication Signal)

A signal that replaces the normal data stream with a continuous string of 1s when a maintenance alarm has been activated. Such maintenance alarms include NOS and LOS.

A-Law A nonlinear companding (compressing-expanding) function for analog-to-digital conversion of voice signals. It provides a higher digital resolution at low signal levels to give an improved signal-to-noise ratio.

ALI Automatic Location InformationALS Acom Line SubrackAMUX Acom multiplexerANI Automatic Number IdentificationBackplane Each Acom subrack contains two backplanes, an upper and a

lower. They are used to connect signals and power supplies to each of the cards contained in the subrack.

Bearer A communication link. For example, a point-to-point digital radio link may have two bearers — one at 2.4 GHz and one at 2.5 GHz. Each bearer could be used independently or in a redundant configuration.


348 025-9574E

BER(Bit Error Rate)

The ratio of bit errors to bits received in a given period of time. For example, a BER of 1x10-6 means that for every million bits received, on average one bit has been corrupted. BER is used to measure the quality of a digital communication path.

Branching Connection Used to describe a point-to-point connection, such as the connection of a time slot to a line card channel. In the IMS package the term “normal connection” is used to describe a branch connection.

Broadcast Connection Used to describe a point-to-multipoint connection. With this type of connection, one time slot (or line card channel) is broadcast to a multiple number of line card channels.

CAD Computer-Aided DispatchCAS(Channel Associated Signaling)

CAS is a transmission protocol used by G.704 systems to transmit signaling data associated with the line cards. Such signaling data includes handshaking signals for the DIU1-2 card and E&M signals for an EMU card. The CAS protocol places the signaling data in TS16 of each frame.

CCC Changeover Control CardCCC-E Changeover Controller Extender CardCCE(Common Control Equipment)

Comprises all backroom system elements such as racks and card cages.

CCU Common Controller UnitCDS Console Design SoftwareChannel Used to describe the point-to-point communication path with in the

Acom system. It is also used to describe and single interface circuit on any of the system line cards.

CLI Calling Line IdentificationClipping Audible distortion that occurs when a signal’s level exceeds the

limits of the amplifier circuit. When the analog signal is a sine wave, clipping results in a waveform with a “flat top.” Clipping can be reduced by decreasing the input signal amplitude to the amplifier or by reducing the gain of the amplifier.

ClockClock SignalClock Source

A precise timing signal generated by a quartz crystal. In the Acom system the clock is used for system synchronization and as a timing base for the G.704 links.

CMOS Complementary Metal Oxide SemiconductorCND Calling Number Display. The phone number of the service used by

the calling party will be displayed automatically to customers who subscribe to CND Services.

COC Changeover Control cardCODEC(Coder/Decoder)

A CODEC (Coder/decoder) is a device that converts analog signals to digital signals and vice versa. In the Acom system, Codecs are used to convert the analog voice signals to and from 8-bit PCM bit streams.

Name Description

349

Codirectional Interface Codirectional is normally used to describe an interface where both data and timing signals are transmitted in the same direction. This means that a receiver is sent both data and a synchronizing clock signal from the transmitter.

Companding Literally means compression and expanding. It is a term used to describe a type of signal conditioning that is used to improve some characteristics of audio signals. See A-law and Mu-Law.

COR Carrier Operated RelayCOS Changeover SubrackCOV-R Changeover card (RJ-21) for voiceCOV-T Changeover card (SMB coax) for dataCOV-V Changeover card (Euro/DIN96) for voiceCRC(Cyclic Redundancy Check)

CRC is a technique used by G.704 systems to detect errors in transmitted data. A 4-bit CRC code (called CRC-4) is generated for a block of data, which is then sent along with the data. The receiver compares the received CRC-4 code against the CRC-4 code generated from the received data. If the two codes do not match, then some of the data has been corrupted during transmission.

Crosspoint Switch Also called a “Digital Crosspoint Switch” in this set of manuals. This is a key component that provides the physical switching (connecting) of time slots within the MCU3. The crosspoint switch has an internal switching matrix that allows any input to be connected to any output.

CSR Conferencing SubrackCTCSS Continuous Tone-Coded Squelch SystemCTS Clear To SendDCD Data Carrier DetectDCE(Data Circuit Equipment)

This term is used in serial data communication to refer to a device that provides the signal conversion and coding between a DTE and a transmission line. A modem is an example of a DCE device. Two DCE devices are usually connected using a “null modem” serial cable.

DCU DS3 Control Unit CardDecadic Signaling A system for transmitting telephone numbers using loop break/

make (disconnect/connect) pulses. Each break pulse momentarily interrupts the DC voltage on the line. The number of pulses equals the number of the digit transmitted (ten pulses are used to represent the number 0). Also known as pulse dialing.

DID(Direct Inward Dialing)

A phone line dedicated for incoming calls.

Name Description


350 025-9574E

Differential Data A method of increasing transmission distances by transmitting data on two wires simultaneously at opposite polarities. The receiver only responds to the difference in voltage between the wires and therefore cancels out the noise picked up on both wires during transmission. RS-422/485 protocols use differential data transmission.

Digital Multiplex Hierarchy This is a system (described in CCITT Recommendations) that allows connection of lower rate multiplexers to higher rate multiplexers in order to construct larger networks. The system is arranged in a hierarchy so that each level in the hierarchy can combine and transmit a whole number of channels from the system below. For example, a system at the 8 Mbps level contains four 2 Mbps channels, each of which in turn contains 32 64 Kbps channels. The Acom system conforms to the Recommendations and can be used with other equipment to form a large communication system.

DIU Data Interface UnitDPLL Digital Phase Locked LoopDS3 Digital Signal, level 3 (44.736 Mbps)DSR Data Set ReadyDTE(Data Terminal Equipment)

A DTE is a device that functions as a data source or sink for a DCE device. An example of a DTE is a PC; it sends and receives data to and from a DCE device, such as a modem. A straight through cable is usually used to connect a DTE to a DCE device.

DTMF Dual Tone Multi-FrequencyDTR Data Terminal ReadyE&M(Ear and Mouth Signaling)

E&M (Ear and Mouth) signaling originated from early telephone systems to provide a means of establishing calls between exchanges. Modern systems do not use E&M signaling and use either in-band signaling or dedicated data channels to set up calls. E&M leads are now commonly used as multipurpose signaling connections. To avoid confusion, the terms E and M are often replaced by SO (Signaling Out) and SI (Signaling In) throughout this manual set.

Earth Recall Signal A signaling method used in 2-wire analog telephone systems. An earth recall signal is send by earthing one wire of the 2-wire interface. This function is currently not implemented by the Acom system.

EBER Excessive Bit Error RateEIE(Exchange Interface Equipment)

In Acom “EIE” may also refer to the EIE card, which provides an interface to PSTN or PABX lines.

EMC Electromagnetic CompatibilityEMI Electromagnetic InterferenceEMU E&M Unit cardEPIC Extended PCM Interface Controller. A type of integrated circuit.

Name Description

351

ESD Electrostatic DischargeETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute. A

standardization organization in the telecom industry in Europe. They have been successful in standardizing the GSM cell phone system and the TETRA professional mobile radio system.

FAS(Frame Alignment Signal)

A special bit sequence is contained in TS0 of a frame, which allows the receiver to synchronize itself to the incoming data. This frame is transmitted only once per multiframe using the double frame format, 8 times per multiframe if the CRC-4 format is used.

FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array)

A type of integrated circuit.

Frame Alignment Frame alignment is used by each G.704 interface to gain synchronization with other G.704 devices. The MCU3 achieves frame alignment by looking for frame alignment words within the G.704 data stream. Once frame alignment has been achieved, the MCU3 knows the exact position/time slot of the incoming G.704 data stream.

Frame A fixed-length cross-section of a data stream. A 2 Mbps E1 link has 8-bit long frames, each frame containing one segment of each of the 32 time slots. The relative position of each time slot remains constant from frame to frame. The time slots in a frame are numbered 0-31. TS0 is the first 8 bits (first time slot) of a frame and is used to carry the frame alignment word and other control/error code bits. TS16 is used to carry CAS signaling information and multiframe alignment words in the G.704 link. TS16 may also be used as a standard data channel when using in-band signaling instead of CAS.

Framer A circuit on the MCU3 card that performs the HDB3 conversion and frame alignment of the incoming G.704 data.

Gain A figure used to describe amplification. For example, an amplifier with a gain of two will produce an output signal that is twice the amplitude of an input signal.

Handshaking Handshaking is a term used to describe the signaling lines (RTS, CTS, etc.) of serial communication links such as RS-232.

HDB3(High Density Bipolar of Order 3)

A tertiary level form of line encoding used in the G.703 specification. HDB3 allows the receiver to extract a synchronized clock regardless of the content of the incoming stream.

HDLC(High Level Data Link Control)

HDLC is a communication protocol used within the Acom system to communicate between devices on the backplane. It is a synchronous full duplex framed protocol that allows multiple devices to communicate on one bus.

Hot PluggingHot Plug Capable

Hot plugging means inserting or removing a card into a subrack while the power is still applied to the system. All cards within the Acom system are designed to be hot plugged. (MSU3 has some exceptions.)

IDF Intermediate Distribution Frame (or Floor) Distribution

Name Description


352 025-9574E

IMS Terminal(Integrated Management System)

A top level applications package that manages access to the IMS applications for configuration, monitoring, and diagnostics for each part of every CCE and Acom Console Unit in your system. ACS may have the following modules installed: IMS ALS, IMS ADS, and IMS ACU.

IMS(Integrated Management System)

A software suite produced by Zetron for the management of Acom systems. The suite contains several IMS modules that can each run in a stand-alone environment or within ACS. IMS provides a fully functional network management system capable of configuration, remote reconfiguration, fault detection, and diagnostics through a graphical display interface. IMS allows easy configuration and maintenance for the entire system, from general component setting and network adjustments, to individual card configuration.

In-band Signaling In-band signaling is a method use to transmit signaling information. The signaling information is placed into the same time slot as the data for that channel.

IOM-2(ISDN Oriented Modular bus,version 2)

This is a communication bus used internally by the Acom system, that provides a means for communication with voice and signaling interfaces on line cards. It is a framed protocol with data sent in time slots between cards in the subrack.

IPAT(ISDN Primary Access Transceiver)

A type of integrated circuit.

IRR(Instant Recall Recorder)

IRR is an application used to control the voice recording process.

ISB(Intersite Bearer)

A means of interconnecting two or more Acom systems that are at different sites to provide remote or backup operation. ISB connections are implemented between ADSs of separate Acom sites, by way of E1 or T1 connections on the MCU4 cards.

ISDN(Integrated Services Digital Network)

A network that provides or supports a range of telecommunication services by providing digital connections between user network interfaces.

LCB Link Control BlockLine Break A term used in telephone systems to indicate a break (opening) of a

telephone line. Brief line breaks are used in decadic dialing, while an extended line break is used to release (hang up) a connection.

Line Card This is a general term that refers to the voice and data cards. A line card contains a number of channels to decode/encode local signals that can then be branched to other channels or time slots by using a G.703 link.

Link This term is used to describe a communication path that is used to transfer multiple channels of information. In the case of the Acom documentation, “link” means a connection from a 2048 or 1544 Kbps G.703 interface.

LIT Line Integrity Test card

Name Description

353

LLCB Line Logic Control Block — memory that contains information about the lines. See also OLCB.

LMFA Loss of Multiframe AlignmentLoop Detect A term used in telephone line connections. It is a system that

detects a call has been answered by checking the status of the DC loop. In the Acom system, the TIE card uses loop detection to determine when a call has been answered. If a loop is detected, the TIE card switches the line from a ringer to an audio circuit.

Loop OutLoop SeizeLine Loop

Loop out is a DC loop for signaling to the other end of a telephone line. See “Loop Detect.”

LOS(Loss of Synchronization)

This is an alarm condition within the Acom system that is active when synchronization of the G.703 link is not present. This means that the MCU3 Framer is unable to detect the frame alignment word.

Master Clock Each MCU3 card within a subrack has clock generation and selection circuits that are used to generate the timing and synchronization required for data transmission. When an MCU3 is installed in slot 0 of a subrack, it becomes the primary MCU3, and its clock signal is used as a Master Clock for all other cards contained in the subrack. By default the subrack will synchronize to the Master Clock of the primary MCU3 but can be changed to synchronize to other clock signals if required.

MCU(Main Control Unit)

The core of the Acom system is the MCU. The MCU3 comprises a Framer, a digital crosspoint switch and G.703 interfaces and controls the internal backplane interfaces and connections.

MDF Main Distribution Frame (or Building) DistributorMSU Main Supply Unit cardMultiframe A cyclic set of consecutive frames, in which the relative position

of each frame is known. In 2 Mbps G.704 systems, a multiframe may comprise two frames (Double Frame mode) or sixteen frames (CRC-4 mode).

MUSAC A type of integrated circuit; a digital cross point switch used for multipoint switching and conferencing

MUX(Multiplexer)

In Acom documentation the term multiplexer means digital multiplexer: a device that uses time division multiplexing (TDM) to combine multiple digital signals into a single composite digital signal.

Non Urgent Alarm This is a G.732 prompt maintenance alarm condition.NOS No SignalNRZ Non-Return to Zero

Name Description


354 025-9574E

NTP(Network Time Protocol)

An internationally recognized standard that can be used to synchronize clocking devices on computers and other network devices over the Internet. It is used by Application Layer client-server applications that communicate by way of UDP port 123. Its primary benefit is to counter the effects of variable latency caused by queuing on packet-switched networks. An NTP client fetches a time data stream from an NTP server at regular intervals and corrects local time-keeping devices. It synchronizes to Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) only; it has no knowledge of time zones, Daylight Saving Time, or Summer Time. For more information, see www.ntp.org.

OAM Operator’s Audio ModuleOLCB Operator Logic Control Block — memory that contains

information about the consoles. See also LLCB.Omnibus Connection A conference connection where voice signals are converted from

A-law to linear and summed before conversion back to A-law. Data signals and channel signaling are also added.

Order Wire A conference connection where an input to a channel is output on all other channels and not the originating channel. May be used for 2-wire telephone conferencing.

P25(Project 25)

Project 25, also known as APCO-25 but most commonly as P25, Project 25 encompasses a suite of standards to advance interoperability among digital wireless communication products and systems. The P25 standards were created by a committee representing manufacturers, public safety agencies, and other communication professionals, with the intent of ensuring that all purchasers of P25-compatible equipment can communicate with each other. For more information, see www.apcointl.org.

PABX(Private Automated Branch Exchange)

A telephone network commonly used by medium and larger offices, call centers, and other businesses and organizations. PABX provides an efficient internal telephone service with, typically, a a single number for outside callers and a limited number of outgoing lines.

Partial Time Slot Allocation Portions of a time slot may be allocated to multiple lower rate devices. For example, two 32 Kbps data sources may be allocated one time slot, with each 32 Kbps data stream only requiring each alternate frame (or 4 of the 8 bits per time slot). See also Subrate Communication.

PCM(Pulse Code Modulation)

PCM is a technique used to convert an analog signal to a serial bit stream. In the Acom system, analog voice signals are digitized into 8-bit words at a sample rate of 8 kHz, producing a serial bit stream of 64 Kbps for each voice signal.

Name Description

355

PCM-30 PCM-30 generally refers to the specific case of PCM G.704 where TS0 and TS16 contain framing and Channel Associated Signaling (CAS). The CAS signals contain the signaling information for the other 30 information (voice or data) channels. The data format containing 30 information channels, together with the associated signal data in time slot 16, is referred to as PCM-30.

PE Protective EarthPLL(Phase Locked Loop)

A circuit that synchronizes an internal oscillator to an incoming signal. A PLL circuit is used on the MCU3 to produce a stable clock signal from the incoming G.703 link.

Primary MCU When the MCU is installed in slot 0 of the Acom Line Subrack, it becomes the Primary MCU, which functions as a system master and provides configuration setup parameters for other MCU cards and line cards installed in the subrack. The MCU detects that it has been installed in Slot 0 and then enables the Primary MCU circuits and functions.

Primary Rate The primary rate is the data rate from which all other rates (both higher and lower) in the digital multiplexing hierarchy are derived.

Protective Earth (PE) An earth point in the building installation that provides earthing for safety purposes. This may also be called “grounding conductor.”

PSTN Public Switching Telephone NetworkPTT “Push to talk” or “press to talk”.Recovered Clock A clock signal derived from the incoming data signal. In the Acom

system, this is possible because the G.703 signals use HDB3 line coding, which allows the receiver to extract a synchronized clock regardless of the content of the incoming stream.

Redundant Bearer A channel used to carry the traffic of a failed bearer.RF Radio frequencyRGU Ring Generator Unit cardRing Cadence The timing of a ring signal (e.g., 1 second ring, 1 second pause, 1

second ring, 5 second pause, then repeat).Ring out SignalingLoop in Signaling

This is a signaling scheme used by 2-wire telephone lines. The signaling is by means of a current loop when the handset is picked up to initiate either a ring out or a loop in.

Ring SignalRing Voltage

An AC waveform used to drive the ring circuit of a telephone.

RMS Root Mean SquareRRA Received Remote AlarmRTC Real Time ClockRTS Request To SendRVA Recorded Voice Announcement cardRX ReceiveRXD Receive Data

Name Description


356 025-9574E

SCC Serial Communication ControllerSDI Slip Direction IndicationSELV(Safety Extra Low Voltage)

A SELV circuit is circuit with no direct connection to mains power. It obtains power from an isolating transformer, isolated power, or a battery. Under a single fault condition, a SELV circuit should not exceed 71V peak or 120VDC.

Service Word This is a term used to describe the contents of time slot 0 in a frame. If the time slot does not contain a frame alignment word, it is called a service word.

Signaling Binary information passed between communicating devices to manage the establishment, clearing, and control of connections. An example of signaling is the handshake used in an RS-232 communication channel.

Slave Clock A clock whose timing output is phase-locked to the timing signal received from another clock.

Slip The loss of a data bit on a T-1 or E-1 link, due to a frame misalignment between the timing on a transmit node and the timing on a receive node.

Slot As distinct from a “time slot,” a slot refers to the physical space and electrical connector available in a subrack for a circuit board.

SMB Coaxial connector for RG179 CableSMU Signal Management Unit cardSubmultiframe A term used to describe the first 8 frames or the last 8 frames of a

CRC-4 multiframe structure. Subrack This term is used to distinguish from a larger “rack,” which may

support several subracks. A subrack is a standard 6RU 19-inch assembly that supports a backplane with sockets for connecting up to 13 cards.

Subrate Communication Connection of one or more low data rate devices to a single time slot. For example, two devices that transmit data at a rate of 32 Kbp/s could be connected (using IMS) to one time slot.

Synchronous Communication A protocol that allows bits of data to be sent at a fixed, synchronized rate between the transmitter and receiver. Sending synchronized data eliminates the need for start and stop bits as used with asynchronous communication.

TIE Telephone Interface Equipment card.Time Division MultiplexingTDM

A technique employed in the Acom system for combining multiple electronic signals into one stream by sampling each signal at regular intervals and coding each sample into a separate time slot of the combined stream. A period of time containing one time slot per signal is termed a frame. Frames are repeated at the signal sampling rate. A G.704 E1 link carries 8,000 frames per second.

Name Description

357

Time SlotTS

In the context of TDM, the data stream is divided into parallel time slots. An E1 link carries 32 time slots, each representing one 64 Kbps channel. Each time slot is divided into serial frames, each 8 bits long.

TNV(Telecommunication Network Voltage)

A circuit that under normal operating conditions carries telecommunication signals. Telecommunication signals are a steady state, varying amplitude, or intermittent voltage or current intended for use on a telecommunication network. A TNV circuit, which is connected to a telecommunication network, may be subject to over-voltages due to lightning or power system faults. TNV excludes the mains supply, TV cable systems and SELV circuits.

Traffic General reference to data signals, that are intended for multiplexing and demultiplexing within an Acom system. Intended to distinguish from and exclude signals, that are used internally to the system, such as for system coordination and CPU operations.

Transceiver A circuit that can connect to a shared bus for the purpose of receiving and transmitting. A cooperative protocol for the bus ensures that only one transceiver on a bus transmits at any one time.

TRC Telecom Reference ConductorTS Time SlotTSI Time Slot InterchangeTTL Transistor-Transistor LogicTX TransmitTXD Transmit DataUIO Universal Input/Output cardUMS(User Management System)

UMS is a client/server application used to control system access and privileges.

Urgent Alarm This is a G.732 service alarm condition.VF (Voice Frequency) An audio signal in the band 300-3400 Hz.VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) A method for using IP-compatible networks such as a LAN or

WAN to convey voice communication or other audio such as radio control tones.

Watchdog Timer A watchdog timer is a circuit that monitors a microprocessor. If the microprocessor stops responding, the watchdog timer will reset the microprocessor in an attempt to resume normal operation.

Name Description


358 025-9574E

Purpose

359

Appendix B: System Failure Worksheet

Purpose

To provide a worksheet to be filled out in case of an Acom system with a severe failure such as an inactive or unstable system. Capturing the state of the LEDs captures information required to help determine the cause of failure. Fill out each section applicable to the failure, and report your findings to Zetron. See http://www.zetron.com for contact information.

Worksheets are available for:• DCU LEDs on page 360• MCU3/4 LEDs (in ALS) on page 362• MCU4 LEDs (in ADS) on page 364• MSU LEDs on page 366• Acom Console Unit (ACU) LEDs on page 368

Note Make as many copies of these worksheet pages as needed to capture the LED information from all ACUs, DCUs, MSUs, and MCUs in the system.


360 025-9574E

DCU LEDs

Go to each Acom DCU in the system and record the name (example: DCU1) and the status of the LEDs on the front edge of the card. Record the LED status by filling in the LED indicators in the DCU front edge picture. Record any notes of color or flashing LEDs by checking the appropriate boxes. If you need to record more than seven DCU cards, make copies of the following pages as needed to record all DCU front edge LEDs.

Cycle MasterPort 2 DS3 Link StatePort 2 Wrap StateSpare

Name___________________________________________________________

A BCard Operational StatePort 1 DS3 Link State

Port 1 Wrap StateStatus of ADS

Gre

enYe

llow

Red

Flas

hing

?

Gre

enYe

llow

Red

Flas

hing

?


Name___________________________________________________________



Gre

enYe

llow

Red

Flas

hing

?

Gre

enYe

llow

Red

Flas

hing

?


Name___________________________________________________________



Gre

enYe

llow

Red

Flas

hing

?

Gre

enYe

llow

Red

Flas

hing

?

361

DCU LEDs


Name___________________________________________________________



Gre

enYe

llow

Red

Flas

hing

?

Gre

enYe

llow

Red

Flas

hing

?


Name___________________________________________________________



Gre

enYe

llow

Red

Flas

hing

?

Gre

enYe

llow

Red

Flas

hing

?


Name___________________________________________________________



Gre

enYe

llow

Red

Flas

hing

?

Gre

enYe

llow

Red

Flas

hing

?


Name___________________________________________________________



Gre

enYe

llow

Red

Flas

hing

?

Gre

enYe

llow

Red

Flas

hing

?


362 025-9574E

MCU3/4 LEDs (in ALS)

Go to each MCU in the Acom Line Subracks and record the name (example: ALS1A, MCU slot 0) and the status of the LEDs on the MCU front edge. Record the LED status by filling in the LED indicators in the MCU front edge picture. If you need to record more than seven MCU cards, make copies of following page as needed to record all MCUs in the ALS Subracks.

Spare/Master StateSpareRinger 1 OKLink 1 Service AlarmLink 1 LMFALink 1 NOSSystem ResetLink 1 LOS

GREEN 1GREEN 2GREEN 3YELLOW 4YELLOW 5YELLOW 6RED 7RED 8

1 GREEN2 GREEN3 GREEN4 YELLOW5 YELLOW6 YELLOW7 RED8 RED

RUN Indicator (flashing)SpareRinger 2 OKLink 2 Service AlarmLink 2 LMFALink 2 NOSProgrammable AlarmLink 2 LOS

Name___________________________________________________________

A B





Name___________________________________________________________

A B





Name___________________________________________________________

A B

363

MCU3/4 LEDs (in ALS)





Name___________________________________________________________

A B





Name___________________________________________________________

A B





Name___________________________________________________________

A B





Name___________________________________________________________

A B


364 025-9574E

MCU4 LEDs (in ADS)

Go to each MCU4 in the Acom DS3 Switches and record the name (example: ADS1A, MCU slot 2) and the status of the LEDs on the MCU4 front edge. Record the LED status by filling in the LED indicators in the MCU4 front edge picture. If you need to record more than seven MCU4 cards, make copies of following page as needed to record all MCU4 cards in the Acom DS3 Switches.

SpareLCB 1SpareLink 1 Bad/RRALink 1 LMFALink 1 NOSSystem ResetLink 1 LOS



RUN Indicator (flashing)LCB 2SpareLink 2 Bad/RRALink 2 LMFALink 2 NOSProgrammable AlarmLink 2 LOS

Name___________________________________________________________

A B





Name___________________________________________________________

A B





Name___________________________________________________________

A B

365

MCU4 LEDs (in ADS)





Name___________________________________________________________

A B





Name___________________________________________________________

A B





Name___________________________________________________________

A B





Name___________________________________________________________

A B


366 025-9574E

MSU LEDs

Go to each MSU in the system and record the name (example: ALS1A, MSU slot 12) and the status of the LEDs on the MSU front edge. Record the LED status by filling in the LED indicators in the MSU front edge picture. If you need to record more than 10 MSU cards, make copies of the following page as needed to record all MSUs in the system.

Name__________________________________


3 RED Over Voltage Alarm4 GREEN Supply ON

+12V GREEN-12V GREEN

Watchdog alarm REDInput supply present GREEN

LED Indicators LED Indicators

1234Green - Information Alarm

Yellow - Non-Urgent AlarmRed - Urgent Alarm

OFFPower Switch

ON

1 GREEN TNV -12V2 GREEN +5V

Name__________________________________








OFFPower Switch

ON


Name__________________________________








OFFPower Switch

ON


Name__________________________________








OFFPower Switch

ON


367

MSU LEDs

Name__________________________________








OFFPower Switch

ON


Name__________________________________








OFFPower Switch

ON


Name__________________________________








OFFPower Switch

ON


Name__________________________________








OFFPower Switch

ON


Name__________________________________








OFFPower Switch

ON


Name__________________________________








OFFPower Switch

ON



368 025-9574E

Acom Console Unit (ACU) LEDs

Go to each Acom Console Unit in the system and record the name (example: DS1) and the status of the LEDs on the Acom Console Unit rear panel. Record the LED status by filling in the LED indicators in the Acom Console Unit rear panel picture. Record any notes of color or flashing LEDs by checking the appropriate boxes. If you need to record more Acom Console Unit rear panels, make copies of the following page as needed to record all Acom Console Unit rear panel LEDs.

Note The following LED work sheets represent the rear view of a Acom Console Unit. These diagrams are represented in a manner that is truncated and not to scale.

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 PORT 1 PORT 2DUAL 4W E&M OPERATOR’S AUDIO

Port A: Green Orange Red

Port B: Green Orange Red

Port C: Green Orange Red

Port D: Green Orange Red

Port 1: Green Orange Red






Port 1L: Green Yellow Red

Port 1R: Green Yellow Red



H/S1 Green: On Flash Off

H/S1 Yellow: On Flash Off



Audio Green: On Flash Off

Audio Yellow: On Flash Off

CTRL Green: On Flash Off

CTRL Yellow: On Flash Off

H/S 1 H/S 2 AUDIO CTRL

Port 1 Top: Green Red

Port 1 Bottom: Green Red



DUAL E1

Rx Tx Rx Tx

Acom Console Unit name:________________________________________________________

PORT 1 PORT 2

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 PORT 1 PORT 2DUAL 4W E&M OPERATOR’S AUDIO




























DUAL E1

Rx Tx Rx Tx

Acom Console Unit Name:________________________________________________________

PORT 1 PORT 2

369

Acom Console Unit (ACU) LEDs

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6

PORT 1 PORT 2

DUAL 4W E&M OPERATOR’S AUDIO




























DUAL E1


PORT 1 PORT 2

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6

PORT 1 PORT 2





























DUAL E1


PORT 1 PORT 2

A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6

PORT 1 PORT 2





























DUAL E1


PORT 1 PORT 2


370 025-9574E

Alarm System

371

Appendix C: Alarms

Major topics in this chapter are:Alarm System on page 371IMS Fault Logs on page 373

Fault Log Input Alarms on page 377Fault Log Output Alarms on page 382

General Alarms on page 383ALS Alarm Definitions on page 385Acom Console Unit (ACU) Alarm Definitions on page 402ADS Alarm Descriptions on page 408Supervisor Alarms in IMS on page 426Acom Console Unit (ACU) Alarms in IMS on page 428

Alarm System

Aside from the visual alarms that can be defined and monitored, there are relay contacts on the MSU card. The contacts may be connected to a wide range of external circuits and equipment; they may be configured to activate when a user defined alarm occurs. They can be deactivated in many ways, depending on the alarm mode (see Output Alarms on page 372).

Typical applications may include connection of the urgent alarm relay to a visual or audible alarm, alerting personnel of a link failure.

Note Many of the alarms identified in this chapter are listed as “not used with Acom.” These alarms, although not used with Acom hardware, appear in the IMS software because other hardware system use the alarms. All alarms are included here for completeness.

Appendix C: Alarms

372 025-9574E

Input Alarms

Input Alarm Status

The status of an alarm is stored as a two-bit code in the alarm log viewable in Acom Console Software (see “Alarm Log Display Panel” in Acom Console Software Operation, P/N 025-9530). Table 203 shows status bits and what they mean.

Table 203: Input Alarm Status

Figure 95 shows the input flow.

Figure 95: Alarm Input States

The “was active” state is functionally different from the “idle” state, in that the “was active” state is used to indicate to a user that an alarm has been active.

Output Alarms

Each input alarm can be sent to one, many, or all output alarms. One, many, or all input alarms can be sent to the same output alarm. The required configuration is set through IMS (see “Alarm Menu” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).

Operating Modes

An output alarm can be set to operate in any of the modes listed below.

Passive Mode

In passive mode, the alarm output becomes active when alarm input becomes active; it is deactivated only when it is acknowledged from within IMS or the ACK ALL output alarm

Alarm Status Bits Alarm Status

00 Idle.01 Was active. Shows that at some point the alarm was raised but is not currently active.10 Acknowledge. The input alarm is still active but the output alarm is not asserted.11 Active. The only state during which an alarm output is active.

11Active

01Was Active

10Acknowledge

00Idle

Alarm inputdetected as active

Alarm input still active, buthas been acknowledged

Alarm input no longer active

Alarm inputacknowledged

Idle

Alarm inputbecomes

active

Alarminput isdeactivated

373

IMS Fault Logs

or the input alarms become deactivated. Passive mode is the default operating mode for alarm outputs.

Locked Mode

In locked mode, the alarm output becomes active when the alarm input becomes active. It can only be deactivated when acknowledged from IMS or the ACK ALL output. The alarm input becoming deactivated does not put the alarm output into the idle state. The alarm output can be set active from IMS, but again it is only cleared by acknowledging it. In this mode a brief failure, such a temporary link failure, is latched until the alarm is acknowledged.

Pulsed Mode

In pulsed mode, the alarm output becomes active when alarm input becomes active. The output will stay active for a set time and then become deactivated. The active pulse time is set from IMS and is common for all pulsed outputs. Before the output can become active again, the alarm input has to be deactivated or the alarm acknowledged.

Protected Mode

In protected mode the alarm output becomes active when the alarm input becomes active. It can only be deactivated when the input alarm is deactivated. The alarm input becoming acknowledged from IMS or the ACK ALL does not put the alarm output into the idle state.

Protected mode outputs are used for scenarios where acknowledging input alarms does not change the system state, for example Acom subrack redundancy state. Refer to ISB Status in the manual Acom Software Configuration (P/N 025-9529).

IMS Fault Logs

The fault log is a long-term record of all input alarms, output alarms, and events for the rack. It provides a history to help explain what has happened in the past.

Appendix C: Alarms

374 025-9574E

IMS Fault Log Tool

The following screen shot shows the IMS Fault Log tool. The Fault Log tool enables you to view, save, and clear the rack’s fault log. All fault records are stored in the rack until viewed or deleted by this tool.

For detailed information on using this tool, see “Fault Log” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.

Figure 96: IMS Fault Log Tool

Table 204: Using the IMS Fault Log Tool

Warning! Once the logs are retrieved (using Show Current Faults), the rack's fault log is cleared. You must save the logs in order to view or search them off-line using IMS. You should save the logs for future reference.

STOP

Control Description

Clear Rack Fault Log The faults stored in the rack will be cleared without saving them to disk.Delete All Saved Faults The fault logs for this device will be deleted from the local PC fault database. Delete Selected The selected start/stop range will be deleted from the local PC fault database.Close Closes the fault log selection form without displaying any faults.Display Opens a display window showing either the current faults or a range of saved

faults. Depends on the selection.Show Current Faults With this selected, clicking Display will retrieve the current fault list from the

rack. Once retrieved the fault log will be cleared and the downloaded faults are saved to a database on the local PC or the IMS Router. After being saved the faults are shown to the user, an opportunity to save the faults to a plain text file is available at this time. This option is only available when on-line.

Show Selected Faults The range selection fields are enabled for choosing the start and stop time/data to view. After selecting the range, click Display to view the historical faults stored in the PC database. This does not retrieve any faults from the subrack. This option is available on-line and off-line.

375

IMS Fault Logs

Fault Log Header

Syntax

The fault log header uses the following syntax:

-------------------------------------------Device Time Date Alarm (State)

Device is the Acom identifier for the card with an alarm.

Time/Date is the time and date of the event.

Alarm is the type and name of alarm that occurred (see Table 205).

(State) is the event that the alarm changed to (Active/Inactive).

Alarm Types

Alarms will be one of three types: Input Alarms, Output Alarms, or Other Events.

Input Alarms

Prefixed by alarm text “Input Alarm (InActive)” or “Input Alarm (Active)”. Input alarms are created by digital inputs on the MSU card, an internal fault or message, or an E1/T1 fault.

For a complete list of fault log input alarms, see Fault Log Input Alarms on page 377.

Output Alarms

Prefixed by alarm text “Output Alarm (InActive)” or “Output Alarm (Active)”. Output alarms are created as a result of one or more connected/mapped input alarms. They may trigger LEDs, relays, E1/T1 alarms, or internal messages. See the Output alarm list for a complete description of the output alarms and their meaning.

For a complete list of fault log output alarms, see Fault Log Output Alarms on page 382.

Other Events

Other internal messages are logged to the fault log as they happen. Here is a description of some common events.

Alarm Names

Appendix C: Alarms

376 025-9574E

Table 205: Alarm Names in the Fault Log

Alarm Text Examples Description

Rack was reset The ALS, DS3 Switch (ADS), or Acom Console Unit was reset.

Saved configuration is corrupt This can occur during power up if the config location does not have a valid configuration. This may occur because Acom does not make use of the 2nd config location so it is always corrupt.

New clocking source selected. Slot 0 [Default] The rack has a list of E1 clock sources that should be used. All of the preferred sources have been lost so the rack is generating its own clocking. [Default]

Musac Conf Resource Low The MCU card has 2 Musac chips for conferencing time slots. Each Musac can create 21 connections. When the MCU reaches this limit this alarm can occur. The system may operator fine with this alarm, but a check should be done to verify the number of logged lines/access channels does not exceed the racks ability.

Selftest Good The rack finished a power on self test.MCU installed in slot 0 The rack found an MCU card in the first slot. This may be

part of a normal power up sequence.Lcb Bad or Lcb OK The LCB is a data communications link over time slot 16 of

the E1 between the subrack and the ADS. This may occur because of a break in the E1 link.

Max DSP instruction cycles exceeded - DSP 0 The SMU resource use has exceeded its maximum cycle limit. This may cause the rack to stop decoding/encoding signaling. Check the SMU programming, the error message will indicate what card and DSP is overloaded (see “SMU Card Options” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).

Codec has died in slot 6 The MCU card has lost communications with the CODEC (Coder/Decoder) chip on this card. This may occur because the card has died or has been removed.

SMU installed in slot 10 The MCU has found an SMU card in slot 10. This can occur as part of a normal power up sequence. It could occur as part of an SMU reset.

EIE removed from slot 6 The MCU has detected that the EIE in slot 6 has been removed or is dead.

Card in slot 7 has reset The card in slot 7 has reset on its own. This may be because of a problem with the card or because it was commanded to do so from the debug prompt.

2Mb Link 1 has gone faulty The first E1 link on this card is bad. Could be caused during a reset or because of a device or cable failure.

2Mb Link 1 is bad, signaling was reset The first E1 link on this card is bad. Could be caused during a reset or because of a device or cable failure.

377

IMS Fault Logs

Fault Log Input Alarms

Unknown Error. Code: 134 Often seen as part of a reset, this error code represents that link 1 has failed. Error code 135 would indicate that link 2 has failed.

Reset – Watchdog The rack has reset because of a watchdog fault. The processor may have died or the MCU card may have been removed.

Console Reset The ACS has reset its serial link with the Acom Console Unit. There may have been a timeout that expired.

Console Ok or Console Bad The ACS has lost (bad) or established (OK) serial communications with the Acom Console Unit.

DSP IDMA read/write failure This could occur if the SMU has been over allocated. Check the resource programming. The maximum memory may have been exceeded.

Alarm Number IMS Alarm Name Alarm Description

0 – 7 Digital Input 1 – 8 External Digital Inputs8 Internal Link Error MCU A link 1

Internal (FW) alarm generated when the system has detected an error in the E1 link.

9 Internal Link Error MCU A link 210 Internal Link Error MCU B link 111 Internal Link Error MCU B link 212 Internal Link Error MCU C link 113 Internal Link Error MCU C link 214 Internal Link Error MCU reserved for future MCU D link 115 Internal Link Error MCU reserved for future MCU D link 216 Internal Link Error MCU reserved for future MCU E link 117 Internal Link Error MCU reserved for future MCU E link 218 Internal Link Error MCU reserved for future MCU F link 119 Internal Link Error MCU reserved for future MCU F link 2

Alarm Text Examples Description

Appendix C: Alarms

378 025-9574E

20 Internal Link Master MCU A link 1

Internal (FW) alarm generated when the LCB associated with an E1 link has been set as the active in a changeover system.

21 Internal Link Master MCU A link 2

22 Internal Link Master MCU B link 1

23 Internal Link Master MCU B link 2

24 Internal Link Master MCU C link 1

25 Internal Link Master MCU C link 2

26 Internal Link Master MCU reserved for future MCU D link 127 Internal Link Master MCU reserved for future MCU D link 228 Internal Link Master MCU reserved for future MCU E link 129 Internal Link Master MCU reserved for future MCU E link 230 Internal Link Master MCU reserved for future MCU F link 131 Internal Link Master MCU reserved for future MCU F link 231 Card Configuration Difference between saved and installed cards.

(Difference may be revision or type.)32 DS3 Link A Loss of Signal Loss of signal on DS3 Link A33 DS3 Link B Loss of Signal Loss of signal on DS3 Link B34 DS3 Link A Loss of Framing Loss of frame alignment/synchronization on DS3 Link A35 DS3 Link B Loss of Framing Loss of frame alignment/synchronization on DS3 Link B36 DS3 Link A AIS Alarm Received an Alarm Indication Signal on DS3 Link A.37 DS3 Link B AIS Alarm Received an Alarm Indication Signal on DS3 Link B.38 DS3 Link A Failed Unable to remove wrap on Link A.39 DS3 Link B Failed Unable to remove wrap on Link B.40 DS3 Link A Wrapped DS3 Link A is currently in “wrapped” mode.41 DS3 Link B Wrapped DS3 Link B is currently in “wrapped” mode.42 DS3 Ring Offline The Backbone DS3 ring has come online or gone offline.43 Incorrect DS3 Port Connection The DS3 Link was unable to negotiate a communications

link with the remote end, due to the fact that Port A (or Port B) on the current ADS has been incorrectly connected to Port A (or Port B) on the remote ADS.

44 DCU NV Configuration DCU NV configuration corrupted45 No backplane time slots available A connection failed because no time slot available on the

backplane.


379

IMS Fault Logs

46 DCU Packet Memory Exhausted No more memory available in memory pool to allocate to packets for the DS3 backbone or the ADS Backplane HDLC messaging queues.

47 DCU Packet Memory Insufficient Available memory free in memory pool smaller than requested allocation size for a new packet for the DS3 backbone or the ADS Backplane HDLC messaging queues.

48 MCU A Packet Memory Exhausted

No more memory available in memory pool to allocate to packets for the ADS Backplane or E1 messaging queues.

49 MCU A E1 Loss of Signal MCU4 Slot A Link 1Loss of signal on an E1 Link.

50 MCU A E1 Loss of Framing MCU4 Slot A Link 1Loss of frame alignment or synchronization on an E1 Link

51 MCU A E1 AIS Alarm MCU4 Slot A Link 1Received an Alarm Indication Signal on an E1 Link.

52 MCU A E1 Remote Alarm MCU4 Slot A Link 1Received a remote alarm on an E1 Link.

53 MCU A E1 Remote Alarm 1 MCU4 Slot A Link 1Received a remote alarm 1 on an E1 Link.


55 MCU A LCB missing MCU4 Slot A Link 1An LCB is expected but not present (expected is based upon the system receiving a signal on the E1 link).

56 MCU A E1 Framing Slip MCU4 Slot A Link 1Received an E1 framing slip.

57 MCU A Backup Mode Change MCU4 Slot A Link 1An LLCB for an LSR is entering/leaving backup mode.

58 MCU A E1 Loss of Signal MCU4 Slot A Link 2Loss of signal on an E1 Link.

59 MCU A E1 Loss of Framing MCU4 Slot A Link 2Loss of frame alignment or synchronization on an E1 Link

60 MCU A E1 AIS Alarm MCU4 Slot A Link 2Received an Alarm Indication Signal on an E1 Link.

61 MCU A E1 Remote Alarm MCU4 Slot A Link 2Received a remote alarm on an E1 Link.



Appendix C: Alarms

380 025-9574E


64 MCU A LCB missing MCU4 Slot A Link 2An LCB is expected but not present (expected is based upon the system receiving a signal on the E1 link).

65 MCU A E1 Framing Slip MCU4 Slot A Link 2Received an E1 framing slip.

66 MCU A Backup Mode Change MCU4 Slot A Link 2An LLCB for an LSR is entering/leaving backup mode.

67-71 MCU A Spare reserved for future72 MCU B Packet Memory

ExhaustedNo more memory available in memory pool to allocate to packets for the ADS Backplane or E1 messaging queues.

73 MCU B E1 Loss of Signal MCU4 Slot B Link 1Loss of signal on an E1 Link.

74 MCU B E1 Loss of Framing MCU4 Slot B Link 1Loss of frame alignment or synchronization on an E1 Link

75 MCU B E1 AIS Alarm MCU4 Slot B Link 1Received an Alarm Indication Signal on an E1 Link.

76 MCU B E1 Remote Alarm MCU4 Slot B Link 1Received a remote alarm on an E1 Link.

77 MCU B E1 Remote Alarm 1 MCU4 Slot B Link 1Received a remote alarm 1 on an E1 Link.


79 MCU B LCB missing MCU4 Slot B Link 1An LCB is expected but not present (expected is based upon the system receiving a signal on the E1 link).

80 MCU B E1 Framing Slip MCU4 Slot B Link 1Received an E1 framing slip.

81 MCU B Backup Mode Change MCU4 Slot B Link 1An LLCB for an LSR is entering/leaving backup mode.

82 MCU B E1 Loss of Signal MCU4 Slot B Link 2Loss of signal on an E1 Link.

83 MCU B E1 Loss of Framing MCU4 Slot B Link 2- Loss of frame alignment or synchronization on an E1 Link

84 MCU B E1 AIS Alarm MCU4 Slot B Link 2- Received an Alarm Indication Signal on an E1 Link.

85 MCU B E1 Remote Alarm MCU4 Slot B Link 2- Received a remote alarm on an E1 Link.


381

IMS Fault Logs



88 MCU B LCB missing MCU4 Slot B Link 2An LCB is expected but not present (expected is based upon the system receiving a signal on the E1 link).

89 MCU B E1 Framing Slip MCU4 Slot B Link 2Received an E1 framing slip.

90 MCU B Backup Mode Change MCU4 Slot B Link 2An LLCB for an LSR is entering/leaving backup mode.

91-95 MCU B Spare reserved for future96 MCU C Packet Memory

ExhaustedNo more memory available in memory pool to allocate to packets for the ADS Backplane or E1 messaging queues.

97 MCU C E1 Loss of Signal MCU4 Slot C Link 1Loss of signal on an E1 Link.

98 MCU C E1 Loss of Framing MCU4 Slot C Link 1Loss of frame alignment or synchronization on an E1 Link

99 MCU C E1 AIS Alarm MCU4 Slot C Link 1Received an Alarm Indication Signal on an E1 Link.

100 MCU C E1 Remote Alarm MCU4 Slot C Link 1Received a remote alarm on an E1 Link.

101 MCU C E1 Remote Alarm 1 MCU4 Slot C Link 1Received a remote alarm 1 on an E1 Link.


103 MCU C LCB missing MCU4 Slot C Link 1An LCB is expected but not present (expected is based upon the system receiving a signal on the E1 link).

104 MCU C E1 Framing Slip MCU4 Slot C Link 1Received an E1 framing slip.

105 MCU C Backup Mode Change MCU4 Slot C Link 1An LLCB for an LSR is entering/leaving backup mode.

106 MCU C E1 Loss of Signal MCU4 Slot C Link 2Loss of signal on an E1 Link.

107 MCU C E1 Loss of Framing MCU4 Slot C Link 2- Loss of frame alignment or synchronization on an E1 Link

108 MCU C E1 AIS Alarm MCU4 Slot C Link 2- Received an Alarm Indication Signal on an E1 Link.


Appendix C: Alarms

382 025-9574E

Fault Log Output Alarms

109 MCU C E1 Remote Alarm MCU4 Slot C Link 2- Received a remote alarm on an E1 Link.



112 MCU C LCB missing MCU4 Slot C Link 2An LCB is expected but not present (expected is based upon the system receiving a signal on the E1 link).

113 MCU C E1 Framing Slip MCU4 Slot C Link 2Received an E1 framing slip.

114 MCU C Backup Mode Change MCU4 Slot C Link 2An LLCB for an LSR is entering/leaving backup mode.

115-119 MCU C Spare reserved for future120 DCU Boot Error Error starting DCU code, running from backup or failsafe

image121 2Mb Clock Source Error A 2Mb clock source configured to generate an alarm has

failed.

Alarm Number Function

0 Urgent Alarm1 Non-urgent Alarm2 Information Alarm

3-10 Represents External Digital Output 1-811-16 Internal System Select.

(Used to tell the DS3 that the LCB is the selected active for a changeover. Usually driven by a digital input that is wired to a CCC changeover controller.)11 – MCU A, E1 Link 112 – MCU A, E1 Link 213 – MCU B, E1 Link 114 – MCU B, E1 Link 215 – MCU C, E1 Link 116 – MCU C, E1 Link 2


383

General Alarms

General Alarms

The following events will cause an alarm. The columns “urgent” and “non urgent” show the default programming for alarms to the system alarm outputs. (The alarm numbers are used to identify the alarms uniquely within MCU3 and IMS.)

Table 206: Input Alarm Names

No. Alarm Name Urgent Non Urgent MCU B7 LED

0 Configuration Alarm1 64kbp/s G703 NOS2 64kbp/s G703 Slip3 64kbp/s G703 AIS4 2Mbps Slot 0 P1 NOS5 Remaining 2Mbp/s NOS6 2Mbps Slot 0 P1 LOS7 Remaining 2Mbp/s LOS8 2Mbps Slot 0 P1 RRA9 Remaining 2Mbp/s RRA10 2Mbps Slot 0 P1 EBER11 Remaining 2Mbp/s EBER12 2Mbps Slot 0 P1 Slip13 Remaining 2Mbp/s Slip14 2Mbps Slot 0 P1 MFA15 Remaining 2Mbp/s MFA16 2Mbps Slot 0 P1 CRC417 Remaining 2Mbp/s CRC418 2Mbps Slot 0 P1 AIS19 Remaining 2Mbp/s AIS20 2Mbps Slot 0 P1 MRRA21 Remaining 2Mbp/s MRRA22 Acom Self Test Failure23 Ringer Failure24 Alarms Acknowledged25 No Alarms Active26 Not used with Acom27 MSU In1 (AI11) System Selected28 MSU In2 (AI21) Standby Fault29 MSU In3 (12)30 MSU In4 (AI22)

Appendix C: Alarms

384 025-9574E

The following input alarms should be monitored closely and will trigger an urgent alarm:• Standby Fault - Monitors the health of the other rack (main or standby ALS).• MSUin4 - Monitors power supply alarm.• MSUin6 - Monitors the health of an ADS.

31 MSU In5 (AI13) Watchdog32 MSU In6 (AI23)33 Loopback Present34 Maintenance Terminal35 DIU4 Slip 36 DIU4 No Clock37 DIU4 No HDLC 38 Acom Rack Alarm39 Acom Site Alarm40 Console Alarm41 Backup Alarm42 Data Alarm43 Line Alarm44 Bearer Alarm45 Remote Alarm46 LCB Alarm47 E1-T1 Converter RA (Pri)48 E1-T1 Converter RA (Sec)49 Excessive Clipping50 NA51 NA52 NA53 NA54 NA55 NA56 NA57 NA58 SMU Alarm59 2Mbit Clocking Alarm60 MCUx Slot 0 P1 RA161 MCUx Slot 0 P1 RA262 MCUx Slot 0 P2 RA163 MCUx Slot 0 P2 RA2

No. Alarm Name Urgent Non Urgent MCU B7 LED

385

ALS Alarm Definitions

• MSUin3 - If you have a slave ALS, this alarm is programmed in the master ALS. This is to monitor the health of the slave ALS.

• SMU Alarm - Monitors SMU DSP resources and alarms.


Configuration Error

ALARM No. 0 CE

On power up the MCU3 checks to see if all the line cards and smart cards (those that use the HDLC backplane bus) are present and configured according to the setup stored in the configuration Flash RAM. If any change is detected, then the “Configuration Error” alarm is made active. The alarm is only cleared if the configuration is updated (using IMS), or the subrack configuration is changed to match the configuration saved in Flash RAM. During normal operation, the MCU3 checks that all cards are present at least once every minute. The MCU3 will also check the status of the smart cards. The CE alarm will be raised if the card reports a failure of some kind. The CE alarm will also be raised if the MCU3 does not detect the cards normal heartbeat message. The alarm log stores which card caused the alarm.

Note The check of the CODECs does not indicate if the analog portion of the CODEC circuit is operating, only that the MCU3 can communicate with the CODEC.


The installed cards do not match the programmed configuration. One is missing or an unexpected card was found. Communications may have been lost with the card.

Look for a slot with a red or yellow indicator as the problem slot. Check the fault log for fault details. To clear a Configuration alarm the faulty/missing cards can be replaced or the current subrack configuration can be updated to Flash RAM using IMS.

Appendix C: Alarms

386 025-9574E

Loss of Signal at 64k G703 Interface

ALARM No. 1 64K NOS

DIU3 card alarm.

Alarm No. 1 is an application for the DIU3. If any of the DIU3 channels lose receive signal, then the loss of signal alarm will be raised. The alarm will only be automatically cleared when a signal is detected again or that channel is disabled by IMS.

The alarm log stores which one of the 60 possible DIU3 channels raised the alarm. This information is available through IMS.

This alarm is part of the G.735 and G.737 requirements.

Slips at 64k G703 Interface

ALARM No. 2 64K SLIP

DIU3 card alarm.

This alarm is raised if there is one slip (elastic buffer empty or overfilled) in 60 minutes or less (exact time set in IMS). It is cleared by disabling the channel, or correcting the cause of the synchronization fault. This alarm condition needs to be averaged over a long time to avoid setting it to detecting one slip, which might only be occurring at a rate of once every one hundred days. This alarm should not be activated when there are alarms like NOS and LOS active for the same link. It is automatically cleared only after a slip free time period (60 minutes). The averaging time is programmable from IMS.

The alarm log stores which one of the 60 possible DIU3 channels raised the alarm. This information is available through IMS.

AIS from Remote End of 64k G703 Interface

ALARM No. 3 64K AIS

DIU3 card alarm.

If the DIU3 receives a remote AIS (all 1s) on a channel then this alarm is raised. This alarm is cleared by either the removal of the AIS signal from the remote end (64K port) or by disabling the channel through IMS.

The alarm log stores which of the 60 possible DIU3 channels raised the alarm. This information is available through IMS.

Loss of Incoming Signal at 2 MBPS Interface

ALARM No. 4 and 52M NOS P and 2M NOS S

NOS stands for NO Signal. If any 2 Mbps-bit receive signal falls below a level of approximately 1-volt, then this alarm is raised. This corresponds to a loss of 6 dB. In a

387


system that has more than two MCU3s, alarm 4 corresponds to the 2 Mbps link of the primary MCU3 in slot 0, and alarm 5 corresponds to an “OR” function of all the other 2 Mbps interfaces. When an MCU3-DUAL is installed in slot 0, and both of the 2 Mbps channels are in operation, Alarm 4 is for the first 2 Mbps link of the MCU3 in slot 0. Alarm 5 is an “OR” function of all the other 2 Mbps channels in the system (this includes the second 2 Mbps link on the MCU3 in slot 0).

This alarm is cleared by either disabling the MCU3, replacing the MCU3, or restoring the signal. It is automatically cleared only when the 2 Mbps signal is fully restored.

The operation of this alarm is controlled directly by the framer IC on the MCU3. The framer raises the NOS alarm if the following conditions are detected:

• Three or less ones are received in a time internal of 250 micro-seconds, or

• The receive clock pulse fails to occur in a time interval of 4 internal clock cycles (4096 kHz).

The alarm log will store alarm 4 and which of the 6 remote ends raised alarm 5. This information is available through IMS. This alarm is part of the G.732 requirement.


The MCU does not detect a E1/T1 signal from the connected device on the alarming port.

Check E1/T1 connections between the MCU and connected equipment using the system map.This alarm is cleared by either disabling the MCU3 framer, replacing the MCU3, or restoration of the signal. It is automatically cleared only when the 2Mbps signal is fully restored.

The E1/T1 signal is not strong enough. The inbound E1/T1 signal may not be strong enough to drive the circuit input. No more than 6dBm @ 1000Hz may be allowed. Use E1/T1 test set to check inbound signal strength.Swap Tx/Rx pairs on both ends and see if the problem follows the cable. Check/replace connectors on Rx cable.

Appendix C: Alarms

388 025-9574E

Loss of Frame Alignment of the G.703 2 MPBS Link

ALARM No. 6 and 72M LOS P and 2M LOS S

Alarm 6 is for link 1 (2 Mbit) of the primary MCU3. Alarm 7 is for the remaining 2 Mbps links. Loss of frame alignment is in reality a loss of synchronization or frame synchronization (LOS = Loss of synchronization).

The LOS alarm is asserted when the Framer chip detects three consecutive incorrect Frame Alignment Signal (FAS) words. After loss of synchronization, the Framer chip will resynchronize automatically if the following conditions are met:

• The presence of the correct FAS word in frame n • The presence of the correct service word in frame n + 1 • For a second time the presence of a correct FAS word in frame n + 2

After this, the sequence synchronization is regained and the LOS alarm is cleared.

When CRC multiframe structure is enabled (using IMS), the CRC multiframe alignment (as opposed to frame alignment outlined above) is assumed to be lost if pulse frame synchronization has been lost. In this state the LOS alarm is asserted.

CRC multiframe alignment is regained after two consecutive CRC multiframes have been received without a framing error. At this point the LOS alarm is cleared.

The alarm log stores alarm 6 and which of the 6 remote ends raised alarm 7. This information is available through IMS.

This alarm is part of the G.732 requirement.


No signal from the E1/T1 port. LOS would be accompanied by a NOS alarm.

See NOS alarm.

Noise or poor signal strength has made the frame alignment difficult or impossible to detect.

Check E1/T1 connections between the MCU and connected equipment using the system map. The quality of the inbound link may be questionable, isolate circuits and troubleshoot.Use E1/T1 tester to measure signal strength.Check and replace connectors on cable.

389


Received Remote Alarm

ALARM No. 8 and 9 2Mbps RRA P and 2Mbps RRA S

The 2 M RRA alarm is raised when the Framer chip receives a RRA (Receive Remote Alarm, all “1s”) from the device connected to the remote end of the G.703 link.

Alarm 8 is the RRA for the first 2 Mbps link of MCU3 in slot 0.Alarm 9 is the RRA for the remaining MCU3 2 Mbps links.

The alarm log stores alarm 8 and which of the six remote ends raised alarm 9. This information is available through IMS.


Excessive EBER G703 2 MBPS for Channels 1 and 2

ALARM No. 10 and 11 2Mbps EBER P and 2Mbps EBER S

Alarm 10 is for link 1 of the primary MCU3 and alarm 11 is for remaining G.703 links. The EBER alarm will be raised if the received G.703 data has an error rate greater than 10-3.

The alarm log stores which of the six remote ends raised alarm 11. This information is available through IMS.



The connected device is reporting a remote alarm (all “1s”) on the E1 link.

Follow the circuit to the alarming device looking for an open E1 and/or an RRA output alarm on the connected device.


No signal from the E1/T1 port (loss of signal is accompanied by a NOS alarm).

See NOS alarm.

High loss on the E1 circuit. Check E1/T1 connections between the MCU and connected equipment using the system map. The quality of the inbound link may be questionable, isolate circuits and troubleshoot.Use E1/T1 tester to measure signal strength.Check and replace connectors on cable.

Appendix C: Alarms

390 025-9574E

Slips Occurring on 2 MBPS Link

ALARM No. 12 and 13 2Mbps SLIP P and 2Mbps SLIP S

Alarm 12 is for link 1 of the primary MCU3 and alarm 13 is for the remaining G.703 links.

This alarm is raised for each slip except the first slip after restart. It is cleared by disabling the channel, or replacing the card (at either end). It is cleared automatically only after a slip free period of 60 minutes or less (programmable in IMS).


2 MPPS Multi-frame Sync Loss

Alarm no. 14 and 15 2Mbps MFA P and 2Mbps MFA S

Alarm 14 is for link 1 of the primary MCU3 and alarm 15 is for remaining G.703 links.

Multiframe synchronization is lost when the Framer chip does not detect the multiframe sync bit. If this occurs, the MFA alarms are raised. The MFA alarms are cleared when the first correct multiframe alignment signal is detected.


Clocking sources for E1/T1 devices are not in sync causing intermittent slips.

Allow the Acom device to accept clocking from the E1/T1 link using IMS. 1. From the IMS menu select Configure->System Clocking.2. Add all of the Available Clocking Sources to the list of clocking sources.3. Repeat for the other Acom devices.


Connected device is not using TS16 for the same purpose as the alarming device.

TS16 can be used as a data channel, CAS signaling bits, or as a clear voice channel. The expected signaling was not detected on TS16, check E1/T1 configuration on both ends.1. From the IMS menu right-click on the MCU card and select Link Signaling->Link1 or Link2.2. Choose an LCB Signaling Scheme if the port is connected to a DS3 Switch E1 port or choose CAS if operating the subrack as an MX-3.

391


2 MBPS-CRC-4 Error

ALARM No. 16 and 17 2Mbps CRC P and 2Mbps CRC S

Alarm 16 is for link 1 of the primary MCU3 and alarm 17 is for the remaining G.703 links.

This alarm is raised when a CRC error is reported by the Framer chip and cleared when it has received 2 correct CRC multiframes.

The alarm log stores alarm 16 and which of the 6 remote ends raised alarm 17. This information is viewed through IMS.

AIS Detection at 2 MBPS Input

ALARM No. 18 and 19 2Mbps AIS P and 2Mbps AIS S

The alarm indication signal (AIS) is a continuous stream of ones. This alarm is raised when the incoming bit stream has less than two zeros in a time interval of 250 us (that is, two G.704 frames).




TS16 can be used as a data channel, CAS signaling bits, or as a clear voice channel. The expected signaling was not detected on TS16, check E1/T1 configuration on both ends.

Noise or poor signal strength. Check E1/T1 connections between the MCU and connected equipment using the system map. The quality of the inbound link may be questionable, isolate circuits and troubleshoot.Use E1/T1 tester to measure signal strength.Check and replace connectors on cable.


The remote device is running a test. Stop test.

Appendix C: Alarms

392 025-9574E

Remote Multiframe Alarm on 2 MPBS Input

ALARM No. 20 and 21 2Mbps MRRA P and 2Mbps MRRA S

MRRA alarm is raised when the Framer detects a Multiframe Receive Remote Alarm. The Acom system is capable of both sending and receiving this alarm.

The MRRA bit is set on a transmitted multiframe under the following conditions:• Loss of incoming 2 Mbps signal• Loss of multiframe align signal on incoming 2 Mbps link (alarm 6 and 7)


Acom Fault During Restart or Self-test

ALARM No. 22 Acom Self Test Failure

Alarm 22 is raised when a fault is detected during a restart or self test.

Ring Fail Alarm

ALARM No. 23 RFA

The RGU sets a signal on the subrack backplane. This signal is checked by the MCU3. When the signal stops the RGU has failed and MCU3 raises this alarm.


Remote device has detected loss of incoming 2Mbps signal.

Follow MRRA and RRA alarms to the source.

Remote device has detected loss of multiframe alignment signal.

Follow MRRA and RRA alarms to the source.


Bad MCU. Repeat self test, replace MCU if you receive a second failed self test.


One of the ringers has been removed. Check the IMS configuration on the number of expected ringers (see “Configuring ALS Parameters” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).

One of the ringers has failed. Replace the faulty RGU card or external ring source.

393


Alarms Acknowledged

ALARM No. 24 ACK

This alarm is raised when any alarm is acknowledged but not yet cleared.

No Alarms

ALARM No. 25 OK

When no alarms are active (excluding the OK alarm), the OK alarm is raised. This alarm can be considered an “ALL OK” alarm.

Local Input Alarms

ALARM No. 27 to 32 LIN1 to LIN6

These alarms are received through the local MSU alarm input ports.

LIN1 and LIN2 are the defaults used as SI1 and SI2 inputs for the audio channel on the MSU board. These inputs can be programmed as alarm inputs through IMS (see “Define Alarms” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).

System Selected MSU, Input 1 (AI11)

The SYSSEL output (AO11) is grounded by the MSU card to signal the CCC card that it wishes to take control of the lines in the Changeover subrack. Input AI11 is then activated by the Changeover Control Card (CCC) to signal the MSU that it is in control.

AI11 is used as an E1 lead if the MSU audio channel is enabled.


The system is automatically acking alarms. Remove all input alarms from the “Ack All” output alarm definition in IMS (see “Define Alarms” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).

A technician has pressed the Ack All button on the Input Alarms panel and acknowledged all alarms.

Technicians should not press Ack All button on the Input Alarms panel.


The normally active Watchdog alarm from the standby subrack has been lost.

The standby ALS may be dead. Check its input and output alarms in IMS.

The system is operating in a non-redundant mode. This is normal for a non-redundant ALS.


The local subrack is in control. None required.

Appendix C: Alarms

394 025-9574E

Standby Fault MSU, Input 2 (AI21)

This is the health alarm of the standby subrack. This input is expected to be normally inactive and if it becomes active a fault in the standby rack is assumed. Like the Watchdog alarm it provides communication between main and standby MSU cards. It is common to duplicate the same type of alarm mapping to the Standby Fault alarm as the Urgent Alarm Output so as to switch control if an Urgent alarm was to occur.

AI11 is used as an E2 lead if the MSU audio channel is enabled.

MSU Input 3 (AI12)

This is an MSU input alarm that may be used for other purposes such as monitoring the power supply alarms.

MSU Input 4 (AI22)

This is an MSU input alarm that may be used for other purposes such as monitoring the power supply alarms.

Watchdog, MSU Input 5 (AI13)

Should the Primary MCU card in the ALS go dead, or the MSU lose power, this output will go inactive to indicate it has failed. In addition to these two non-configurable triggers, additional alarm inputs can be mapped to this MSU output to trigger a changeover (see “Define Alarms” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529). It is common to connect all operational alarms to the Standby Fault output and leave only the loss of power and failure of a primary MCU to trigger the watchdog. The Watchdog input (AI13) monitors the Watchdog output of the other subrack. If this input goes high (inactive) the MSU will demand control by asserting the SYSSEL Output (AO11).

MSU Input 6 (AI23)

The AI23 input is commonly used to detect a problem with the E1 link associated with the local subrack. The backbone switch (ADS) connected to the E1 ports of the Primary MCU card provides this signal. It provides a faster indication of a lost E1 than waiting for a LOS, NOS, or RRA signal on the E1 link and will result in a quicker changeover between subracks.


The redundant standby subrack has a problem. Use IMS to view the input/output alarms of the standby subrack.

Note The Watchdog output (AO13) is in an active state under normal operation. For this reason a redundant ALS will never have the “All OK” alarm active.

395


Test Condition

ALARM No. 33 TEST

This alarm is raised when a loopback test is initiated from the maintenance terminal.

Maintenance Terminal Active

ALARM No. 34 MAINT

This alarm is raised when a maintenance terminal is opened on the ALS.

DIU4 Alarms

ALARM No. 35, 36, 37 DIU4 SLIPS, DIU4 NO CLOCK, DIU4 NO HDLC

These alarms are raised when the DIU4 board detects a slip, loss of clocking, or loss of HDLC (High-level Data Link Control) communication with the Primary MCU3.

ALARM No. 40 Console Alarm

Indicates a console from the local Operator SubRack (OSR) has lost serial communications with the console PC.


A loopback test is underway on an E1 link in this subrack.

Use IMS to remove the loopback test. (See “Loopback” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).


A local IMS connection is active with this subrack. Not a problem, indicates there is a local RS232 IMS session active.


Console PC turned off. Check the power to the console PC and that it isturned on.

ACS application not running. Check that the ACS application is running and logged in. Acknowledge any popup messages it might display and check the status bar to verify communications with the Acom Console Unit.

Baud rate or serial settings wrong in DIU configuration.

Check the IMS and ACS configuration for the serial port and baud rate (see “Serial Port” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).

The physical RS422 port to the console PC is bad. Check DIU connection to console.

Appendix C: Alarms

396 025-9574E

ALARM No. 41 Backup Alarm

Not used with Acom.

ALARM No. 42 Data Alarm

The Data Alarm is generated by the External Clock serial port. The ALS expects regular time updates from the external time source. If the Alarm Timeout in the External Clock programming of IMS expires, the Data Alarm will activate. If a time source has never been connected, this alarm will not activate.

ALARM No. 43 Line Alarm

The Line Alarm is generated by the LIT card. If a line test fails the alarm is activated.

ALARM No. 44 Bearer Alarm

Not used with Acom.

ALARM No. 45 Remote Alarm

Not used with Acom.

ALARM No. 46 LCB Alarm

Not used with Acom.

If the ALS loses communications with the Acom DS3 Subrack (ADS), this alarm will activate.


The ALS is not receiving time updates. Check the serial connection to the ALS. It may be connected to an MCU port or a DIU card.At the debug prompt, issue the command “Test 8 80” to show time updates. To get to the debug prompt: With a laptop, use cable 709-7345 and a terminal program to connect directly to the Primary MCU card’s serial port 1 (38400 baud, 8N1). Press ESC three times to get a login, and type in your password (default 8564888).


The E1 link to the ADS has been broken. Check for any associated RRA, NOS, or LOS alarms.Check for a physical break in the link. Check the SMB connectors for slippage.

The ALS can no longer communicate with the ADS over time slot 16.

Check the Link Signaling Scheme in IMS (see Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529). The Link Signaling Scheme should be set to LCB 1-4, the number refers to the physical port the ALS is connected to on the ADS.

397


ALARM No. 47 E1-T1 Converter RA (Pri)

When the Acom subrack is configured as an E1 to T1 protocol rate converter, this alarm indicates a problem on the primary side (local to the ADS).

ALARM No. 48 E1-T1 Converter RA (Sec)

When the Acom subrack is configured as an E1 to T1 protocol rate converter, this alarm indicates a problem on the secondary side (local to the remote console end).

ALARM No. 49 Excessive Clipping

Not used with Acom.

ALARM No. 56 SMU LAN Alarm

Not used with Acom.

Generated by the SMU on an OpenSky VoIP system.

ALARM No. 57 SMU Ping Alarm

Not used with Acom

Generated by the SMU on an OpenSky VoIP system.

SMU Alarm

ALARM No. 58 SMU

This alarm indicates a problem has developed with the SMU card.


DSP signal processing loop has too many modules enabled, exceeding the maximum number of DSP instruction cycles allowed.

Check the SMU programming. If using User Defined resource allocation, verify the number of resources does not exceed the CPU clock cycles or memory of the DSP. (See “SMU Card Options” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.)From the SMU debug prompt, issue the command “SMU” and verify that the each DSP does not exceed 100% clock cycles. To get to the debug prompt: With a laptop, use cable 709-7345 and a terminal program to connect directly to the SMU card’s debug serial port (38400 baud, 8N1). Press ESC three times to get a login, and use password 8564888.

SMU host processor believes DSP is running at the wrong speed. (A corrupt EEPROM can cause this.)

Replace SMU.

EEPROM cannot be read. Replace SMU.EEPROM read error (checksum bad). Replace SMU.

Appendix C: Alarms

398 025-9574E

2MBPS Clocking

Alarm No. 59 2M CLK

The current clocking source has been programmed to trigger a clocking alarm.

Remote End Alarms

ALARMS No. 50 to 63 RAIN101-262 (with exception of alarms 58 and 59)

Two alarms are available for each of the remote ends connected to the G.703 links. If these input alarms are to be used the remote end must be capable of sending these alarm signals.

ALARM No. 60 and 62 MCU Slot 0 PX RA1

ALARM No. 61 and 63 MCU Slot 0 PX RA2

Input Alarm Handling

Alarm Storing

When a General Alarm is raised (see General Alarms on page 383), the time and type of alarm is stored in non-volatile memory on the MCU in the ALS. The memory has space

Any of the three DSPs have a fault (watchdog, self test).

Replace SMU.

DSP IDMA read/write failure. Replace SMU.FPGA failed to load. Replace SMU.



The current clocking source has been programmed to trigger a clocking alarm.

Check the ALS System Clocking programming. A checkbox next to an available clocking source will cause this alarm if the checked clock is used to drive the 2Mbit links of the ALS.


The connected backbone switching device (ADS) is reporting a remote alarm because of a failed backbone link.

Check for a broken DS3 link on the connected backbone switch (ADS) port A.


The connected backbone switching device (ADS) is reporting a remote alarm because of a failed backbone link.

Check for a broken DS3 link on the connected backbone switch (ADS) port B.

399


for a total of 256 individual alarm events. The alarm memory also stores the time of the last restart.

Alarm Urgency

Alarm urgency defines how urgent a maintenance action is following an alarm. The level of alarm urgency is defined by the user to suit the level/type of maintenance the system is intended to receive. The following levels are common:

Table 207: Alarm Urgency

The user can set any alarm output for any of the above alarm urgency levels. The alarms that require actions of a desired urgency are simply programmed to go to the port allocated for this level of urgency. This means that the alarm is assigned to an output to indicate a particular urgency rather than assigning an urgency level to an alarm. This output is then “labeled” the appropriate urgency level.

Alarm Acknowledgment

The acknowledgment can be initiated from IMS or when one or more of the input alarms become active. Which input alarms initiate an acknowledgment is defined in IMS (see “Alarm Menu” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).

Alarm Outputs

Table 208 contains a list of the alarm outputs. The default column shows the default programming for each output. You can change this configuration using IMS.

Table 208: Alarm Outputs

Urgency Maintenance Action

High Immediate action any time of the dayMedium Immediate action but only during normal work hoursLow Action during next scheduled visitNone Information only

Output Alarm Name Default Output No.

Urgent Alarm LED URGENT ALARM 1Non Urgent Alarm LED NON-URGENT ALARM 2Information Alarm LED OK ALARM 3MSU OP 1 (AO11) SO1 4MSU OP 2 (AO21) SO2 5MSU OP 3 (AO12) URGENT ALARM 6MSU OP 4 (AO22) NON-URGENT ALARM 7MSU OP 5 (AO13) SYS ALARM 8MSU OP6 (AO23) OK ALARM 9

Appendix C: Alarms

400 025-9574E

Alarm Output Defaults

This section defines the input alarm conditions that cause a default alarm to become active. See Table 209 for definition of input alarms.

IMS Output Alarm NONE 10MCU3 Slot 0 Port1 RRA RRA 11MCU3 Slot 0 Port1 MRRA MRRA 12MCU3 Slot 0 Port1 RA1 NONE 13MCU3 Slot 0 Port1 RA2 NONE 14MCU3 Slot 1 RRA RRA 15MCU3 Slot 1 MRRA MRRA 16MCU3 Slot 1 RA1 NONE 17MCU3 Slot 1 RA2 NONE 18MCU3 Slot 2 RRA RRA 19MCU3 Slot 2 MRRA MRRA 20MCU3 Slot 2 RA1 NONE 21MCU3 Slot 2 RA2 NONE 22MCU3 Slot 3 RRA RRA 23MCU3 Slot 3 MRRA MRRA 24MCU3 Slot 3 RA1 NONE 25MCU3 Slot 3 RA2 NONE 26MCU3 Slot 0 Port2 RRA RRA 27MCU3 Slot 0 Port2 MRRA MRRA 28MCU3 Slot 0 Port2 RA1 NONE 29MCU3 Slot 0 Port2 RA2 NONE 30MCU3 Slot 5 RRA RRA 31MCU3 Slot 5 MRRA MRRA 32MCU3 Slot 5 RA1 NONE 33MCU3 Slot 5 RA2 NONE 34MCU3 Slot 6 RRA RRA 35MCU3 Slot 6 MRRA MRRA 36MCU3 Slot 6 RA1 NONE 37MCU3 Slot 6 RA2 NONE 38Primary MCU3 LED B7 URGENT ALARM 39ACK All LIN5 + RAIN01 40Application Software Use — —

Output Alarm Name Default Output No.

401


Table 209: Alarm Output Defaults

Alarm Outputs over the G.703 Link

The Acom system is capable of transmitting alarm signals over any of the G.703 links. This can be used to inform remote devices or other systems of any alarms that are currently active. The Acom system provides 4 alarm outputs over a single G.703 link according to the following:

• RRA Received Remote Alarm• MRRA Multiframe Remote Received Alarm• RA1 Remote Alarm 1 (multiframe error)• RA2 Remote Alarm 2 (multiframe error)

These alarm names are used because they are part of the G.704 standard, however in the Acom system they become arbitrary, as any input alarm can be used to raise any of these output alarms. These output alarms are configured through IMS (see “Alarm Menu” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).

MSU Alarm Inputs/Outputs

Refer to the Acom Software Installation and Configuration manual P/N 025-9529.

Alarm Type Default Input Alarm

URGENT CE, 2M NOS P, 2M NOS S, 2M LOS P, 2M LOS S, 2M EBER P, 2M EBER S, 2M MFA P, 2M MFA S, 2M AIS P, 2M AIS S, ACOM, RFA, LIN3, LIN6

NON URGENT 64K NOS, 64K SLIP, 64K AIS, 2M SLIP P, 2M SLIP S 2M RRA P, 2M RRA S+ 2M MRRA P, 2M MRRA S, LIN4, TEST

OK OKSYS WATCHDOG, URGENTRRA CE, 2M NOS P, 2M LOS P, 2M EBER P, 2M NOS S +2M LOS S, 2M EBER SMRRA 2M NOS P, 2M MFA P, 2M NOS S, 2M MFA SSO1, SO2 These MSU outputs are default set up as SO1 and SO2 outputs (SO = E+M Signal Output)

associated with the audio channel on the MSU board. These outputs can be programmed as alarm outputs through IMS.

ACK ALL LIN5, RAIN101. This “output” is only used to initiate acknowledgment of all existing alarms. Although this is not an ordinary output, it can be programmed as any other output.

Appendix C: Alarms

402 025-9574E

Acom Console Unit (ACU) Alarm Definitions

Configuration Error

ALARM No. 0

Amux Alarm

ALARM No. 1

Raised when a fault is detected during a restart or self test.

Acked Alarms

ALARM No. 2 ACK

This alarm is raised when any alarm is acknowledged but not yet cleared.

All OK

ALARM No. 3

No alarms appear in the system. This is a good alarm to have.


The installed modules do not match the programmed configuration. One is missing or an unexpected module was found. Communications may have been lost with the module. This alarm is usually accompanied by an active “C” LED on the back of the Acom Console Unit.

In IMS or on the Acom Console Unit itself, look for a red or yellow indicator as the problem slot.Check the fault log for fault details. (See “Fault Log” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.)To clear a Configuration alarm the faulty/missing cards can be replaced or the current Acom Console Unit configuration can be updated to Flash RAM using IMS.


Bad Acom Console Unit. Reset the Acom Console Unit. Replace Acom Console Unit if you receive a 2nd alarm.


The system is automatically acking alarms Remove all input alarms from the “Ack All” output alarm definition in IMS. (See “Define Alarms” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).

A technician has acked alarms Technicians should not ACK active alarms.

403


Test Condition

ALARM No. 4 TEST

This alarm is raised when a loopback test is initiated from the maintenance terminal.

Maintenance Terminal Active

ALARM No. 5 MT

The IMS maintenance terminal is connected to this Acom device.

Digital Input 1 (through 6)

ALARMS No. 6 through 11

Programmable input alarm using IMS. These inputs may be active when the local input is programmed as an “Acom Alarm” and the input is active. Not used with Acom.

Link A Offline

ALARM No. 12

The Acom Console Unit has lost communications with the Acom DS3 connected to E1 port 1. This alarm is accompanied by a red “A” LED on the back of the Acom Console Unit.


A loop back test is underway on an E1 link in this Acom Console Unit.

Use IMS to remove the loopback test. (See “Loopback” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).


A local IMS connection is active with this Acom Console Unit.

Not a problem, indicates there is a local RS232 IMS session active.


An Acom Console Unit is not passing the data to the ADS.

Reset the Acom Console Units between this device and the ADS. Each Acom Console Unit is responsible for passing data from E1 port to E1 port.

Acom Console Units hooked up incorrectly.

Check the connections between Acom Console Units and the ADS. Port 1 on a Acom Console Unit should connect with E1 port 2 on the next. There should not be any E1 port 1 links connected to an adjacent E1 port 1.

Broken E1 link. The E1 link that is serviced by the Dual E1 card port 1 does not have a data connection to an ADS on time slot 16. Check for breaks in the E1 down the line. Check for red LEDs on the Dual E1 cards of the Acom Console Units between the local and the ADS.

Appendix C: Alarms

404 025-9574E

Link B Offline

ALARM No. 13

The Acom Console Unit has lost communications with the Acom DS3 connected to E1 port 2. This alarm is accompanied by a red “B” LED on the back of the Acom Console Unit.

Console Alarm

ALARM No. 14

This Acom Console Unit has lost previously established communications with the ACS.

Console Audio Facilities Alarm

ALARM No. 21

Not used with Acom.

The Audio Facility Alarm is generated when the Acom Console Unit was in communications with an audio interface through the “Data” connector on the OAM and has since lost the heartbeat signal.


Serial cable unplugged. Check RS-232 cable between ACS COM port and Acom Console Unit COM1 port.

PC turned off. Check the power to the console PC and that it is turned on.ACS turned off. Check that the ACS application is running and logged in.

Acknowledge any popup messages it might display and check the status bar to verify communications with the Acom Console Unit.

Baud rate or serial settings wrong in Acom Console Unit data port.

Check the Acom Console Unit programming for the console data port. The Acom Console Unit baud rate should match the AcomConsole.ini setting (see “[Digital Outputs]” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).


OAM “Data” cable unplugged from audio interface.

Check the data cable between the Acom Console Unit OAM “Data” port and the audio interface.

Audio interface turned off. Check the power to the audio interface and that it is turned on.Resetting the Acom Console Unit will remove this alarm, it will no longer expect an audio interface.

405


E1 Slot 0 Link X No Signal

ALARM No. 33 and 44 NOS

E1 Slot 0 Link X Loss of Sync

ALARM No. 34 and 45 LOS

E1 Slot 0 Link X Receive Remote Alarm

ALARM No. 35 and 46 RRA


The Acom Console Unit does not detect an E1 signal from the connected device on the alarming port.

Check E1 connections between the Acom Console Unit and connected equipment using the system map.This alarm is cleared by either disabling the E1 framer, replacing the E1 daughter card, or restoration of the signal. It is automatically cleared only when the 2 Mbps signal is fully restored.

The E1 signal is not strong enough. The inbound E1 signal may not be strong enough to drive the circuit input. No more than 6 dBm @ 1000 Hz may be allowed.Use an E1 test set to check inbound signal strength.Swap Tx/Rx pairs on both ends and see if the problem follows the cable.Check/replace connectors on Rx cable.


No Signal from the E1 port. LOS would be accompanied by a NOS alarm.

See NOS alarm.

Noise or poor signal strength has made the frame alignment difficult or impossible to detect.

Check E1 connections between the MCU and connected equipment using the system map.The quality of the inbound link may be questionable; isolate circuits and troubleshoot.Use an E1 tester to measure signal strength.Check and replace connectors on cable.


The connected device is reporting a remote alarm (all “1s”) on the E1 link.

Follow the circuit to the alarming device looking for an open E1 and/or an RRA output alarm on the connected device.

Appendix C: Alarms

406 025-9574E

E1 Slot 0 Link X Exceeded Bit Error Rate

ALARM No. 36 and 47 EBER

E1 Slot 0 Link X frame slips

ALARM No. 37 and 48 SLIP

This alarm is raised for each slip except the first slip after restart. It is cleared by disabling the channel, or replacing the card (at either end). It is cleared automatically only after a slip free period of 60 minutes or less (programmable in IMS

E1 Slot 0 Link X Loss of MultiFrame Alignment

ALARM No. 38 and 49 MFA

Multiframe synchronization is lost when the framer chip does not detect the multiframe sync bit. If this occurs, the MFA alarms are raised. The MFA alarms are cleared when the first correct multiframe alignment signal is detected.

E1 Slot 0 Link X

ALARM No. 39 and 50 CRC4


No Signal from the E1 port. LOS would be accompanied by a NOS alarm.

See NOS alarm.

High loss on the E1 circuit. Check E1 connections between the Acom Console Unit and connected equipment using the system map.The quality of the inbound link may be questionable; isolate circuits and troubleshoot.Use E1 tester to measure signal strength.Check and replace connectors on cable.


Clocking sources for E1 devices are not in sync causing intermittent slips.

Allow the Acom device to accept clocking from the E1/T1 link using IMS. 1. From the IMS menu select Configure, System Clocking.2. Add all of the Available Clocking Sources to the Clocking list.Repeat these two steps for the other Acom devices on the E1 ring.



TS16 can be used as a data channel, CAS signaling bits, or as a clear voice channel. The expected signaling was not detected on TS16; check E1 configuration on both ends (see “Dual E1 Module” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).

407


This alarm is raised when a CRC error is reported by the framer chip and cleared when it has received two correct CRC multiframes.

E1 Slot 0 Link X MultiFrame Remote Alarm

ALARM No. 40 and 51 MFR

The MFR alarm is raised when the Framer detects a Multiframe Receive Remote Alarm. The Acom Console Unit is capable of both sending and receiving this alarm. An E1 bit is set on the transmitted multiframe to signal a MFR.

E1 Slot 0 Link X RA1

ALARM No. 41 and 52

E1 Slot 0 Link X RA2

ALARM No. 42 and 53



TS16 can be used as a data channel, CAS signaling bits, or as a clear voice channel. The expected signaling was not detected on TS16, check E1 configuration on both ends.

Noise or poor signal strength. Check E1 connections between the Acom Console Unit and connected equipment using the system map.The quality of the inbound link may be questionable; isolate circuits and troubleshoot.Use an E1 tester to measure signal strength.Check and replace connectors on cable.


Remote device has detected loss of incoming 2Mbps signal. Follow MFA and RRA alarms to the source.Remote device has detected loss of multiframe alignment signal.

Follow MFA and RRA alarms to the source.


The connected DS3 is reporting a remote alarm because of a failed DS3 link.

Check for a broken DS3 link on the connected DS3 Switch port 1.


The connected DS3 is reporting a remote alarm because of a failed DS3 link.

Check for a broken DS3 link on the connected DS3 Switch port 1.

Appendix C: Alarms

408 025-9574E

ADS Alarm Descriptions

This section describes ADS alarms and how they are detected.

Input Alarm Description

Digital Inputs

Purpose

The Digital Inputs are for any general purpose external alarm input to be used by the ADS. The first six inputs are typically configured to allow the current state of a Changeover Subrack to be known by the ADS.

Alarm IDs

Description

The DCU supports eight optically isolated digital inputs. The digital inputs shall be polled at a rate of 100ms. The Digital Input alarm shall be active when a voltage is applied to the digital input.

The first six digital inputs are typically configured to monitor the Changeover State for the first three MCU cards. In this case, each E1 link on an MCU card is assigned a digital

Note The following table shows a typical configuration.

Alarm Number

Alarm Name Comment

0 Digital 0 Is typically used internally by the ADS as the Changeover state indicator for MCU Slot 1 Link 1






6 Digital 67 Digital 7

409


input. Therefore, when a digital input is active it indicates that the ALS connected to the associated E1 link is active.

Internal Link Error

Purpose

The Internal Link Error alarm is required to provide a method for the ALS to discover if the ADS it has been connected to is working correctly. A normal setup of the system would define a Digital Output as being activated when the Internal Link Error is active. This Digital Output is then connected to the ALS. The ALS will use this signal to decide if it can be the master ALS or if it must release control to the standby ALS.

Alarm IDs

Description

Each E1 link on an installed MCU card in an ALS system shall support an Internal Link Error alarm. An Internal Link Error alarm can only be generated after an ALS/ACU has started communication with the ALS on an E1 link and caused a Link Control Block to be created (A Link Control Block is only created when the ADS has received a CREATE_OLCB or CREATE_LLCB command from the ACU or ALS). An Internal Link Error alarm shall be activated when any of the following is present for the specified E1 link:

E1 link : No SignalE1 link: Loss of SyncE1 link : AIS being received

Link Control Block in Standby mode and Digital Input from Changeover Subrack for this E1 link indicates it is selected.

When the Link Control Block is destroyed (due to the ALS or ACU being removed from the system or having a fatal failure) then the Internal Link Error alarm shall maintain its active state. The alarm can only be cleared once the Link Control Block is created again and all error conditions are cleared.

Alarm Number Alarm Name Comment

8 MCU A Link1 MCU Slot 1 Link 19 MCU A Link 2 MCU Slot 1 Link 2

10 MCU B Link 1 MCU Slot 2 Link 111 MCU B Link 2 MCU Slot 2 Link 212 MCU C Link 1 MCU Slot 3 Link 113 MCU C Link 2 MCU Slot 3 Link 2

Appendix C: Alarms

410 025-9574E

If a Link Control Block has never been created then the Internal Link Error alarm shall be inactive.

Description for Intersite Bearer

If the port is configured for use as an Intersite Bearer (ISB main, ISB main backup, ISB standby, or ISB standby backup port), the alarm indicates that the port is unable to be used for main/backup/standby.

Internal Link Master

Purpose

This alarm enables the IMS Maintenance Terminal to indicate which of the ALS links are active.

Alarm IDs

Description

Each E1 link on an installed MCU card in an ADS system shall support an Internal Link Master alarm. A total of six MCU cards are allowed for but support is only implemented for the first three MCU cards. An Internal Link Master alarm can only be generated when an ALS has started communication with the ADS on an E1 link and caused a Link Control Block to be created (Note: This alarm is never generated if an ACU is connected to the E1 link). An Internal Master alarm shall be activated when the Link Control Block is in the active mode. As such this alarm is actually a state indicator and not a real alarm.

When the Link Control Block is destroyed, the Internal Link Master alarm shall be returned to its idle state.

Description for Intersite Bearer

If the port is configured for use as an Intersite Bearer (ISB main, ISB main backup, ISB standby, or ISB standby backup port) the alarm takes a different meaning.


20 MCU A Link 1 MCU Slot 1 Link 121 MCU A Link 2 MCU Slot 1 Link 222 MCU B Link 1 MCU Slot 2 Link 123 MCU B Link 2 MCU Slot 2 Link 224 MCU C Link 1 MCU Slot 3 Link 125 MCU C Link 2 MCU Slot 3 Link 2

411


This alarm would typically be mapped to the information output alarm for all ISB controller ports, so at a glance a user can tell if any port at this ADS is actively controlling. Likewise, backup or standby controller ports can also map this alarm to the major output alarm notifying users of the critical condition that their 1:1 redundancy has been called upon and they may no longer be resilient to further failures.

Card Configuration

Purpose

This alarm shall indicate when the installed cards do not match what the ADS system was expecting. This could be that a new card has been installed, or an existing card has failed.

Alarm IDs

Description

When IMS does an Update to NVRAM the current list of installed cards is saved. The DCU will then use this saved list and the list of cards present to decide if the Configuration alarm is to be active. If extra cards are found in the rack, or if the saved configuration indicates a card is missing, then the configuration alarm shall be activated.

DS3 Loss Of Signal

Purpose

This alarm shall indicate when a DS3 link is not connected or has failed. A DCU card has two DS3 links.

Alarm IDs

Description

Loss of Signal from a DS3 Link is detected by the PM4328 IC. (Bit 0 of register 0x100F). Whenever a change in state occurs an interrupt is generated and the new state is passed to the alarm handler.


31 Configuration


32 Link A LOS Loss of Signal for DCU Link A33 Link B LOS Loss of Signal for DCU Link B

Appendix C: Alarms

412 025-9574E

DS3 Loss Of Frame

Purpose

This alarm shall indicate when a DS3 link is connected but cannot detect the DS3 frame. This can be due to AIS being received, errors on the DS3 link, or insufficient signal level. A DCU card has two DS3 links.

Alarm IDs

Description

Loss of Frame from a DS3 Link is detected by the PM4328 IC. (Bit 1 of register 0x100F). Whenever a change in state occurs an interrupt is generated and the new state is passed to the alarm handler.

DS3 Alarm Indication Signal

Purpose

This alarm shall indicate when a DS3 link is connected but has detected all ones on the link. A DCU card has two DS3 links.

Alarm IDs

Description

Alarm Indication Signal from a DS3 Link is detected by the PM4328 IC. (Bit 2 of register 0x100F). Whenever a change in state occurs an interrupt is generated and the new state is passed to the alarm handler.


34 Link A LOF Loss of Frame for DCU Link A35 Link B LOF Loss of Frame for DCU Link B


36 Link A AIS Alarm Indication Signal for DCU Link A

37 Link B AIS Alarm Indication Signal for DCU Link B

413


DS3 Link Failure

Purpose

This alarm shall indicate when a DS3 link is unable to be used to pass audio/data around the ADS ring.

Alarm IDs

Description

The Link Failed alarm is made active whenever the DCU discovers that it cannot use the link to talk to the adjacent racks. This alarm shall be set when any of the following conditions are present:

• DS3 Loss Of Signal• DS3 Loss Of Frame• DS3 Alarm Indication Signal• Failure of C-Bit messaging to talk to adjacent rack• Lockup of adjacent rack

DS3 Link Wrapped

Purpose

This alarm shall indicate when a DS3 link has been placed into the wrapped mode. Wrapped mode is used to cause all data and audio to go around the ring in the opposite direction and hence skip the broken link.

Alarm IDs


38 Link A Failed Link A not usable39 Link B Failed Link B not usable


40 Link A Wrapped Link A is wrapped41 Link B Wrapped Link B is wrapped

Appendix C: Alarms

414 025-9574E

Description

The Link Wrapped alarm is made active whenever the DCU discovers that it cannot use the link to talk to or pass audio to an adjacent rack. This alarm shall be set when any of the following conditions are present:

• DS3 Loss Of Signal• DS3 Loss Of Frame• DS3 Alarm Indication Signal• Failure of C-Bit messaging to talk to adjacent rack• Lockup of adjacent rack• Failure of Link startup negotiations• Forced wrap by the IMS maintenance terminal

DCU Ring Off-Line

Purpose

This alarm shall indicate when both sides of the DS3 link has failed and hence this DCU card has been isolated.

Alarm IDs

Description

The Ring Off Line alarm is made active whenever the DCU discovers that it cannot use either DS3 links. This implies that both DS3 Link A Wrapped and DS3 Link B Wrapped shall be active. The alarm is cleared when either of the wraps are removed.

Incorrect DS3 Port Connection

Purpose

This alarm shall indicate if a DCU has been connected to the incorrect port on an adjacent DCU. An incorrect connection is defined as connecting Port A to Port A or Port B to Port B.


42 Ring Offline

415


Alarm IDs

Description

When the DCU communicates with an adjacent DCU they shall exchange information about the DS3 port being used. If the DS3 ports are different (i.e. Port A connected to Port B) then the alarm is cleared. If the DS3 ports are the same then the alarm is set.

DCU NV Configuration

Purpose

This alarm shall indicate if the saved configuration is valid.

Alarm IDs

Description

When the loads its configuration from NVRAM it shall generate a checksum for the data read and compare it to the expected value. If the values don’t match the NV Configuration alarm is set and the saved configuration is not restored. The NV Configuration alarm shall only be cleared once a valid saved configuration is loaded.

No Backplane Time Slots Available

Purpose

This alarm shall indicate if an audio connected failed due to there not being any free time slots on the ADS rack backplane bus.


43 Incorrect Port Connection


44 NV Configuration

Appendix C: Alarms

416 025-9574E

Alarm IDs

Description

When an audio channel is required to be passed on an E1 link to a ALS or ACU then the DCU card must connect the required channel on the DS3 ring to the backplane bus. If the backplane bus is fully used the No Backplane Time Slots alarm shall be activated. This alarm shall remain active until a new connection is required and a free time slot on the backplane is found.

DCU Packet Memory Exhausted

Purpose

This alarm shall indicate when the DCU was unable to send a message due to there being no memory available to store the message to be sent. This is a serious alarm since it indicates that a message has failed and hence the system can enter an unknown state. (i.e. message to turn PTT off might be lost and hence some radio resources might be left keyed up)

Alarm IDs

Description

When the DCU attempts to send a message on the Ring it must allocate a temporary storage for the message. If the temporary storage cannot be allocated then the Packet Memory Exhausted alarm is set. This alarm shall only be cleared once the IMS terminal is used to Ack the alarm.

DCU Packet Memory Insufficient

Purpose

Reserved for future use


45 No Backplane Time Slots


46 Packet Memory Exhausted

417


Alarm IDs

Description

This alarm is unused.

MCU Packet Memory Exhausted

Alarm IDs

MCU E1 Loss Of Signal

Purpose

Alarm is used to indicate if an E1 link on an MCU card is receiving a signal or not.

Alarm IDs


47 Packet Memory Insufficient


48 MCU A Packet Memory Exhausted

MCU Slot 1

72 MCU B Packet Memory Exhausted

MCU Slot 2

96 MCU C Packet Memory Exhausted

MCU Slot 3


49 MCU A Link 1 LOS MCU Slot 1, Link 158 MCU A Link 2 LOS MCU Slot 1, Link 272 MCU B Link 1 LOS MCU Slot 2, Link 181 MCU B Link 2 LOS MCU Slot 2, Link 296 MCU C Link 1 LOS MCU Slot 3, Link 1105 MCU C Link 2 LOS MCU Slot 3, Link 2

Appendix C: Alarms

418 025-9574E

Description

The E1 Loss Of Signal shall be detected by the FALC54 or FALC55 IC bit 7 of register FRS0) on the MCU4 card and passed to the DCU card. (If LOS is detected the alarm shall be set

MCU E1 Loss Of Framing

Purpose

Alarm is used to indicate if an E1 link on an MCU card is receiving a signal but cannot detect or sync to the E1 framing.

Alarm IDs

Description

The E1 Loss Of Frame shall be detected by the FALC54 or FALC55 IC (bit 5 of register FRS0) on the MCU4 card and passed to the DCU card. If LOF is detected the alarm shall be set.

MCU E1 Alarm Indication Signal

Purpose

Alarm is used to indicate if an E1 link on an MCU card is receiving an alarm indication signal.


50 MCU A Link 1 LOF

MCU Slot 1, Link 1

59 MCU A Link 2 LOF

MCU Slot 1, Link 2

73 MCU B Link 1 LOF

MCU Slot 2, Link 1

82 MCU B Link 2 LOF

MCU Slot 2, Link 2

97 MCU C Link 1 LOF

MCU Slot 3, Link 1

106 MCU C Link 2 LOF

MCU Slot 3, Link 2

419


Alarm IDs

Description

The E1 Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) shall be detected by the FALC54 or FALC55 IC (bit 6 of register FRS0) on the MCU4 card and passed to the DCU card. If AIS is detected the alarm shall be set.

MCU E1 Remote Alarm

Purpose

Alarm is used to indicate if an E1 link is receiving a Remote Alarm indication from the far end.

Alarm IDs

Description

The E1 Remote Alarm shall be detected by the FALC54 or FALC55 IC (bit 4 of register FRS0) on the MCU4 card and passed to the DCU card. If RA is detected the alarm shall be set.


51 MCU A Link 1 AIS MCU Slot 1, Link 160 MCU A Link 2 AIS MCU Slot 1, Link 274 MCU B Link 1 AIS MCU Slot 2, Link 183 MCU B Link 2 AIS MCU Slot 2, Link 298 MCU C Link 1 AIS MCU Slot 3, Link 1

107 MCU C Link 2 AIS MCU Slot 3, Link 2


52 MCU A Link 1 RA MCU Slot 1, Link 161 MCU A Link 2 RA MCU Slot 1, Link 275 MCU B Link 1 RA MCU Slot 2, Link 184 MCU B Link 2 RA MCU Slot 2, Link 299 MCU C Link 1 RA MCU Slot 3, Link 1

108 MCU C Link 2 RA MCU Slot 3, Link 2

Appendix C: Alarms

420 025-9574E

MCU E1 Remote Alarm 1

Purpose

Alarm is used to indicate if the CCS signaling on an E1 link is receiving a Remote Alarm 1.

Remote Alarm 1 is defined as bit 2 of the CCS stream for time slot 16.

Alarm IDs

Description

The E1 Remote Alarm 1 shall be detected by the DCU card. When the ALS or ACU activates its Remote Alarm 1 output a CCS message for time slot 16 is sent. This is passed by the MCU4 card to the DCU card. The DCU card shall then check if the CCS message was for time slot 16 and if so shall test bit 2. If bit 2 is a 0 the alarm shall be made active.

MCU E1 Remote Alarm 2

Purpose

Alarm is used to indicate if the CCS signaling on an E1 link is receiving a Remote Alarm 2.

Remote Alarm 3 is defined as bit 2 of the CCS stream for time slot 16.


53 MCU A Link 1 RA1 MCU Slot 1, Link 162 MCU A Link 2 RA1 MCU Slot 1, Link 276 MCU B Link 1 RA1 MCU Slot 2, Link 185 MCU B Link 2 RA1 MCU Slot 2, Link 2

100 MCU C Link 1 RA1 MCU Slot 3, Link 1109 MCU C Link 2 RA1 MCU Slot 3, Link 2

421


Alarm IDs

Description

The E1 Remote Alarm 2 shall be detected by the DCU card. When the ALS or ACU activates its Remote Alarm 2 output a CCS message for time slot 16 is sent. This is passed by the MCU4 card to the DCU card. The DCU card shall then check if the CCS message was for time slot 16 and if so shall test bit 3. If bit 3 is a 0 the alarm shall be made active.

MCU LCB Missing

Purpose

Alarm is used to indicate if an Link Control Block had been created (by either the ALS or ACU sending the required create message) and is then destroyed (due to failure or the ALS/ACU, etc.).

This Alarm is used mainly to indicate that some external device was present but is now missing. This alarm can be activate by the user changing the system configuration (e.g. moving an ACU loop to a different MCU).

Alarm IDs


54 MCU A Link 1 RA2 MCU Slot 1, Link 163 MCU A Link 2 RA2 MCU Slot 1, Link 277 MCU B Link 1 RA2 MCU Slot 2, Link 186 MCU B Link 2 RA2 MCU Slot 2, Link 2

101 MCU C Link 1 RA2 MCU Slot 3, Link 1110 MCU C Link 2 RA2 MCU Slot 3, Link 2


55 MCU A Link 1 LCB MCU Slot 1, Link 164 MCU A Link 2 LCB MCU Slot 1, Link 278 MCU B Link 1 LCB MCU Slot 2, Link 187 MCU B Link 2 LCB MCU Slot 2, Link 2

102 MCU C Link 1 LCB MCU Slot 3, Link 1111 MCU C Link 2 LCB MCU Slot 3, Link 2

Appendix C: Alarms

422 025-9574E

Description

When a ALS or ACU communicates with the ADS and request a Operator Link Control Block or a Line Link Control Block is created the ADS shall record this creation request. If this Link Control Block is later destroyed (could be due to failure of the ALS/ACU, failure of the E1 link, or a configuration change) it shall activate the LCB Missing alarm. This alarm can only be cleared by a Link Control Block being created for the link or a reset of the system. When the system first powers up there shall be no LCB Missing alarms active.

MCU E1 Framer Slips

Purpose

Alarm is used to indicate if an E1 link on an MCU card is slipping (2Mb clock different between the internal source and the source on the other end of the E1 link).

Alarm IDs

Description

The E1 Slip shall be detected by the FALC54 or FALC55 IC (bit 3 of register FRS0) on the MCU4 card. When a slip is detected a 60 second timer shall be started. If a second slip is detected within this 60 second period then the Slip alarm is set and passed to the DCU card. The slip alarm shall only be cleared if there are no more slips within a 60 second window.

MCU LCB Backup

Purpose

Alarm is used to indicate if an Link Control Block is in the standby mode. This alarm shall only be active if a Link Control Block has been created.


56 MCU A Link 1 Slip MCU Slot 1, Link 165 MCU A Link 2 Slip MCU Slot 1, Link 279 MCU B Link 1 Slip MCU Slot 2, Link 188 MCU B Link 2 Slip MCU Slot 2, Link 2103 MCU C Link 1 Slip MCU Slot 3, Link 1112 MCU C Link 2 Slip MCU Slot 3, Link 2

423


Alarm IDs

Description

An ALS must be connected and a Link Control Block must have been created for this E1 link. If the ALS is in the standby mode then the LCB Backup alarm shall be active. When the ALS becomes the master the LCB Backup alarm shall be cleared.

DCU Boot Error

Purpose

The DCU Boot Error is used to indicate if a fault occurred when the DCU started. This alarm cannot be cleared unless the DCU is reset.

Alarm IDs

Description

When a DCU first boots it runs a boot loader. The boot loader shall verify the following items:

• RAM is OK• Meta File Checksum is OK• Meta File Version is valid• Boot Loader Checksum is OK• Valid application firmware present• Application firmware can be unzipped ok.

If any of the above checks fails then the failsafe code shall be loaded and the reason recorded. The failsafe code shall then generate the DCU Boot Error alarm. This alarm can only be cleared by fixing the boot problem and rebooting the DCU card.


57 MCU A Link 1 Backup MCU Slot 1, Link 166 MCU A Link 2 Backup MCU Slot 1, Link 280 MCU B Link 1 Backup MCU Slot 2, Link 188 MCU B Link 2 Backup MCU Slot 2, Link 2

103 MCU C Link 1 Backup MCU Slot 3, Link 1112 MCU C Link 2 Backup MCU Slot 3, Link 2


120 DCU Boot Error

Appendix C: Alarms

424 025-9574E

2Mb Clock Source Error

Purpose

The 2Mb Clock Source Error shall be set if IMS had defined one or more 2Mb clock source and had triggered the clock source to cause an alarm.

Alarm IDs

Description

IMS is used to define what 2Mb clock sources the DCU card is to use. Each of these clock source can be specified to trigger an alarm when they become the active source. When the DCU checks for a valid 2Mb clock to use it shall scan the provided list and select the first active clock source. If this clock source is defined as triggering an alarm then the 2Mb Clock Source alarm is set.

DCU Selftest Failure

Purpose

The Selftest Failure alarm shall be set if any of the tests done during a selftest fails.

Alarm IDs

Description

A DCU selftest is done at powerup and can also be done via IMS. The failure of any of the selftest shall result in the Selftest Failure alarm being set. Once this alarm is set it cannot be cleared except via a power cycle.

Input Alarm Handling

Alarm Storing

The alarms specified in section Input Alarm Description above are stored in an alarm log in RAM storing 123 alarms. The alarm log is lost at restart of the DCU (reset or power


121 2Mb Clock Source


122 Self Test

425


up). The change of state of an input alarm shall also be stored in the DCU Fault Log. The Fault Log is stored in NVRAM and hence shall not be lost when the DCU is restarted. The Alarm Fault Log entry shall include the time the alarm changed states and what the new state is.

Alarm Outputs

General

Each input alarm can be sent to one, many or all alarm outputs. One, many or all input alarms can be sent to the same alarm output. The required configuration is entered via IMS

Alarm Outputs

The following table contains a list of the alarm outputs.

Output Alarm NameAlarm Output

No.Purpose

Urgent Alarm LED 0 This is a RED Led on the MSU. It is used to indicate a condition exists that requires immediate action.

Non Urgent Alarm LED 1 This is a YELLOW Led on the MSU. It is used to indicate a possible fault exists that might required action

Information Alarm LED 2 This is a GREEN Led to indicate that there might be a fault. No action is required.

Digital Output 1 3 Optical Isolated digital outputDigital Output 2 4 Optical Isolated digital outputDigital Output 3 5 Optical Isolated digital outputDigital Output 4 6 Optical Isolated digital outputDigital Output 5 7 Optical Isolated digital outputDigital Output 6 8 Optical Isolated digital outputDigital Output 7 9 Optical Isolated digital outputDigital Output 8 10 Optical Isolated digital output

MCU A Link 1 System Select 11 Alarm reserved for MCU Slot 1 Link 1MCU A Link 2 System Select 12 Alarm reserved for MCU Slot 1 Link 2MCU B Link 1 System Select 13 Alarm reserved for MCU Slot 2 Link 1MCU B Link 2 System Select 14 Alarm reserved for MCU Slot 2 Link 2MCU C Link 1 System Select 15 Alarm reserved for MCU Slot 3 Link 1MCU C Link 2 System Select 16 Alarm reserved for MCU Slot 3 Link 2

Appendix C: Alarms

426 025-9574E

Output Alarm Operating Modes

An output alarm can be set to be in one of three operating modes:1. Passive Mode

In passive mode the alarm output becomes active when an alarm input becomes active and is de-activated only when it is acknowledged from IMS. This is the default operating mode for alarm outputs.

2. Locked ModeIn locked mode the alarm output becomes active when an alarm input becomes active. It can only be de-activated when acknowledged from IMS. The alarm input becoming de-activated does not put the alarm output into the idle state. (In this mode a brief failure, such a temporary link failure is latched until the alarm is acknowledged.)

3. Pulsed ModeIn pulsed mode the alarm output will become active when an alarm input becomes active. The output will stay active for a set time and then become de-activated. The active pulse time is set from IMS and is common for all pulsed outputs.Before the output can become active again the alarm input has to be de-activated or the alarm acknowledged.

Supervisor Alarms in IMS

Supervisor alarms are designed to alert a supervisor that there is a problem with the console system.

Supervisor Console Alarms

Output alarms will cause the on-screen ALARM button to flash red and an audible sound to be played to the supervisor. This functionality was designed to alert supervisors that there is an alarm condition within the system so that he/she may take appropriate action in a timely fashion. Note that some alarms are easily resolved by the supervisor without calling in the system maintenance technician. In order to see alarm indications at an operator console position you must use the login type “SUPERVISOR” and you must have the desired alarm strings defined in the “AcomConsole.ini” file. Alarm strings are defined in the “AcomConsole.ini” file under the [ALARMS] section. Note that if an alarm is not defined then it will not be displayed on the supervisor’s console. There are four types of alarms that can be defined and displayed at the supervisor position. These alarm types include NAME, ACU, CONSOLE, and DEVICE alarms (ACU is Acom Console Unit). These alarms are generated by various system components and are passed around the system via time slot 16 of the E1 console loops.

If the Alarm button exists on the Acom Console Software screen, the device alarms will be reported regardless if you are logged in as Supervisor or any other operator type.

427

Supervisor Alarms in IMS

Any position can be a Supervisor position using one of the two methods.1. AcomConsole.ini has Operator Types set with ,S after the name.

Example: Type1=SUPERVISOR,3,3,S2. The Acom Console Unit supervisor checkbox is enabled in the Acom Console Unit

settings in IMS. This means that this position will be a Supervisor Position regardless of the login type set in the AcomConsole.ini file.

Name Alarms

NAME alarms are generated by an ALS within a system whenever one of its Output Alarms goes active. NAME alarms are assigned a unique identifier number (0-115) within the ALS programming and can be viewed or configured via IMS (see “Alarm Menu” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529). To define NAME alarms within your “AcomConsole.ini” file use the following format, (where: n = 0 – 115 from Table 210):

NAMEn=description

Table 210: NAME Alarm Cross-Reference

N Value ALS (IMS) Value Alarm Reference0 0 Urgent Alarm LED1 1 Non-Urgent Alarm LED2 2 Information Alarm LED3 3 Not used with Acom4 4 Standby Fault5 5 MSU Out3 (A012)6 6 MSU Out4 (A022)7 7 Standby Fault (watchdog)8 8 MSU Out6 (A023)9 9 Not used with Acom

10 10 MCU Slot 0 Port1 RRA11 11 MCU Slot 0 Port1 MRRA12 12 MCU Slot 0 Port1 RA113 13 MCU Slot 0 Port1 RA214 14 MCU Slot 0 Port2 RRA15 15 MCU Slot 0 Port2 MRRA16 16 MCU Slot 0 Port2 RA117 17 MCU Slot 0 Port2 RA2

18-113 18-113 Not used with Acom114 114 Primary MCU LED B7115 115 Ack All

Appendix C: Alarms

428 025-9574E

Acom Console Unit (ACU) Alarms in IMS

ACU alarms are generated by a Acom Console Unit within a system whenever one of its Output Alarms goes active. ACU alarms are assigned a unique identifier number (1-96) within the Acom Console Unit programming and can be viewed/changed via IMS (see “Alarm Menu” in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529). To define ACU alarms within your “AcomConsole.ini” file use the following format (where: n = 0 – 96 based on Table 211):

ACUn=description

Note that the ACU alarms as viewed by IMS are zero based but the alarms seen by the supervisor console will be 1’s based. So, to customize ACU alarm 0 your string would start with “ACU1= urgent alarm”.

429


Table 211: ACU Alarm Cross-Reference

Console Alarms

CONSOLE alarms are generated by a Acom Console Unit anytime the Acom Console Unit fails to receive responses to polling from its associated ACS. CONSOLE alarms are assigned a unique identifier number (1-128) which represents the number of the alarming console position (refer to Table 3). To define CONSOLE alarms within your “AcomConsole.ini” file use the following format (where: n = 0 – 128 based on Table 212):

CONSOLEn=description

N Value ACU (IMS) Value Alarm Reference1 0 Urgent Alarm LED2 1 Non-Urgent Alarm LED3 2 Information Alarm LED4 3 Digital Output 15 4 Digital Output 26 5 Digital Output 37 6 Digital Output 48 7 Digital Output 59 8 Digital Output 6

10 9 Not used with Acom11 10 Ack All

12-28 11-27 Not used with Acom29 28 E1 Slot0 Link1 RRA30 29 E1 Slot0 Link1 MRRA31 30 E1 Slot0 Link1 RR132 31 E1 Slot0 Link1 RR233 32 E1 Slot0 Link2 RRA34 33 E1 Slot0 Link2 MRRA35 34 E1 Slot0 Link2 RR136 35 E1 Slot0 Link2 RR2

37-96 36-95 Not used with Acom

Appendix C: Alarms

430 025-9574E

Table 212: Console Alarm Cross-Reference

Device Alarms

DEVICE alarms are generated by the Acom Console Unit (ACU) whenever a device fails to respond to polling. DEVICE alarms are assigned a unique identifier number (1-255) which represents the network address of the alarming equipment. Acom Console Unit addresses are typically 1-99 and subracks are typically 100-255 (see Table 213). DEVICE alarms do not need to be defined unless you want to customize the text associated with the alarms. In other words, DEVICE alarms will always be displayed at the supervisor console position regardless of your alarm definitions within your “AcomConsole.ini” file. To define DEVICE alarms within your “AcomConsole.ini” file use the following format (where: n = 0 – 255 based on Table 213):

DEVICEn=description

Table 213: Device Alarm Cross-Reference

Sample “AcomConsole.ini” file

Here is a sample [ALARMS] section of an “AcomConsole.ini” file. Note that in this particular example there are four specific console positions that are being monitored by this supervisor. The NAME and ACU alarms have been defined and will output a message to contact technical support. Note that the Urgent alarms tell the supervisor to call immediately and the non-urgent alarms specify normal business hours. The alarm strings also allow us to tell the supervisor which area of the system is experiencing problems (CCE room vs. console room). The CONSOLE and DEVICE alarms have been defined to give meaningful names to each console position. Note that a CONSOLE alarm alerts the

N Value Alarm Reference1 Console Position 1...

.

.

.

128 Console Position 128

N Value Alarm Reference1 ACU1...

.

.

.

99 ACU99100 ALS100

.

.

.

.

.

.

255 ALS255

431


supervisor that a console has been shut down and a DEVICE alarm indicates that a console is actually experiencing a failure.

[Alarms];NAME Alarms (ALS Generated Output Alarms)NAME0=Urgent Alarm Active in CCE Room- Call 24/7 Support ImmediatelyNAME1=Non-Urgent Alarm Active in CCE Room - Call helpdesk during normal business hours

;OCU Alarms (ACU Generated Output Alarms)OCU1=Urgent Alarm Active in Console Room - Call 24/7 Support ImmediatelyOCU2=Non-Urgent Alarm Active in Console Room - Call helpdesk during normal business hours

;CONSOLE Alarms (ACU Generated Output Alarms)CONSOLE1=MTCE Console has been shut downCONSOLE4=FlightDispatch Console #1 has been shut downCONSOLE5=FlightDispatch Console #2 has been shut downCONSOLE22=De-Ice Console has been shut down

;DEVICE Alarms (IMS Terminal Generated Output Alarms)DEVICE1=MTCE Console is out of serviceDEVICE4=FlightDispatch Console #1 is out of serviceDEVICE5=FlightDispatch Console #2 is out of serviceDEVICE100=Backroom Equipment Failure (ALS1A is out of service)

Appendix C: Alarms

432 025-9574E

Index

433

Index

Numerics2-wire interface, 347

AAcom Console Software (ACS), 347Acom Console Unit (ACU), 22, 73, 347Acom DS3 Switch (ADS), 347Acom DS3 Switch (ADS) Subrack, 102Acom Line Subrack (ALS), 347Acom Multiplexer, 347Acom System Overview, 20ACU

COM Ports, 78Mounting, 50specifications, 74

ACU Alarm Definitions, 402ACU Expansion Slots, 83ACU Internal Layout, 76ACU Jumpers, 70ACU Main Board COM Ports 1-3, 78ACU Main Board Connections, 78ACU Main Board Functions, 76ACU Plug-In Modules, 84ACU service port (port 4), 78ADS, 102Alarm Generation, EIE, 166Alarm Generation, EMU, 177Alarm Generation, MSU, 212Alarm Generation, TIE, 258Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), 347Alarm Inputs, MSU, 213Alarm Interface, MSU, 215Alarm System, 371Alarms, 371

ACU, 402ALS, 385General, 383Logs, 373

A-Law, 347ALS, 92

Building Earth Conductors, 97Cable Assemblies, 99Card installation, 94Connection of Cable Shield, 100Earth Connections (Acom), 97Electrical Isolation, 96Grounding, 97Maximum Ratings, 101Physical Characteristics, 101Signal Cable Connections, 99Slot compatibility, 95Specifications, 100Surge Suppression, 100

Antistatic Work Practice, 31As-Built Documentation, 32audible distortion, clipping, 348Audio Interface, MSU, 214Audio Jackbox

Mounting, 51Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), 347Automatic Location Information (ALI), 347Automatic Number Identification (ANI), 347

BBack Room Preparations, 33Backbone Status, 26backbone time slots, 26backplane, 347

Index

434 025-9574E

Backup System Configurations, 320Basic ADS Rack, 103BDM Connector, SMU, 246bearer, 347bearer redundant, 355Bearer Status, 27bearer time slots, 25bit error rate (BER), 348branching connection, 348broadcast connection, 348

CCAD, 348Calling Line Identification (CLI), 348Calling Number Display (CND), 348Capacity, 27Card placement, 107Carrier Operated Relay (COR), 349CAS, 348CCC, 106, 112

Replacing, 278CCC Changeover Details and Specifications, 116CCC Status LED Indications, 114CCC Technical Specifications, 117CCE, 20, 23, 348CCE Components, 73CCE Installation, 43CCE Installation Procedures, 29, 43CCU, 348Changeover Card - 3 Way Coaxial Switch, 118Changeover Card - 48/96 Way Switch, 123Changeover Control Card, 112Changeover Control Card (CCC), 348Changeover Controller Extender Card (CCC-E),

348Changeover Hardware, 106Changeover Subrack, 106Changeover Subrack (COS), 349Changeover Subrack Description, 105Changeover Troubleshooting, 108channel, 348Channel Associated Signaling (CAS), 348Check Cabinet Route, 39Circuit Card Installation (ADS), 104Circuit Card Installation (ALS), 94CLI, 348clipping, 348clock, clock source, 348

Cloning an Acom ALS, 102CMOS, 348CND, 348Coax Loops, 41COC, 348CODEC, 348codirectional interface, 349COM 1 - COM 3, 78Common Control Electronics, 20Common Control Equipment (CCE), 348Common Controller Unit (CCU), 348communication link bearer, 347communications ports, 78companding, 349Computer Aided Dispatch (CAD), 348connection

branching, 348broadcast, 348

Console Installation Procedures, 49Console Loop Installation, 40Console Network Installation, 42Console Room Preparations, 40COR, 349COS, 349COV-R, 123, 349

Replacing, 279COV-R card, 107COV-R Status LED Indications, 126COV-R Technical Specifications, 131COV-R Voice and Data Signals, P2, J1, and J2,

129COV-T, 107, 118, 349

Replacing, 279COV-T Status LED Indications, 121COV-T Technical Specifications, 122COV-V, 123, 349

Replacing, 279COV-V card, 106COV-V Status LED Indications, 126COV-V Technical Specifications, 131COV-V Voice and Data Signals, P4, P2 and P3,

128CRC, 349crosspoint switch, 349CTCSS, 349CTS, 349Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC), 349

435

Index

DData Circuit Terminating Equip (DCE), 349Data Interface Unit, 142, 151Data Terminal Equipment (DTE), 350DCD, 349DCE, 349DCU, 349

Replacing, 280decadic signaling, 349Deskmic, 57Diagnostic RS-232 Interface, 247Diagnostic Serial Port, SMU, 245DID, 349differential data, 350digital crosspoint switch, 349Digital Input Interface, 81digital inputs, 74digital multiplex hierarchy, 350Digital Output Interface, 82digital outputs, 75DIP Switch Settings, MSU, 207DIU, 350DIU1-2, 142DIU1-2 Technical Specifications, 148DIU1-4, 151DPLL, 350DS, 73DS3, 350DS3 Switch, 24DSP Functions, 83DSP Interfaces, 248DSR, 350DTE, 350DTMF, 350DTR, 350Dual 4W E&M Module, 89Dual E1 Fiber Module, 88Dual E1 Interface Module, 86, 87

EE&M 4-Wire Interface Unit, 168E&M signaling, 350E1 Digital Interfaces, 71earth recall signal, 350EBER, 350EIE, 159, 350EIE Technical Specifications, 166

Electromagnetic Compatibility, 101EMC, 350EMI, 350EMU, 168, 350EMU Connector Detail, 174EMU Status LEDs, 172EMU Technical Specifications, 178Environment, 39Environmental Issues, 321EPIC, 350ESD, 351Ethernet Interface, 247Ethernet Interface, SMU, 250Ethernet Port, SMU, 245ETSI, 351Excessive Bit Error Rate, 350Exchange Interface Card, 162Exchange Interface Equipment (EIE), 350Exchange Interface Unit Card, 159External Interfaces (ACU), 77

FFAS, 351Fault Logs, 373Faults, 319Foot Switch, 69FPGA, 351FPGA and Interface Circuits, 247frame, 25, 351frame alignment, 351Frame Alignment Signal (FAS), 351framer, 351

Ggain, 351Gain Setting and Impedance, TIE, 256General Alarms, 383General Preparation, 30

Hhandshaking, 351Hardware Connections (ACU), 76HDB3, 351HDLC, 195, 351High Density Bipolar of Order 3 (HDB3), 351High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC), 351hot plugging, 351

Index

436 025-9574E

II/O Connector, 248IDF, 351IMS, 352IMS terminal, 352inband signaling, 352Input Alarm Handling, 372Install Additional Power, 35Install Cable Trays, 37Install Grounding System, 36Installation in Subrack

MCU, 211SMU, 249

Installation in Subrack, EMU, 177Installation Procedures, 105Instant Recall Recorder, 352Integrated Management System (IMS), 352Integrated Services Digital Network, 352Integrator IRR

Acom Overview, 58Installation, 61

intersite bearers, 25intersite resources, 25IOM-2, 352IPAT, 352IRR, 352ISB, 25ISDN, 195, 352ISDN Oriented Modular Bus, v2, 352ISDN Primary Access Transceiver, 352

JJTAG Connector, SMU, 246Jumper Link Settings, 207

LLCB, 352Lightning Protection, 38line break, 352line card, 352Line Subrack Alarm Definitions, 385Line Subracks, 92link, 352LIT, 352LMFA, 353Local Area Network (LAN), 21local resources, 26

Log On, 23Logger Card, 131Logs

Alarm, 373loop detect, 353loop out, 353loop seize, 353loop signaling, 355LOS, 353loss of sync, 353

MMain Control Unit, 353MAINTENANCE LOG, 320Maintenance Terminal Interface, 250Manual Reset, 48master clock, 353MCU, 353MCU Card Replacement (ADS), 297MCU Card Replacement (ALS), 293MCU Installation in ADS, 196MCU Installation in LSR, 196MCU Part Numbers and Compatibility, 104, 180MCU Technical Specifications, 197MDF, 353Model 3030 PSAP TDD, 64Mount Acom Punchdown Blocks on Demarc

Wall, 38MSU, 353MSU Interfaces, 209MSU Technical Specifications, 213multiframe, 353Multiplexer Supply Unit, 202MUSAC, 353MUX, 353

Nnon urgent alarm, 353NOS, 353NRZ, 353

OOAM, 354Operating Environment, 30Operator Active Lamp, 65Operator’s Audio Module, 85Operator’s Audio Module LEDs, 85

437

Index

order wire, 354

Ppartial time slot allocation, 354PCM, 354PCM-30, 355PE, 355Phase Locked Loop, 355PLL, 355Preventative Maintenance, 319primary MCU, 355primary rate, 355Programmable Alarms, MSU, 213Protective Earth (PE), 355PSTN, 355PTT, 355Pulse Code Modulation, 354

RRack Configuration, 103Rack Unit, 93Radio Interface Unit (RIU), 224Recommended Installer Materials and

Equipment, 33Recorded Voice Announcement Card, 235Recovered Clock, 355redundant bearer, 355Reference Voltage Strapping, 207Replacing Acom Cards and Devices, 277Replacing CCCs, 278Replacing COV-R Cards, 279Replacing COV-T Cards, 279Replacing COV-V Cards, 279Replacing Daughter Cards in a Acom Console

Unit, 290Replacing DCU Cards, 280Replacing EIE Cards, 291Replacing EMU Cards, 291Replacing Jackboxes, 292Replacing MCU Cards in an ADS, 297Replacing MCU Cards in an ALS, 293Replacing MSU Cards, 301Replacing RVA Cards, 302Replacing SMU Cards, 302, 303Replacing Telephone Radio Handset Interfaces,

305Replacing UIO Cards, 306

Replacing YIE Cards, 291Reset, manual, 48RGU, 355ring cadence, 355Ring Cadence and Ring Tone, TIE, 256Ring Generator Unit (RGU), 215ring out signaling, 355ring signal, 355ring voltage, 355RIU Card, 224RMS, 355RRA, 355RS-232, 78RS-485, 78RTC, 194, 355RTS, 355RUN LED Indicator, SMU, 244RVA, 355RVA Card, 235RX, 355RXD, 355

SSafety, 30Safety Extra Low Voltage, 30Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV), 356SCC, 356SDI, 356SELV, 30, 356serial ports, 78service word, 356signaling, 356Signaling Management Unit, 240slave clock, 356slip, 356slot, 356SMB, 356SMU, 240, 356SMU Daughter Boards, 248SMU Technical Specifications, 249SoundBlaster

configuration, 60Speakers

Zetron-Brand, 54Specifications (ALS), 100Status LED Indicators, MCU, 186Status LED Indicators, MSU, 205Strap Settings, UIO, 264

Index

438 025-9574E

sub-multiframe, 356subrack, 356subrack backplane, 347Subrack Mounting, 93Subracks (additional), 108subrate communication, 356synchronous communication, 356System Architecture, 31System Card Descriptions, 111System Console Connectors and pin-outs, 23System Console Electrical Requirements, 23System Console Hardware Requirements, 22System Power Up Sequence, 46System Reset, 206System Reset, EMU, 173System Reset, MCU, 190System Reset, TIE, 255

TTDM, 356Telecom Network Voltage, 30Telecommunication Network Voltage (TNV),

357Telephone Interface Unit, 252terminal, IMS, 352Testing Backup Systems, 321Testing of New/Existing Circuits, 34TIE, 252, 356TIE Connections, 256TIE Installation, 258TIE Interfaces, 254Time Division Multiplexing (TDM), 356time slot, 25Time Slot (TS), 357time slots, backbone, 26

TNV, 30, 357traffic, 357transceiver, 357TRC, 357TRHI

Mounting, 53Troubleshooting, 108, 325Troubleshooting Actions, 329TS, 357TSI, 357TTL, 357Twisted Pair Loops, 40TX, 357TXD, 357

UUIO, 260, 357UIO Input Interface, 262UIO Interfaces, 262UIO Output Interface, 262UMS, 357Universal Input/Output, 260urgent alarm, 357User Management System (UMS), 357

VVF, 357Voice Frequency (VF), 357VoIP Line Subrack, 101

WWatchdog Alarm, MSU, 213Watchdog Timer, 357